UPD780112GB(A2)-XXX-8ES-A - Renesas Electronics - Pdf.Support

To our customers,

Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents

On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology

Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both

companies. Therefore, although the old company name remains in this document, it is a valid

Renesas Electronics document. We appreciate your understanding.

Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com

April 1st, 2010

Renesas Electronics Corporation

Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com)

Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry.

Notice

1. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is

subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please

confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to

additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website.

2. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights

of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document.

No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights

of Renesas Electronics or others.

3. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part.

4. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of

semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software,

and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by

you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information.

5. When exporting the products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control

laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. You should not use Renesas

Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by

the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. Renesas Electronics products and

technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited

under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations.

6. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics

does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages

incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein.

7. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: “Standard”, “High Quality”, and

“Specific”. The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product’s quality grade, as

indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular

application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as “Specific” without the prior

written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for

which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way

liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an

application categorized as “Specific” or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written

consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is “Standard” unless otherwise

expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc.

“Standard”: Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual

equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots.

“High Quality”: Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anti-

crime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support.

“Specific”: Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or

systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare

intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life.

8. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics,

especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation

characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or

damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges.

9. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have

specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further,

Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to

guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a

Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire

control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because

the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system

manufactured by you.

10. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental

compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable

laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS

Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with

applicable laws and regulations.

11. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas

Electronics.

12. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this

document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries.

(Note 1) “Renesas Electronics” as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-

owned subsidiaries.

(Note 2) “Renesas Electronics product(s)” means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics.

Document No. U16227EJ3V0UD00 (3rd edi tion)

Date Published February 2005 N CP(K)

Printed in Japan

µ

PD780111

µ

PD780111(A)

µ

PD780111(A1)

µ

PD780111(A2)

µ

PD780112

µ

PD780112(A)

µ

PD780112(A1)

µ

PD780112(A2)

µ

PD780113

µ

PD780113(A)

µ

PD780113(A1)

µ

PD780113(A2)

µ

PD780114

µ

PD780114(A)

µ

PD780114(A1)

µ

PD780114(A2)

µ

PD78F0114

µ

PD78F0114(A)

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

78K0/KC1

8-Bit Single-Chip Microcontrollers

User’s Manual

©

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

2

[MEMO]

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 3

1

2

3

4

VOLTAGE APPLICATION WAVEFORM AT INPUT PIN

Waveform distortion due to input noise or a reflected wave may cause malfunction. If the input of the

CMOS device stays in the area between V

IL

(MAX) and V

IH

(MIN) due to noise, etc., the device may

malfunction. Take care to prevent chattering noise from entering the device when the input level is fixed,

and also in the transition period when the input level passes through the area between V

IL

(MAX) and

V

IH

(MIN).

HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS

Unconnected CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If an input pin is unconnected, it is

possible that an internal input level may be generated due to noise, etc., causing malfunction. CMOS

devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS devices. Input levels of CMOS devices must be fixed

high or low by using pull-up or pull-down circuitry. Each unused pin should be connected to V

DD

or GND

via a resistor if there is a possibility that it will be an output pin. All handling related to unused pins must

be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device.

PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD

A strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause destruction of the gate oxide and

ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop generation of static electr icity as

much as possible, and quickly dissipate it when it has occurred. Environmental control must be

adequate. When it is dr y, a humidifier should be used. It is recommended to avoid using insulators that

easily build up static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be stored and transported in an anti-static

container, static shielding bag or conductive material. All test and measurement tools including work

benches and floors should be grounded. The operator should be grounded using a wrist strap.

Semiconductor devices must not be touched with bare hands. Similar precautions need to be taken for

PW boards with mounted semiconductor devices.

STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION

Power-on does not necessarily define the initial status of a MOS device. Immediately after the power

source is turned ON, devices with reset functions have not yet been initialized. Hence, power-on does

not guarantee output pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. A device is not initialized until the

reset signal is received. A reset operation must be executed immediately after power-on for devices

with reset functions.

POWER ON/OFF SEQUENCE

In the case of a device that uses different power supplies for the internal operation and external

interface, as a rule, switch on the external power supply after switching on the internal power supply.

When switching the power supply off, as a rule, switch off the external power supply and then the

internal power supply. Use of the reverse power on/off sequences may result in the application of an

overvoltage to the internal elements of the device, causing malfunction and degradation of internal

elements due to the passage of an abnormal current.

The correct power on/off sequence must be judged separately for each device and according to related

specifications governing the device.

INPUT OF SIGNAL DURING POWER OFF STATE

Do not input signals or an I/O pull-up power supply while the device is not powered. The current

injection that results from input of such a signal or I/O pull-up power supply may cause malfunction and

the abnormal current that passes in the device at this time may cause degradation of internal elements.

Input of signals during the power off state must be judged separately for each device and according to

related specifications governing the device.

NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES

5

6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

4

Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

HP9000 series 700 and HP-UX are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.

SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc.

Solaris and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

These commodities, technology or software, must be exported in accordance

with the export administration regulations of the exporting country.

Diversion contrary to the law of that country is prohibited.

The information in this document is current as of September, 2004. The information is subject to

change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data

sheets or data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC Electronics products. Not

all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC Electronics sales

representative for availability and additional information.

No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior

written consent of NEC Electronics. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may

appear in this document.

NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual

property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document

or any other liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is

granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others.

Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative

purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these

circuits, software and information in the design of a customer's equipment shall be done under the full

responsibility of the customer. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by

customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information.

While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products,

customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To

minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC

Electronics products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as

redundancy, fire-containment and anti-failure features.

NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and

"Specific".

The "Specific" quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer-

designated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of an NEC

Electronics product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of

each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application.

The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC

Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications

not intended by NEC Electronics, they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to

determine NEC Electronics' willingness to support a given application.

(Note)

•

•

•

•

•

•

M8E 02. 11-1

(1)

(2)

"NEC Electronics" as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its

majority-owned subsidiaries.

"NEC Electronics products" means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics (as

defined above).

Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio

and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment

and industrial robots.

Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster

systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed

for life support).

Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life

support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc.

"Standard":

"Special":

"Specific":

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 5

Regional Information

• Device availability

• Ordering information

• Product release schedule

• Availability of related technical literature

• Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and

components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth)

• Network requirements

In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary

from country to country.

[GLOBAL SUPPORT]

http://www.necel.com/en/support/support.html

NEC Electronics America, Inc. (U.S.)

Santa Clara, California

Tel: 408-588-6000

800-366-9782

NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.

Hong Kong

Tel: 2886-9318

NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.

Seoul Branch

Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-558-3737

NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd.

Shanghai, P.R. China

Tel: 021-5888-5400

NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.

Taipei, Taiwan

Tel: 02-2719-2377

NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.

Novena Square, Singapore

Tel: 6253-8311

J04.1

N

EC Electronics (Europe) GmbH

Duesseldorf, Germany

Tel: 0211-65030

• Sucursal en España

Madrid, Spain

Tel: 091-504 27 87

Vélizy-Villacoublay, France

Tel: 01-30-67 58 00

• Succursale Française

• Filiale Italiana

Milano, Italy

Tel: 02-66 75 41

• Branch The Netherlands

Eindhoven, The Netherlands

Tel: 040-244 58 45

• Tyskland Filial

Taeby, Sweden

Tel: 08-63 80 820

• United Kingdom Branch

Milton Keynes, UK

Tel: 01908-691-133

Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC

Electronics product in your application, pIease contact the NEC Electronics office in your country to

obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors. They will verify:

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

6

INTRODUCTION

Readers This manual is intended for user engineers who wish to understand the functions of the

78K0/KC1 and design and develop application systems and programs for these

devices.

The target products are as follows.

78K0/KC1:

µ

PD780111, 780112, 780113, 780114, 78F0114, 780111(A), 780112(A),

780113(A), 780114(A), 78F0114(A), 780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1),

780114(A1), 78F0114(A1), 780111(A2), 780112(A2), 780113(A2), and

780114(A2)

Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions described in the

Organization below.

Organization The 78K0/KC1 manual is separated into two parts: this manual and the instructions

edition (common to the 78K/0 Series).

78K0/KC1

User’s Manual

(This Manual)

78K/0 Series

Instructions

User’s Manual

• Pin functions

• Internal block functions

• Interrupts

• Other on-chip peripheral functions

• Electrical specifications

• CPU functions

• Instruction set

• Explanation of each instruction

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 7

How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical

engineering, logic circuits, and microcontrollers.

• When using this manual as the manual for (A) grade products, (A1) grade products,

and (A2) grade products:

→ Only the quality grade differs between standard products and (A), (A1), and (A2)

grade products. Read the part number as follows.

•

µ

PD780111 →

µ

PD780111(A), 780111(A1), 780111(A2)

•

µ

PD780112 →

µ

PD780112(A), 780112(A1), 780112(A2)

•

µ

PD780113 →

µ

PD780113(A), 780113(A1), 780113(A2)

•

µ

PD780114 →

µ

PD780114(A), 780114(A1), 780114(A2)

•

µ

PD78F0114 →

µ

PD78F0114(A), 78F0114(A1)

• To gain a general understanding of functions:

→ Read this manual in the order of the CONTENTS. The mark shows major

revised points.

• How to interpret the register format:

→ For a bit number enclosed in brackets, the bit name is defined as a reserved word

in the RA78K0, and is defined as the sfr variable by #pragma sfr directive in the

CC78K0.

• To check the details of a register when you know the register name:

→ Refer to APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX.

• To know details of the 78K/0 Series instructions:

→ Refer to the separate document 78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual

(U12326E).

Caution Examples in this manual employ the “standard” quality grade for

general electronics. When using examples in this manual for the

“special” quality grade, review the quality grade of each part and/or

circuit actually used.

Conventions Data significance: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right

Active low representations: ××× (overscore over pin and signal name)

Note: Footnote for item marked with Note in the text

Caution: Information requiring particular attention

Remark: Supplementary information

Numerical representations: Binary

... ×××× or ××××B

Decimal

... ××××

Hexadecimal

... ××××H

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

8

Differences Between 78K0/KC1 and 78K0/KC1+

Series Name

Item 78K0/KC1 78K0/KC1+

Mask ROM version Available None

Power supply Two power supplies Single power supply

Self programming function None Available

Flash

memory

version Option byte None Ring-OSC can be stopped/cannot be

stopped selectable

RC oscillation (3 to 4 MHz) None Available

Power-on-clear (POC) function 2.85 V ±0.15 V or 3.5 V ±0.2 V selectable 2.1 V ±0.1 V (fixed)Note

Version with on-chip debug function None Available (

µ

PD78F0114HD)

Minimum instruction execution time 0.166

µ

s (at 12 MHz operation) 0.125

µ

s (at 16 MHz operation)

Note This value may chang e after evaluation.

Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions.

However, preliminary versions are not marked as such.

Documents Related to Devices

Document Name Document No.

78K0/KC1 User’s Manual This manual

78K0/KC1+ User’s Manual U16961E

78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual U12326E

Documents Related to Development Tools (Software) (User’s Manuals)

Document Name Document No.

Operation U16629E

Language U14446E

RA78K0 Assembler Package

Structured Assembly Language U11789E

Operation U16613E CC78K0 C Compiler

Language U14298E

Operation U16768E SM78K Series Ver. 2.52 System Simulator

External Part User Open Interface

Specifications U15802E

ID78K0-NS Ver. 2.52 Integrated Debugger Operation U16488E

ID78K0-QB Ver. 2.81 Integrated Debugger Operation U16996E

PM plus Ver. 5.10 U16569E

Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the latest

version of each document when designing.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 9

Documents Related to Development Tools (Hardware) (User’s Manuals)

Document Name Document No.

IE-78K0-NS In-Circuit Emulator U13731E

IE-78K0-NS-A In-Circuit Emulator U14889E

IE-78K0K1-ET In-Circuit Emulator U16604E

QB-78K0KX1H In-Circuit Emulator U17081E

IE-780148-NS-EM1 Emulation Board U16963E

Documents Related to Flash Memory Programming

Document Name Document No.

PG-FP3 Flash Memory Programmer User’s Manual U13502E

PG-FP4 Flash Memory Programmer User’s Manual U15260E

Other Documents

Document Name Document No.

SEMICONDUCTOR SELECTION GUIDE − Products and Packages − X13769X

Semiconductor Device Mount Manual Note

Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices C11531E

NEC Semiconductor Device Reliability/Quality Control System C10983E

Guide to Prevent Damage for Semiconductor Devices by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) C11892E

Note See the “Semiconductor Device Mount Manual” website (http://www.necel.com/pkg/en/mount/index.html).

Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the latest

version of each document when designing.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

10

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE ............................................................................................................................ 17

1.1 Expanded-Specification Products and Conventional Products (Standard Products, (A)

Grade Products Only) ................................................................................................................ 17

1.2 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 18

1.3 Applications................................................................................................................................ 19

1.4 Ordering Information ................................................................................................................. 20

1.5 Pin Configuration (Top View).................................................................................................... 22

1.6 Kx1 Series Lineup ...................................................................................................................... 24

1.6.1 78K0/Kx1, 78K0/Kx1+ product lineup ............................................................................................ 24

1.6.2 V850ES/Kx1, V850ES/Kx1+ product lineup................................................................................... 27

1.7 Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................ 30

1.8 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................. 31

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................... 33

2.1 Pin Function List ........................................................................................................................ 33

2.2 Description of Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 36

2.2.1 P00 and P01 (port 0) ..................................................................................................................... 36

2.2.2 P10 to P17 (port 1) ........................................................................................................................ 37

2.2.3 P20 to P27 (port 2) ........................................................................................................................ 37

2.2.4 P30 to P33 (port 3) ........................................................................................................................ 38

2.2.5 P60 to P63 (port 6) ........................................................................................................................ 38

2.2.6 P70 to P73 (port 7) ........................................................................................................................ 38

2.2.7 P120 (port 12)................................................................................................................................ 39

2.2.8 P130 (port 13)................................................................................................................................ 39

2.2.9 AVREF ............................................................................................................................................. 39

2.2.10 AVSS............................................................................................................................................... 39

2.2.11 RESET........................................................................................................................................... 39

2.2.12 X1 and X2...................................................................................................................................... 39

2.2.13 XT1 and XT2.................................................................................................................................. 39

2.2.14 VDD and EVDD................................................................................................................................. 39

2.2.15 VSS and EVSS ................................................................................................................................. 39

2.2.16 VPP (flash memory versions only) .................................................................................................. 39

2.2.17 IC (mask ROM versions only) ........................................................................................................ 40

2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins......................................... 41

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE ...................................................................................................... 44

3.1 Memory Space ............................................................................................................................ 44

3.1.1 Internal program memory space .................................................................................................... 50

3.1.2 Internal data memory space .......................................................................................................... 51

3.1.3 Special function register (SFR) area.............................................................................................. 51

3.1.4 Data memory addressing............................................................................................................... 52

3.2 Processor Registers .................................................................................................................. 57

3.2.1 Control registers ............................................................................................................................ 57

3.2.2 General-purpose registers ............................................................................................................. 61

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 11

3.2.3 Special function registers (SFRs) ...................................................................................................62

3.3 Instruction Address Addressing ..............................................................................................66

3.3.1 Relative addressing ........................................................................................................................66

3.3.2 Immediate addressing ....................................................................................................................67

3.3.3 Table indirect addressing ...............................................................................................................68

3.3.4 Register addressing........................................................................................................................68

3.4 Operand Address Addressing..................................................................................................69

3.4.1 Implied addressing .........................................................................................................................69

3.4.2 Register addressing........................................................................................................................70

3.4.3 Direct addressing............................................................................................................................71

3.4.4 Short direct addressing...................................................................................................................72

3.4.5 Special function register (SFR) addressing ....................................................................................73

3.4.6 Register indirect addressing ...........................................................................................................74

3.4.7 Based addressing...........................................................................................................................75

3.4.8 Based indexed addressing .............................................................................................................76

3.4.9 Stack addressing ............................................................................................................................77

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS........................................................................................................... 78

4.1 Port Functions............................................................................................................................ 78

4.2 Port Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 80

4.2.1 Port 0..............................................................................................................................................81

4.2.2 Port 1..............................................................................................................................................83

4.2.3 Port 2..............................................................................................................................................88

4.2.4 Port 3..............................................................................................................................................89

4.2.5 Port 6..............................................................................................................................................91

4.2.6 Port 7..............................................................................................................................................92

4.2.7 Port 12............................................................................................................................................93

4.2.8 Port 13............................................................................................................................................94

4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function........................................................................................ 95

4.4 Port Function Operations.......................................................................................................... 99

4.4.1 Writing to I/O port ...........................................................................................................................99

4.4.2 Reading from I/O port .....................................................................................................................99

4.4.3 Operations on I/O port ....................................................................................................................99

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR .................................................................................................... 100

5.1 Functions of Clock Generator ................................................................................................ 100

5.2 Configuration of Clock Generator.......................................................................................... 100

5.3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator ................................................................................. 102

5.4 System Clock Oscillator.......................................................................................................... 109

5.4.1 X1 oscillator ..................................................................................................................................109

5.4.2 Subsystem clock oscillator............................................................................................................109

5.4.3 When subsystem clock is not used...............................................................................................112

5.4.4 Ring-OSC oscillator ......................................................................................................................112

5.4.5 Prescaler ......................................................................................................................................112

5.5 Clock Generator Operation ..................................................................................................... 113

5.6 Time Required to Switch Between Ring-OSC Clock and X1 Input Clock .......................... 120

5.7 Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover ............................................................................ 121

5.8 Clock Switching Flowchart and Register Setting................................................................. 122

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

12

5.8.1 Switching from Ring-OSC clock to X1 input clock.........................................................................122

5.8.2 Switching from X1 input clock to Ring-OSC clock.........................................................................123

5.8.3 Switching from X1 input clock to subsystem clock........................................................................124

5.8.4 Switching from subsystem clock to X1 input clock........................................................................125

5.8.5 Register settings ...........................................................................................................................126

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00 ........................................................................... 127

6.1 Functions of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 ......................................................................... 127

6.2 Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00................................................................... 128

6.3 Registers Controlling 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 .......................................................... 132

6.4 Operation of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 ......................................................................... 138

6.4.1 Interval timer operation .................................................................................................................138

6.4.2 PPG output operations .................................................................................................................140

6.4.3 Pulse width measurement operations ...........................................................................................143

6.4.4 External event counter operation ..................................................................................................151

6.4.5 Square-wave output operation......................................................................................................153

6.4.6 One-shot pulse output operation...................................................................................................155

6.5 Cautions for 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00 ......................................................................... 160

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51........................................................... 163

7.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51............................................................. 163

7.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 ...................................................... 165

7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 ............................................. 167

7.4 Operations of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51........................................................... 172

7.4.1 Operation as interval timer............................................................................................................172

7.4.2 Operation as external event counter .............................................................................................174

7.4.3 Square-wave output operation......................................................................................................175

7.4.4 PWM output operation ..................................................................................................................176

7.5 Cautions for 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 ............................................................. 180

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 .......................................................................................... 181

8.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 ..................................................................................... 181

8.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1............................................................................... 181

8.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 ...................................................................... 185

8.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 ..................................................................................... 190

8.4.1 Operation as interval timer/square-wave output ...........................................................................190

8.4.2 Operation as PWM output mode...................................................................................................193

8.4.3 Carrier generator mode operation (8-bit timer H1 only) ................................................................199

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER................................................................................................................ 206

9.1 Functions of Watch Timer ....................................................................................................... 206

9.2 Configuration of Watch Timer................................................................................................. 208

9.3 Register Controlling Watch Timer .......................................................................................... 208

9.4 Watch Timer Operations.......................................................................................................... 210

9.4.1 Watch timer operation...................................................................................................................210

9.4.2 Interval timer operation .................................................................................................................211

9.5 Cautions for Watch Timer ....................................................................................................... 212

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 13

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER ..................................................................................................... 213

10.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................ 213

10.2 Configuration of Watchdog Timer.......................................................................................... 215

10.3 Registers Controlling Watchdog Timer ................................................................................. 216

10.4 Operation of Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................ 219

10.4.1 Watchdog timer operation when “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” is selected by mask option ......219

10.4.2 Watchdog timer operation when “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by mask

option............................................................................................................................................220

10.4.3 Watchdog timer operation in STOP mode (when “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is

selected by mask option)..............................................................................................................221

10.4.4 Watchdog timer operation in HALT mode (when “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is

selected by mask option)..............................................................................................................223

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER ......................................................................................................... 224

11.1 Functions of A/D Converter .................................................................................................... 224

11.2 Configuration of A/D Converter.............................................................................................. 225

11.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter ........................................................................................... 227

11.4 A/D Converter Operations....................................................................................................... 232

11.4.1 Basic operations of A/D converter ................................................................................................232

11.4.2 Input voltage and conversion results ............................................................................................234

11.4.3 A/D converter operation mode......................................................................................................235

11.5 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table .............................................................. 238

11.6 Cautions for A/D Converter..................................................................................................... 240

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0 ...................................................................................... 245

12.1 Functions of Serial Interface UART0 ..................................................................................... 245

12.2 Configuration of Serial Interface UART0 ............................................................................... 246

12.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface UART0 ...................................................................... 249

12.4 Operation of Serial Interface UART0...................................................................................... 254

12.4.1 Operation stop mode ....................................................................................................................254

12.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode................................................................................255

12.4.3 Dedicated baud rate generator .....................................................................................................261

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6 ...................................................................................... 266

13.1 Functions of Serial Interface UART6 ..................................................................................... 266

13.2 Configuration of Serial Interface UART6 ............................................................................... 270

13.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface UART6 ...................................................................... 273

13.4 Operation of Serial Interface UART6...................................................................................... 281

13.4.1 Operation stop mode ....................................................................................................................281

13.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode................................................................................282

13.4.3 Dedicated baud rate generator .....................................................................................................297

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 ........................................................................................ 304

14.1 Functions of Serial Interface CSI10 ....................................................................................... 304

14.2 Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10 ................................................................................. 304

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

14

14.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface CSI10......................................................................... 306

14.4 Operation of Serial Interface CSI10........................................................................................ 309

14.4.1 Operation stop mode ....................................................................................................................309

14.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode...................................................................................................................310

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................ 318

15.1 Interrupt Function Types......................................................................................................... 318

15.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration ..................................................................................... 318

15.3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions ............................................................................ 321

15.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations ............................................................................................... 328

15.4.1 Maskable interrupt request acknowledgment................................................................................328

15.4.2 Software interrupt request acknowledgment.................................................................................330

15.4.3 Multiple interrupt servicing ............................................................................................................331

15.4.4 Interrupt request hold....................................................................................................................334

CHAPTER 16 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 335

16.1 Functions of Key Interrupt ...................................................................................................... 335

16.2 Configuration of Key Interrupt................................................................................................ 335

16.3 Register Controlling Key Interrupt ......................................................................................... 336

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION .................................................................................................. 337

17.1 Standby Function and Configuration..................................................................................... 337

17.1.1 Standby function ...........................................................................................................................337

17.1.2 Registers controlling standby function ..........................................................................................338

17.2 Standby Function Operation................................................................................................... 341

17.2.1 HALT mode...................................................................................................................................341

17.2.2 STOP mode..................................................................................................................................346

CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 350

18.1 Register for Confirming Reset Source................................................................................... 356

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK MONITOR ........................................................................................................ 357

19.1 Functions of Clock Monitor..................................................................................................... 357

19.2 Configuration of Clock Monitor .............................................................................................. 357

19.3 Register Controlling Clock Monitor........................................................................................ 358

19.4 Operation of Clock Monitor..................................................................................................... 359

CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT...................................................................................... 364

20.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit...................................................................................... 364

20.2 Configuration of Power-on-Clear Circuit ............................................................................... 365

20.3 Operation of Power-on-Clear Circuit...................................................................................... 365

20.4 Cautions for Power-on-Clear Circuit ...................................................................................... 366

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR ....................................................................................... 368

21.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector........................................................................................ 368

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 15

21.2 Configuration of Low-Voltage Detector................................................................................. 368

21.3 Registers Controlling Low-Voltage Detector ........................................................................ 369

21.4 Operation of Low-Voltage Detector ....................................................................................... 372

21.5 Cautions for Low-Voltage Detector........................................................................................ 376

CHAPTER 22 MASK OPTIONS ........................................................................................................... 380

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114................................................................................................................... 381

23.1 Internal Memory Size Switching Register ............................................................................. 382

23.2 Writing with Flash Programmer.............................................................................................. 383

23.3 Programming Environment..................................................................................................... 390

23.4 Communication Mode ............................................................................................................. 390

23.5 Handling of Pins on Board...................................................................................................... 393

23.5.1 VPP pin ..........................................................................................................................................393

23.5.2 Serial interface pins ......................................................................................................................394

23.5.3 RESET pin....................................................................................................................................396

23.5.4 Port pins .......................................................................................................................................396

23.5.5 Other signal pins...........................................................................................................................396

23.5.6 Power supply................................................................................................................................396

23.6 Programming Method.............................................................................................................. 397

23.6.1 Controlling flash memory..............................................................................................................397

23.6.2 Flash memory programming mode...............................................................................................398

23.6.3 Selecting communication mode....................................................................................................398

23.6.4 Communication commands ..........................................................................................................399

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET ...................................................................................................... 400

24.1 Conventions Used in Operation List...................................................................................... 400

24.1.1 Operand identifiers and specification methods .............................................................................400

24.1.2 Description of operation column ...................................................................................................401

24.1.3 Description of flag operation column ............................................................................................401

24.2 Operation List........................................................................................................................... 402

24.3 Instructions Listed by Addressing Type ............................................................................... 410

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE

PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS) ........................................ 413

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE

PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS) ............................................................ 433

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)................................ 451

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)................................ 470

CHAPTER 29 PACKAGE DRAWING .................................................................................................. 483

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

16

CHAPTER 30 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS...........................................................484

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.................................................................................................486

31.1 Cautions for Wait......................................................................................................................486

31.2 Peripheral Hardware That Generates Wait............................................................................487

31.3 Example of Wait Occurrence .................................................................................................. 488

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS............................................................................................... 489

A.1 Software Package.....................................................................................................................493

A.2 Language Processing Software.............................................................................................. 493

A.3 Control Software ...................................................................................................................... 494

A.4 Flash Memory Writing Tools...................................................................................................494

A.5 Debugging Tools (Hardware)..................................................................................................495

A.5.1 When using in-circuit emulat ors IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-A.................................................495

A.5.2 When using in-circuit emul ator IE-78K0K1-ET..............................................................................496

A.5.3 When using in-circuit emulator QB- 78K0KX1H.............................................................................497

A.6 Debugging Tools (Software) ................................................................................................... 498

APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN...................................................................499

B.1 When Using IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A, or IE-78K0K1-ET ..................................................499

B.2 When Using QB-78K0KX1H..................................................................................................... 501

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX.........................................................................................................502

C.1 Register Index (In Alphabetical Ord e r with Respect to Register Names) ..........................502

C.2 Register Index (In Alphabetical Ord e r with Respect to Register Symbol)......................... 505

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS..................................................................................................... 508

APPENDIX E REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................................530

E.1 Major Revisions in This Edition..............................................................................................530

E.2 Revision History up to Previous Edition ............................................................................... 532

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 17

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

1.1 Expanded-Specification Products and Conventional Products (Standard Products, (A) Grade

Products Only)

The expanded-specification products and conventional products refer to the following products.

Expanded-specification prod uct: Products with a rankNote E or after

• Mask ROM version for which order was rece ived on or after the end of March

2004.

• Flash memory version for which order was received on or after the middle of

July 2004

Conventional product: Products with rankNote I or K

• Products other than the above expanded-specification prod ucts

Note The rank is indicated by the 5th digit from the left in the lot number marked on the package.

Lot number × × × ×

Expanded-specification products and conventional products of standard products and (A) grade products differ in

operating frequency ratings. The differenc es are shown in Table 1-1.

Table 1-1. Differences Between Expanded-Specification Products and Conventional Products of Standard

Products and (A) Grade Products

Supply Voltage (VDD) Guaranteed Operating

Speed (Minimum Instruction

Execution Time) Conventional Products (Rank: I, K) Expanded-Specification Products

(Rank: E or After)

12 MHz (0.166

µ

s) Not used 4.0 to 5.5 V

10 MHz (0.2

µ

s) 4.0 to 5.5 V 3.5 to 4.0 V

8.38 MHz (0.238

µ

s) 3.3 to 4.0 V 3.0 to 3.5 V

5 MHz (0.4

µ

s) 2.7 to 3.3 V 2.5 to 3.0 V

Cautions 1. The specifications of the peripheral functions (timer, serial interface, A/D converter, etc.)

are conventional when operating at VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V. Therefore, to select the count

clock or base clock of a peripheral function, satisfy the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 10 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 8.38 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 2.5 MHz

2. Rewrite the flash memory in the ranges of fX = 2 to 10 MHz and VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V as ever.

Year

code Week

code

Rank

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

18

1.2 Features

{ Minimum instruction execution time can be changed from high speed (0.166

µ

s: @ 12 MHz operation with X1

input clock) to ultra low-speed (122

µ

s: @ 32.768 kHz operation with subsystem clock)

{ General-purpose registers: 8 bits × 32 registers (8 bits × 8 registers × 4 banks)

{ ROM, RAM capacities

Item

Part Number

Program Memory

(ROM)

Data Memory

(Internal High-Speed RAM)

µ

PD780111 8 KB

µ

PD780112 16 KB

512 bytes

µ

PD780113 24 KB

µ

PD780114

Mask ROM

32 KB

1024 bytes

µ

PD78F0114 Flash memory 32 KBNote 1024 bytesNote

Note The internal flash memory and internal high-speed RAM capacities can be changed using the internal

memory size switching register (IMS).

{ On-chip power-on-clear (POC) circuit and low-voltage detector (LVI)

{ Short startup is possible via the CPU default start using the on-chip Ring-OSC

{ On-chip clock monitor function using on-chip Ring-OSC

{ On-chip watchdog timer (operable with Ring-OSC clock)

{ On-chip key interrupt function

{ I/O ports: 32 (N-ch open drain: 4)

{ Timer: 7 channels

{ Serial interface: 3 channels

(UART (LIN (Local Interconnect Network)-bus supported): 1 channel, CSI/UARTNote 1: 1 channel)

{ 10-bit resolution A/D converter: 8 channels

{ Supply voltage: VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 VNotes 2, 3 (expanded-specification products of standard products and (A) grade

products)

V

DD = 2.7 to 5.5 VNotes 2, 3 (conventional products of standard products and (A) grade products)

V

DD = 3.3 to 5.5 VNote 3 ((A1) grade products, (A2) grade products)

{ Operating ambient temperature: TA = −40 to +85°C (standard product, (A) grade product)

T

A = −40 to +105°C (flash memory version of (A1) grade product)

T

A = −40 to +110°C (mask ROM version of (A1) grade product)

TA = −40 to +125°C (mask ROM version of (A2) grade product)

Notes 1. Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins.

2. Use the product in a voltage range of 3.0 to 5.5 V when the detection voltage (VPOC) of the power-on-

clear (POC) circuit is 2.85 V ±0.15 V.

3. Use the product in a voltage range of 3.7 to 5.5 V when the detection voltage (VPOC) of the power-on-

clear (POC) circuit is 3.5 V ±0.2 V.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 19

1.3 Applications

{ Automotive equipment

• System control for body electricals (power windows, keyless entry reception, etc.)

• Sub-microcontrollers for control

{ Home audio, car audio

{ AV equipment

{ PC peripheral equipment (keyboards, etc.)

{ Household electrical appliances

• Outdoor air conditioner units

• Microwave ovens, electric rice cookers

{ Industrial equipment

• Pumps

• Vending machines

• FA (Factory Automation)

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

20

1.4 Ordering Information

Part Number Package Quality Grade

µ

PD780111GB-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD780112GB-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD780113GB-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD780114GB-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD780111GB(A)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780112GB(A)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780113GB(A)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780114GB(A)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780111GB(A1)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780112GB(A1)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780113GB(A1)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780114GB(A1)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780111GB(A2)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780112GB(A2)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780113GB(A2)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD780114GB(A2)-×××-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M1GB-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD78F0114M2GB-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD78F0114M3GB-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD78F0114M4GB-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD78F0114M5GB-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD78F0114M6GB-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Standard

µ

PD78F0114M1GB(A)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M2GB(A)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M3GB(A)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M4GB(A)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M5GB(A)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M6GB(A)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M1GB(A1)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M2GB(A1)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M5GB(A1)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

µ

PD78F0114M6GB(A1)-8ES 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10) Special

Remark ××× indicates ROM code suffix.

Please refer to "Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices" (Document No. C11531E) published by

NEC Electronics Corporation to know the specification of the quality grade on the device and its

recommended applications.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 21

Mask ROM versions (

µ

PD780111, 780112, 780113, and 780114) include mask options. When ordering, it is

possible to select “Power-on-clear (POC) circuit can be used/cannot be used”, “Ring-OSC can be stopped/cannot be

stopped by software” and “Pull-up resistor incorporated/not incorporated in 1-bit units (P60 to P63)”.

Flash memory versions corresponding to the mask options of the mask ROM versions are as follows.

Table 1-2. Flash Memory Versions Corresponding to Mask Options of Mask ROM Versions

Mask Option

POC Circuit Ring-OSC

Flash Memory Versions

(Part Number)

Cannot be stopped

µ

PD78F0114M1GB-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M1GB(A)-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M1GB(A1)-8ES

POC cannot be used

Can be stopped by software

µ

PD78F0114M2GB-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M2GB(A)-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M2GB(A1)-8ES

Cannot be stopped

µ

PD78F0114M3GB-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M3GB(A)-8ES

POC used (VPOC = 2.85 V ±0.15 V)

Can be stopped by software

µ

PD78F0114M4GB-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M4GB(A)-8ES

Cannot be stopped

µ

PD78F0114M5GB-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M5GB(A)-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M5GB(A1)-8ES

POC used (VPOC = 3.5 V ±0.2 V)

Can be stopped by software

µ

PD78F0114M6GB-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M6GB(A)-8ES

µ

PD78F0114M6GB(A1)-8ES

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

22

1.5 Pin Configuration (Top View)

• 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

AV

REF

AV

SS

IC (V

PP

)

V

DD

V

SS

X1

X2

RESET

XT1

XT2

P130

P73/KR3

P00/TI000

P01/TI010/TO00

P10/SCK10/TxD0

P11/SI10/RxD0

P12/SO10

P13/TxD6

P14/RxD6

P15/TOH0

P16/TOH1/INTP5

EV

DD

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34

P120/INTP0

P33/TI51/TO51/INTP4

P32/INTP3

P31/INTP2

P30/INTP1

P17/TI50/TO50

P60

P61

P62

P63

EV

SS

P20/ANI0

P21/ANI1

P22/ANI2

P23/ANI3

P24/ANI4

P25/ANI5

P26/ANI6

P27/ANI7

P70/KR0

P71/KR1

P72/KR2

Cautions 1. Connect the IC (Internally Connected) pin directly to VSS.

2. Connect the AVSS pin to VSS.

3. Connect the VPP pin to EVSS or VSS during normal operation.

Remark Figures in parentheses apply only to the

µ

PD78F0114.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 23

Pin Identification

ANI0 to ANI7: Analog input

AVREF: Analog reference voltage

AVSS: Analog ground

EVDD: Power supply for port

EVSS: Ground for port

IC: Internally connected

INTP0 to INTP5: External interrupt input

KR0 to KR3: Key return

P00, P01: Port 0

P10 to P17: Port 1

P20 to P27: Port 2

P30 to P33: Port 3

P60 to P63: Port 6

P70 to P73: Port 7

P120: Port 12

P130: Port 13

RESET: Reset

RxD0, RxD6: Receive data

SCK10: Serial clock input/output

SI10: Serial data input

SO10: Serial data output

TI000, TI010,

TI50, TI51: Timer input

TO00, TO50, TO51,

TOH0, TOH1: Timer output

TxD0, TxD6: Transmit data

VDD: Power supply

VPP: Programming power supply

VSS: Ground

X1, X2: Crystal oscillator (X1 input clock)

XT1, XT2: Crystal oscillator (subsystem clock)

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

24

1.6 Kx1 Series Lineup

1.6.1 78K0/Kx1, 78K0/Kx1+ product lineup

Mask ROM: 24 KB,

RAM: 768 B

Mask ROM: 16 KB,

RAM: 768 B

Mask ROM: 8 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD780101

78K0/KB1

•

30-pin SSOP (7.62 mm 0.65 mm pitch)

Single-power-supply flash memory: 24 KB,

RAM: 768 B

Single-power-supply flash memory: 16 KB,

RAM: 768 B

Single-power-supply flash memory: 8 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD780102

PD780103

PD78F0103

Two-power-supply

flash memory: 24 KB,

RAM: 768 B

78K0/KB1+

PD78F0102H

PD78F0103H

PD78F0101H

•

44-pin LQFP (10

×

10 mm 0.8 mm pitch)

PD78F0114

Two-power-supply

flash memory: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

Mask ROM: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD780114

Mask ROM: 24 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD780113

Mask ROM: 16 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD780112

PD780111

78K0/KC1

Single-power-supply flash memory: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

Single-power-supply flash memory: 24 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

Single-power-supply flash memory: 16 KB,

RAM: 512 B

78K0/KC1+

PD78F0113H

PD78F0114H/HD

Note

PD78F0112H

Mask ROM: 8 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD78F0124

Mask ROM: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD780124

Mask ROM: 24 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD780123

Mask ROM: 16 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD780122

Mask ROM: 8 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD780121

•

52-pin LQFP (10

×

10 mm 0.65 mm pitch)

Single-power-supply flash memory: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

Single-power-supply flash memory: 24 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

Single-power-supply flash memory: 16 KB,

RAM: 512 B

78K0/KD1+

PD78F0123H

PD78F0124H/HD

Note

PD78F0122H

Two-power-supply

flash memory: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD78F0148

Mask ROM: 60 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

PD780148

Mask ROM: 48 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

PD780146

Mask ROM: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD780144

Mask ROM: 24 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD780143

•

80-pin TQFP, QFP (12

×

12 mm 0.5 mm pitch, 14

×

14 mm 0.65 mm pitch)

Single-power-supply flash memory: 60 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

78K0/KF1+

PD78F0148H/HD

Note

78K0/KF1

Two-power-supply

flash memory: 60 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

PD78F0138 PD780138

PD780136

•

64-pin LQFP, TQFP (10

×

10 mm 0.5 mm pitch, 12

×

12 mm 0.65 mm pitch, 14

×

14 mm 0.8 mm pitch)

78K0/KE1+

PD78F0136H

PD78F0138H/HD

Note

78K0/KE1

PD78F0134

Mask ROM: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD780134

Mask ROM: 24 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

PD780133

Mask ROM: 16 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD780132

Mask ROM: 8 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD780131

Single-power-supply flash memory: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

Single-power-supply flash memory: 24 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

Single-power-supply flash memory: 16 KB,

RAM: 512 B

PD78F0133H

PD78F0134H

PD78F0132H

Two-power-supply

flash memory: 32 KB,

RAM: 1 KB

Mask ROM: 60 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

Mask ROM: 48 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

Single-power-supply flash memory: 60 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

Single-power-supply flash memory: 48 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

Two-power-supply

flash memory: 60 KB,

RAM: 2 KB

µµµ

µµ

µµ

µµ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µµ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µµ

µ

µ

µ

µ

78K0/KD1

Note Product with on-chip debug function

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 25

The list of functions in the 78K0/Kx1 is shown below.

Part Number

Item 78K0/KB1 78K0/KC1 78K0/KD1 78K0/KE1 78K0/KF1

Number of pins 30 pins 44 pins 52 pins 64 pins 80 pins

Mask ROM 8 16/

24 − 8/

16 24/

32 − 8/

16 24/

32 − 8/

16 24/

32 − 48/

60 − 24/

32 48/

60 −

Flash memory − 24 − 32 − 32 − 32 − 60 − 60

Internal

memory

(KB)

RAM 0.5 0.75 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 2 1 2

Power supply voltage VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 VNotes 1, 2

Minimum instruction execution time 0.166

µ

s (when 12 MHz, VDD =

4.0 to 5.5 V)

0.2

µ

s (when 10 MHz, VDD =

3.5 to 5.5 V)

0.238

µ

s (when 8.38 MHz, VDD

= 3.0 to 5.5 V)

0.4

µ

s (when 5 MHz, VDD = 2.5

to 5.5 V)

<Connect REGC pin to VDD>

0.166

µ

s (when 12 MHz, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V)

0.2

µ

s (when 10 MHz, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V)

0.238

µ

s (when 8.38 MHz, VDD = 3.0 to 5.5 V)

0.4

µ

s (when 5 MHz, VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V)

X1 input 2 to 12 MHz

Subclock − 32.768 kHz

Clock

Ring-OSC 240 kHz (TYP.)

CMOS I/O 17 19 26 38 54

CMOS input 4 8

CMOS output 1

Port

N-ch open-drain I/O − 4

16 bits (TM0) 1 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch

8 bits (TM5) 1 ch 2 ch

8 bits (TMH) 2 ch

For watch − 1 ch

Timer

WDT 1 ch

3-wire CSINote 3 1 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch

Automatic transmit/

receive 3-wire CSI − 1 ch

UARTNote 3 − 1 ch

Serial

interface

UART supporting LIN-bus 1 ch

10-bit A/D converter 4 ch 8 ch

External 6 7 8 9 9 Interrupt Internal 11 12 15 16 19 17 20

Key return input − 4 ch 8 ch

RESET pin Provided

POC 2.85 V ±0.15 V/3.5 V ±0.20 V (selectable by mask option)

LVI 2.85 V/3.1 V/3.3 V ±0.15 V/3.5 V/3.7 V/3.9 V/4.1 V/4.3 V ±0.2 V (selectable by software)

Clock monitor Provided

Reset

WDT Provided

Clock output/buzzer output − Clock output

only Provided

Multiplier/divider − 16 bits × 16 bits, 32 bits ÷ 16 bits

ROM correction − Provided −

Standby function HALT/STOP mode

Operating ambient temperature Standard products, special (A) grade products: −40 to +85°C

Special (A1) grade products: −40 to +110°C (mask ROM version),

−40 to +105°C (flash memory version)

Special (A2) grade products: −40 to +125°C (mask ROM version)

Notes 1. Use the product in a voltage r ang e of 3.0 to 5.5 V when t he detection vo ltage (V POC) of the po wer-on-cle ar

(POC) circuit is 2.85 V ±0.15 V.

2. Use the product in a voltag e r ange of 3.7 to 5.5 V wh en t he detectio n volta ge (VPOC) of the po wer-o n-clear

(POC) circuit is 3.5 V ±0.2 V.

3. Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

26

The list of functions in the 78K0/Kx1+ is shown bel ow.

Part Number

Item 78K0/KB1+ 78K0/KC1+ 78K0/KD1+ 78K0/KE1+ 78K0/KF1+

Number of pins 30 pins 44 pins 52 pins 64 pins 80 pins

Flash memory 8 16/24 16 24/32 16 24/32 16 24/32 48/60 60 Internal

memory

(KB) RAM 0.5 0.75 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 2 2

Power supply voltage VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V (with Ring-OSC clock or subclock: VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 VNote 1)

Minimum instruction execution time 0.125

µ

s (when 16 MHz, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V)

0.2

µ

s (when 10MHz, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V)

0.238

µ

s (when 8.38 MHz, VDD = 3.0 to 5.5 V)

0.4

µ

s (when 5 MHz, VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V)

Crystal/ceramic 2 to 16 MHz

RC 3 to 4 MHz −

Subclock − 32.768 kHz

Clock

Ring-OSC 240 kHz (TYP.)

CMOS I/O 17 19 26 38 54

CMOS input 4 8

CMOS output 1

Port

N-ch open-drain I/O − 4

16 bits (TM0) 1 ch 2 ch

8 bits (TM5) 1 ch 2 ch

8 bits (TMH) 2 ch

For watch − 1 ch

Timer

WDT 1 ch

3-wire CSINote 2 1 ch 2 ch

Automatic transmit/

receive 3-wire CSI − 1 ch

UARTNote 2 − 1 ch

Serial

interface

UART supporting LIN-bus 1 ch

10-bit A/D converter 4 ch 8 ch

External 6 7 8 9 9

Interrupts

Internal 11 12 15 16 19 20

Key return input − 4 ch 8 ch

RESET pin Provided

POC 2.1 V ±0.1 V (detection voltage is fixed)

LVI 2.35 V/2.6 V/2.85 V/3.1 V/3.3 V ±0.15 V/3.5 V/3.7 V/3.9 V/4.1 V/4.3 V ±0.2 V

(selectable by software)

Clock monitor Provided

Reset

WDT Provided

Clock output/buzzer output − Clock output

only Provided

External bus interface − Provided

Multiplier/divider − 16 bits × 16 bits, 32 bits ÷ 16 bits

ROM correction − Provided −

Self-programming function Provided

Product with on-chip debug

function

µ

PD78F0114HD, 78F0124HD, 78F0138HD, 78F0148HD

Standby function HALT/STOP mode

Operating ambient temperature TA = −40 to +85°C

Notes 1. Use the product in a voltage rang e of 2.2 to 5.5 V wh en the detection voltage (VPOC) of the power-o n-clear

(POC) circuit is 2.1 V ±0.1 V.

2. Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 27

1.6.2 V850ES/Kx1, V850ES/Kx1+ product lineup

V850ES/KE1

•

64-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10 mm, 0.5 mm pitch)

•

64-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12 mm, 0.65 mm pitch)

•

64-pin plastic LQFP (14 × 14 mm, 0.8 mm pitch)

PD70F3207HY

PD70F3207H

Single-power-supply flash

memory: 128 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD703207Y

PD703207

Mask ROM: 128 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD703206Y

PD703206

Mask ROM: 96 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD703210Y

PD703210

Mask ROM: 128 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD703209Y

PD703209

Mask ROM: 96 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD70F3210HY

PD70F3210H

Single-power-supply flash

memory: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB

PD70F3306Y

PD70F3306

Single-power-supply flash memory: 128 KB,

RAM: 6 KB

PD70F3210Y

PD70F3210

Two-power-supply flash memory:

128 KB, RAM: 6 KB

PD703208Y

PD703208

Mask ROM: 64 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

V850ES/KE1+

PD70F3302Y

PD70F3302

Single-power-supply flash

memory: 128 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD703302Y

PD703302

Mask ROM: 128 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD703301Y

PD703301

Mask ROM: 96 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

V850ES/KF1

•

80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12 mm, 0.5 mm pitch)

•

80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm, 0.65 mm pitch)

•

100-pin plastic LQFP (14 × 14 mm, 0.5 mm pitch)

•

100-pin plastic QFP (14 × 20 mm, 0.65 mm pitch)

PD70F3211HY

PD70F3211H

Single-power-supply flash memory:

256 KB, RAM: 12 KB

PD703211Y

PD703211

Mask ROM: 256 KB,

RAM: 12 KB

V850ES/KF1+

PD70F3308Y

PD70F3308

Single-power-supply flash memory:

256 KB, RAM: 12 KB

PD703308Y

PD703308

Mask ROM: 256 KB,

RAM: 12 KB

PD703214Y

PD703214

Mask ROM: 128 KB,

RAM: 6 KB

PD703213Y

PD703213

Mask ROM: 96 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD70F3214HY

PD70F3214H

Single-power-supply flash

memory: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB

PD70F3311Y

PD70F3311

Single-power-supply flash memory: 128 KB,

RAM: 6 KB

PD70F3214Y

PD70F3214

Two-power-supply flash memory:

128 KB, RAM: 6 KB

PD703212Y

PD703212

Mask ROM: 64 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

V850ES/KG1

PD70F3215HY

PD70F3215H

Single-power-supply flash memory:

256 KB, RAM: 16 KB

PD703215Y

PD703215

Mask ROM: 256 KB,

RAM: 16 KB

V850ES/KG1+

PD70F3313Y

PD70F3313

Single-power-supply flash memory:

256 KB, RAM: 16 KB

PD703313Y

PD703313

Mask ROM: 256 KB,

RAM: 16 KB

•

144-pin plastic LQFP (20 × 20 mm, 0.5 mm pitch)

PD703217Y

PD703217

Mask ROM: 128 KB,

RAM: 6 KB

PD703216Y

PD703216

Mask ROM: 96 KB,

RAM: 4 KB

PD70F3217HY

PD70F3217H

Single-power-supply flash

memory: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB

PD70F3316Y

PD70F3316

Single-power-supply flash memory: 128 KB,

RAM: 6 KB

PD70F3217Y

PD70F3217

Two-power-supply flash memory:

128 KB, RAM: 6 KB

V850ES/KJ1

PD70F3218HY

PD70F3218H

Single-power-supply flash memory:

256 KB, RAM: 16 KB

PD703218Y

PD703218

Mask ROM: 256 KB,

RAM: 16 KB

V850ES/KJ1+

PD70F3318Y

PD70F3318

Single-power-supply flash memory:

256 KB, RAM: 16 KB

PD703318Y

PD703318

Mask ROM: 256 KB,

RAM: 16 KB

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

28

The list of functions in the V850ES/Kx1 is shown below.

Part Number

Item

V850ES/KE1 V850ES/KF1 V850ES/KG1 V850ES/KJ1

Number of pins 64 pins 80 pins 100 pins 144 pins

Mask ROM 96/128 − 64/

96

128 − 256 − 64/

96

128 − 256 − 96/

128

− 256 −

Flash memory − 128 − − 128 − 256 − − 128 − 256 − 128 − 256

Internal

memory

(KB)

RAM 4 4 6 12 4 6 16 6 16

Power supply voltage VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

Minimum instruction execution time 50 ns @ 20 MHz

X1 input 2 to 10 MHz

Subclock 32.768 kHz

Clock

Ring-OSC −

CMOS input 8 8 8 16

CMOS I/O 43 59 76 112

Ports

N-ch open-drain I/O 1 2 4 6

16 bits (TMP) 1 ch − 1 ch − 1 ch − 1 ch

16 bits (TM0) 1 ch 2 ch 4 ch 6 ch

8 bits (TM5) 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch

8 bits (TMH) 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch

Interval timer 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

For watch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

WDT1 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

Timer

WDT2 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

RTO 6 bits × 1 ch 6 bits × 1 ch 6 bits × 1 ch 6 bits × 2 ch

CSI 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 3 ch

Automatic transmit/

receive 3-wire CSI

− 1 ch 2 ch 2 ch

UART 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 3 ch

UART supporting LIN-bus − − − −

Serial

interface

I2CNote 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 2 ch

Address space − 128 KB 3 MB 15 MB

Address bus − 16 bits 22 bits 24 bits

External

bus

Mode − Multiplexed mode only Multiplexed/separate mode

DMA controller − − − −

10-bit A/D converter 8 ch 8 ch 8 ch 16 ch

8-bit D/A converter − − 2 ch 2 ch

External 8 8 8 8

Interrupts

Internal 26 26 29 31 34 40 43

Key return input 8 ch 8 ch 8 ch 8 ch

RESET pin Provided

POC Not provided

LVI Not provided

Clock monitor Not provided

WDT1 Provided

Reset

WDT2 Provided

ROM correction 4 points

Regulator Not provided Provided

Standby function HALT/IDLE/STOP/sub-IDLE mode

Operating ambient temperature TA = −40 to +85°C

Note Provided in the Y version only.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 29

The list of functions in the V850ES/Kx1+ is shown below.

Part Number

Item

V850ES/KE1+ V850ES/KF1+ V850ES/KG1+ V850ES/KJ1+

Number of pins 64 pins 80 pins 100 pins 144 pins

Mask ROM 96/128 − 128 256 − 128/256 − 128/256 −

Flash memory − 128 − − 256 − 256 − 256

Internal

memory

(KB) RAM 4 6 12 6 16 6 16

Power supply voltage VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

Minimum instruction execution time 50 ns @ 20 MHz

X1 input 2 to 10 MHz

Subclock 32.768 kHz

Clock

Ring-OSC 240 kHz (TYP.)

CMOS input 8 8 8 16

CMOS I/O 43 59 76 112

Ports

N-ch open-drain I/O 1 2 4 6

16 bits (TMP) 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

16 bits (TM0) 1 ch 2 ch 4 ch 6 ch

8 bits (TM5) 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch

8 bits (TMH) 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch

Interval timer 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

For watch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

WDT1 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

Timer

WDT2 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

RTO 6 bits × 1 ch 6 bits × 1 ch 6 bits × 1 ch 6 bits × 2 ch

CSI 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 3 ch

Automatic transmit/

receive 3-wire CSI

− 1 ch 2 ch 2 ch

UART 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 2 ch

UART supporting LIN-bus 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

Serial

interface

I2CNote 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 2 ch

Address space − 128 KB 3 MB 15 MB

Address bus − 16 bits 22 bits 24 bits

External

bus

Mode − Multiplexed mode only Multiplexed/separate mode

DMA controller − − 4 ch 4 ch

10-bit A/D converter 8 ch 8 ch 8 ch 16 ch

8-bit D/A converter − − 2 ch 2 ch

External 9 9 9 9

Interrupts

Internal 27 30 42 48

Key return input 8 ch 8 ch 8 ch 8 ch

RESET pin Provided

POC Fixed to 2.7 V or lower

LVI 3.1 V/3.3 V ±0.15 V or 3.5 V/3.7 V/3.9 V/4.1 V/4.3 V ±0.2 V (selectable by software)

Clock monitor Provided (monitoring by Ring-OSC)

WDT1 Provided

Reset

WDT2 Provided

ROM correction 4 points

Regulator Not provided Provided

Standby function HALT/IDLE/STOP/sub-IDLE mode

Operating ambient temperature TA = −40 to +85°C

Note Provided in the Y version only.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

30

1.7 Block Diagram

16-bit timer/

event counter 00

TO00/TI010/P01

TI000/P00

Port 0 P00, P01

2

Port 1 P10 to P17

Port 2 P20 to P27

8

Port 3 P30 to P33

4

78K/0

CPU

core

Internal

high-speed

RAM

ROM

(flash

memory)

V

SS

,

EV

SS

IC

(VPP)

V

DD

,

EV

DD

Serial

interface CSI10

SI10/P11

SO10/P12

SCK10/P10

ANI0/P20 to

ANI7/P27

Interrupt control

8-bit timer H0

TOH0/P15

8-bit timer H1

TOH1/P16

TI50/TO50/P17 8-bit timer/

event counter 50

8

A/D converter

RxD0/P11

TxD0/P10

Serial

interface UART0

Watchdog timer

RxD6/P14

TxD6/P13

Serial

interface UART6

AV

REF

AV

SS

INTP1/P30 to

INTP4/P33 4

INTP0/P120

8

System control

RESET

X1

X2

Clock monitor

Power on clear/

low voltage

indicator

POC/LVI

control

Reset control

Port 6 P60 to P63

4

Port 7 P70 to P73

Port 12 P120

Port 13 P130

4

Ring-OSC

XT1

XT2

TI51/TO51/P33 8-bit timer/

event counter 51

Watch timer

INTP5/P16

Key return 4KR0/P70 to

KR3/P73

Remark Items in parentheses are available only in the

µ

PD78F0114.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 31

1.8 Outline of Functions (1/2)

Item

µ

PD780111

µ

PD780112

µ

PD780113

µ

PD780114

µ

PD78F0114

ROM 8 KB 16 KB 24 KB 32 KB 32 KBNote 1

(flash memory)

Internal memory

High-speed RAM 512 bytes 1 KB 1 KBNote 1

Memory space 64 KB

X1 input clock (oscillation frequency) Ceramic/crystal/external clock oscillation

Standard

products,

expanded-

specification

products of (A)

grade products

2 to 12 MHz: VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 2 to 10 MHz: VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, 2 to 8.38 MHz: VDD =

3.0 to 5.5 V, 2 to 5 MHz: VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V

Standard

products,

conventional

products of (A)

grade products

2 to 10 MHz: VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 2 to 8.38 MHz: VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 V, 2 to 5 MHz: VDD = 2.7

to 5.5 V

(A1) grade

products 2 to 10 MHz: VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 2 to 8.38 MHz: VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 2 to 5 MHz: VDD = 3.3

to 5.5 V

(A2) grade

products 2 to 8.38 MHz: VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 2 to 5 MHz: VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 V

Ring-OSC clock

(oscillation frequency) On-chip Ring oscillation (240 kHz (TYP.): VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V)

Subsystem clock

(oscillation frequency) Crystal/external clock oscillation (32.768 kHz: VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V)

General-purpose registers 8 bits × 32 registers (8 bits × 8 registers × 4 banks)

0.166

µ

s/0.333

µ

s/0.666

µ

s/1.333

µ

s/2.666

µ

s (X1 input clock: @ fXP = 12 MHz

operation)

8.3

µ

s/16.6

µ

s/33.2

µ

s/66.4

µ

s/132.8

µ

s (TYP.) (Ring-OSC cl o ck: @ fR = 240 kHz (TYP.)

operation)

Minimum instruction execution time

122

µ

s (subsystem clock: @ fXT = 32.768 kHz operation)

Instruction set • 16-bit operation

• Multiply/divide (8 bits × 8 bits, 16 bits ÷ 8 bits)

• Bit manipulate (set, reset, test, and Boolean operation)

• BCD adjust, etc.

I/O ports Total: 32

CMOS I/O 19

CMOS input 8

CMOS output 1

N-ch open-drain I/O 4

Timers • 16-bit timer/event counter: 1 channel

• 8-bit timer/event counter: 2 channels

• 8-bit timer: 2 channels

• Watch timer 1 channel

• Watchdog timer: 1 channel

Timer outputs 5 (PWM outputs: 4)

A/D converter 10-bit resolution × 8 channels

Serial interface • UART mode supporting LIN-bus: 1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O mode/UART modeNote 2: 1 channel

Notes 1. The internal flash memory capacity and internal high-speed RAM capacity can be changed using the

internal memory size switching register (IMS).

2. Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

32

(2/2)

Item

µ

PD780111

µ

PD780112

µ

PD780113

µ

PD780114

µ

PD78F0114

Internal 15 Vectored interrupt

sources External 7

Key interrupt Key interrupt (INTKR) occurs by detecting falling edge of key input pins (KR0 to KR3).

Reset • Reset using RESET pin

• Internal reset by watchdog timer

• Internal reset by clock monitor

• Internal reset by power-on-clear

• Internal reset by low-voltage detector

Supply voltage • Expanded-specification products of standard products and (A) grade products:

V

DD = 2.5 to 5.5 VNotes 1, 2

• Conventional products of standard products and (A) grade products:

V

DD = 2.7 to 5.5 VNotes 1, 2

• (A1) grade products, (A2) grade products: VDD = 3.3 to 5.5 VNote 2

Operating ambient temperature • Standard products, (A) grade products: TA = −40 to +85°C

• (A1) grade products: TA = −40 to +110°C (mask ROM versions),

−40 to +105°C (flash memory versions)

• (A2) grade products: TA = −40 to +125°C (mask ROM versions)

Package • 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10)

Notes 1. Use the product in a voltage range of 3.0 to 5.5 V when the detection voltage (VPOC) of the power-on-

clear (POC) circuit is 2.85 V ±0.15 V.

2. Use the product in a voltage range of 3.7 to 5.5 V when the detection voltage (VPOC) of the power-on-

clear (POC) circuit is 3.5 V ±0.2 V.

An outline of the timer is shown below.

16-Bit Timer/

Event Counter 00

8-Bit Timer/

Event Counters

50 and 51

8-Bit Timers H0 and

H1

TM00 TM50 TM51 TMH0 TMH1

Watch

Timer

Watchdog

Timer

Interval timer 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel 1 channelNote −

External event counter 1 channel 1 channel 1 channel − − − −

Operation

mode

Watchdog timer − − − − − − 1 channel

Timer output 1 output 1 output 1 output 1 output 1 output − −

PPG output 1 output − − − − − −

PWM output − 1 output 1 output 1 output 1 output − −

Pulse width measurement 2 inputs − − − − − −

Square-wave output 1 output 1 output 1 output 1 output 1 output − −

Function

Interrupt source 2 1 1 1 1 1 −

Note The watch timer function and interval timer function can be used simultaneously.

Remark TM51 and TMH1 can be used in combination as a carrier generator mode.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 33

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

2.1 Pin Function List

There are three types of pin I/O buffer power supplies: AVREF, EVDD, and VDD. The relationship between these

power supplies and the pins is shown below.

Table 2-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies

Power Supply Corresponding Pins

AVREF P20 to P27

EVDD Port pins other than P20 to P27

VDD Pins other than port pins

(1) Port pins (1/2)

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function

P00 TI000

P01

I/O Port 0.

2-bit I/O port.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input

TI010/TO00

P10 SCK10/TxD0

P11 SI10/RxD0

P12 SO10

P13 TxD6

P14 RxD6

P15 TOH0

P16 TOH1/INTP5

P17

I/O Port 1.

8-bit I/O port.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input

TI50/TO50

P20 to P27 Input Port 2.

8-bit input-only port.

Input ANI0 to ANI7

P30 to P32 INTP1 to INTP3

P33

I/O Port 3.

4-bit I/O port.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input

INTP4/TI51/TO51

P60 to P63 I/O Port 6.

4-bit I/O port (N-ch open drain).

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a mask

option only for mask ROM versions.

Input −

P70 to P73 I/O Port 7.

4-bit I/O port.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input KR0 to KR3

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

34

(1) Port pins (2/2)

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function

P120 I/O

Port 12.

1-bit I/O port.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input INTP0

P130 Output

Port 13.

1-bit output-only port.

Output −

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 35

(2) Non-port pins

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function

INTP0 P120

INTP1 to INTP3 P30 to P32

INTP4 P33/TI51/TO51

INTP5

Input External interrupt request input for which the valid edge (rising

edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be

specified

Input

P16/TOH1

SI10 Input Serial data input to serial interface Input P11/RxD0

SO10 Output Serial data output from serial interface Input P12

SCK10 I/O Clock input/output for serial interface Input P10/TxD0

RxD0 P11/SI10

RxD6

Input Serial data input to asynchronous serial interface Input

P14

TxD0 P10/SCK10

TxD6

Output Serial data output from asynchronous serial interface Input

P13

TI000 External count clock input to 16-bit timer/event counter 00

Capture trigger input to capture registers (CR000, CR010) of

16-bit timer/event counter 00

P00

TI010

Input

Capture trigger input to capture register (CR000) of 16-bit

timer/event counter 00

Input

P01/TO00

TO00 Output 16-bit timer/event counter 00 output Input P01/TI010

TI50 External count clock input to 8-bit timer/event counter 50 P17/TO50

TI51

Input

External count clock input to 8-bit timer/event counter 51

Input

P33/TO51/INTP4

TO50 8-bit timer/event counter 50 output P17/TI50

TO51 8-bit timer/event counter 51 output P33/TI51/INTP4

TOH0 8-bit timer H0 output P15

TOH1

Output

8-bit timer H1 output

Input

P16/INTP5

ANI0 to ANI7 Input A/D converter analog input Input P20 to P27

AVREF Input

A/D converter reference voltage input and positive power

supply for port 2

− −

AVSS − A/D converter ground potential. Make the same potential as

EVSS or VSS.

− −

KR0 to KR3 Input Key interrupt input Input P70 to P73

RESET Input System reset input − −

X1 Input − −

X2 −

Connecting resonator for X1 input clock

− −

XT1 Input − −

XT2 −

Connecting resonator for subsystem clock

− −

VDD − Positive power supply (except for ports) − −

EVDD − Positive power supply for ports − −

VSS − Ground potential (except for ports) − −

EVSS − Ground potential for ports − −

IC − Internally connected. Connect directly to EVSS or VSS. − −

VPP − Flash memory programming mode setting. High-voltage

application for program write/verify. Connect to EVSS or VSS in

normal operation mode.

− −

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

36

2.2 Description of Pin Functions

2.2.1 P00 and P01 (port 0)

P00 and P01 function as a 2-bit I/O port. These pins also function as timer I/O.

The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P00 and P01 function as a 2-bit I/O port. P00 and P01 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

register 0 (PM0). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0).

(2) Control mode

P00 and P01 function as timer I/O.

(a) TI000

This is the pin for inputting an external count clock to 16-bit timer/event counter 00 and is also for inputting a

capture trigger signal to the capture registers (CR000 or CR001) of 16-bit timer/event counter 00.

(b) TI010

This is the pin for inputting a capture trigger signal to the capture register (CR000) of 16-bit timer/event

counter 00.

(c) TO00

This is a timer output pin.

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 37

2.2.2 P10 to P17 (port 1)

P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for external interrupt request input, serial

interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O.

The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port. P10 to P17 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

register 1 (PM1). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1).

(2) Control mode

P10 to P17 function as external interrupt request input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O.

(a) SI10

This is a serial interface serial data input pin.

(b) SO10

This is a serial interface serial data output pin.

(c) SCK10

This is a serial interface serial clock I/O pin.

(d) RxD0 and RxD6

These are the serial data input pins of the asynchronous serial interface.

(e) TxD0 and TxD6

These are the serial data output pins of the asynchronous serial interface.

(f) TI50

This is the pin for inputting an external count clock to 8-bit timer/event counter 50.

(g) TO50, TOH0, and TOH1

These are timer output pins.

(h) INTP5

This is an external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising

and falling edges) can be specified.

2.2.3 P20 to P27 (port 2)

P20 to P27 function as an 8-bit input-only port. These pins also function as pins for A/D converter analog input.

The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P20 to P27 function as an 8-bit input-only port.

(2) Control mode

P20 to P27 function as A/D converter analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7). When using these pins as analog input

pins, see (5) ANI0/P20 to ANI7/P27 in 11.6 Cautions for A/D Converter.

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

38

2.2.4 P30 to P33 (port 3)

P30 to P33 function as a 4-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for external interrupt request input and

timer I/O.

The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P30 to P33 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P30 to P33 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

register 3 (PM3). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3).

(2) Control mode

P30 to P33 function as external interrupt request input pins and timer I/O pins.

(a) INTP1 to INTP4

These are the external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both

rising and falling edges) can be specified.

(b) TI51

This is an external count clock input pin to 8-bit timer/event counter 51.

(c) TO51

This is a timer output pin.

2.2.5 P60 to P63 (port 6)

P60 to P63 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P60 to P63 can be set to input port or output port in 1-bit units using port

mode register 6 (PM6).

P60 to P63 are N-ch open-drain pins. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a mask option only for

mask ROM versions.

2.2.6 P70 to P73 (port 7)

P70 to P73 function as a 4-bit I/O port. These pins also function as key interrupt input pins.

The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P70 to P73 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P70 to P73 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

register 7 (PM7). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7).

(2) Control mode

P70 to P73 function as key interrupt input pins.

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 39

2.2.7 P120 (port 12)

P120 functions as a 1-bit I/O port. This pin also functions as a pin for external interrupt request input.

The following operation modes can be specified.

(1) Port mode

P120 functions as a 1-bit I/O port. P120 can be set to input or output using port mode register 12 (PM12). Use of

an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12).

(2) Control mode

P120 functions as an external interrupt request input pin (INTP0) for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling

edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified.

2.2.8 P130 (port 13)

P130 functions as a 1-bit output-only port.

2.2.9 AVREF

This is the A/D converter reference voltage input pin.

When the A/D converter is not used, connect this pin directly to EVDD or VDDNote.

Note Connect port 2 directly to EVDD when it is used as a digital port.

2.2.10 AVSS

This is the A/D converter ground potential pin. Even when the A/D converter is not used, always use this pin with

the same potential as the EVSS pin or VSS pin.

2.2.11 RESET

This is the active-low system reset input pin.

2.2.12 X1 and X2

These are the pins for connecting a resonator for X1 input clock.

When supplying an external clock, input a signal to the X1 pin and input the inverse signal to the X2 pin.

2.2.13 XT1 and XT2

These are the pins for connecting a resonator for subsystem clock.

When supplying an external clock, input a signal to the XT1 pin and input the inverse signal to the XT2 pin.

2.2.14 VDD and EVDD

VDD is the positive power supply pin for other than ports.

EVDD is the positive power supply pin for ports.

2.2.15 VSS and EVSS

VSS is the ground potential pin for other than ports.

EVSS is the ground potential pin for ports.

2.2.16 VPP (flash memory versions only)

This is a pin for flash memory programming mode setting and high-voltage application for program write/verify.

Connect to EVSS or VSS in the normal operation mode.

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

40

2.2.17 IC (mask ROM versions only)

The IC (Internally Connected) pin is provided to set the test mode to check the 78K0/KC1 at shipment. Connect it

directly to EVSS or VSS pin with the shortest possible wire in the normal operation mode.

When a potential difference is produced between the IC pin and the EVSS or VSS pin because the wiring between

these two pins is too long or external noise is input to the IC pin, the user’s program may not operate normally.

• Connect the IC pin directly to EVSS or VSS.

As short as possible

ICEV

SS

or V

SS

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 41

2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins

Table 2-2 shows the types of pin I/O circuits and the recommended connections of unused pins.

Refer to Figure 2-1 for the configuration of the I/O circuit of each type.

Table 2-2. Pin I/O Circuit Types

Pin Name I/O Circuit Type I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins

P00/TI000

P01/TI010/TO00

P10/SCK10/TxD0

P11/SI10/RXD0

8-A

P12/SO10

P13/TxD6

5-A

P14/RxD6 8-A

P15/TOH0 5-A

P16/TOH1/INTP5

P17/TI50/TO50

8-A

I/O Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS via a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

P20/ANI0 to P27/ANI7 9-C Input Connect to EVDD or EVSS.

P30/INTP1 to P32/INTP3

P33/TI51/TO51/INTP4

8-A Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS vi a a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

P60, P61 (mask ROM version) 13-S

P60, P61 (flash memory version) 13-R

P62, P63 (mask ROM version) 13-V

P62, P63 (flash memory version) 13-W

Input: Connect to EVSS.

Output: Leave this pin open at low-level output after clearing

the output latch of the port to 0.

P70/KR0 to P73/KR3

P120/INTP0

8-A

I/O

Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS vi a a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

P130 3-C Output Leave open.

RESET 2 Connect to EVDD or V DD.

XT1

Input

Connect directly to EVSS or VSSNote 1.

XT2

16

Leave open.

AVREF Connect directly to EVDD or VDDNote 2.

AVSS

IC

Connect directly to EVSS or VSS.

VPP

−

−

Connect to EVSS or VSS.

Notes 1. Except for rank K and rank I products. When using rank K or rank I products, handle as follows.

• XT1: Directly connect to EVDD or VDD.

2. Connect port 2 directly to EVDD when it is used as a digital port.

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

42

Figure 2-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (1/2)

Type 3-C

Type 2 Type 8-A

Type 5-A

Type 9-C

Schmitt-triggered input with hysteresis characteristics

IN

Pull-up

enable

Data

Output

disable

EVDD

P-ch

VDD

P-ch

IN/OUT

N-ch

EVDD

P-ch

N-ch

Data OUT

IN

Comparator

VREF

(threshold voltage)

AVSS

P-ch

N-ch

Input

enable

+

–

Pull-up

enable

Data

Output

disable

Input

enable

EVDD

P-ch

VDD

P-ch

IN/OUT

N-ch

Data

Output disable

IN/OUT

N-ch

Type 13-R

CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 43

Figure 2-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (2/2)

Type 13-V

Type 13-S Type 13-W

Type 16

Data

Output disable

IN/OUT

N-ch

EV

DD

Mask

option













Data

Output disable

IN/OUT

N-ch

Input

enable Middle-voltage input buffer

Data

Output disable

IN/OUT

N-ch

EV

DD

Mask

option













Input

enable

Middle-voltage input buffer

P-ch

Feedback

cut-off

XT1 XT2

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

44

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

3.1 Memory Space

78K0/KC1 products can each access a 64 KB memory space. Figures 3-1 to 3-5 show the memory maps.

Caution Regardless of the internal memory capacity, the initial value of the internal memory size

switching register (IMS) of all 78K0/KC1 products is fixed (IMS = CFH). Therefore, set the value

corresponding to each product as indicated below.

Table 3-1. Set Value of Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS)

Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS)

µ

PD780111 42H

µ

PD780112 44H

µ

PD780113 C6H

µ

PD780114 C8H

µ

PD78F0114 Value corresponding to mask ROM version

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 45

Figure 3-1. Memory Map (

µ

PD780111)

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose

registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

8192 × 8 bits

1FFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Program area

Program

memory

space

2000H

1FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

512 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Reserved

FD00H

FCFFH

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

46

Figure 3-2. Memory Map (

µ

PD780112)

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose

registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

16384 × 8 bits

3FFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Program area

Program

memory

space

4000H

3FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

512 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Reserved

FD00H

FCFFH

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 47

Figure 3-3. Memory Map (

µ

PD780113)

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose

registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

24576 × 8 bits

5FFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Program area

Program

memory

space

6000H

5FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Reserved

FB00H

FAFFH

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

48

Figure 3-4. Memory Map (

µ

PD780114)

0000H

Data memory

space

Internal ROM

32768 × 8 bits

7FFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Program area

Program

memory

space

8000H

7FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Reserved

FB00H

FAFFH

General-purpose

registers

32 × 8 bits

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 49

Figure 3-5. Memory Map (

µ

PD78F0114)

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose

registers

32 × 8 bits

Flash memory

32768 × 8 bits

7FFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Program area

Program

memory

space

8000H

7FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Reserved

FB00H

FAFFH

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

50

3.1.1 Internal program memory space

The internal program memory space stores the program and table data. Normally, it is addressed with the program

counter (PC).

78K0/KC1 products incorporate internal ROM (mask ROM or flash memory), as shown below.

Table 3-2. Internal ROM Capacity

Internal ROM Part Number

Structure Capacity

µ

PD780111 8192 × 8 bits (0000H to 1FFFH)

µ

PD780112 16384 × 8 bits (0000H to 3FFFH)

µ

PD780113 24576 × 8 bits (0000H to 5FFFH)

µ

PD780114

Mask ROM

32768 × 8 bits (0000H to 7FFFH)

µ

PD78F0114 Flash memory 32768 × 8 bits (0000H to 7FFFH)

The internal program memory space is divided into the following areas.

(1) Vector table area

The 64-byte area 0000H to 003FH is reserved as a vector table area. The program start addresses for branch

upon reset signal input or generation of each interrupt request are stored in the vector table area.

Of the 16-bit address, the lower 8 bits are stored at even addresses and the higher 8 bits are stored at odd

addresses.

Table 3-3. Vector Table

Vector Table Address Interrupt Source Vector Table Address Interrupt Source

001AH INTTMH1 0000H RESET input, POC, LVI,

clock monitor, WDT 001CH INTTMH0

0004H INTLVI 001EH INTTM50

0006H INTP0 0020H INTTM000

0008H INTP1 0022H INTTM010

000AH INTP2 0024H INTAD

000CH INTP3 0026H INTSR0

000EH INTP4 0028H INTWTI

0010H INTP5 002AH INTTM51

0012H INTSRE6 002CH INTKR

0014H INTSR6 002EH INTWT

0016H INTST6 003EH BRK

0018H INTCSI10/INTST0

(2) CALLT instruction table area

The 64-byte area 0040H to 007FH can store the subroutine entry address of a 1-byte call instruction (CALLT).

(3) CALLF instruction entry area

The area 0800H to 0FFFH can perform a direct subroutine call with a 2-byte call instruction (CALLF).

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 51

3.1.2 Internal data memory space

78K0/KC1 products incorporate the following internal high-speed RAMs.

Table 3-4. Internal High-Speed RAM Capacity

Part Number Internal Expansion RAM

µ

PD780111

µ

PD780112

512 × 8 bits (FD00H to FEFFH)

µ

PD780113

µ

PD780114

µ

PD78F0114

1024 × 8 bits (FB00H to FEFFH)

The 32-byte area FEE0H to FEFFH is assigned to four general-purpose register banks consisting of eight 8-bit

registers per one bank.

This area cannot be used as a program area in which instructions are written and executed.

The internal high-speed RAM can also be used as a stack memory.

3.1.3 Special function register (SFR) area

On-chip peripheral hardware special function registers (SFRs) are allocated in the area FF00H to FFFFH (refer to

Table 3-5 Special Function Register List in 3.2.3 Special function registers (SFRs)).

Caution Do not access addresses to which SFRs are not assigned.

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

52

3.1.4 Data memory addressing

Addressing refers to the method of specifying the address of the instruction to be executed next or the address of

the register or memory relevant to the execution of instructions.

Several addressing modes are provided for addressing the memory relevant to the execution of instructions for the

78K0/KC1, based on operability and other considerations. For areas containing data memory in particular, special

addressing methods designed for the functions of special function registers (SFR) and general-purpose registers are

available for use. Figures 3-6 to 3-10 show correspondence between data memory and addressing. For the details of

each addressing mode, see 3.4 Operand Address Addressing.

Figure 3-6. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (

µ

PD780111)

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

8192 × 8 bits

2000H

1FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

512 × 8 bits

Reserved

FD00H

FCFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits SFR addressing

Register addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

Register indirect

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 53

Figure 3-7. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (

µ

PD780112)

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

16384 × 8 bits

4000H

3FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

512 × 8 bits

Reserved

FD00H

FCFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits SFR addressing

Register addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

Register indirect

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

54

Figure 3-8. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (

µ

PD780113)

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

24576 × 8 bits

6000H

5FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1024 × 8 bits

Reserved

FB00H

FAFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits SFR addressing

Register addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

Register indirect

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 55

Figure 3-9. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (

µ

PD780114)

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

32768 ×8 bits

8000H

7FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1024 ×8 bits

Reserved

FB00H

FAFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 ×8 bits SFR addressing

Register addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

Register indirect

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

56

Figure 3-10. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (

µ

PD78F0114)

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Flash memory

32768 × 8 bits

8000H

7FFFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1024 × 8 bits

Reserved

FB00H

FAFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits SFR addressing

Register addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

Register indirect

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 57

3.2 Processor Registers

78K0/KC1 products incorporate the following processor registers.

3.2.1 Control registers

The control registers control the program sequence, statuses, and stack memory. The control registers consist of

a program counter (PC), a program status word (PSW) and a stack pointer (SP).

(1) Program counter (PC)

The program counter is a 16-bit register that holds the address information of the next program to be executed.

In normal operation, the PC is automatically incremented according to the number of bytes of the instruction to be

fetched. When a branch instruction is executed, immediate data and register contents are set.

RESET input sets the reset vector table values at addresses 0000H and 0001H to the program counter.

Figure 3-11. Format of Program Counter

15 0

PC PC15 PC14 PC13 PC12 PC11 PC10 PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0

(2) Program status word (PSW)

The program status word is an 8-bit register consisting of various flags set/reset by instruction execution.

Program status word contents are automatically stacked upon interrupt request generation or PUSH PSW

instruction execution and are restored upon execution of the RETB, RETI, and POP PSW instructions.

RESET input sets the PSW to 02H.

Figure 3-12. Format of Program Status Word

7 0

PSW IE Z RBS1 AC RBS0 0 ISP CY

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

58

(a) Interrupt enable flag (IE)

This flag controls the interrupt request acknowledge operations of the CPU.

When 0, the IE flag is set to the interrupt disabled (DI) state, and all maskable interrupts are disabled.

When 1, the IE flag is set to the interrupt enabled (EI) state and interrupt request acknowledgment is

controlled with an in-service priority flag (ISP), an interrupt mask flag for various interrupt sources, and a

priority specification flag.

The IE flag is reset (0) upon DI instruction execution or interrupt acknowledgment and is set (1) upon EI

instruction execution.

(b) Zero flag (Z)

When the operation result is zero, this flag is set (1). It is reset (0) in all other cases.

(c) Register bank select flags (RBS0 and RBS1)

These are 2-bit flags to select one of the four register banks.

In these flags, the 2-bit information that indicates the register bank selected by SEL RBn instruction

execution is stored.

(d) Auxiliary carry flag (AC)

If the operation result has a carry from bit 3 or a borrow at bit 3, this flag is set (1). It is reset (0) in all other

cases.

(e) In-service priority flag (ISP)

This flag manages the priority of acknowledgeable maskable vectored interrupts. When this flag is 0, low-

level vectored interrupt requests specified by a priority specification flag register (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L) (refer

to 15.3 (3) Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L)) cannot be acknowledged. Actual

interrupt request acknowledgment is controlled by the interrupt enable flag (IE).

(f) Carry flag (CY)

This flag stores overflow and underflow upon add/subtract instruction execution. It stores the shift-out value

upon rotate instruction execution and functions as a bit accumulator during bit operation instruction

execution.

(3) Stack pointer (SP)

This is a 16-bit register to hold the start address of the memory stack area. Only the internal high-speed RAM

area can be set as the stack area.

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 59

Figure 3-13. Format of Stack Pointer

15 0

SP SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0

The SP is decremented ahead of write (save) to the stack memory and is incremented after read (restored) from

the stack memory.

Each stack operation saves/restores data as shown in Figures 3-14 and 3-15.

Caution Since RESET input makes the SP contents undefined, be sure to initialize the SP before using

the stack.

Figure 3-14. Data to Be Saved to Stack Memory

(a) PUSH rp instruction (when SP = FEE0H)

Register pair lower

FEE0H

SP

SP

FEE0H

FEDFH

FEDEH

Register pair higher

FEDEH

(b) CALL, CALLF, CALLT instructions (when SP = FEE0H)

PC15 to PC8

FEE0H

SP

SP

FEE0H

FEDFH

FEDEH PC7 to PC0

FEDEH

(c) Interrupt, BRK instructions (when SP = FEE0H)

PC15 to PC8

PSW

FEDFH

FEE0H

SP

SP

FEE0H

FEDEH

FEDDH PC7 to PC0

FEDDH

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

60

Figure 3-15. Data to Be Restored from Stack Memory

(a) POP rp instruction (when SP = FEDEH)

Register pair lower

FEE0H

SP

SP

FEE0H

FEDFH

FEDEH

Register pair higher

FEDEH

(b) RET instruction (when SP = FEDEH)

PC15 to PC8

FEE0H

SP

SP

FEE0H

FEDFH

FEDEH PC7 to PC0

FEDEH

(c) RETI, RETB instructions (when SP = FEDDH)

PC15 to PC8

PSW

FEDFH

FEE0H

SP

SP

FEE0H

FEDEH

FEDDH PC7 to PC0

FEDDH

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 61

3.2.2 General-purpose registers

General-purpose registers are mapped at particular addresses (FEE0H to FEFFH) of the data memory. The

general-purpose registers consists of 4 banks, each bank consisting of eight 8-bit registers (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, and H).

Each register can be used as an 8-bit register, and two 8-bit registers can also be used in a pair as a 16-bit register

(AX, BC, DE, and HL).

These registers can be described in terms of function names (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL) and

absolute names (R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3).

Register banks to be used for instruction execution are set by the CPU control instruction (SEL RBn). Because of

the 4-register bank configuration, an efficient program can be created by switching between a register for normal

processing and a register for interrupts for each bank.

Figure 3-16. Configuration of General-Purpose Registers

(a) Absolute name

BANK0

BANK1

BANK2

BANK3

FEFFH

FEF8H

FEE0H

RP3

RP2

RP1

RP0

R7

15 0 7 0

R6

R5

R4

R3

R2

R1

R0

16-bit processing 8-bit processing

FEF0H

FEE8H

(b) Function name

BANK0

BANK1

BANK2

BANK3

FEFFH

FEF8H

FEE0H

HL

DE

BC

AX

H

15 0 7 0

L

D

E

B

C

A

X

16-bit processing 8-bit processing

FEF0H

FEE8H

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

62

3.2.3 Special function registers (SFRs)

Unlike a general-purpose register, each special function register has a special function.

SFRs are allocated to the FF00H to FFFFH area.

Special function registers can be manipulated like general-purpose registers, using operation, transfer, and bit

manipulation instructions. The manipulatable bit units, 1, 8, and 16, depend on the special function register type.

Each manipulation bit unit can be specified as follows.

• 1-bit manipulation

Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 1-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr.bit).

This manipulation can also be specified with an address.

• 8-bit manipulation

Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 8-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr).

This manipulation can also be specified with an address.

• 16-bit manipulation

Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 16-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfrp).

When specifying an address, describe an even address.

Table 3-5 gives a list of the special function registers. The meanings of items in the table are as follows.

• Symbol

Symbol indicating the address of a special function register. It is a reserved word in the RA78K0, and is defined

as the sfr variable by the #pragma sfr direction in the CC78K0. When using the RA78K0, ID78K0-NS, ID78K0,

or SM78K0, symbols can be written as an instruction operand.

• R/W

Indicates whether the corresponding special function register can be read or written.

R/W: Read/write enable

R: Read only

W: Write only

• Manipulatable bit units

Indicates the manipulatable bit unit (1, 8, or 16). “−” indicates a bit unit for which manipulation is not possible.

• After reset

Indicates each register status upon RESET input.

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 63

Table 3-5. Special Function Register List (1/3)

Manipulatable Bit Unit Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W

1 Bit 8 Bits 16 Bits

After

Reset

FF00H Port register 0 P0 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF01H Port register 1 P1 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF02H Port register 2 P2 R √ √ − Undefined

FF03H Port register 3 P3 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF06H Port register 6 P6 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF07H Port register 7 P7 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF08H

FF09H

A/D conversion result register ADCR R − − √ Undefined

FF0AH Receive buffer register 6 RXB6 R − √ − FFH

FF0BH Transmit buffer register 6 TXB6 R/W − √ − FFH

FF0CH Port register 12 P12 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF0DH Port register 13 P13 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF0FH Serial I/O shift register 10 SIO10 R − √ − 00H

FF10H

FF11H

16-bit timer counter 00 TM00 R − − √ 0000H

FF12H

FF13H

16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 CR000 R/W − − √ 0000H

FF14H

FF15H

16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 CR010 R/W − − √ 0000H

FF16H 8-bit timer counter 50 TM50 R − √ − 00H

FF17H 8-bit timer compare register 50 CR50 R/W − √ − 00H

FF18H 8-bit timer H compare register 00 CMP00 R/W − √ − 00H

FF19H 8-bit timer H compare register 10 CMP10 R/W − √ − 00H

FF1AH 8-bit timer H compare register 01 CMP01 R/W − √ − 00H

FF1BH 8-bit timer H compare register 11 CMP11 R/W − √ − 00H

FF1FH 8-bit timer counter 51 TM51 R − √ − 00H

FF20H Port mode register 0 PM0 R/W √ √ − FFH

FF21H Port mode register 1 PM1 R/W √ √ − FFH

FF23H Port mode register 3 PM3 R/W √ √ − FFH

FF26H Port mode register 6 PM6 R/W √ √ − FFH

FF27H Port mode register 7 PM7 R/W √ √ − FFH

FF28H A/D converter mode register ADM R/W √ √ − 00H

FF29H Analog input channel specification register ADS R/W √ √ − 00H

FF2AH Power-fail comparison mode register PFM R/W √ √ − 00H

FF2BH Power-fail comparison threshold register PFT R/W − √ − 00H

FF2CH Port mode register 12 PM12 R/W √ √ − FFH

FF30H Pull-up resistor option register 0 PU0 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF31H Pull-up resistor option register 1 PU1 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF33H Pull-up resistor option register 3 PU3 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF37H Pull-up resistor option register 7 PU7 R/W √ √ − 00H

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

64

Table 3-5. Special Function Register List (2/3)

Manipulatable Bit Unit Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W

1 Bit 8 Bits 16 Bits

After

Reset

FF3CH Pull-up resistor option register 12 PU12 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF41H 8-bit timer compare register 51 CR51 R/W − √ − 00H

FF43H 8-bit timer mode control register 51 TMC51 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF48H External interrupt rising edge enable register EGP R/W √ √ − 00H

FF49H External interrupt falling edge enable register EGN R/W √ √ − 00H

FF4FH Input switch control register ISC R/W √ √ − 00H

FF50H Asynchronous serial interface operation mode

register 6

ASIM6 R/W √ √ − 01H

FF53H Asynchronous serial interface reception error

status register 6

ASIS6 R

− √ − 00H

FF55H Asynchronous serial interface transmission

status register 6

ASIF6 R

− √ − 00H

FF56H Clock selection register 6 CKSR6 R/W − √ − 00H

FF57H Baud rate generator control register 6 BRGC6 R/W − √ − FFH

FF58H Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 ASICL6 R/W √ √ − 16H

FF69H 8-bit timer H mode register 0 TMHMD0 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF6AH Timer clock selection register 50 TCL50 R/W − √ − 00H

FF6BH 8-bit timer mode control register 50 TMC50 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF6CH 8-bit timer H mode register 1 TMHMD1 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF6DH 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 TMCYC1 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF6EH Key return mode register KRM R/W √ √ − 00H

FF6FH Watch timer operation mode register WTM R/W √ √ − 00H

FF70H Asynchronous serial interface operation mode

register 0

ASIM0 R/W √ √ − 01H

FF71H Baud rate generator control register 0 BRGC0 R/W − √ − 1FH

FF72H Receive buffer register 0 RXB0 R − √ − FFH

FF73H Asynchronous serial interface reception error

status register 0

ASIS0 R

− √ − 00H

FF74H Transmit shift register 0 TXS0 W − √ − FFH

FF80H Serial operation mode register 10 CSIM10 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF81H Serial clock selection register 10 CSIC10 R/W √ √ − 00H

FF84H Transmit buffer register 10 SOTB10 R/W − √ − Undefined

FF8CH Timer clock selection register 51 TCL51 R/W − √ − 00H

FF98H Watchdog timer mode register WDTM R/W − √ − 67H

FF99H Watchdog timer enable register WDTE R/W − √ − 9AH

FFA0H Ring-OSC mode register RCM R/W √ √ − 00H

FFA1H Main clock mode register MCM R/W √ √ − 00H

FFA2H Main OSC control register MOC R/W √ √ − 00H

FFA3H Oscillation stabilization time counter status register OSTC R √ √ − 00H

FFA4H Oscillation stabilization time select register OSTS R/W − √ − 05H

FFA9H Clock monitor mode register CLM R/W √ √ − 00H

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 65

Table 3-5. Special Function Register List (3/3)

Manipulatable Bit Unit Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W

1 Bit 8 Bits 16 Bits

After

Reset

FFACH Reset control flag register RESF R − √ − 00HNote 1

FFBAH 16-bit timer mode control register 00 TMC00 R/W √ √ − 00H

FFBBH Prescaler mode register 00 PRM00 R/W √ √ − 00H

FFBCH Capture/compare control register 00 CRC00 R/W √ √ − 00H

FFBDH 16-bit timer output control register 00 TOC00 R/W √ √ − 00H

FFBEH Low-voltage detection register LVIM R/W √ √ − 00H

FFBFH Low-voltage detection level selection register LVIS R/W − √ − 00H

FFE0H Interrupt request flag register 0L IF0 IF0L R/W √ √ √ 00H

FFE1H Interrupt request flag register 0H IF0H R/W √ √ 00H

FFE2H Interrupt request flag register 1L IF1L R/W √ √ − 00H

FFE4H Interrupt mask flag register 0L MK0 MK0L R/W √ √ √ FFH

FFE5H Interrupt mask flag register 0H MK0H R/W √ √ FFH

FFE6H Interrupt mask flag register 1L MK1L R/W √ √ − FFH

FFE8H Priority specification flag register 0L PR0 PR0L R/W √ √ √ FFH

FFE9H Priority specification flag register 0H PR0H R/W √ √ FFH

FFEAH Priority specification flag register 1L PR1L R/W √ √ − FFH

FFF0H Internal memory size switching registerNote 2 IMS R/W − √ − CFH

FFFBH Processor clock control register PCC R/W √ √ − 00H

Notes 1. This value varies depending on the reset source.

2. The default value of IMS is fixed (IMS = CFH) in all 78K0/KC1 products regardless of the internal memory

capacity. Therefore, set the following value to each product.

Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS)

µ

PD780111 42H

µ

PD780112 44H

µ

PD780113 C6H

µ

PD780114 C8H

µ

PD78F0114 Value corresponding to mask ROM version

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

66

3.3 Instruction Address Addressing

An instruction address is determined by program counter (PC) contents and is normally incremented (+1 for each

byte) automatically according to the number of bytes of an instruction to be fetched each time another instruction is

executed. When a branch instruction is executed, the branch destination information is set to the PC and branched by

the following addressing (for details of instructions, refer to 78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual (U12326E)).

3.3.1 Relative addressing

[Function]

The value obtained by adding 8-bit immediate data (displacement value: jdisp8) of an instruction code to the

start address of the following instruction is transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched. The

displacement value is treated as signed two’s complement data (−128 to +127) and bit 7 becomes a sign bit.

In other words, relative addressing consists of relative branching from the start address of the following

instruction to the −128 to +127 range.

This function is carried out when the BR $addr16 instruction or a conditional branch instruction is executed.

[Illustration]

15 0

PC

+

15 0

876

S

15 0

PC

α

jdisp8

When S = 0, all bits of are 0.

When S = 1, all bits of are 1.

PC indicates the start address

of the instruction after the BR instruction.

...

α

α

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 67

3.3.2 Immediate addressing

[Function]

Immediate data in the instruction word is transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched.

This function is carried out when the CALL !addr16 or BR !addr16 or CALLF !addr11 instruction is executed.

CALL !addr16 and BR !addr16 instructions can be branched to the entire memory space. The CALLF !addr11

instruction is branched to the 0800H to 0FFFH area.

[Illustration]

In the case of CALL !addr16 and BR !addr16 instructions

15 0

PC

87

70

CALL or BR

Low Addr.

High Addr.

In the case of CALLF !addr11 instruction

15 0

PC

87

70

fa

10–8

11 10

00001

643

CALLF

fa7–0

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

68

3.3.3 Table indirect addressing

[Function]

Table contents (branch destination address) of the particular location to be addressed by bits 1 to 5 of the

immediate data of an operation code are transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched.

This function is carried out when the CALLT [addr5] instruction is executed.

This instruction references the address stored in the memory table from 40H to 7FH, and allows branching to

the entire memory space.

[Illustration]

15 1

15 0

PC

70

Low Addr.

High Addr.

Memory (Table)

Effective address+1

Effective address 01

00000000

87

87

65 0

0

111

765 10

ta4–0

Operation code

3.3.4 Register addressing

[Function]

Register pair (AX) contents to be specified with an instruction word are transferred to the program counter (PC)

and branched.

This function is carried out when the BR AX instruction is executed.

[Illustration]

70

rp

07

AX

15 0

PC

87

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 69

3.4 Operand Address Addressing

The following methods are available to specify the register and memory (addressing) to undergo manipulation

during instruction execution.

3.4.1 Implied addressing

[Function]

The register that functions as an accumulator (A and AX) among the general-purpose registers is automatically

(implicitly) addressed.

Of the 78K0/KC1 instruction words, the following instructions employ implied addressing.

Instruction Register to Be Specified by Implied Addressing

MULU A register for multiplicand and AX register for product storage

DIVUW AX register for dividend and quotient storage

ADJBA/ADJBS A register for storage of numeric values that become decimal correction targets

ROR4/ROL4 A register for storage of digit data that undergoes digit rotation

[Operand format]

Because implied addressing can be automatically employed with an instruction, no particular operand format is

necessary.

[Description example]

In the case of MULU X

With an 8-bit × 8-bit multiply instruction, the product of A register and X register is stored in AX. In this example,

the A and AX registers are specified by implied addressing.

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

70

3.4.2 Register addressing

[Function]

The general-purpose register to be specified is accessed as an operand with the register bank select flags

(RBS0 and RBS1) and the register specify codes (Rn and RPn) of an operation code.

Register addressing is carried out when an instruction with the following operand format is executed. When an

8-bit register is specified, one of the eight registers is specified with 3 bits in the operation code.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

r X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H

rp AX, BC, DE, HL

‘r’ and ‘rp’ can be described by absolute names (R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3) as well as function names (X, A, C,

B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL).

[Description example]

MOV A, C; when selecting C register as r

Operation code 0 1100010

Register specify code

INCW DE; when selecting DE register pair as rp

Operation code 1 0000100

Register specify code

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 71

3.4.3 Direct addressing

[Function]

The memory to be manipulated is directly addressed with immediate data in an instruction word becoming an

operand address.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

addr16 Label or 16-bit immediate data

[Description example]

MOV A, !0FE00H; when setting !addr16 to FE00H

Operation code 10001110 OP code

00000000 00H

11111110 FEH

[Illustration]

Memory

07

addr16 (lower)

addr16 (upper)

OP code

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

72

3.4.4 Short direct addressing

[Function]

The memory to be manipulated in the fixed space is directly addressed with 8-bit data in an instruction word.

This addressing is applied to the 256-byte space FE20H to FF1FH. Internal RAM and special function registers

(SFRs) are mapped at FE20H to FEFFH and FF00H to FF1FH, respectively.

The SFR area (FF00H to FF1FH) where short direct addressing is applied is a part of the overall SFR area.

Ports that are frequently accessed in a program and compare and capture registers of the timer/event counter

are mapped in this area, allowing SFRs to be manipulated with a small number of bytes and clocks.

When 8-bit immediate data is at 20H to FFH, bit 8 of an effective address is cleared to 0. When it is at 00H to

1FH, bit 8 is set to 1. Refer to [Illustration].

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

saddr Immediate data that indicates label or FE20H to FF1FH

saddrp Immediate data that indicates label or FE20H to FF1FH (even address only)

[Description example]

MOV 0FE30H, A; when transferring value of A register to saddr (FE30H)

Operation code 1 1110010 OP code

0 0110000 30H (saddr-offset)

[Illustration]

15 0

Short direct memory

Effective address 1111111

87

07

OP code

saddr-offset

α

When 8-bit immediate data is 20H to FFH,

α

= 0

When 8-bit immediate data is 00H to 1FH,

α

= 1

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 73

3.4.5 Special function register (SFR) addressing

[Function]

A memory-mapped special function register (SFR) is addressed with 8-bit immediate data in an instruction word.

This addressing is applied to the 240-byte spaces FF00H to FFCFH and FFE0H to FFFFH. However, the SFRs

mapped at FF00H to FF1FH can be accessed with short direct addressing.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

sfr Special function register name

sfrp 16-bit manipulatable special function register name (even address

only)

[Description example]

MOV PM0, A; when selecting PM0 (FF20H) as sfr

Operation code 11110110 OP code

00100000 20H (sfr-offset)

[Illustration]

15 0

SFR

Effective address 1111111

87

07

OP code

sfr-offset

1

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

74

3.4.6 Register indirect addressing

[Function]

Register pair contents specified by a register pair specify code in an instruction word and by a register bank

select flag (RBS0 and RBS1) serve as an operand address for addressing the memory. This addressing can be

carried out for all the memory spaces.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

− [DE], [HL]

[Description example]

MOV A, [DE]; when selecting [DE] as register pair

Operation code 10000101

[Illustration]

16 0

8

D

7

E

07

7 0

A

DE

The contents of the memory

addressed are transferred.

Memory

The memory address

specified with the

register pair DE

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 75

3.4.7 Based addressing

[Function]

8-bit immediate data is added as offset data to the contents of the base register, that is, the HL register pair in

the register bank specified by the register bank select flag (RBS0 and RBS1), and the sum is used to address

the memory. Addition is performed by expanding the offset data as a positive number to 16 bits. A carry from

the 16th bit is ignored. This addressing can be carried out for all the memory spaces.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

− [HL + byte]

[Description example]

MOV A, [HL + 10H]; when setting byte to 10H

Operation code 10101110

00010000

[Illustration]

16 08

H

7

L

07

7 0

A

HL

The contents of the memory

addressed are transferred.

Memory +10

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

76

3.4.8 Based indexed addressing

[Function]

The B or C register contents specified in an instruction word are added to the contents of the base register, that

is, the HL register pair in the register bank specified by the register bank select flag (RBS0 and RBS1), and the

sum is used to address the memory. Addition is performed by expanding the B or C register contents as a

positive number to 16 bits. A carry from the 16th bit is ignored. This addressing can be carried out for all the

memory spaces.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

− [HL + B], [HL + C]

[Description example]

In the case of MOV A, [HL + B] (selecting B register)

Operation code 10101011

[Illustration]

16 0

H

78

L

07

B

+

07

7 0

A

HL

The contents of the memory

addressed are transferred.

Memory

CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 77

3.4.9 Stack addressing

[Function]

The stack area is indirectly addressed with the stack pointer (SP) contents.

This addressing method is automatically employed when the PUSH, POP, subroutine call, and return

instructions are executed or the register is saved/reset upon generation of an interrupt request.

With stack addressing, only the internal high-speed RAM area can be accessed.

[Description example]

In the case of PUSH DE (saving DE register)

Operation code 10110101

[Illustration]

E

FEE0H

SP

SP

FEE0H

FEDFH

FEDEH

D

Memory 07

FEDEH

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

78

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

4.1 Port Functions

There are two types of pin I/O buffer power supplies: AVREF and EVDD. The relationship between these power

supplies and the pins is shown below.

Table 4-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies

Power Supply Corresponding Pins

AVREF P20 to P27

EVDD Port pins other than P20 to P27

78K0/KC1 products are provided with the ports shown in Figure 4-1, which enable variety of control operations.

The functions of each port are shown in Table 4-2.

In addition to the function as digital I/O ports, these ports have several alternate functions. For details of the

alternate functions, refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS.

Figure 4-1. Port Types

Port 2

P20

P27

Port 3

P30

P33

Port 0

P00

P01

Port 1

P10

P17

Port 6

P60

P63

Port 7

P70

P73

P120

Port 12

P130

Port 13

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 79

Table 4-2. Port Functions

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function

P00 TI000

P01

I/O Port 0.

2-bit I/O port.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input

TI010/TO00

P10 SCK10/TxD0

P11 SI10/RxD0

P12 SO10

P13 TxD6

P14 RxD6

P15 TOH0

P16 TOH1/INTP5

P17

I/O Port 1.

8-bit I/O port.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input

TI50/TO50

P20 to P27 Input Port 2.

8-bit input-only port.

Input ANI0 to ANI7

P30 to P32 INTP1 to INTP3

P33

I/O Port 3.

4-bit I/O port.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input

INTP4/TI51/TO51

P60 to P63 I/O Port 6.

4-bit I/O port (N-ch open drain).

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a mask

option only for mask ROM versions.

Input −

P70 to P73 I/O Port 7.

4-bit I/O port.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input KR0 to KR3

P120 I/O

Port 12.

1-bit I/O port.

Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a

software setting.

Input INTP0

P130 Output

Port 13.

1-bit output-only port.

Output −

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

80

4.2 Port Configuration

Ports include the following hardware.

Table 4-3. Port Configuration

Item Configuration

Control registers Port mode register (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6, PM7, PM12)

Port register (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12, P13)

Pull-up resistor option register (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12)

Ports Total: 32 (CMOS I/O: 19, CMOS input: 8, CMOS output: 1, N-ch open drain I/O: 4)

Pull-up resistors • Mask ROM version

Total: 23 (software control: 19, mask option specification: 4)

• Flash memory version: Total: 19

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 81

4.2.1 Port 0

Port 0 is a 2-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 0 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 0 (PM0). When the P00 and P01 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up

resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0).

This port can also be used for timer I/O.

RESET input sets port 0 to input mode.

Figures 4-2 and 4-3 show block diagrams of port 0.

Figure 4-2. Block Diagram of P00

P00/TI000

WRPU

RD

WRPORT

WRPM

PU00

PU0

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P00)

PM00

PM0

EVDD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0

PM0: Port mode register 0

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

82

Figure 4-3. Block Diagram of P01

P01/TI010/TO00

WRPU

RD

WRPORT

WRPM

PU01

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P01)

PM01

PU0

PM0

Alternate

function

EVDD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0

PM0: Port mode register 0

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 83

4.2.2 Port 1

Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 1 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 1 (PM1). When the P10 to P17 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up

resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1).

This port can also be used for external interrupt request input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O.

RESET input sets port 1 to input mode.

Figures 4-4 to 4-8 show block diagrams of port 1.

Caution When P10/SCK10/TxD0, P11/SI10/RxD0, and P12/SO10 are used as general-purpose ports, do not

write to serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10).

Figure 4-4. Block Diagram of P10

P10/SCK10/TxD0

WRPU

RD

WRPORT

WRPM

PU10

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P10)

PM10

PU1

PM1

Alternate

function

EVDD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1

PM1: Port mode register 1

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

84

Figure 4-5. Block Diagram of P11 and P14

P11/SI10/RxD0,

P14/RxD6

WR

PU

RD

WR

PORT

WR

PM

PU11, PU14

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P11, P14)

PM11, PM14

PU1

PM1

EV

DD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1

PM1: Port mode register 1

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 85

Figure 4-6. Block Diagram of P12 and P15

P12/SO10,

P15/TOH0

WR

PU

RD

WR

PORT

WR

PM

PU12, PU15

Output latch

(P12, P15)

PM12, PM15

PU1

PM1

Alternate

function

EV

DD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1

PM1: Port mode register 1

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

86

Figure 4-7. Block Diagram of P13

P13/TxD6

WRPU

RD

WRPORT

WRPM

PU13

Output latch

(P13)

PM13

PU1

PM1

Alternate

function

EVDD

P-ch

Internal bus

Selector

PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1

PM1: Port mode register 1

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 87

Figure 4-8. Block Diagram of P16 and P17

P16/TOH1/INTP5,

P17/TI50/TO50

WRPU

RD

WRPORT

WRPM

PU16, PU17

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P16, P17)

PM16, PM17

PU1

PM1

Alternate

function

EVDD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1

PM1: Port mode register 1

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

88

4.2.3 Port 2

Port 2 is an 8-bit input-only port.

This port can also be used for A/D converter analog input.

Figure 4-9 shows a block diagram of port 2.

Figure 4-9. Block Diagram of P20 to P27

RD

A/D converter P20/ANI0 to P27/ANI7

Internal bus

RD: Read signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 89

4.2.4 Port 3

Port 3 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 3 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 3 (PM3). When used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by

pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3).

This port can also be used for timer I/O and external interrupt request input.

RESET input sets port 3 to input mode.

Figures 4-10 and 4-11 show block diagrams of port 3.

Figure 4-10. Block Diagram of P30 to P32

P30/INTP1 to

P32/INTP3

WRPU

RD

WRPORT

WRPM

PU30 to PU32

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P30 to P32)

PM30 to PM32

PU3

PM3

EVDD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3

PM3: Port mode register 3

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

90

Figure 4-11. Block Diagram of P33

P33/INTP4/TI51/TO51

WRPU

RD

WRPORT

WRPM

PU33

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P33)

PM33

PU3

PM3

Alternate

function

EVDD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3

PM3: Port mode register 3

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 91

4.2.5 Port 6

Port 6 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 6 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 6 (PM6).

This port has the following functions for pull-up resistors. These functions differ depending on whether the product

is a mask ROM version or a flash memory version.

Table 4-4. Pull-up Resistor of Port 6

Pins P60 to P63

Mask ROM version An on-chip pull-up resistor can be

specified in 1-bit units by mask option

Flash memory version On-chip pull-up resistors are not provided

The P60 to P63 pins are N-ch open-drain pins.

RESET input sets port 6 to input mode.

Figure 4-12 shows a block diagram of port 6.

Figure 4-12. Block Diagram of P60 to P63

RD

P60 to P63

WR

PORT

WR

PM

Output latch

(P60 to P63)

PM60 to PM63

PM6

Selector

EV

DD

Mask option resistor





















Internal bus

Mask ROM versions only

No pull-up resistor for

flash memory versions

PM6: Port mode register 6

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

92

4.2.6 Port 7

Port 7 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 7 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 7 (PM7). When the P70 to P73 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up

resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7).

This port can also be used for key return input.

RESET input sets port 7 to input mode.

Figure 4-13 shows a block diagram of port 7.

Figure 4-13. Block Diagram of P70 to P73

P70/KR0 to

P73/KR3

WR

PU

RD

WR

PORT

WR

PM

PU70 to PU73

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P70 to P73)

PM70 to PM73

PU7

PM7

EV

DD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7

PM7: Port mode register 7

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 93

4.2.7 Port 12

Port 12 is a 1-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 12 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 12 (PM12). When used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified

by pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12).

This port can also be used for external interrupt request input.

RESET input sets port 12 to input mode.

Figure 4-14 shows a block diagram of port 12.

Figure 4-14. Block Diagram of P120

P120/INTP0

WR

PU

RD

WR

PORT

WR

PM

PU120

Alternate

function

Output latch

(P120)

PM120

PU12

PM12

EV

DD

P-ch

Selector

Internal bus

PU12: Pull-up resistor option register 12

PM12: Port mode register 12

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

94

4.2.8 Port 13

Port 13 is a 1-bit output-only port.

Figure 4-15 shows a block diagram of port 13.

Figure 4-15. Block Diagram of P130

RD

Output latch

(P130)

WR

PORT

P130

Internal bus

RD: Read signal

WR××: Write signal

Remark When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level before reset, the

output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the reset signal to the CPU.

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 95

4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function

Port functions are controlled by the following three types of registers.

• Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6, PM7, PM12)

• Port registers (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12, P13)

• Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12)

(1) Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6, PM7, and PM12)

These registers specify input or output mode for the port in 1-bit units.

These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets these registers to FFH.

When port pins are used as alternate-function pins, set the port mode register and output latch as shown in Table

4-5.

Figure 4-16. Format of Port Mode Register

7

1

Symbol

PM0

6

1

5

1

4

1

3

1

2

1

1

PM01

0

PM00

Address

FF20H

After reset

FFH

R/W

R/W

7

PM17

PM1

6

PM16

5

PM15

4

PM14

3

PM13

2

PM12

1

PM11

0

PM10 FF21H FFH R/W

7

1

PM3

6

1

5

1

4

1

3

PM33

2

PM32

1

PM31

0

PM30 FF23H FFH R/W

7

1

PM6

6

1

5

1

4

1

3

PM63

2

PM62

1

PM61

0

PM60 FF26H FFH R/W

7

1

PM7

6

1

5

1

4

1

3

PM73

2

PM72

1

PM71

0

PM70 FF27H FFH R/W

7

1

PM12

6

1

5

1

4

1

3

1

2

1

1

1

0

PM120 FF2CH FFH R/W

PMmn Pmn pin I/O mode selection

(m = 0, 1, 3, 6, 7, 12; n = 0 to 7)

0 Output mode (output buffer on)

1 Input mode (output buffer off)

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

96

Table 4-5. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function

Alternate Function Pin Name

Function Name I/O

PM×× P××

P00 TI000 Input 1 ×

TI010 Input 1

×

P01

TO00 Output 0 0

Input 1 ×

SCK10

Output 0 1

P10

TxD0 Output 0 1

SI10 Input 1

×

P11

RxD0 Input 1

×

P12 SO10 Output 0 0

P13 TxD6 Output 0 1

P14 RxD6 Input 1 ×

P15 TOH0 Output 0 0

TOH1 Output 0 0 P16

INTP5 Input 1

×

TI50 Input 1

×

P17

TO50 Output 0 0

P30 to P32 INTP1 to INTP3 Input 1 ×

INTP4 Input 1

×

TI51 Input 1

×

P33

TO51 Output 0 0

P70 to P73 KR0 to KR3 Input 1 ×

P120 INTP0 Input 1 ×

Remark ×: Don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 97

(2) Port registers (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12, and P13)

These registers write the data that is output from the chip when data is output from a port.

If the data is read in the input mode, the pin level is read. If it is read in the output mode, the value of the output

latch is read.

These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears these registers to 00H (but P2 is undefined).

Figure 4-17. Format of Port Register

7

0

Symbol

P0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

0

1

P01

0

P00

Address

FF00H

After reset

00H (output latch)

R/W

R/W

7

P17

P1

6

P16

5

P15

4

P14

3

P13

2

P12

1

P11

0

P10 FF01H 00H (output latch) R/W

R

7

P27

P2

6

P26

5

P25

4

P24

3

P23

2

P22

1

P21

0

P20 FF02H Undefined

7

0

P3

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

P33

2

P32

1

P31

0

P30 FF03H 00H (output latch) R/W

7

0

P6

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

P63

2

P62

1

P61

0

P60 FF06H 00H (output latch) R/W

7

0

P7

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

P73

2

P72

1

P71

0

P70 FF07H 00H (output latch) R/W

7

0

P12

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

0

1

0

0

P120 FF0CH 00H (output latch) R/W

7

0

P13

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

0

1

0

0

P130 FF0DH 00H (output latch) R/W

m = 0 to 3, 6, 7, 12, 13; n = 0 to 7

Pmn

Output data control (in output mode) Input data read (in input mode)

0 Output 0 Input low level

1 Output 1 Input high level

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

98

(3) Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, and PU12)

These registers specify whether the on-chip pull-up resistors of P00, P01, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P70 to P73, or

P120 are to be used or not. On-chip pull-up resistors can be used in 1-bit units only for the bits set to input mode

of the pins to which the use of an on-chip pull-up resistor has been specified in PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, and PU12.

On-chip pull-up resistors cannot be connected for bits set to output mode and bits used as alternate-function

output pins, regardless of the settings of PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, and PU12.

These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears these registers to 00H.

Caution Use of a pull-up resistor can be specified for P60 to P63 pins by a mask option only in the mask

ROM versions.

Figure 4-18. Format of Pull-up Resistor Option Register

7

0

Symbol

PU0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

0

1

PU01

0

PU00

Address

FF30H

After reset

00H

R/W

R/W

7

PU17

PU1

6

PU16

5

PU15

4

PU14

3

PU13

2

PU12

1

PU11

0

PU10 FF31H 00H R/W

7

0

PU3

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

PU33

2

PU32

1

PU31

0

PU30 FF33H 00H R/W

7

0

PU7

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

PU73

2

PU72

1

PU71

0

PU70 FF37H 00H R/W

7

0

PU12

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

0

1

0

0

PU120 FF3CH 00H R/W

PUmn Pmn pin on-chip pull-up resistor selection

(m = 0, 1, 3, 7, 12; n = 0 to 7)

0 On-chip pull-up resistor not connected

1 On-chip pull-up resistor connected

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 99

4.4 Port Function Operations

Port operations differ depending on whether the input or output mode is set, as shown below.

Caution In the case of a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction, although a single bit is manipulated, the

port is accessed as an 8-bit unit. Therefore, on a port with a mixture of input and output pins,

the output latch contents for pins specified as input are undefined, even for bits other than the

manipulated bit.

4.4.1 Writing to I/O port

(1) Output mode

A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, and the output latch contents are output from the

pin.

Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.

The data of the output latch is cleared by reset.

(2) Input mode

A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does

not change.

Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.

4.4.2 Reading from I/O port

(1) Output mode

The output latch contents are read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change.

(2) Input mode

The pin status is read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change.

4.4.3 Operations on I/O port

(1) Output mode

An operation is performed on the output latch contents, and the result is written to the output latch. The output

latch contents are output from the pins.

Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.

The data of the output latch is cleared by reset.

(2) Input mode

The pin level is read and an operation is performed on its contents. The result of the operation is written to the

output latch, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does not change.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

100

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

5.1 Functions of Clock Generator

The clock generator generates the clock to be supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware.

The following three system clock oscillators are available.

• X1 oscillator

The X1 oscillator oscillates a clock of fXP = 2.0 to 12.0 MHzNote. Oscillation can be stopped by executing the

STOP instruction or setting the main OSC control register (MOC) and processor clock control register (PCC).

• Ring-OSC oscillator

The Ring-OSC oscillator oscillates a clock of fR = 240 kHz (TYP.). Oscillation can be stopped by setting the

Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) when “Can be stopped by software” is set by a mask option and the X1 input

clock is used as the CPU clock.

• Subsystem clock oscillator

The subsystem clock oscillator oscillates a clock of fXT = 32.768 kHz. Oscillation cannot be stopped. When

subsystem clock oscillator is not used, setting not to use the on-chip feedback resistor is possible using the

processor clock control register (PCC), and the operating current can be reduced in the STOP mode.

Note Expanded-specification products of standard products and (A) grade products: fXP = 2.0 to 12.0 MHz

Conventional products of standard products, (A) grade products, and (A1) grade products: fXP = 2.0 to

10.0 MHz

(A2) grade products: fXP = 2.0 to 8.38 MHz

Remarks 1. f

XP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

2. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

3. f

XT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

5.2 Configuration of Clock Generator

The clock generator includes the following hardware.

Table 5-1. Configuration of Clock Generator

Item Configuration

Control registers Processor clock control register (PCC)

Ring-OSC mode register (RCM)

Main clock mode register (MCM)

Main OSC control register (MOC)

Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)

Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)

Oscillators X1 oscillator

Ring-OSC oscillator

Subsystem clock oscillator

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 101

Figure 5-1. Block Diagram of Clock Generator

X1

X2 f

XP

f

XT

FRC

XT1

XT2

f

X

2

2

STOP

MSTOP

f

X

2

3

f

X

2

4

f

X

2

4

RSTOP

CSS PCC2CLS

MCM0

MCSCLSMCC

OSTS1 OSTS0OSTS2

1/2

3

MOST

16

MOST

15

MOST

14

MOST

13

MOST

11

C

P

U

f

R

f

X

PCC1 PCC0

X1 oscillator

Internal bus

Ring-OSC mode

register (RCM)

Main OSC

control

register

(MOC)

Internal bus

Ring-OSC

oscillator

Mask option

1: Cannot be stopped

0: Can be stopped

CPU clock

(f

CPU

)

Controller

Processor clock

control register

(PCC)

Main clock

mode register

(MCM)

X1 oscillation

stabilization time counter

Oscillation

stabilization time

select register

(OSTS)

Oscillation

stabilization

time counter

status

register

(OSTC)

Clock to peripheral

hardware

Prescaler

Operation

clock switch

8-bit timer H1,

watchdog timer

Prescaler

Prescaler

Selector

Subsystem

clock oscillator

Watch clock

f

CPU

Control signal

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

102

5.3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator

The following six registers are used to control the clock generator.

• Processor clock control register (PCC)

• Ring-OSC mode register (RCM)

• Main clock mode register (MCM)

• Main OSC control register (MOC)

• Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)

• Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)

(1) Processor clock control register (PCC)

The PCC register is used to select the CPU clock, the division ratio, main system clock oscillator operation/stop

and whether to use the on-chip feedback resistorNote of the subsystem clock oscillator.

PCC can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears PCC to 00H.

Note The feedback resistor is required to control the bias point of the oscillation waveform so that the bias point

is in the middle of the power supply voltage (see Figure 5-11 Subsystem Clock Feedback Resistor).

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 103

Figure 5-2. Format of Processor Clock Control Register (PCC)

Address: FFFBH After reset: 00H R/WNote 1

Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 2 1 0

PCC MCC FRC CLS CSS 0 PCC2 PCC1 PCC0

MCC Control of X1 oscillator operationNote 2

0 Oscillation possible

1 Oscillation stopped

FRC Subsystem clock feedback resi sto r selection

0 On-chip feedback resistor used

1 On-chip feedback resistor not usedNo te 3

CLS CPU clock status

0 X1 input clock o r Ring-OSC clo ck

1 Subsystem clock

CPU clock (fCPU) selection

CSSNote 4 PCC2 PCC1 PCC0

MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1

0 0 0 fX fR fXP

0 0 1 fX/2 fR/2Note 5 fXP/2

0 1 0 fX/22 Setting prohibited fXP/22

0 1 1 fX/23 Setting prohibited fXP/23

0

1 0 0 fX/24 Setting prohibited fXP/24

0 0 0

0 0 1

0 1 0

0 1 1

1

1 0 0

fXT/2

Other than above Setting prohibited

Notes 1. Bit 5 is read-only.

2. When the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock, MCC should be used to stop the X1 oscillator

operation. When the CPU is operating on the Ring-OSC clock, use bit 7 (MSTOP) of the main OSC

control register (MOC) to stop the X1 oscillator operation (this cannot be set by MCC). A STOP

instruction should not be used.

3. Clear this bit to 0 when the subsystem clock is used and set to 1 when the subsystem clock is not

used.

4. Be sure to switch CSS from 1 to 0 when bits 1 (MCS) and 0 (MCM0) of the main clock mode register

(MCM) are 1.

5. Setting is prohibited for the (A1) and (A2) grade products.

Caution Be sure to clear bit 3 to 0.

Remarks 1. MCM0: Bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency (X1 input clock oscillation frequency or Ring-OSC

clock oscillation frequency)

3. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

4. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

5. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

104

The fastest instruction can be executed in 2 clocks of the CPU clock in the 78K0/KC1. Theref ore, the relations hip

between the CPU clock (fCPU) and minimum instruction execution time is as shown in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2. Relationship Between CPU Clock and Minimum Instruction Execution Time

Minimum Instruction Execution Time: 2/fCPU

X1 Input ClockNote 1

CPU Clock (fCPU)

at 10 MHz Operation

at 12 MHz OperationNo te 2

Ring-OSC ClockNote 1

(at 240 kHz (TYP.) Operation) Subsystem Clock

(at 32.768 kHz Operation)

fX 0.2

µ

s 0.166

µ

s 8.3

µ

s (TYP.) −

fX/2 0.4

µ

s 0.333

µ

s 16.6

µ

s (TYP.)Note 3 −

fX/22 0.8

µ

s 0.666

µ

s Setting prohibited −

fX/23 1.6

µ

s 1.333

µ

s Setting prohibited −

fX/24 3.2

µ

s 2.666

µ

s Setting prohibited −

fXT/2 − − 122.1

µ

s

Notes 1. The main clock mode register (MCM) is used to set the CPU clock (X1 input clock/Ring-OSC clock)

(see Figure 5-4).

2. Expanded-specification produ c ts of standard products and (A) grade products only

3. Setting is prohibited for the (A1) and (A2) grade products.

(2) Ring-OSC mode register (RCM)

This register sets the operation mode of Ring-OSC.

This register is valid when “Can be stopped by softwar e” is set for Ring-O SC by a mask option, and th e X1 input

clock or subsystem clock is selected as the CPU clock. If “Cannot be stopped” is selected for Ring-OSC by a

mask option, settings for this register are invalid.

RCM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 5-3. Format of Ring-OSC Mode Register (RCM)

Address: FFA0H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0>

RCM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RSTOP

RSTOP Ring-OSC oscillating/stopped

0 Ring-OSC oscillating

1 Ring-OSC stopped

Caution Make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 1 before setting

RSTOP.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 105

(3) Main clock mode register (MCM)

This register sets the CPU clock (X1 input clock/Ring-OSC clock).

MCM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 5-4. Format of Main Clock Mode Register (MCM)

Address: FFA1H After reset: 00H R/WNote

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0>

MCM 0 0 0 0 0 0 MCS MCM0

MCS CPU clock status

0 Operates with Ring-OSC clock

1 Operates with X1 input clock

MCM0 Selection of clock supplied to CPU

0 Ring-OSC clock

1 X1 input clock

Note Bit 1 is read-only.

Cautions 1. When Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

divided clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator output (fX) is supplied to the peripheral

hardware (fX = 240 kHz (TYP.)).

Operation of the peripheral hardware with Ring-OSC clock cannot be

guaranteed. Therefore, when Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied

to the CPU, do not use peripheral hardware. In addition, stop the peripheral

hardware before switching the clock supplied to the CPU from the X1 input clock

to the Ring-OSC clock. Note, however, that the following peripheral hardware

can be used when the CPU operates on the Ring-OSC clock.

• Watchdog timer

• Clock monitor

• 8-bit timer H1 when fR/27 is selected as count clock

• Peripheral hardware selecting external clock as the clock source

(Except when external count clock of TM00 is selected (TI000 valid edge))

2. Set MCS = 1 and MCM0 = 1 before switching subsystem clock operation to X1

input clock operation (bit 4 (CSS) of the processor clock control register (PCC)

is changed from 1 to 0).

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

106

(4) Main OSC control register (MOC)

This register selects the operation mode of the X1 input clock.

This register is used to stop the X1 oscillator operation when the CPU is operating with the Ring-OSC clock.

Therefore, this register is valid only when the CPU is operating with the Ring-OSC clock.

MOC can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 5-5. Format of Main OSC Control Register (MOC)

Address: FFA2H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MOC MSTOP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MSTOP Control of X1 oscillator operation

0 X1 oscillator operating

1 X1 oscillator stopped

Cautions 1. Make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 0 before

setting MSTOP.

2. To stop X1 oscillation when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock, set bit

7 (MCC) of the processor clock control register (PCC) to 1 (setting by MSTOP is

not possible).

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 107

(5) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)

This is the status register of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time counter. If the Ring-OSC clock is used

as the CPU clock, the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time can be checked.

OSTC can be read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

When reset is released (reset by RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT), the STOP instruction,

MSTOP = 1, and MCC = 1 clear OSTC to 00H.

Figure 5-6. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC)

Address: FFA3H After reset: 00H R

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

OSTC 0 0 0 MOST11 MOST13 MOST14 MOST15 MOST16

Oscillation stabilization time status

MOST11 MOST13 MOST14 MOST15 MOST16

When fXP =

10 MHz

When fXP =

12 MHzNote

1 0 0 0 0 211/fXP min. 204.8

µ

s min. 170.7

µ

s min.

1 1 0 0 0 213/fXP min. 819.2

µ

s min. 682.7

µ

s min.

1 1 1 0 0 214/fXP min. 1.64 ms min. 1.37 ms min.

1 1 1 1 0 215/fXP min. 3.27 ms min. 2.73 ms min.

1 1 1 1 1 216/fXP min. 6.55 ms min. 5.46 ms min.

Note Expanded-specification products of standard products and (A) grade products only

Cautions 1. After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from MOST11 and

remain 1.

2. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being

used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows.

• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time

set by OSTS

The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation

stabilization time set by OSTS. Note, therefore, that only the status up to the

oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS is set to OSTC after STOP mode is

released.

3. The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP

mode release until clock oscillation starts (“a” below) regardless of whether

STOP mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation.

STOP mode release

X1 pin voltage

waveform

a

Remark fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

108

(6) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)

This register is used to select the X1 oscillation stabilization wait time when STOP mode is released.

The wait time set by OSTS is valid only after STOP mode is released with the X1 input clock selected as CPU

clock. After STOP mode is released with Ring-OSC selected as CPU clock, the oscillation stabilization time must

be confirmed by OSTC.

OSTS can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets OSTS to 05H.

Figure 5-7. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS)

Address: FFA4H After reset: 05H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

OSTS 0 0 0 0 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0

OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 Oscillation stabilization time selection

When fXP = 10 MHz When fXP = 12 MHzNote

0 0 1 211/fXP 204.8

µ

s 170.7

µ

s

0 1 0 213/fXP 819.2

µ

s 682.7

µ

s

0 1 1 214/fXP 1.64 ms 1.37 ms

1 0 0 215/fXP 3.27 ms 2.73 ms

1 0 1 216/fXP 6.55 ms 5.46 ms

Other than above Setting prohibited

Note Expanded-specification products of standard products and (A) grade products only

Cautions 1. To set the STOP mode while the X1 input clock is used as the CPU clock, set

OSTS before executing the STOP instruction.

2. Before setting OSTS, confirm that the oscillation stabilization time expected by

OSTS has elapsed.

3. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is

being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows.

• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time

set by OSTS

The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation

stabilization time set by OSTS. Note, therefore, that only the status up to the

oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS is set to OSTC after STOP mode is

released.

4. The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP

mode release until clock oscillation starts (“a” below) regardless of whether

STOP mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation.

STOP mode release

X1 pin voltage

waveform

a

Remark fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 109

5.4 System Clock Oscillator

5.4.1 X1 oscillator

The X1 oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator or ceramic resonator connected to the X1 and X2 pins.

External clocks can be input to the X1 oscillator. In this case, input the clock signal to the X1 pin and input the

inverse signal to the X2 pin.

Figure 5-8 shows examples of the external circuit of the X1 oscillator.

Figure 5-8. Examples of External Circuit of X1 Oscillator

(a) Crystal, ceramic oscillation (b) External clock

V

SS

X1

X2

Crystal resonator or

ceramic resonator

External

clock X1

X2

5.4.2 Subsystem clock oscillator

The subsystem clock oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator (Standard: 32.768 kHz) connected to the XT1

and XT2 pins.

External clocks can be input to the subsystem clock oscillator. In this case, input the clock signal to the XT1 pin

and the inverse signal to the XT2 pin.

Figure 5-9 shows examples of the external circuit of the subsystem clock oscillator.

Figure 5-9. Examples of External Circuit of Subsystem Clock Oscillator

(a) Crystal oscillation (b) External clock

XT1

XT2

External

clock

XT2

V

SS

XT1

32.768

kHz

A caution is provided on the next page.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

110

Caution When using the X1 oscillator and subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area

enclosed by the broken lines in Figures 5-8 and 5-9 to avoid an adverse effect from wiring

capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do

not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

Note that the subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing

power consumption.

Figure 5-10 shows examples of incorrect resonator connection.

Figure 5-10. Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection (1/2)

(a) Too long wiring (b) Crossed signal line

X2V

SS

X1 X1V

SS

X2

PORT

Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert

resistors in series on the XT2 side.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 111

Figure 5-10. Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection (2/2)

(c) Wiring near high alternating current (d) Current flowing through ground line of oscillator

(potential at points A, B, and C fluctuates)

V

SS

X1 X2

V

SS

X1 X2

AB C

Pmn

V

DD

High current

High current

(e) Signals are fetched

VSS X1 X2

Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert

resistors in series on the XT2 side.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

112

5.4.3 When subsystem clock is not used

If it is not necessary to use the subsystem clock for low power consumption operations and watch operations,

connect the XT1 and XT2 pins as follows.

XT1: Connect directly to EVSS or VSSNote

XT2: Leave open

Note Connection of products with a rank other than K and I. For the connection of the products with rank K and I,

refer to Note 1 of Table 2-2 Pin I/O Circuit Types.

When the subsystem clock is not used, set so that the use of the on-chip feedback resistor is disabled (setting bit 6

(FRC) of the processor clock control register (PCC) to 1) after a reset is released.

Figure 5-11. Subsystem Clock Feedback Resistor

FRC

P-ch

Feedback resistor

XT1 XT2

Remark The feedback resistor is required to control the bias point of the oscillation waveform so that the bias

point is in the middle of the power supply voltage.

5.4.4 Ring-OSC oscillator

Ring-OSC oscillator is incorporated in the 78K0/KC1.

“Can be stopped by software” or “Cannot be stopped” can be selected by a mask option. The Ring-OSC clock

always oscillates after RESET release (240 kHz (TYP.)).

5.4.5 Prescaler

The prescaler generates various clocks by dividing the X1 oscillator output when the X1 input clock is selected as

the clock to be supplied to the CPU.

Caution When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied to the CPU, the prescaler generates

various clocks by dividing the Ring-OSC oscillator output (fX = 240 kHz (TYP.)).

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 113

5.5 Clock Generator Operation

The clock generator generates the following clocks and controls the operation modes of the CPU, such as standby

mode.

• X1 input clock fXP

• Ring-OSC clock fR

• Subsystem clock fXT

• CPU clock fCPU

• Clock to peripheral hardware

The CPU starts operation when the on-chip Ring-OSC oscillator starts outputting after reset release in the

78K0/KC1, thus enabling the following.

(1) Enhancement of security function

When the X1 input clock is set as the CPU clock by the default setting, the device cannot operate if the X1 input

clock is damaged or badly connected and therefore does not operate after reset is released. However, the start

clock of the CPU is the on-chip Ring-OSC clock, so the device can be started by the Ring-OSC clock after reset

release by the clock monitor (detection of X1 input clock stop). Consequently, the system can be safely shut

down by performing a minimum operation, such as acknowledging a reset source by software or performing

safety processing when there is a malfunction.

(2) Improvement of performance

Because the CPU can be started without waiting for the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time, the total

performance can be improved.

A timing diagram of the CPU default start using Ring-OSC is shown in Figure 5-12.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

114

Figure 5-12. Timing Diagram of CPU Default Start Using Ring-OSC

Ring-OSC clock

(fR)

CPU clock

X1 input clock

(fXP)

Operation

stopped: 17/fR

X1 oscillation stabilization time: 211/fXP to 216/fXPNote

RESET

Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock

Switched by software

Subsystem clock

(fXT)

Note Check using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC).

(a) When the RESET signal is generated, bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM) is cleared to 0 and the

Ring-OSC clock is set as the CPU clock. However, a clock is supplied to the CPU after 17 clocks of the

Ring-OSC clock have elapsed after RESET release (or clock supply to the CPU stops for 17 clocks). During

the RESET period, oscillation of the X1 input clock and Ring-OSC clock is stopped.

(b) After RESET release, the CPU clock can be switched from the Ring-OSC clock to the X1 input clock using bit

0 (MCM0) of the main clock mode register (MCM) after the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time has

elapsed. At this time, check the oscillation stabilization time using the oscillation stabilization time counter

status register (OSTC) before switching the CPU clock. The CPU clock status can be checked using bit 1

(MCS) of MCM.

(c) Ring-OSC can be set to stopped/oscillating using the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) when “Can be stopped

by software” is selected for the Ring-OSC by a mask option, if the X1 input or subsystem clock is used as the

CPU clock. Make sure that MCS is 1 at this time.

(d) When Ring-OSC is used as the CPU clock, the X1 input clock can be set to stopped/oscillating using the

main OSC control register (MOC). Make sure that MCS is 0 at this time.

When the subsystem clock is used as the CPU clock, whether the X1 input clock stops or oscillates can be

set by the processor clock control register (PCC). In addition, HALT mode can be used during operation with

the subsystem clock, but STOP mode cannot be used (subsystem clock oscillation cannot be stopped by the

STOP instruction).

(e) Select the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time (211/fXP, 213/fXP, 214/fXP, 215/fXP, 216/fXP) using the oscillation

stabilization time select register (OSTS) when releasing STOP mode while X1 input clock is being used as

the CPU clock. In addition, when releasing STOP mode while RESET is released and Ring-OSC clock is

being used as the CPU clock, check the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time using the oscillation

stabilization time counter status register (OSTC).

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 115

A status transition diagram of this product is shown in Figure 5-13, and the relationship between the operation

clocks in each operation status and between the oscillation control flag and oscillation status of each clock are shown

in Tables 5-3 and 5-4, respectively.

Figure 5-13. Status Transition Diagram (1/4)

(1) When “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by mask option

(when subsystem clock is not used)

Status 4

CPU clock: fXP

fXP: Oscillating

f

R

: Oscillation stopped

Status 3

CPU clock: fXP

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

Status 1

CPU clock: fR

f

XP

: Oscillation stopped

fR: Oscillating

Status 2

CPU clock: fR

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

HALT

Note 4

Interrupt

Interrupt

Interrupt Interrupt

Interrupt Interrupt

Reset release

Interrupt

InterruptHALT

instruction

STOP

instruction

STOP

instruction

STOP

instruction

STOP

instruction

RSTOP = 0

RSTOP = 1

Note 1

MCM0 = 0

MCM0 = 1

Note 2

MSTOP = 1

Note 3

MSTOP = 0

HALT

instruction

HALT instruction

HALT

instruction

STOP

Note 4

Reset

Note 5

Notes 1. When shifting from status 3 to status 4, make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register

(MCM) is 1.

2. Before shifting from status 2 to status 3 after reset and STOP are released, check the X1 input clock

oscillation stabilization time status using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register

(OSTC).

3. When shifting from status 2 to status 1, make sure that MCS is 0.

4. When “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by a mask option, the watchdog timer

stops operating in the HALT and STOP modes, regardless of the source clock of the watchdog timer.

However, oscillation of Ring-OSC does not stop even in the HALT and STOP modes if RSTOP = 0.

5. All reset sources (RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT)

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

116

Figure 5-13. Status Transition Diagram (2/4)

(2) When “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by mask option

(when subsystem clock is used)

HALT

Note 4

Interrupt

Interrupt

Interrupt

Interrupt Interrupt

Interrupt

Interrupt

HALT

instruction

HALT

instruction

STOP

instruction

STOP

instruction

STOP

instruction

RSTOP = 0

RSTOP = 1

Note 1

MCC = 0

CSS = 0

Note 5

MCC = 1

CSS = 1

Note 5

MCM0 = 0

MCM0 = 1

Note 2

MSTOP = 1

Note 3

MSTOP = 0

HALT

instruction HALT

instruction

STOP

Note 4

Reset

Note 6

Status 4

CPU clock: fXP

fXP: Oscillating

f

R

: Oscillation

stopped

Status 3

CPU clock: fXP

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

Status 1

CPU clock: fR

f

XP

: Oscillation

stopped

fR: Oscillating

Status 2

CPU clock: fR

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

Reset release

Interrupt

HALT

instruction

Status 6

CPU clock: fXT

fXP: Oscillation

stopped

fR: Oscillating/

oscillation

stopped

Status 5

CPU clock: fXT

fXP: Oscillating

f

R

: Oscillating/

oscillation

stopped

Notes 1. When shifting from status 3 to status 4, make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register

(MCM) is 1.

2. Before shifting from status 2 to status 3 after reset and STOP are released, check the X1 input clock

oscillation stabilization time status using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register

(OSTC).

3. When shifting from status 2 to status 1, make sure that MCS is 0.

4. When “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by a mask option, the clock supply to the

watchdog timer is stopped after the HALT or STOP instruction has been executed, regardless of the

setting of bit 0 (RSTOP) of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) and bit 0 (MCM0) of the main clock

mode register (MCM).

5. The operation cannot be shifted between subsystem clock operation and Ring-OSC operation.

6. All reset sources (RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT)

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 117

Figure 5-13. Status Transition Diagram (3/4)

(3) When “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” is selected by mask option

(when subsystem clock is not used)

Status 3

CPU clock: fXP

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

HALT

Interrupt Interrupt

Interrupt

STOP

instruction

MCM0 = 0

MCM0 = 1Note 1

HALT

instruction

HALT

instruction

STOP

Note 3

Reset

Note 4

Status 2

CPU clock: fR

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

Status 1

CPU clock: fR

fXP: Oscillation stopped

fR: Oscillating

Interrupt

STOP

instruction

Interrupt

Interrupt

STOP

instruction

MSTOP = 1Note 2

MSTOP = 0

HALT instruction

Reset release

Notes 1. Before shifting from status 2 to status 3 after reset and STOP are released, check the X1 input clock

oscillation stabilization time status using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register

(OSTC).

2. When shifting from status 2 to status 1, make sure that MCS is 0.

3. The watchdog timer operates using Ring-OSC even in STOP mode if “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped”

is selected by a mask option. Ring-OSC division can be selected as the count source of 8-bit timer

H1 (TMH1), so clear the watchdog timer using the TMH1 interrupt request before watchdog timer

overflow. If this processing is not performed, an internal reset signal is generated at watchdog timer

overflow after STOP instruction execution.

4. All reset sources (RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT)

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

118

Figure 5-13. Status Transition Diagram (4/4)

(4) When “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” is selected by mask option

(when subsystem clock is used)

HALT

Interrupt Interrupt

Interrupt

STOP

instruction

MCM0 = 0

MCM0 = 1

Note 1

HALT

instruction

HALT

instruction

STOP

Note 3

Reset

Note 5

Interrupt

STOP

instruction

Interrupt

Interrupt

STOP

instruction

MSTOP = 1

Note 2

MSTOP = 0

HALT instruction

Reset release

MCC = 0

CSS = 0

Note 4

MCC = 1

CSS = 1

Note 4

Interrupt

Interrupt

HALT instruction

HALT instruction

Status 3

CPU clock: fXP

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

Status 2

CPU clock: fR

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

Status 1

CPU clock: fR

fXP: Oscillation stopped

fR: Oscillating

Status 5

CPU clock: fXT

fXP: Oscillation stopped

fR: Oscillating

Status 4

CPU clock: fXT

fXP: Oscillating

fR: Oscillating

Notes 1. Before shifting from status 2 to status 3 after reset and STOP are released, check the X1 input clock

oscillation stabilization time status using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register

(OSTC).

2. When shifting from status 2 to status 1, make sure that MCS is 0.

3. The watchdog timer operates using Ring-OSC even in STOP mode if “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped”

is selected by a mask option. Ring-OSC division can be selected as the count source of 8-bit timer

H1 (TMH1), so clear the watchdog timer using the TMH1 interrupt request before watchdog timer

overflow. If this processing is not performed, an internal reset signal is generated at watchdog timer

overflow after STOP instruction execution.

4. The operation cannot be shifted between subsystem clock operation and Ring-OSC operation.

5. All reset sources (RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT)

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 119

Table 5-3. Relationship Between Operation Clocks in Each Operation Status

X1 Oscillator Ring-OSC Oscillator

Note 2

Prescaler Clock

Supplied to Peripherals

Status

Operation

Mode

MSTOP = 0

MCC = 0

MSTOP = 1

MCC = 1

Note 1

RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 1

Subsystem

Clock

Oscillator

CPU Clock

After

Release MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1

Reset Stopped Ring-OSC Stopped

STOP

Stopped

Note 3 Stopped

HALT Oscillating Stopped

Oscillating Oscillating Stopped

Oscillating

Note 4 Ring-OSC X1

Notes 1. When “Cannot be stopped” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option.

2. When “Can be stopped by software” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option.

3. Operates using the CPU clock at STOP instruction execution.

4. Operates using the CPU clock at HALT instruction execution.

Caution The RSTOP setting is valid only when “Can be stopped by software” is set for Ring-OSC by a mask

option.

Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC)

MCC: Bit 7 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

RSTOP: Bit 0 of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM)

MCM0: Bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM)

Table 5-4. Oscillation Control Flags and Clock Oscillation Status

X1 Oscillator Ring-OSC Oscillator

RSTOP = 0 Stopped Oscillating MSTOP = 1Note

RSTOP = 1 Setting prohibited

RSTOP = 0 Oscillating MSTOP = 0Note

RSTOP = 1

Oscillating

Stopped

RSTOP = 0 Oscillating MCC = 1Note

RSTOP = 1

Stopped

Stopped

RSTOP = 0 Oscillating MCC = 0Note

RSTOP = 1

Oscillating

Stopped

Note Setting X1 oscillator oscillating/stopped differs depending on the CPU clock used.

• When the Ring-OSC clock is used as the CPU clock: Set using the MSTOP bit

• When the subsystem clock is used as the CPU clock: Set using the MCC bit

Caution The RSTOP setting is valid only when “Can be stopped by software” is set for Ring-OSC

by a mask option.

Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC)

MCC: Bit 7 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

RSTOP: Bit 0 of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM)

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

120

5.6 Time Required to Switch Between Ring-OSC Clock and X1 Input Clock

Bit 0 (MCM0) of the main cl ock mode register (MCM) is used to switch between the Ring -OSC clock and X1 input

clock.

In the actual switching operation, switching does not occur immediately after MCM0 rewrite; several instructions

are executed using the pre-sw itch clock after switching MCM0 (see Table 5-5).

Bit 1 (MCS) of MCM is used to judge that operation is performed using either the Ring-OSC clock or X1 input clock.

To stop the original clock after switching the clock, wait for the number of clocks shown in Table 5-5.

Table 5-5. Maximum Time Required to Switch Between Ring-OSC Clock and X1 Input Clock

PCC Maximum Time Required for Switching

PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 X1→Ring-OSC Ring-OSC→X1

0 0 0 fXP/fR + 1 clock 2 clocks

0 0 1 fXP/2fR + 1 clockNote 2 clocksNote

Note Setting is prohibited for the (A1) and (A2) grade products.

Caution To calculate the maximum time, set fR = 120 kHz.

Remarks 1. PCC: Processor clock control register

2. f

XP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

3. f

R: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

4. The maximum time is the number of clocks of the CPU clock before switching.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 121

5.7 Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover

The CPU clock can be switched using bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) and bit 4 (CSS) of the processor clock control

register (PCC).

The actual switchover operation is not performed immediately after rewriting to the PCC; operation continues on

the pre-switchover clock for several instructions (see Table 5-6).

Whether the system is operating on the X1 input clock (or Ring-OSC clock) or the subsystem clock can be

ascertained using bit 5 (CLS) of the PCC register.

Table 5-6. Maximum Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover

Set Value Before

Switchover

Set Value After Switchover

CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 × × ×

0 0 0 16 clocks 16 clocks 16 clocks 16 clocks fXP/fXT clocks

(367 clocks)

0 0 1 8 clocks 8 clocks 8 clocks 8 clocks fXP/2fXT clocks

(184 clocks)

0 1 0 4 clocks 4 clocks 4 clocks 4 clocks fXP/4fXT clocks

(92 clocks)

0 1 1 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks fXP/8fXT clocks

(46 clocks)

0

1 0 0 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock

fXP/16fXT clocks

(23 clocks)

1 × × × 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock

Cautions 1. Selection of the CPU clock cycle division factor (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from the X1

input clock to the subsystem clock (changing CSS from 0 to 1) should not be set

simultaneously.

Simultaneous setting is possible, however, for selection of the CPU clock cycle division

factor (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from the subsystem clock to the X1 input clock

(changing CSS from 1 to 0).

2. Setting the following values is prohibited when the CPU operates on the Ring-OSC clock.

• CSS, PCC2, PCC1, PCC0 = 0, 0, 0, 1 (settable only for standard products and (A) grade

products)

• CSS, PCC2, PCC1, PCC0 = 0, 0, 1, 0

• CSS, PCC2, PCC1, PCC0 = 0, 0, 1, 1

• CSS, PCC2, PCC1, PCC0 = 0, 1, 0, 0

Remarks 1. The maximum time is the number of clocks of the pre-switchover CPU clock.

2. Figures in parentheses apply to operation with fXP = 12 MHz and fXT = 32.768 kHz.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

122

5.8 Clock Switching Flowchart and Register Se tting

5.8.1 Switching from Ring-OSC clock to X1 input clock

Figure 5-14. Switching from Ring-OSC Clock to X1 Input Clock (Flowchart)

; fCPU = fR

; Ring-OSC oscillation

; Ring-OSC clock operation

; X1 oscillation

; Oscillation stabilization time counter status register

; Oscillation stabilization time fXP/216

MCM.1 (MCS) is changed from 0 to 1

; X1 oscillation stabilization time status check

X1 oscillation stabilization time has elapsed

X1 oscillation stabilization

time has not elapsed

PCC = 00H

RCM = 00H

MCM = 00H

MOC = 00H

OSTC = 00H

OSTS = 05HNote

OSTC checkNote

Each processing

After reset release

PCC setting

MCM.0 ← 1

X1 input clock operation

Ring-OSC

clock operation

(dividing set PCC)

Register initial

value after reset

Ring-OSC clock

operation

X1 input clock

operation

Note Check the oscillation stabilization wait time of the X1 oscillator after reset release using the OSTC register

and then switch to the X1 input clock operati on after the oscillation stabilization w ait time has elapsed. The

OSTS register setting is valid only after STOP mode is released by interrupt during X1 input clock operation.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 123

5.8.2 Switching from X1 input clock to Ring-OSC clock

Figure 5-15. Switching from X1 Input Clock to Ring-OSC Clock (Flowchart)

MCM.1 (MCS) is changed from 1 to 0

; Ring-OSC clock operation

; Ring-OSC oscillating?

Ring-OSC clock operation

; X1 oscillation

; X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock

; X1 input clock operation

No: RSTOP = 0

Yes: RSTOP = 1

PCC.7 (MCC) = 0

PCC.4 (CSS) = 0

MCM = 03H

RCM.0

Note

(RSTOP) = 1?

RSTOP = 0

MCM0 ← 0

Register setting

in X1 input

clock operation

X1 input

clock operation

Ring-OSC

clock operation

Note Required only when “can be stopped by software” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

124

5.8.3 Switching from X1 input clock to subsystem clock

Figure 5-16. Switching from X1 Input Clock to Subsystem Clock (Flowchart)

MCS = 1 not changed.

CLS is changed from 0 to 1.

; Subsystem clock operation

Subsystem clock operation

; X1 oscillation

; X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock

; X1 input clock operation

PCC.7 (MCC) = 0

PCC.4 (CSS) = 0

MCM = 03H

CSS ← 1

Note

Register setting

in X1 input

clock operation

X1 input

clock operation

Subsystem

clock

Note Set CSS to 1 after confirming that oscillation of the subsystem clock is stabilized.

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 125

5.8.4 Switching from subsystem clock to X1 input clock

Figure 5-17. Switching from Subsystem Clock to X1 Input Clock (Flowchart)

; Subsystem clock operation

; X1 oscillating?

; X1 oscillation enabled

; Wait for X1 oscillation stabilization time

; X1 input clock operation

CLS is changed from 1 to 0.

MCS = 1 not changed.

X1 oscillation stabilization time elapsed

X1 oscillation

stabilization time

not elapsed

Yes: X1 oscillation stopped

No: X1 oscillating

MCC ← 0

PCC.4 (CSS) = 1

MCM = 03H

MCC = 1?

OSTC check

CSS ← 0

X1 input clock operation

Subsystem

clock operation

X1 input

clock operation

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

126

5.8.5 Register settings

The table below shows the statuses of the setting flags and status flags when each mode is set.

Table 5-7. Clock and Register Setting

Setting Flag Status Flag

PCC Register MCM

Register

MOC

Register

RCM

Register

PCC

Register

MCM

Register

fCPU Mode

MCC CSS MCM0 MSTOP RSTOPNote 1 CLS MCS

Ring-OSC oscillating 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 X1 input clockNote 2

Ring-OSC stopped 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

X1 oscillating 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ring-OSC clock

X1 stopped 0Note 3 0 0 1 0 0 0

X1 oscillating, Ring-OSC oscillating 0 1 1Note 5 0

Note 6 0 1 1

X1 stopped, Ring-OSC oscillating 1 1 1Note 5 0

Note 6 0 1 1

X1 oscillating, Ring-OSC stopped 0 1 1Note 5 0

Note 6 1 1 1

Subsystem clockNote 4

X1 stopped, Ring-OSC stopped 1 1 1Note 5 0

Note 6 1 1 1

Notes 1. Valid only when “can be stopped by software” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option.

2. Do not set MCC = 1 or MSTOP = 1 during X1 input clock operation (even if MCC = 1 or MSTOP = 1 is set,

the X1 oscillation does not stop).

3. Do not set MCC = 1 during Ring-OSC operation (even if MCC = 1 is set, the X1 oscillation does not stop).

To stop X1 oscillation during Ring-OSC operation, use MSTOP.

4. Shifting to subsystem clock operation mode must be performed from the X1 input clock operation mode.

From subsystem clock operation mode, only X1 input clock operation mode can be shifted to.

5. Do not set MCM0 = 0 (shifting to Ring-OSC operation) during subsystem clock operation.

6. Do not set MSTOP = 1 during subsystem clock operation (even if MSTOP = 1 is set, X1 oscillation does

not stop). To stop X1 oscillation during subsystem clock operation, use MCC.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 127

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

6.1 Functions of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00

16-bit timer/event counter 00 has the following functions.

• Interval timer

• PPG output

• Pulse width measurement

• External event counter

• Square-wave output

• One-shot pulse output

(1) Interval timer

16-bit timer/event counter 00 generates an interrupt request at the preset time interval.

(2) PPG output

16-bit timer/event counter 00 can output a rectangular wave whose frequency and output pulse width can be set

freely.

(3) Pulse width measurement

16-bit timer/event counter 00 can measure the pulse width of an externally input signal.

(4) External event counter

16-bit timer/event counter 00 can measure the number of pulses of an externally input signal.

(5) Square-wave output

16-bit timer/event counter 00 can output a square wave with any selected frequency.

(6) One-shot pulse output

16-bit timer/event counter 00 can output a one-shot pulse whose output pulse width can be set freely.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

128

6.2 Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00

16-bit timer/event counter 00 includes the following hardware.

Table 6-1. Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00

Item Configuration

Timer counter 16 bits (TM00)

Register 16-bit timer capture/compare register: 16 bits (CR000, CR010)

Timer input TI000, TI010

Timer output TO00 output controller

Control registers 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

16-bit timer capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)

Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

Port mode register 0 (PM0)

Port register 0 (P0)

Figure 6-1 shows the block diagram.

Figure 6-1. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00

Internal bus

To CR010

Capture/compare control

register 00 (CRC00)

TI010/TO00/P01

f

X

f

X

/2

2

f

X

/2

8

f

X

TI000/P00

Prescaler mode

register 00 (PRM00)

2

PRM001 PRM000

CRC002

16-bit timer capture/compare

register 010 (CR010)

Match

Match

16-bit timer counter 00

(TM00) Clear

Noise

elimi-

nator

CRC002 CRC001 CRC000

INTTM000

TO00/TI010/

P01

INTTM010

16-bit timer output

control register 00

(TOC00)

16-bit timer mode

control register 00

(TMC00)

Internal bus

TMC003 TMC002

TMC001

OVF00

TOC004

LVS00 LVR00

TOC001

TOE00

Selector

16-bit timer capture/compare

register 000 (CR000)

Selector

Selector

Selector

Noise

elimi-

nator

Noise

elimi-

nator

Output

controller

OSPE00

OSPT00

Output latch

(P01)

PM01

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 129

(1) 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00)

TM00 is a 16-bit read-only register that counts count pulses.

The counter is incremented in synchronization with the rising edge of the input clock.

Figure 6-2. Format of 16-Bit Timer Counter 00 (TM00)

TM00

Symbol FF11H FF10H

Address: FF10H, FF11H After reset: 0000H R

The count value is reset to 0000H in the following cases.

<1> At RESET input

<2> If TMC003 and TMC002 are cleared

<3> If the valid edge of TI000 is input in the mode in which clear & start occurs when inputting the valid edge of

TI000

<4> If TM00 and CR000 match in the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM00 and CR000

<5> OSPT00 is set to 1 in one-shot pulse output mode

(2) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000)

CR000 is a 16-bit register that has the functions of both a capture register and a compare register. Whether it is

used as a capture register or as a compare register is set by bit 0 (CRC000) of capture/compare control register

00 (CRC00).

CR000 can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CR000 to 0000H.

Figure 6-3. Format of 16-Bit Timer Capture/Compare Register 000 (CR000)

CR000

Symbol FF13H FF12H

Address: FF12H, FF13H After reset: 0000H R/W

• When CR000 is used as a compare register

The value set in CR000 is constantly compared with the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) count value, and an

interrupt request (INTTM000) is generated if they match. The set value is held until CR000 is rewritten.

• When CR000 is used as a capture register

It is possible to select the valid edge of the TI000 pin or the TI010 pin as the capture trigger. The TI000 or

TI010 valid edge is set using prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) (see Table 6-2).

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

130

Table 6-2. CR000 Capture Trigger and Valid Edges of TI000 and TI010 Pins

(1) TI000 pin valid edge selected as capture trigger (CRC001 = 1, CRC000 = 1)

TI000 Pin Valid Edge CR000 Capture Trigger

ES001 ES000

Falling edge Rising edge 0 1

Rising edge Falling edge 0 0

No capture operation Both rising and falling edges 1 1

(2) TI010 pin valid edge selected as capture trigger (CRC001 = 0, CRC000 = 1)

TI010 Pin Valid Edge CR000 Capture Trigger

ES101 ES100

Falling edge Falling edge 0 0

Rising edge Rising edge 0 1

Both rising and falling edges Both rising and falling edges 1 1

Remarks 1. Setting ES001, ES000 = 1, 0 and ES101, ES100 = 1, 0 is prohibited.

2. ES001, ES000: Bits 5 and 4 of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101, ES100: Bits 7 and 6 of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

CRC001, CRC000: Bits 1 and 0 of capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

Cautions 1. Set a value other than 0000H to CR000 in the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match

of TM00 and CR000.

2. If CR000 is set to 0000H in the free-running mode and in the clear mode using the valid edge

of the TI000 pin, an interrupt request (INTTM000) is generated when the value of CR000

changes from 0000H to 0001H following TM00 overflow (FFFFH). Moreover, INTTM000 is

generated after a match of TM00 and CR000 is detected, a valid edge of the TI010 pin is

detected, and the timer is cleared by a one-shot trigger.

3. When P01 is used as the valid edge input pin of TI010, it cannot be used as the timer output

(TO00). Moreover, when P01 is used as TO00, it cannot be used as the valid edge input pin

of TI010.

4. When CR000 is used as a capture register, read data is undefined if the register read time

and capture trigger input conflict (the capture data itself is the correct value).

If timer count stop and capture trigger input conflict, the captured data is undefined.

5. Do not rewrite CR000 during TM00 operation.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 131

(3) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010)

CR010 is a 16-bit register that has the functions of both a capture register and a compare register. Whether it is

used as a capture register or a compare register is set by bit 2 (CRC002) of capture/compare control register 00

(CRC00).

CR010 can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CR010 to 0000H.

Figure 6-4. Format of 16-Bit Timer Capture/Compare Register 010 (CR010)

CR010

Symbol FF15H FF14H

Address: FF14H, FF15H After reset: 0000H R/W

• When CR010 is used as a compare register

The value set in CR010 is constantly compared with the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) count value, and an

interrupt request (INTTM010) is generated if they match. The set value is held until CR010 is rewritten.

• When CR010 is used as a capture register

It is possible to select the valid edge of the TI000 pin as the capture trigger. The TI000 valid edge is set using

prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) (see Table 6-3).

Table 6-3. CR010 Capture Trigger and Valid Edge of TI000 Pin (CRC002 = 1)

TI000 Pin Valid Edge CR010 Capture Trigger

ES001 ES000

Falling edge Falling edge 0 0

Rising edge Rising edge 0 1

Both rising and falling edges Both rising and falling edges 1 1

Remarks 1. Setting ES001, ES000 = 1, 0 is prohibited.

2. ES001, ES000: Bits 5 and 4 of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

CRC002: Bit 2 of capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

Cautions 1. If the CR010 register is cleared to 0000H, an interrupt request (INTTM010) is generated when

the value changes from 0000H to 0001H after an overflow (FFFFH) of TM00. Moreover,

INTTM010 is generated after a match of TM00 and CR010, after the valid edge of the TI000

pin is detected, and after clearing by the one-shot trigger.

2. When CR010 is used as a capture register, read data is undefined if the register read time

and capture trigger input conflict (the capture data itself is the correct value).

If count stop input and capture trigger input conflict, the captured data is undefined.

3. CR010 can be rewritten during TM00 operation. For details, see Caution 2 in Figure 6-15.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

132

6.3 Registers Controlling 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00

The following six registers are used to control 16-bit timer/event counter 00.

• 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

• Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

• 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)

• Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

• Port mode register 0 (PM0)

• Port register 0 (P0)

(1) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

This register sets the 16-bit timer operating mode, the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) clear mode, and output

timing, and detects an overflow.

TMC00 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TMC00 to 00H.

Caution 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) starts operation at the moment TMC002 and TMC003 are set to

values other than 0, 0 (operation stop mode), respectively. Set TMC002 and TMC003 to 0, 0 to

stop the operation.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 133

Figure 6-5. Format of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

TMC003

2

TMC002

1

TMC001

<0>

OVF00

Symbol

TMC00

Address FFBAH After reset: 00H R/W

TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 Operating mode and clear

mode selection

TO00 inversion timing selection Interrupt request generation

0 0 0

0 0 1

Operation stop

(TM00 cleared to 0)

No change Not generated

0 1 0 Free-running mode Match between TM00 and

CR000 or match between

TM00 and CR010

0 1 1 Match between TM00 and

CR000, match between TM00

and CR010 or TI000 valid edge

1 0 0

1 0 1

Clear & start occurs on TI000

valid edge

−

1 1 0

Clear & start occurs on match

between TM00 and CR000

Match between TM00 and

CR000 or match between

TM00 and CR010

1 1 1 Match between TM00 and

CR000, match between TM00

and CR010 or TI000 valid edge

<When used as compare

register>

Generated on match between

TM00 and CR000, or match

between TM00 and CR010

<When used as capture

register>

Generated by inputting CR000

capture trigger

OVF00 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) overflow detection

0 Overflow not detected

1 Overflow detected

Cautions 1. Timer operation must be stopped before writing to bits other than the OVF00 flag.

2. Set the valid edge of the TI000/P00 pin using prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00).

3. If any of the following modes is selected: the mode in which clear & start occurs on match

between TM00 and CR000, the mode in which clear & start occurs at the TI000 valid edge, or

free-running mode, when the set value of CR000 is FFFFH and the TM00 value changes from

FFFFH to 0000H, the OVF00 flag is set to 1.

Remarks 1. TO00: 16-bit timer/event counter 00 output pin

2. TI000: 16-bit timer/event counter 00 input pin

3. TM00: 16-bit timer counter 00

4. CR000: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000

5. CR010: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

134

(2) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

This register controls the operation of the 16-bit timer capture/compare registers (CR000, CR010).

CRC00 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CRC00 to 00H.

Figure 6-6. Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 00 (CRC00)

Address: FFBCH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC00 0 0 0 0 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000

CRC002 CR010 operating mode selection

0 Operates as compare register

1 Operates as capture register

CRC001 CR000 capture trigger selection

0 Captures on valid edge of TI010

1 Captures on valid edge of TI000 by reverse phaseNote

CRC000 CR000 operating mode selection

0 Operates as compare register

1 Operates as capture register

Note The capture operation is not performed if both the rising and falling edges are specified as the valid edge of

TI000.

Cautions 1. Timer operation must be stopped before setting CRC00.

2. When the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM00 and CR000 is

selected with 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00), CR000 should not be specified

as a capture register.

3. To ensure that the capture operation is performed properly, the capture trigger requires a

pulse two cycles longer than the count clock selected by prescaler mode register 00

(PRM00).

(3) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)

This register controls the operation of the 16-bit timer/event counter 00 output controller. It sets/resets the timer

output F/F (LV00), enables/disables output inversion and 16-bit timer/event counter 00 timer output,

enables/disables the one-shot pulse output operation, and sets the one-shot pulse output trigger via software.

TOC00 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TOC00 to 00H.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 135

Figure 6-7. Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register 00 (TOC00)

Address: FFBDH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 <6> <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>

TOC00 0 OSPT00 OSPE00 TOC004 LVS00 LVR00 TOC001 TOE00

OSPT00 One-shot pulse output trigger control via software

0 No one-shot pulse output trigger

1 One-shot pulse output trigger

OSPE00 One-shot pulse output operation control

0 Successive pulse output mode

1 One-shot pulse output modeNote

TOC004 Timer output F/F control using match of CR010 and TM00

0 Disables inversion operation

1 Enables inversion operation

LVS00 LVR00 Timer output F/F status setting

0 0 No change

0 1 Timer output F/F reset (0)

1 0 Timer output F/F set (1)

1 1 Setting prohibited

TOC001 Timer output F/F control using match of CR000 and TM00

0 Disables inversion operation

1 Enables inversion operation

TOE00 Timer output control

0 Disables output (output fixed to level 0)

1 Enables output

Note The one-shot pulse output mode operates correctly only in the free-running mode and the mode in which

clear & start occurs at the TI000 valid edge. In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between

the TM00 register and CR000 register, one-shot pulse output is not possible because an overflow does not

occur.

Cautions 1. Timer operation must be stopped before setting other than TOC004.

2. If LVS00 and LVR00 are read, 0 is read.

3. OSPT00 is automatically cleared after data is set, so 0 is read.

4. Do not set OSPT00 to 1 other than in one-shot pulse output mode.

5. A write interval of two cycles or more of the count clock selected by prescaler mode register

00 (PRM00) is required to write to OSPT00 successively.

6. Do not set LVS00 to 1 before TOE00, and do not set LVS00 and TOE00 to 1 simultaneously.

7. Perform <1> and <2> below in the following order, not at the same time.

<1> Set TOC001, TOC004, TOE00, OSPE00: Timer output operation setting

<2> Set LVS00, LVR00: Timer output F/F setting

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

136

(4) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

This register is used to set the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) count clock and TI000 and TI010 input valid edges.

PRM00 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulati on instruction.

RESET input clears PRM00 to 00H.

Figure 6-8. Format of Prescaler Mode Register 00 (PRM00)

Address: FFBBH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PRM00 ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 0 0 PRM001 PRM000

ES101 ES100 TI010 valid edge selection

0 0 Falling edge

0 1 Rising edge

1 0 Setting prohibited

1 1 Both rising and falling edges

ES001 ES000 TI000 valid edge selection

0 0 Falling edge

0 1 Rising edge

1 0 Setting prohibited

1 1 Both rising and falling edges

PRM001 PRM000 Count clock selectionNote 1

0 0 fX (10 MHz)

0 1 fX/22 (2.5 MHz)

1 0 fX/28 (39.06 kHz)

1 1 TI000 valid edgeNote 2

Notes 1. Set the count clock to satisfy the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock or base clo ck ≤ 10 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Count clock or base clo ck ≤ 8.38 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Count clock or base clo ck ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Count clock or base clo ck ≤ 2.5 MHz

2. The external clock requ ires a pulse two cycles longer than i nterna l clock (fX).

Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the

Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the

Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 is not guaranteed. When an

external clock is used and when the Ring-OSC clock is selected and supplied to the CPU, the

operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 is not guaranteed, either, because the Ring-OSC

clock is supplied as the sampling clock to eliminate noise.

2. Always set data to PRM00 after stopping the timer operation.

3. If the valid edge of TI000 is to be set for the count clock, do not set the clear & start mode

using the valid edge of TI000 and the capture trigger.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 137

Cautions 4. If the TI000 or TI010 pin is high level immediately after system reset, the rising edge is

immediately detected after the rising edge or both the rising and falling edges are set as the

valid edge(s) of the TI000 pin or TI010 pin to enable the operation of 16-bit timer counter 00

(TM00). Care is therefore required when pulling up the TI000 or TI010 pin. However, if the

TI000 pin or TI010 pin is high level, the rising edge is not detected when re-enabling

operation after the operation has been stopped once.

5. When P01 is used as the TI010 valid edge input pin, it cannot be used as the timer output

(TO00), and when used as TO00, it cannot be used as the TI010 valid edge input pin.

Remarks 1. f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

2. TI000, TI010: 16-bit timer/event counter 00 input pins

3. Figures in parentheses are for operation with fX = 10 MHz.

(5) Port mode register 0 (PM0)

This register sets port 0 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P01/TO00/TI010 pin for timer output, clear PM01 and the output latch of P01 to 0.

When using the P01/TO00/TI010 pin for timer input, set PM01 to 1. At this time, the output latch of P01 may be 0

or 1.

PM0 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets PM0 to FFH.

Figure 6-9. Format of Port Mode Register 0 (PM0)

7

1

6

1

5

1

4

1

3

1

2

1

1

PM01

0

PM00

Symbol

PM0

Address: FF20H After reset: FFH R/W

PM0n

0

1

P0n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0, 1)

Output mode (output buffer on)

Input mode (output buffer off)

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

138

6.4 Operation of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00

6.4.1 Interval timer operation

Setting 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) and capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) as shown

in Figure 6-10 allows operation as an interval timer.

Setting

The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.

<1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-10 for the set value).

<2> Set any value to the CR000 register.

<3> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register.

<4> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-10 for the set value).

Caution Do not rewrite CR000 during TM00 operation.

Remark For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.

Interrupt requests are generated repeatedly using the count value preset in 16-bit timer capture/compare register

000 (CR000) as the interval.

When the count value of 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) matches the value set in CR000, counting continues with

the TM00 value cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM000) is generated.

The count clock of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 can be selected with bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler

mode register 00 (PRM00).

Figure 6-10. Control Register Settings for Interval Timer Operation (1/2)

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

TMC003

1

TMC002

1

TMC001

0/1

OVF00

0TMC00

Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000.

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

CRC002

1

CRC001

0/1

CRC000

0CRC00

CR000 used as compare register

CR010 used as capture register

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 139

Figure 6-10. Control Register Settings for Interval Timer Operation (2/2)

(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101

0/1

ES100

0/1

ES001

0/1

ES000

0/1

3

0

2

0

PRM001

0/1

PRM000

0/1PRM00

Selects count clock.

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with the interval timer. See the

description of the respective control registers for details.

Figure 6-11. Interval Timer Configuration Diagram

16-bit timer capture/compare

register 000 (CR000)

16-bit timer counter 00

(TM00)

OVF00

Note

Clear

circuit

INTTM000

f

X

f

X

/2

2

f

X

/2

8

TI000/P00

Selector

Noise

eliminator

f

X

Note OVF00 is set to 1 only when 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 is set to FFFFH.

Figure 6-12. Timing of Interval Timer Operation

Count clock

t

TM00 count value

CR000

INTTM000

0000H

0001H

N

0000H 0001H

N

0000H 0001H

N

NNNN

Timer operation enabled Clear Clear

Interrupt acknowledged Interrupt acknowledged

Remark Interval time = (N + 1) × t

N = 0001H to FFFFH (settable range)

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

140

6.4.2 PPG output operations

Setting 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) and capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) as shown

in Figure 6-13 allows operation as PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator) output.

Setting

The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.

<1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-13 for the set value).

<2> Set any value to the CR000 register as the cycle.

<3> Set any value to the CR010 register as the duty factor.

<4> Set the TOC00 register (see Figure 6-13 for the set value).

<5> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register.

<6> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-13 for the set value).

Caution To change the value of the duty factor (the value of the CR010 register) during operation, see

Caution 2 in Figure 6-15 PPG Output Operation Timing.

Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO00 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).

2. For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.

In the PPG output operation, rectangular waves are output from the TO00 pin with the pulse width and the cycle

that correspond to the count values preset in 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) and in 16-bit timer

capture/compare register 000 (CR000), respectively.

Figure 6-13. Control Register Settings for PPG Output Operation (1/2)

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

TMC003

1

TMC002

1

TMC001

0

OVF0

0

0TMC00

Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000.

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

CRC002

0

CRC001

×

CRC000

0CRC00

CR000 used as compare register

CR010 used as compare register

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 141

Figure 6-13. Control Register Settings for PPG Output Operation (2/2)

(c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)

7

0

OSPT00

0

OSPE00

0

TOC004

1

LVS00

0/1

LVR00

0/1

TOC001

1

TOE00

1TOC00

Enables TO00 output.

Inverts output on match between TM00 and CR000.

Specifies initial value of TO00 output F/F (setting “11” is prohibited).

Inverts output on match between TM00 and CR010.

Disables one-shot pulse output.

(d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101

0/1

ES100

0/1

ES001

0/1

ES000

0/1

3

0

2

0

PRM001

0/1

PRM000

0/1PRM00

Selects count clock.

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Cautions 1. Values in the following range should be set in CR000 and CR010:

0000H ≤ CR010 < CR000 ≤ FFFFH

2. The cycle of the pulse generated through PPG output (CR000 setting value + 1) has a duty of

(CR010 setting value + 1)/(CR000 setting value + 1).

Remark ×: Don’t care

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

142

Figure 6-14. Configuration Diagram of PPG Output

16-bit timer capture/compare

register 000 (CR000)

16-bit timer counter 00

(TM00)

Clear

circuit

Noise

eliminator

f

X

f

X

f

X

/2

2

f

X

/2

8

TI000/P00

16-bit timer capture/compare

register 010 (CR010)

TO00/TI010/P01

Selector

Output controller

Figure 6-15. PPG Output Operation Timing

t

0000H 0000H

0001H

0001H

M − 1

Count clock

TM00 count value

TO00

Pulse width: (M + 1) × t

1 cycle: (N + 1) × t

N

CR000 capture value

CR010 capture value M

M

N − 1

NN

ClearClear

Cautions 1. Do not rewrite CR000 during TM00 operation.

2. In the PPG output operation, change the pulse width (rewrite CR010) during TM00 operation

using the following procedure.

<1> Disable the timer output inversion operation by match of TM00 and CR010 (TOC004 = 0)

<2> Disable the INTTM010 interrupt (TMMK010 = 1)

<3> Rewrite CR010

<4> Wait for 1 cycle of the TM00 count clock

<5> Enable the timer output inversion operation by match of TM00 and CR010 (TOC004 = 1)

<6> Clear the interrupt request flag of INTTM010 (TMIF010 = 0)

<7> Enable the INTTM010 interrupt (TMMK010 = 0)

Remark 0000H ≤ M < N ≤ FFFFH

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 143

6.4.3 Pulse width measurement operations

It is possible to measure the pulse width of the signals input to the TI000 pin and TI010 pin using 16-bit timer

counter 00 (TM00).

There are two measurement methods: measuring with TM00 used in free-running mode, and measuring by

restarting the timer in synchronization with the edge of the signal input to the TI000 pin.

When an interrupt occurs, read the valid value of the capture register, check the overflow flag, and then calculate

the necessary pulse width. Clear the overflow flag after checking it.

The capture operation is not performed until the signal pulse width is sampled in the count clock cycle selected by

prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) and the valid level of the TI000 or TI010 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating

noise with a short pulse width.

Figure 6-16. CR010 Capture Operation with Rising Edge Specified

Count clock

TM00

TI000

Rising edge detection

CR010

INTTM010

N – 3 N – 2 N – 1 N N + 1

N

Setting

The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.

<1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figures 6-17, 6-20, 6-22, and 6-24 for the set value).

<2> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register.

<3> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figures 6-17, 6-20, 6-22, and 6-24 for the set value).

Caution To use two capture registers, set the TI000 and TI010 pins.

Remarks 1. For the setting of the TI000 (or TI010) pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).

2. For how to enable the INTTM000 (or INTTM010) interrupt, see CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT

FUNCTIONS.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

144

(1) Pulse width measurement with free-running counter and one capture register

When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, and the edge specified by prescaler mode

register 00 (PRM00) is input to the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare

register 010 (CR010) and an external interrupt request signal (INTTM010) is set.

Specify both the rising and falling edges of the TI000 pin by using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of PRM00.

Sampling is performed using the count clock selected by PRM00, and a capture operation is only performed

when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width.

Figure 6-17. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter

and One Capture Register (When TI000 and CR010 Are Used)

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

TMC003

0

TMC002

1

TMC001

0/1

OVF00

0TMC00

Free-running mode

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

CRC002

1

CRC001

0/1

CRC000

0CRC00

CR000 used as compare register

CR010 used as capture register

(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101

0/1

ES100

0/1

ES001

1

ES000

1

3

0

2

0

PRM001

0/1

PRM000

0/1PRM00

Selects count clock (setting “11” is prohibited).

Specifies both edges for pulse width detection.

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 145

Figure 6-18. Configuration Diagram for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter

f

X

f

X

/2

2

f

X

/2

8

TI000

16-bit timer counter 00

(TM00) OVF00

16-bit timer capture/compare

register 010 (CR010)

Internal bus

INTTM010

Selector

Figure 6-19. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter

and One Capture Register (with Both Edges Specified)

t

0000H 0000H

FFFFH

0001H

D0

D0

Count clock

TM00 count value

TI000 pin input

CR010 capture value

INTTM010

OVF00

(D1 − D0) × t (D3 − D2) × t(10000H − D1 + D2) × t

D1 D2 D3

D2 D3

D0 + 1

D1

D1 + 1

Note

Note Clear OVF00 by software.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

146

(2) Measurement of two pulse widths with free-running counter

When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, it is possible to simultaneously measure

the pulse widths of the two signals input to the TI000 pin and the TI010 pin.

When the edge specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is input to

the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) and an interrupt

request signal (INTTM010) is set.

Also, when the edge specified by bits 6 and 7 (ES100 and ES101) of PRM00 is input to the TI010 pin, the value

of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) and an interrupt request signal

(INTTM000) is set.

Specify both the rising and falling edges as the edges of the TI000 and TI010 pins, by using bits 4 and 5 (ES000

and ES001) and bits 6 and 7 (ES100 and ES101) of PRM00.

Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00), and a

capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 or TI010 pin is detected twice, thus

eliminating noise with a short pulse width.

Figure 6-20. Control Register Settings for Measurement of Two Pulse Widths with Free-Running Counter

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

TMC003

0

TMC002

1

TMC001

0/1

OVF00

0TMC00

Free-running mode

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

CRC002

1

CRC001

0

CRC000

1CRC00

CR000 used as capture register

Captures valid edge of TI010 pin to CR000.

CR010 used as capture register

(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101

1

ES100

1

ES001

1

ES000

1

3

0

2

0

PRM001

0/1

PRM000

0/1PRM00

Selects count clock (setting “11” is prohibited).

Specifies both edges for pulse width detection.

Specifies both edges for pulse width detection.

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 147

Figure 6-21. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter

(with Both Edges Specified)

t

0000H 0000H

FFFFH

0001H

D0

D0

TI010 pin input

CR000 capture value

INTTM010

INTTM000

OVF00

(D1 − D0) × t (D3 − D2) × t(10000H − D1 + D2) × t

(10000H − D1 + (D2 + 1)) × t

D1

D2 + 1D1

D2

D2 D3

D0 + 1

D1

D1 + 1 D2 + 1 D2 + 2

Count clock

TM00 count value

TI000 pin input

CR010 capture value

Note

Note Clear OVF00 by software.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

148

(3) Pulse width measurement with free-running counter and two capture registers

When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, it is possible to measure the pulse width

of the signal input to the TI000 pin.

When the rising or falling edge specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00

(PRM00) is input to the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010

(CR010) and an interrupt request signal (INTTM010) is set.

Also, when the inverse edge to that of the capture operation is input into CR010, the value of TM00 is taken into

16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000).

Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00), and a

capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise

with a short pulse width.

Figure 6-22. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter and

Two Capture Registers (with Rising Edge Specified)

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

TMC003

0

TMC002

1

TMC001

0/1

OVF00

0TMC00

Free-running mode

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

CRC002

1

CRC001

1

CRC000

1CRC00

CR000 used as capture register

Captures to CR000 at inverse edge

to valid edge of TI000.

CR010 used as capture register

(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101

0/1

ES100

0/1

ES001

0

ES000

1

3

0

2

0

PRM001

0/1

PRM000

0/1PRM00

Selects count clock (setting “11” is prohibited).

Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection.

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 149

Figure 6-23. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter

and Two Capture Registers (with Rising Edge Specified)

t

0000H 0000H

FFFFH

0001H

D0

D0

INTTM010

OVF00

D2

D1 D3

D2 D3

D0 + 1 D2 + 1

D1

D1 + 1

CR000 capture value

Count clock

TM00 count value

TI000 pin input

CR010 capture value

(D1 − D0) × t (D3 − D2) × t(10000H − D1 + D2) × t

Note

Note Clear OVF00 by software.

(4) Pulse width measurement by means of restart

When input of a valid edge to the TI000 pin is detected, the count value of 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is taken

into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010), and then the pulse width of the signal input to the TI000

pin is measured by clearing TM00 and restarting the count operation.

Either of two edgesrising or fallingcan be selected using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode

register 00 (PRM00).

Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) and a

capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise

with a short pulse width.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

150

Figure 6-24. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement by Means of Restart

(with Rising Edge Specified)

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

TMC003

1

TMC002

0

TMC001

0/1

OVF00

0

TMC00

Clears and starts at valid edge of TI000 pin.

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

CRC002

1

CRC001

1

CRC000

1CRC00

CR000 used as capture register

Captures to CR000 at inverse edge to valid edge of TI000.

CR010 used as capture register

(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101

0/1

ES100

0/1

ES001

0

ES000

1

3

0

2

0

PRM001

0/1

PRM000

0/1PRM00

Selects count clock (setting “11” is prohibited).

Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection.

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Figure 6-25. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by Means of Restart

(with Rising Edge Specified)

t

0000H 0001H0000H0001H 0000H 0001H

D0

D0

INTTM010

D1 × t

D2 × t

D2

D1

D2D1

CR000 capture value

Count clock

TM00 count value

TI000 pin input

CR010 capture value

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 151

6.4.4 External event counter operation

Setting

The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.

<1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-26 for the set value).

<2> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register.

<3> Set any value to the CR000 register (0000H cannot be set).

<4> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-26 for the set value).

Remarks 1. For the setting of the TI000 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).

2. For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.

The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses input to the TI000 pin using 16-bit timer

counter 00 (TM00).

TM00 is incremented each time the valid edge specified by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is input.

When the TM00 count value matches the 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) value, TM00 is

cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM000) is generated.

Input a value other than 0000H to CR000 (a count operation with 1-bit pulse cannot be carried out).

Any of three edgesrising, falling, or both edgescan be selected using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of

prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00).

Sampling is performed using the internal clock (fX) and an operation is only performed when a valid level of the

TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width.

Figure 6-26. Control Register Settings in External Event Counter Mode

(with Rising Edge Specified) (1/2)

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

TMC003

1

TMC002

1

TMC001

0/1

OVF00

0TMC00

Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000.

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

CRC002

0/1

CRC001

0/1

CRC000

0CRC00

CR000 used as compare register

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

152

Figure 6-26. Control Register Settings in External Event Counter Mode

(with Rising Edge Specified) (2/2)

(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101

0/1

ES100

0/1

ES001

0

ES000

1

3

0

2

0

PRM001

1

PRM000

1PRM00

Selects external clock.

Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection.

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with the external event counter.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

Figure 6-27. Configuration Diagram of External Event Counter

f

X

Internal bus

16-bit timer capture/compare

register 000 (CR000)

Match

Clear

OVF00

Note

Noise eliminator 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00)

Valid edge of TI000

INTTM000

Note OVF00 is set to 1 only when CR000 is set to FFFFH.

Figure 6-28. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified)

TI000 pin input

TM00 count value

CR000

INTTM000

0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H

N − 1N

0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H

N

Caution When reading the external event counter count value, TM00 should be read.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 153

6.4.5 Square-wave output operation

Setting

The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.

<1> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register.

<2> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-29 for the set value).

<3> Set the TOC00 register (see Figure 6-29 for the set value).

<4> Set any value to the CR000 register (0000H cannot be set).

<5> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-29 for the set value).

Caution Do not rewrite CR000 during TM00 operation.

Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO00 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).

2. For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.

A square wave with any selected frequency can be output at intervals determined by the count value preset to 16-

bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000).

The TO00 pin output status is reversed at intervals determined by the count value preset to CR000 + 1 by setting

bit 0 (TOE00) and bit 1 (TOC001) of 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) to 1. This enables a square wave

with any selected frequency to be output.

Figure 6-29. Control Register Settings in Square-Wave Output Mode (1/2)

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

TMC003

1

TMC002

1

TMC001

0

OVF00

0TMC00

Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000.

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

CRC002

0/1

CRC001

0/1

CRC000

0CRC00

CR000 used as compare register

(c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)

7

0

OSPT00

0

OSPE00

0

TOC004

0

LVS00

0/1

LVR00

0/1

TOC001

1

TOE00

1TOC00

Enables TO00 output.

Inverts output on match between TM00 and CR000.

Specifies initial value of TO00 output F/F (setting “11” is prohibited).

Does not invert output on match between TM00 and CR010.

Disables one-shot pulse output.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

154

Figure 6-29. Control Register Settings in Square-Wave Output Mode (2/2)

(d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

ES101

0/1

ES100

0/1

ES001

0/1

ES000

0/1

3

0

2

0

PRM001

0/1

PRM000

0/1PRM00

Selects count clock.

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with square-wave output. See the

description of the respective control registers for details.

Figure 6-30. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing

Count clock

TM00 count value

CR000

INTTM000

TO00 pin output

0000H 0001H 0002H

N − 1N

0000H 0001H 0002H

N − 1N

0000H

N

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 155

6.4.6 One-shot pulse output operation

16-bit timer/event counter 00 can output a one-shot pulse in synchronization with a software trigger or an external

trigger (TI000 pin input).

Setting

The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.

<1> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register.

<2> Set the CRC00 register (see Figures 6-31 and 6-33 for the set value).

<3> Set the TOC00 register (see Figures 6-31 and 6-33 for the set value).

<4> Set any value to the CR000 and CR010 registers (0000H cannot be set).

<5> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figures 6-31 and 6-33 for the set value).

Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO00 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).

2. For how to enable the INTTM000 (if necessary, INTTM010) interrupt, see CHAPTER 15

INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.

(1) One-shot pulse output with software trigger

A one-shot pulse can be output from the TO00 pin by setting 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00),

capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00), and 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) as shown in

Figure 6-31, and by setting bit 6 (OSPT00) of the TOC00 register to 1 by software.

By setting the OSPT00 bit to 1, 16-bit timer/event counter 00 is cleared and started, and its output becomes

active at the count value (N) set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010). After that, the

output becomes inactive at the count value (M) set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000

(CR000)Note.

Even after the one-shot pulse has been output, the TM00 register continues its operation. To stop the TM00

register, the TMC003 and TMC002 bits of the TMC00 register must be cleared to 00.

Note The case where N < M is described here. When N > M, the output becomes active with the CR000

register and inactive with the CR010 register. Do not set N to M.

Cautions 1. Do not set the OSPT00 bit to 1 while the one-shot pulse is being output. To output the one-

shot pulse again, wait until the current one-shot pulse output is completed.

2. When using the one-shot pulse output of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 with a software

trigger, do not change the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin.

Because the external trigger is valid even in this case, the timer is cleared and started even

at the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin, resulting in the output of a

pulse at an undesired timing.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

156

Figure 6-31. Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output with Software Trigger

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

00000

TMC003

TMC00

TMC002 TMC001 OVF007654

Free-running mode

100

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

00000

76543

CRC00

CRC002 CRC001 CRC000

CR000 used as compare register

CR010 used as compare register

0 0/1 0

(c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)

0 0 1 1 0/1

TOC00

LVR00LVS00TOC004OSPE00OSPT007 TOC001 TOE00

Enables TO00 output.

Inverts output upon match

between TM00 and CR000.

Specifies initial value of TO00 output

F/F (setting “11” is prohibited).

Inverts output upon match

between TM00 and CR010.

Sets one-shot pulse output mode.

Set to 1 for output.

0/1 1 1

(d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0

PRM00

PRM001 PRM000

Selects count clock.

Setting invalid

(Setting “10” is prohibited.)

0 0/1 0/1

ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000

Setting invalid

(Setting “10” is prohibited.)

32

Caution Do not set the CR000 and CR010 registers to 0000H.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 157

Figure 6-32. Timing of One-Shot Pulse Output Operation with Software Trigger

0000H N

NN N N

MM M M

NMN + 1 N – 1 M – 1

0001H

M + 1 M + 2

0000H

Count clock

TM00 count

CR010 set value

CR000 set value

OSPT00

INTTM010

INTTM000

TO00 pin output

Set TMC00 to 04H

(TM00 count starts)

Caution 16-bit timer counter 00 starts operating as soon as a value other than 00 (operation stop mode) is

set to the TMC003 and TMC002 bits.

Remark N < M

(2) One-shot pulse output with external trigger

A one-shot pulse can be output from the TO00 pin by setting 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00),

capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00), and 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) as shown in

Figure 6-33, and by using the valid edge of the TI000 pin as an external trigger.

The valid edge of the TI000 pin is specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00

(PRM00). The rising, falling, or both the rising and falling edges can be specified.

When the valid edge of the TI000 pin is detected, the 16-bit timer/event counter is cleared and started, and the

output becomes active at the count value set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010).

After that, the output becomes inactive at the count value set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register

000 (CR000)Note.

Note The case where N < M is described here. When N > M, the output becomes active with the CR000

register and inactive with the CR010 register. Do not set N to M.

Caution Even if the external trigger is generated again while the one-shot pulse is output, it is ignored.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

158

Figure 6-33. Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output with External Trigger

(with Rising Edge Specified)

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)

0000

7654

1

TMC003

TMC00

TMC002 TMC001 OVF00

Clears and starts at

valid edge of TI000 pin.

000

(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)

00000

76543

CRC00

CRC002 CRC001 CRC000

CR000 used as compare register

CR010 used as compare register

0 0/1 0

(c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)

0

7

011 0/1

TOC00

LVR00 TOC001 TOE00OSPE00OSPT00 TOC004 LVS00

Enables TO00 output.

Inverts output upon match

between TM00 and CR000.

Specifies initial value of TO00 output

F/F (setting “11” is prohibited).

Inverts output upon match

between TM00 and CR010.

Sets one-shot pulse output mode.

0/1 1 1

(d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)

0/1 0/1 0 1

PRM00

PRM001 PRM000

Selects count clock

(setting “11” is prohibited).

Specifies the rising edge

for pulse width detection.

0/1 0/1

ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000

Setting invalid

(setting “10” is prohibited.)

00

32

Caution Do not set the CR000 and CR010 registers to 0000H.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 159

Figure 6-34. Timing of One-Shot Pulse Output Operation with External Trigger (with Rising Edge Specified)

0000H N

NN N N

MM M M

MN + 1 N + 2 M + 1 M + 2M − 2M − 1

0001H

0000H

Count clock

TM00 count value

CR010 set value

CR000 set value

TI000 pin input

INTTM010

INTTM000

TO00 pin output

When TMC00 is set to 08H

(TM00 count starts)

t

Caution 16-bit timer counter 00 starts operating as soon as a value other than 00 (operation stop mode) is

set to the TMC003 and TMC002 bits.

Remark N < M

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

160

6.5 Cautions for 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00

(1) Timer start errors

An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be generated after timer start.

This is because 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is started asynchronously to the count clock.

Figure 6-35. Start Timing of 16-Bit Timer Counter 00 (TM00)

TM00 count value

0000H 0001H 0002H 0004H

Count clock

Timer start

0003H

(2) 16-bit timer capture/compare registers 000, 010 setting

In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM00 and CR000, set 16-bit timer

capture/compare registers 000 and 010 (CR000 and CR010) to other than 0000H. This means a 1-pulse count

operation cannot be performed whe n 16-b it timer/event counter 00 is used as an external event counter.

(3) Capture register data retention

The values of 16-bit timer capture/compare registers 0 00 and 010 (CR000 and CR010) are not guaranteed after

16-bit timer/event counter 00 has been stop ped.

(4) Valid edge setting

Set the valid edge of the TI000 pin after setting bits 2 and 3 (TMC002 an d TMC003) of 16-bit timer mode c ontrol

register 00 (TMC00) to 0, 0, respectively, and then stopping timer operation. The valid edge is set using bits 4

and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00).

(5) Re-triggering one-shot pulse

(a) One-shot pulse output by software

When a one-shot pulse is output, do not set the OSPT00 bit to 1. Do not output the one-shot pulse again

until INTTM000, which occurs upon a match with the CR000 register, or INTTM010, which occurs upon a

match with the CR010 register, occurs.

(b) One-shot pulse output with external trigger

If the external trigger occurs again while a one-shot pu lse is output, it is ignored.

(c) One-shot pulse output function

When using the one-shot pu lse output of 16-bit timer/ev ent counter 00 wit h a software trigger, do not chang e

the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin.

Because the external trigger is valid even in this case, the timer is cleared and started even at the level of the

TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin, resulting in the o utput of a puls e at an undesired timing.

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 161

(6) Operation of OVF00 flag

<1> The OVF00 flag is also set to 1 in the following case.

When any of the following modes is selected: the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between

TM00 and CR000, the mode in which clear & start occurs at the TI000 valid edge, or the free-running mode

↓

CR000 is set to FFFFH

↓

TM00 is counted up from FFFFH to 0000H.

Figure 6-36. Operation Timing of OVF00 Flag

Count clock

CR000

TM00

OVF00

INTTM000

FFFFH

FFFEH FFFFH 0000H 0001H

<2> Even if the OVF00 flag is cleared before the next count clock is counted (before TM00 becomes 0001H)

after the occurrence of TM00 overflow, the OVF00 flag is re-set newly and clear is disabled.

(7) Conflicting operations

If a conflict occurs between the read period of the 16-bit timer capture/compare register (CR000/CR010) and

capture trigger input (CR000/CR010 used as capture register), capture trigger input has priority. The data read

from CR000/CR010 is undefined.

Figure 6-37. Capture Register Data Retention Timing

Count clock

TM00 count value

Edge input

INTTM010

Capture read signal

CR010 capture value

N N + 1 N + 2 M M + 1 M + 2

X N + 2

Capture, but

read value is

not guaranteed

Capture

M + 1

CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

162

(8) Timer operation

<1> Even if 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is read, the value is not captured by 16-bit timer capture/compare

register 010 (CR010).

<2> Regardless of the CPU’s operation mode, when the timer stops, the input signals to the TI000/TI010 pins

are not acknowledged.

<3> The one-shot pulse output mode operates correctly only in the free-running mode and the mode in which

clear & start occurs at the TI000 valid edge. In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between

the TM00 register and CR000 register, one-shot pulse output is not possible because an overflow does not

occur.

(9) Capture operation

<1> If TI000 valid edge is specified as the count clock, a capture operation by the capture register specified as

the trigger for TI000 is not possible.

<2> To ensure the reliability of the capture operation, the capture trigger requires a pulse two cycles longer than

the count clock selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00).

<3> The capture operation is performed at the falling edge of the count clock. An interrupt request input

(INTTM000/INTTM010), however, is generated at the rise of the next count clock.

(10) Compare operation

A capture operation may not be performed for CR000/CR010 set in compare mode even if a capture trigger has

been input.

(11) Edge detection

<1> If the TI000 or TI010 pin is high level immediately after system reset and the rising edge or both the rising

and falling edges are specified as the valid edge of the TI000 or TI010 pin to enable the 16-bit timer counter

00 (TM00) operation, a rising edge is detected immediately after the operation is enabled. Be careful

therefore when pulling up the TI000 or TI010 pin. However, if the TI000 pin or TI010 pin is high level, the

rising edge is not detected at restart after the operation has been stopped once.

<2> The sampling clock used to eliminate noise differs when the TI000 valid edge is used as the count clock

and when it is used as a capture trigger. In the former case, the count clock is fX, and in the latter case the

count clock is selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). The capture operation is only performed

when a valid level is detected twice by sampling the valid edge, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse

width.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 163

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

7.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51

8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51 have the following functions.

• Interval timer

• External event counter

• Square-wave output

• PWM output

Figures 7-1 and 7-2 show the block diagrams of 8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51.

Figure 7-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 50

Internal bus

8-bit timer compare

register 50 (CR50)

TI50/TO50/P17

f

X

/2

2

f

X

/2

6

f

X

/2

8

f

X

/2

13

f

X

f

X

/2

Match

Mask circuit

OVF

Clear

3

Selector

TCL502 TCL501 TCL500

Timer clock selection

register 50 (TCL50)

Internal bus

TCE50

TMC506

LVS50 LVR50

TMC501

TOE50

Invert

level

8-bit timer mode control

register 50 (TMC50)

S

R

SQ

R

INV

Selector

To TMH0

To UART0

To UART6

INTTM50

TO50/

TI50/P17

Note 1

Note 2

Selector

8-bit timer

counter 50 (TM50)

Selector

Output latch

(P17)

PM17

Notes 1. Timer output F/F

2. PWM output F/F

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

164

Figure 7-2. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 51

Internal bus

8-bit timer compare

register 51 (CR51)

TI51/TO51/P33/INTP4

fX/28

fX/212

fX

fX/2

Match

Mask circuit

OVF

Clear

3

Selector

TCL512 TCL511 TCL510

Timer clock selection

register 51 (TCL51)

Internal bus

TCE51

TMC516

LVS51 LVR51

TMC511

TOE51

Invert

level

8-bit timer mode control

register 51 (TMC51)

S

R

SQ

R

INV

Selector INTTM51

TO51/TI51/

P33/INTP4

Note 1

Note 2

Selector

8-bit timer

counter 51 (TM51)

Selector

Output latch

(P33)

PM33

fX/26

fX/24

Notes 1. Timer output F/F

2. PWM output F/F

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 165

7.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51

8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51 include the following hardware.

Table 7-1. Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51

Item Configuration

Timer register 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n)

Register 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n)

Timer input TI5n

Timer output 1 (TO5n)

Control registers Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n)

8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n)

Port mode register 1 (PM1) or port mode register 3 (PM3)

Port register 1 (P1) or port register 3 (P3)

(1) 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n)

TM5n is an 8-bit register that counts the count pulses and is read-only.

The counter is incremented in synchronization with the rising edge of the count clock.

Figure 7-3. Format of 8-Bit Timer Counter 5n (TM5n)

Symbol

TM5n

(n = 0, 1)

Address: FF16H (TM50), FF1FH (TM51) After reset: 00H R

In the following situations, the count value is cleared to 00H.

<1> RESET input

<2> When TCE5n is cleared

<3> When TM5n and CR5n match in the mode in which clear & start occurs upon a match of the TM5n and

CR5n.

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

166

(2) 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n)

CR5n can be read and written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

Except in PWM mode, the value set in CR5n is constantly compared with the 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) count

value, and an interrupt request (INTTM5n) is generated if they match.

In PWM mode, when the TO5n pin becomes active due to a TM5n overflow and the values of TM5n and CR5n

match, the TO5n pin becomes inactive.

The value of CR5n can be set within 00H to FFH.

RESET input clears CR5n to 00H.

Figure 7-4. Format of 8-Bit Timer Compare Register 5n (CR5n)

Symbol

CR5n

(n = 0, 1)

Address: FF17H (CR50), FF41H (CR51) After reset: 00H R/W

Cautions 1. In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n and CR5n (TMC5n6 = 0), do

not write other values to CR5n during operation.

2. In PWM mode, make the CR5n rewrite period 3 count clocks of the count clock (clock

selected by TCL5n) or more.

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 167

7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Ti mer/Event Counters 50 and 51

The following four registers ar e used to control 8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51.

• Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n)

• 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n)

• Port mode register 1 (PM1) or port mode register 3 (PM3)

• Port register 1 (P1) or port register 3 (P3)

(1) Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n)

This register sets the count clock of 8-bit timer/event counter 5n and the valid edge of TI5n input.

TCL5n can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TCL5n to 00H.

Remark n = 0, 1

Figure 7-5. Format of Timer Clock Selection Register 50 (TCL50)

Address: FF6AH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

TCL50 0 0 0 0 0 TCL502 TCL501 TCL500

TCL502 TCL501 TCL500 Count clock selectionNote

0 0 0 TI50 falling edge

0 0 1 TI50 rising edge

0 1 0 fX (10 MHz)

0 1 1 fX/2 (5 MHz)

1 0 0 fX/22 (2.5 MHz)

1 0 1 fX/26 (156.25 kHz)

1 1 0 fX/28 (39.06 kHz)

1 1 1 fX/213 (1.22 kHz)

Note Set the count clock to satisfy the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 10 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 8.38 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 2.5 MHz

Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the

Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the

Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50 is not guaranteed.

2. When rewriting TCL50 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand.

3. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to 0.

Remarks 1. fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

2. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz.

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

168

Figure 7-6. Format of Timer Clock Selection Register 51 (TCL51)

Address: FF8CH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

TCL51 0 0 0 0 0 TCL512 TCL511 TCL510

TCL512 TCL511 TCL510 Count clock selectionNote

0 0 0 TI51 falling edge

0 0 1 TI51 rising edge

0 1 0 fX (10 MHz)

0 1 1 fX/2 (5 MHz)

1 0 0 fX/24 (625 kHz)

1 0 1 fX/26 (156.25 kHz)

1 1 0 fX/28 (39.06 kHz)

1 1 1 fX/212 (2.44 kHz)

Note Set the count clock to satisfy the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 10 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 8.38 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 2.5 MHz

Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the

Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the

Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is not guaranteed.

2. When rewriting TCL51 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand.

3. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to 0.

Remarks 1. f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

2. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz.

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 169

(2) 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n)

TMC5n is a register that performs the following five types of settings.

<1> 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) count operation control

<2> 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) operating mode selection

<3> Timer output F/F (flip-flop) status setting

<4> Active level selection in timer F/F control or PWM (free-running) mode

<5> Timer output control

TMC5n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Remark n = 0, 1

Figure 7-7. Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 50 (TMC50)

Address: FF6BH After reset: 00H R/WNote

Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>

TMC50 TCE50 TMC506 0 0 LVS50 LVR50 TMC501 TOE50

TCE50 TM50 count operation control

0 After clearing to 0, count operation disabled (counter stopped)

1 Count operation start

TMC506 TM50 operating mode selection

0 Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM50 and CR50

1 PWM (free-running) mode

LVS50 LVR50 Timer output F/F status setting

0 0 No change

0 1 Timer output F/F reset (0)

1 0 Timer output F/F set (1)

1 1 Setting prohibited

In other modes (TMC506 = 0) In PWM mode (TMC506 = 1) TMC501

Timer F/F control Active level selection

0 Inversion operation disabled Active-high

1 Inversion operation enabled Active-low

TOE50 Timer output control

0 Output disabled (TM50 output is low level)

1 Output enabled

Note Bits 2 and 3 are write-only.

(Refer to Caution and Remark on the next page.)

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

170

Figure 7-8. Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 51 (TMC51)

Address: FF43H After reset: 00H R/WNote

Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>

TMC51 TCE51 TMC516 0 0 LVS51 LVR51 TMC511 TOE51

TCE51 TM51 count operation control

0 After clearing to 0, count operation disabled (counter stopped)

1 Count operation start

TMC516 TM51 operating mode selection

0 Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM51 and CR51

1 PWM (free-running) mode

LVS51 LVR51 Timer output F/F status setting

0 0 No change

0 1 Timer output F/F reset (0)

1 0 Timer output F/F set (1)

1 1 Setting prohibited

In other modes (TMC516 = 0) In PWM mode (TMC516 = 1) TMC511

Timer F/F control Active level selection

0 Inversion operation disabled Active-high

1 Inversion operation enabled Active-low

TOE51 Timer output control

0 Output disabled (TM51 output is low level)

1 Output enabled

Note Bits 2 and 3 are write-only.

Cautions 1. The settings of LVS5n and LVR5n are valid in other than PWM mode.

2. Perform <1> to <4> below in the following order, not at the same time.

<1> Set TMC5n1, TMC5n6: Operation mode setting

<2> Set TOE5n to enable output: Timer output enable

<3> Set LVS5n, LVR5n (see Caution 1): Timer F/F setting

<4> Set TCE5n

3. Stop operation before rewriting TMC5n6.

Remarks 1. In PWM mode, PWM output is made inactive by clearing TCE5n to 0.

2. If LVS5n and LVR5n are read, the value is 0.

3. The values of the TMC5n6, LVS5n, LVR5n, TMC5n1, and TOE5n bits are reflected at the TO5n pin

regardless of the value of TCE5n.

4. n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 171

(3) Port mode registers 1 and 3 (PM1, PM3)

These registers set port 1 and 3 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P17/TO50/TI50 and P33/TO51/TI51/INTP4 pins for timer output, set PM17 and PM33 and the

output latches of P17 and P33 to 0.

When using the P17/TO50/TI50 and P33/TO51/TI51/INTP4 pins for timer input, set PM17 and PM33 to 1. The

output latches of P17 and P33 at this time may be 0 or 1.

PM1 and PM3 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets these registers to FFH.

Figure 7-9. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)

Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10

PM1n P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

0 Output mode (output buffer on)

1 Input mode (output buffer off)

Figure 7-10. Format of Port Mode Register 3 (PM3)

Address: FF23H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PM3 1 1 1 1 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30

PM3n P3n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 3)

0 Output mode (output buffer on)

1 Input mode (output buffer off)

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

172

7.4 Operations of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51

7.4.1 Operation as interval timer

8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as an interval timer that generates interrupt requests repeatedly at intervals

of the count value preset to 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n).

When the count value of 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) matches the value set to CR5n, counting continues with the

TM5n value cleared to 0 and an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated.

The count clock of TM5n can be selected with bits 0 to 2 (TCL5n0 to TCL5n2) of timer clock selection register 5n

(TCL5n).

Setting

<1> Set each register.

• TCL5n: Select the count clock.

• CR5n: Compare value

• TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n

and CR5n.

(TMC5n = 0000×××0B × = Don’t care)

<2> After TCE5n = 1 is set, the count operation starts.

<3> If the values of TM5n and CR5n match, INTTM5n is generated (TM5n is cleared to 00H).

<4> INTTM5n is generated repeatedly at the same interval. Clear TCE5n to 0 to stop the count operation.

Caution Do not write other values to CR5n during operation.

Figure 7-11. Interval Timer Operation Timing (1/2)

(a) Basic operation

t

Count clock

TM5n count value

CR5n

TCE5n

INTTM5n

Count start Clear Clear

00H 01H N 00H 01H N 00H 01H N

NNNN

Interrupt acknowledged Interrupt acknowledged

Interval timeInterval time

Remark Interval time = (N + 1) × t

N = 01H to FEH

n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 173

Figure 7-11. Interval Timer Operation Timing (2/2)

(b) When CR5n = 00H

t

Interval time

Count clock

TM5n

CR5n

TCE5n

INTTM5n

00H 00H 00H

00H 00H

(c) When CR5n = FFH

t

Count clock

TM5n

CR5n

TCE5n

INTTM5n

01H FEH FFH 00H FEH FFH 00H

FFHFFHFFH

Interval time

Interrupt

acknowledged

Interrupt acknowledged

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

174

7.4.2 Operation as external event counter

The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses to be input to TI5n by 8-bit timer counter 5n

(TM5n).

TM5n is incremented each time the valid edge specified by timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) is input.

Either the rising or falling edge can be selected.

When the TM5n count value matches the value of 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n), TM5n is cleared to 0

and an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated.

Whenever the TM5n value matches the value of CR5n, INTTM5n is generated.

Setting

<1> Set each register.

• Set the port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 1.

• TCL5n: Select TI5n input edge.

TI5n falling edge → TCL5n = 00H

TI5n rising edge → TCL5n = 01H

• CR5n: Compare value

• TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on match of TM5n and

CR5n, disable the timer F/F inversion operation, disable timer output.

(TMC5n = 0000××00B × = Don’t care)

<2> When TCE5n = 1 is set, the number of pulses input from TI5n is counted.

<3> When the values of TM5n and CR5n match, INTTM5n is generated (TM5n is cleared to 00H).

<4> After these settings, INTTM5n is generated each time the values of TM5n and CR5n match.

Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: PM17

8-bit timer/event counter 51: PM33

Figure 7-12. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified)

TI5n

TM5n count value

CR5n

INTTM5n

00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H N – 1 N 00H 01H 02H 03H

N

Count start

Remark N = 00H to FFH

n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 175

7.4.3 Square-wave output operation

A square wave with any selected frequency is output at intervals determined by the value preset to 8-bit timer

compare register 5n (CR5n).

The TO5n pin output status is inverted at intervals determined by the count value preset to CR5n by setting bit 0

(TOE5n) of 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) to 1. This enables a square wave with any selected

frequency to be output (duty = 50%).

Setting

<1> Set each register.

• Clear the port output latch (P17 or P33)Note and port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 0.

• TCL5n: Select the count clock.

• CR5n: Compare value

• TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n and

CR5n.

LVS5n LVR5n Timer Output F/F Status Setting

1 0 High-level output

0 1 Low-level output

Timer output F/F inversion enabled

Timer output enabled

(TMC5n = 00001011B or 00000111B)

<2> After TCE5n = 1 is set, the count operation starts.

<3> The timer output F/F is inverted by a match of TM5n and CR5n. After INTTM5n is generated, TM5n is

cleared to 00H.

<4> After these settings, the timer output F/F is inverted at the same interval and a square wave is output from

TO5n.

The frequency is as follows.

Frequency = 1/2t (N + 1)

(N: 00H to FFH)

Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: P17, PM17

8-bit timer/event counter 51: P33, PM33

Caution Do not write other values to CR5n during operation.

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

176

Figure 7-13. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing

Count clock

TM5n count value 00H 01H 02H N − 1N

N

00H N − 1 N 00H01H 02H

CR5n

TO5n

Note

t

Count start

Note The initial value of TO5n output can be set by bits 2 and 3 (LVR5n, LVS5n) of 8-bit timer mode control

register 5n (TMC5n).

7.4.4 PWM output operation

8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as a PWM output when bit 6 (TMC5n6) of 8-bit timer mode control register 5n

(TMC5n) is set to 1.

The duty pulse determined by the value set to 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n) is output from TO5n.

Set the active level width of the PWM pulse to CR5n; the active level can be selected with bit 1 (TMC5n1) of

TMC5n.

The count clock can be selected with bits 0 to 2 (TCL5n0 to TCL5n2) of timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n).

PWM output can be enabled/disabled with bit 0 (TOE5n) of TMC5n.

Caution In PWM mode, make the CR5n rewrite period 3 count clocks of the count clock (clock selected by

TCL5n) or more.

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 177

(1) PWM output basic operation

Setting

<1> Set each register.

• Clear the port output latch (P17 or P33)Note and port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 0.

• TCL5n: Select the count clock.

• CR5n: Compare value

• TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select PWM mode.

The timer output F/F is not changed.

TMC5n1 Active Level Selection

0 Active-high

1 Active-low

Timer output enabled

(TMC5n = 01000001B or 01000011B)

<2> The count operation starts when TCE5n = 1.

Clear TCE5n to 0 to stop the count operation.

Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: P17, PM17

8-bit timer/event counter 51: P33, PM33

PWM output operation

<1> PWM output (output from TO5n) outputs an inactive level until an overflow occurs.

<2> When an overflow occurs, the active level is output. The active level is output until CR5n matches the

count value of 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n).

<3> After the CR5n matches the count value, the inactive level is output until an overflow occurs again.

<4> Operations <2> and <3> are repeated until the count operation stops.

<5> When the count operation is stopped with TCE5n = 0, PWM output becomes inactive.

For details of timing, see Figures 7-14 and 7-15.

The cycle, active-level width, and duty are as follows.

• Cycle = 28t

• Active-level width = Nt

• Duty = N/28

(N = 00H to FFH)

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

178

Figure 7-14. PWM Output Operation Timing

(a) Basic operation (active level = H)

Count clock

TM5n

CR5n

TCE5n

INTTM5n

TO5n

00H 01H FFH 00H 01H 02H

N

N + 1

FFH 00H 01H 02H

M

00H

N

<2> Active level

<1> <3> Inactive level Active level

<5>

t

(b) CR5n = 00H

Count clock

TM5n

CR5n

TCE5n

INTTM5n

TO5n

Inactive level Inactive level

01H00H FFH 00H 01H 02H

N

N + 1

FFH 00H 01H 02H

M

00H

00H

N + 2

L

t

(c) CR5n = FFH

TM5n

CR5n

TCE5n

INTTM5n

TO5n

01H00H FFH 00H 01H 02H

N

N + 1

FFH 00H 01H 02H

M

00H

FFH

N + 2

Inactive level Active level

Inactive level

Active level Inactive level

t

Remarks 1. <1> to <3> and <5> in Figure 7-14 (a) correspond to <1> to <3> and <5> in PWM output operation in

7.4.4 (1) PWM output basic operation.

2. n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 179

(2) Operation with CR5n changed

Figure 7-15. Timing of Operation with CR5n Changed

(a) CR5n value is changed from N to M before clock rising edge of FFH

→ Value is transferred to CR5n at overflow immediately after change.

Count clock

TM5n

CR5n

TCE5n

INTTM5n

TO5n

<1> CR5n change (N → M)

N

N + 1 N + 2

FFH 00H 01H

M

M + 1 M + 2

FFH 00H 01H 02H

M

M + 1 M + 2

N

02H

M

H

<2>

t

(b) CR5n value is changed from N to M after clock rising edge of FFH

→ Value is transferred to CR5n at second overflow.

Count clock

TM5n

CR5n

TCE5n

INTTM5n

TO5n

N

N + 1 N + 2

FFH 00H 01H

N

N + 1 N + 2

FFH 00H 01H 02H

N

02H

N

H

M

M

M + 1 M + 2

<1> CR5n change (N → M) <2>

t

Caution When reading from CR5n between <1> and <2> in Figure 7-15, the value read differs from the

actual value (read value: M, actual value of CR5n: N).

CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

180

7.5 Cautions for 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51

(1) Timer start error

An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be generated after timer start.

This is because 8-bit timer counters 50 and 51 (TM50, TM51) are started asynchronously to the count clock.

Figure 7-16. 8-Bit Timer Counter 5n Start Timing

Count clock

TM5n count value 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H

Timer start

Remark n = 0, 1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 181

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

8.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1

8-bit timers H0 and H1 have the following functions.

• Interval timer

• PWM output mode

• Square-wave output

• Carrier generator mode (8-bit timer H1 only)

8.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1

8-bit timers H0 and H1 include the following hardware.

Table 8-1. Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1

Item Configuration

Timer register 8-bit timer counter Hn

Registers 8-bit timer H compare register 0n (CMP0n)

8-bit timer H compare register 1n (CMP1n)

Timer output TOHn

Control registers 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)

8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)Note

Port mode register 1 (PM1)

Port register 1 (P1)

Note 8-bit timer H1 only

Remark n = 0, 1

Figures 8-1 and 8-2 show the block diagrams.

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

182

Figure 8-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer H0

TMHE0

CKS02

CKS01

CKS00

TMMD01 TMMD00

TOLEV0

TOEN0

TOH0/P15

INTTMH0

fX

fX/2

fX/22

fX/26

fX/210

1

0

F/F

R

32

PM15

Match

Internal bus

8-bit timer H mode control register 0

(TMHMD0)

8-bit timer H

compare register

10 (CMP10)

Decoder

Selector

Interrupt

generator

Output

controller

Level

inversion

PWM mode signal

Timer H enable signal

Clear

8-bit timer H

compare register

00 (CMP00)

Output latch

(P15)

8-bit timer/

event counter 50

output

Selector

8-bit timer

counter H0

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 183

Figure 8-2. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer H1

Match

Internal bus

TMHE1

CKS12

CKS11

CKS10

TMMD11 TMMD10

TOLEV1

TOEN1

8-bit timer H

compare

register 11

(CMP11)

Decoder

TOH1/

INTP5/

P16

8-bit timer H carrier

control register 1

(TMCYC1)

INTTMH1

INTTM51

Selector

fX

fX/22

fX/24

fX/26

fX/212

fR/27

Interrupt

generator

Output

controller

Level

inversion

PM16

Output latch

(P16)

1

0

F/F

R

PWM mode signal

Carrier generator mode signal

Timer H enable signal

3 2

8-bit timer H

compare

register 01

(CMP01)

8-bit timer

counter H1

Clear

RMC1

NRZB1

NRZ1

Reload/

interrupt control

8-bit timer H mode control

register 1 (TMHMD1)

Selector

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

184

(1) 8-bit timer H compare register 0n (CMP0n)

This register can be read/written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 8-3. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Compare Register 0n (CMP0n)

Symbol

CMP0n

(n = 0, 1)

Address: FF18H (CMP00), FF1AH (CMP01) After reset: 00H R/W

765432 1 0

Caution CMP0n cannot be rewritten during timer count operation.

(2) 8-bit timer H compare register 1n (CMP1n)

This register can be read/written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 8-4. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Compare Register 1n (CMP1n)

Symbol

CMP1n

(n = 0, 1)

Address: FF19H (CMP10), FF1BH (CMP11) After reset: 00H R/W

765432 1 0

CMP1n can be rewritten during timer count operation.

An interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated if the timer count value and CMP1n value match after setting

CMP1n in carrier generator mode. The timer count value is cleared at the same time. If the CMP1n value is rewritten

during timer operation, transferring is performed at the timing at which the count value and CMP1n value match. If the

transfer timing and writing from CPU to CMP1n conflict, transfer is not performed.

Caution In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set CMP1n when starting the

timer count operation (TMHEn = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn = 0) (be

sure to set again even if setting the same value to CMP1n).

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 185

8.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1

The following four registers are used to control 8-bit timers H0 and H1.

• 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)

• 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)Note

• Port mode register 1 (PM1)

• Port register 1 (P1)

Note 8-bit timer H1 only

(1) 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)

This register controls the mode of timer H.

This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

186

Figure 8-5. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 0 (TMHMD0)

TMHE0

Stops timer count operation (counter is cleared to 0)

Enables timer count operation (count operation started by inputting clock)

TMHE0

0

1

Timer operation enable

TMHMD0 CKS02 CKS01 CKS00 TMMD01 TMMD00 TOLEV0 TOEN0

Address: FF69H After reset: 00H R/W

fX

fX/2

fX/22

fX/26

fX/210

TM50 outputNote 2

CKS02

0

0

0

0

1

1

CKS01

0

0

1

1

0

0

CKS00

0

1

0

1

0

1

(10 MHz)

(5 MHz)

(2.5 MHz)

(156.25 kHz)

(9.77 kHz)

Count clock (fCNT) selectionNote 1

Setting prohibitedOther than above

Interval timer mode

PWM output mode

Setting prohibited

TMMD01

0

1

TMMD00

0

0

Timer operation mode

Low level

High level

TOLEV0

0

1

Timer output level control (in default mode)

Disables output

Enables output

TOEN0

0

1

Timer output control

Other than above

<7> 6543 2 <1> <0>

Notes 1. Set the count clock to satisfy the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock or base clo ck ≤ 10 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Count clock or base clo ck ≤ 8.38 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Count clock or base clo ck ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Count clock or base clo ck ≤ 2.5 MHz

2. When selectin g the TM50 output as the count clock, note the following.

• PWM mode (TMC506 = 1)

Set the clock to the 50% duty and start the 8-bit timer/event counter 50 operation beforehand.

• Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM50 and CR50 (TMC506 = 0)

Enable the timer F/F inversion operation (TMC501 = 1) and start the 8-bit timer/event counter 50

operation beforeha nd.

In the both modes, it is not necessary to enable the timer output for the TO50 pin.

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 187

Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the

Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the

Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer H0 is not guaranteed.

2. When TMHE0 = 1, setting the other bits of the TMHMD0 register is prohibited.

3. In the PWM output mode, be sure to set 8-bit timer H compare register 10 (CMP10) when

starting the timer count operation (TMHE0 = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped

(TMHE0 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMP10 register).

Remarks 1. f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

2. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz.

Figure 8-6. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 1 (TMHMD1)

TMHE1

Stops timer count operation (counter is cleared to 0)

Enables timer count operation (count operation started by inputting clock)

TMHE1

0

1

Timer operation enable

TMHMD1 CKS12 CKS11 CKS10 TMMD11 TMMD10 TOLEV1 TOEN1

Address: FF6CH After reset: 00H R/W

f

X

f

X

/2

2

f

X

/2

4

f

X

/2

6

f

X

/2

12

f

R

/2

7

CKS12

0

0

0

0

1

1

CKS11

0

0

1

1

0

0

CKS10

0

1

0

1

0

1

(10 MHz)

(2.5 MHz)

(625 kHz)

(156.25 kHz)

(2.44 kHz)

(1.88 kHz (TYP.))

Count clock (f

CNT

) selection

Note

Setting prohibitedOther than above

Interval timer mode

Carrier generator mode

PWM output mode

Setting prohibited

TMMD11

0

0

1

1

TMMD10

0

1

0

1

Timer operation mode

Low level

High level

TOLEV1

0

1

Timer output level control (in default mode)

Disables output

Enables output

TOEN1

0

1

Timer output control

<7> 6543 2 <1> <0>

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

188

Note Set the count clock to satisfy the following conditions.

V

DD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 10 MHz

VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 8.38 MHz

V

DD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 5 MHz

V

DD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 2.5 MHz

Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the

Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the count clock is the

Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer H1 is not guaranteed (except when CKS12,

CKS11, CKS10 = 1, 0, 1 (fR/27)).

2. When TMHE1 = 1, setting the other bits of the TMHMD1 register is prohibited.

3. In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set 8-bit timer H compare

register 11 (CMP11) when starting the timer count operation (TMHE1 = 1) after the timer count

operation was stopped (TMHE1 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the

CMP11 register).

4. When the carrier generator mode is used, set so that the count clock frequency of TMH1

becomes more than 6 times the count clock frequency of TM51.

Remarks 1. f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

2. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

3. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fX = 10 MHz, fR = 240 kHz (TYP.).

(2) 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)

This register controls the remote control output and carrier pulse output status of 8-bit timer H1.

This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 8-7. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Carrier Control Register 1 (TMCYC1)

0TMCYC1 0 0 0 0 RMC1 NRZB1 NRZ1

Address: FF6DH After reset: 00H R/WNote

Low-level output

High-level output

Low-level output

Carrier pulse output

RMC1

0

0

1

1

NRZB1

0

1

0

1

Remote control output

Carrier output disabled status (low-level status)

Carrier output enabled status

(RMC1 = 1: Carrier pulse output, RMC1 = 0: High-level status)

NRZ1

0

1

Carrier pulse output status flag

< >

Note Bit 0 is read-only.

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 189

(3) Port mode register 1 (PM1)

This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P15/TOH0 and P16/TOH1/INTP5 pins for timer output, clear PM15 and PM16 and the output

latches of P15 and P16 to 0.

PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to FFH.

Figure 8-8. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)

Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10

PM1n P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

0 Output mode (output buffer on)

1 Input mode (output buffer off)

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

190

8.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1

8.4.1 Operation as interval timer/square-wave output

When 8-bit timer counter Hn and compare register 0n (CMP0n) match, an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is

generated and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H.

Compare register 1n (CMP1n) is not used in interval timer mode. Since a match of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the

CMP1n register is not detected even if the CMP1n register is set, timer output is not affected.

By setting bit 0 (TOENn) of timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) to 1, a square wave of any frequency (duty = 50%)

is output from TOHn.

(1) Usage

Generates the INTTMHn signal repeatedly at the same interval.

<1> Set each register.

Figure 8-9. Register Setting During Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation

(i) Setting timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)

0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0 0 0/1 0/1

TMMDn0 TOLEVn TOENnCKSn1CKSn2TMHEn

TMHMDn

CKSn0 TMMDn1

Timer output setting

Timer output level inversion setting

Interval timer mode setting

Count clock (fCNT) selection

Count operation stopped

(ii) CMP0n register setting

• Compare value (N)

<2> Count operation starts when TMHEn = 1.

<3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the INTTMHn signal is generated

and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H.

Interval time = (N +1)/fCNT

<4> Subsequently, the INTTMHn signal is generated at the same interval. To stop the count operation, clear

TMHEn to 0.

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 191

(2) Timing chart

The timing of the interval timer/square-wave output operation is shown below.

Figure 8-10. Timing of Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation (1/2)

(a) Basic operation

00H

Count clock

Count start

8-bit timer counter Hn

CMP0n

TMHEn

INTTMHn

TOHn

01H N

Clear

Interval time

Clear

N

00H 01H N 00H 01H 00H

<2>

Level inversion,

match interrupt occurrence,

8-bit timer counter Hn clear

<2>

Level inversion,

match interrupt occurrence,

8-bit timer counter Hn clear

<3><1>

<1> The count operation is enabled by setting the TMHEn bit to 1. The count clock starts counting no more than

1 clock after the operation is enabled.

<2> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn

is cleared, the TOHn output level is inverted, and the INTTMHn signal is output.

<3> The INTTMHn signal and TOHn output become inactive by clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn

operation. If these are inactive from the first, the level is retained.

Remark n = 0, 1

N = 01H to FEH

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

192

Figure 8-10. Timing of Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation (2/2)

(b) Operation when CMP0n = FFH

00H

Count clock

Count start

8-bit timer counter Hn

CMP0n

TMHEn

INTTMHn

TOHn

01H FEH

Clear

Clear

FFH 00H FEH FFH 00H

FFH

Interval time

(c) Operation when CMP0n = 00H

Count clock

Count start

8-bit timer counter Hn

CMP0n

TMHEn

INTTMHn

TOHn

00H

00H

Interval time

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 193

8.4.2 Operation as PWM output mode

In PWM output mode, a pulse with an arbitrary duty and arbitrary cycle can be output.

8-bit timer compare register 0n (CMP0n) controls the cycle of timer output (TOHn). Rewriting the CMP0n register

during timer operation is prohibited.

8-bit timer compare register 1n (CMP1n) controls the duty of timer output (TOHn). Rewriting the CMP1n register

during timer operation is possible.

The operation in PWM output mode is as follows.

TOHn output becomes active and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 0 when 8-bit timer counter Hn and the

CMP0n register match after the timer count is started. TOHn output becomes inactive when 8-bit timer counter Hn

and the CMP1n register match.

(1) Usage

In PWM output mode, a pulse for which an arbitrary duty and arbitrary cycle can be set is output.

<1> Set each register.

Figure 8-11. Register Setting in PWM Output Mode

(i) Setting timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)

0 0/1 0/1 0/1 1 0 0/1 1

TMMDn0 TOLEVn TOENnCKSn1CKSn2TMHEn

TMHMDn

CKSn0 TMMDn1

Timer output enabled

Timer output level inversion setting

PWM output mode selection

Count clock (f

CNT

) selection

Count operation stopped

(ii) Setting CMP0n register

• Compare value (N): Cycle setting

(iii) Setting CMP1n register

• Compare value (M): Duty setting

Remarks 1. n = 0, 1

2. 00H ≤ CMP1n (M) < CMP0n (N) ≤ FFH

<2> The count operation starts when TMHEn = 1.

<3> The CMP0n register is the compare register that is to be compared first after counter operation is enabled.

When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared,

an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated, and TOHn output becomes active. At the same time,

the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn is changed from the CMP0n register to the

CMP1n register.

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

194

<4> When 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register match, TOHn output becomes inactive and the

compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn is changed from the CMP1n register to the

CMP0n register. At this time, 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not

generated.

<5> By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a pulse with an arbitrary duty can be obtained.

<6> To stop the count operation, set TMHEn = 0.

If the setting value of the CMP0n register is N, the setting value of the CMP1n register is M, and the count clock

frequency is fCNT, the PWM pulse output cycle and duty are as follows.

PWM pulse output cycle = (N+1)/fCNT

Duty = Active width : Total width of PWM = (M + 1) : (N + 1)

Cautions 1. In PWM output mode, three operation clocks (signal selected using the CKSn2 to CKSn0

bits of the TMHMDn register) are required to transfer the CMP1n register value after

rewriting the register.

2. Be sure to set the CMP1n register when starting the timer count operation (TMHEn = 1) after

the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the

same value to the CMP1n register).

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 195

(2) Timing chart

The operation timing in PWM output mode is shown below.

Caution Make sure that the CMP1n register setting value (M) and CMP0n register setting value (N) are

within the following range.

00H ≤ CMP1n (M) < CMP0n (N) ≤ FFH

Remark n = 0, 1

Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (1/4)

(a) Basic operation

Count clock

8-bit timer counter Hn

CMP0n

TMHEn

INTTMHn

TOHn

(TOLEVn = 0)

TOHn

(TOLEVn = 1)

00H 01H A5H 00H 01H 02H A5H 00H A5H 00H01H 02H

CMP1n

A5H

01H

<1> <2> <3> <4>

<1> The count operation is enabled by setting the TMHEn bit to 1. Start 8-bit timer counter Hn by masking one

count clock to count up. At this time, TOHn output remains inactive (when TOLEVn = 0).

<2> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the TOHn output level is inverted,

the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, and the INTTMHn signal is output.

<3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register match, the level of the TOHn output is

returned. At this time, the 8-bit timer counter value is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not output.

<4> Clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn operation makes the INTTMHn signal and TOHn output inactive.

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

196

Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (2/4)

(b) Operation when CMP0n = FFH, CMP1n = 00H

Count clock

8-bit timer counter Hn

CMP0n

TMHEn

INTTMHn

TOHn

(TOLEVn = 0)

00H 01H FFH 00H 01H 02H FFH 00H FFH 00H01H 02H

CMP1n

FFH

00H

(c) Operation when CMP0n = FFH, CMP1n = FEH

Count clock

8-bit timer counter Hn

CMP0n

TMHEn

INTTMHn

TOHn

(TOLEVn = 0)

00H 01H FEH FFH 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H

CMP1n

FFH

FEH

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 197

Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (3/4)

(d) Operation when CMP0n = 01H, CMP1n = 00H

Count clock

8-bit timer counter Hn

CMP0n

TMHEn

INTTMHn

TOHn

(TOLEVn = 0)

01H

00H 01H 00H 01H 00H 00H 01H 00H 01H

CMP1n 00H

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

198

Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (4/4)

(e) Operation by changing CMP1n (CMP1n = 01H → 03H, CMP0n = A5H)

Count clock

8-bit timer counter Hn

CMP0n

TMHEn

INTTMHn

TOHn

(TOLEVn = 0)

00H 01H 02H A5H 00H 01H 02H 03H A5H 00H 01H 02H 03H A5H 00H

CMP1n 01H

A5H

03H01H (03H)

<1> <3> <4>

<2> <2>'

<5> <6>

<1> The count operation is enabled by setting the TMHEn bit to 1. Start 8-bit timer counter Hn by masking one

count clock to count up. At this time, the TOHn output remains inactive (when TOLEVn = 0).

<2> The CMP1n register value can be changed during timer counter operation. This operation is asynchronous

to the count clock.

<3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn

is cleared, the TOHn output becomes active, and the INTTMHn signal is output.

<4> If the CMP1n register value is changed, the value is latched and not transferred to the register. When the

values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register before the change match, the value is transferred to

the CMP1n register and the CMP1n register value is changed (<2>’).

However, three count clocks or more are required from when the CMP1n register value is changed to when

the value is transferred to the register. If a match signal is generated within three count clocks, the changed

value cannot be transferred to the register.

<5> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register after the change match, the TOHn output

becomes inactive. 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not generated.

<6> Clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn operation makes the INTTMHn signal and TOHn output inactive.

Remark n = 0, 1

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 199

8.4.3 Carrier generator mode operation (8-bit timer H1 only)

The carrier clock generated by 8-bit timer H1 is output in the cycle set by 8-bit timer/event counter 51.

In carrier generator mode, the output of the 8-bit timer H1 carrier pulse is controlled by 8-bit timer/event counter 51,

and the carrier pulse is output from the TOH1 output.

(1) Carrier generation

In carrier generator mode, 8-bit timer H compare register 01 (CMP01) generates a low-level width carrier pulse

waveform and 8-bit timer H compare register 11 (CMP11) generates a high-level width carrier pulse waveform.

Rewriting the CMP11 register during 8-bit timer H1 operation is possible but rewriting the CMP01 register is

prohibited.

(2) Carrier output control

Carrier output is controlled by the interrupt request signal (INTTM51) of 8-bit timer/event counter 51 and the

NRZB1 and RMC1 bits of the 8-bit timer H carrier control register (TMCYC1). The relationship between the

outputs is shown below.

RMC1 Bit NRZB1 Bit Output

0 0 Low-level output

0 1 High-level output

1 0 Low-level output

1 1 Carrier pulse output

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

200

To control the carrier pulse output during a count operation, the NRZ1 and NRZB1 bits of the TMCYC1 register

have a master and slave bit configuration. The NRZ1 bit is read-only but the NRZB1 bit can be read and written.

The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with the 8-bit timer H1 count clock and output as the INTTM5H1 signal. The

INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal of the NRZ1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value is transferred to the

NRZ1 bit. The timing for transfer from the NRZB1 bit to the NRZ1 bit is as shown below.

Figure 8-13. Transfer Timing

8-bit timer H1

count clock

TMHE1

INTTM51

INTTM5H1

NRZ1

NRZB1

RMC1

1

1

10

00

<1>

<2>

<1> The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with the count clock of 8-bit timer H1 and is output as the INTTM5H1

signal.

<2> The value of the NRZB1 bit is transferred to the NRZ1 bit at the second clock from the rising edge of the

INTTM5H1 signal.

Cautions 1. Do not rewrite the NRZB1 bit again until at least the second clock after it has been rewritten,

or else the transfer from the NRZB1 bit to the NRZ1 bit is not guaranteed.

2. When 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in the carrier generator mode, an interrupt is

generated at the timing of <1>. When 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in a mode other

than the carrier generator mode, the timing of the interrupt generation differs.

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 201

(3) Usage

Outputs an arbitrary carrier clock from the TOH1 pin.

<1> Set each register.

Figure 8-14. Register Setting in Carrier Generator Mode

(i) Setting 8-bit timer H mode register 1 (TMHMD1)

0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0

Timer output enabled

Timer output level inversion setting

Carrier generator mode selection

Count clock (fCNT) selection

Count operation stopped

1 0/1 0/1

TMMD10 TOLEV1 TOEN1CKS11CKS12TMHE1

TMHMD1

CKS10 TMMD11

(ii) CMP01 register setting

• Compare value

(iii) CMP11 register setting

• Compare value

(iv) TMCYC1 register setting

• RMC1 = 1 ... Remote control output enable bit

• NRZB1 = 0/1 ... Carrier output enable bit

(v) TCL51 and TMC51 register setting

• Refer to 7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51.

<2> When TMHE1 = 1, 8-bit timer H1 starts counting.

<3> When TCE51 of 8-bit timer mode control register 51 (TMC51) is set to 1, 8-bit timer/event counter 51 starts

counting.

<4> After the count operation is enabled, the first compare register to be compared is the CMP01 register.

When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP01 register value match, the INTTMH1 signal

is generated, 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared, and at the same time, the compare register to be compared

with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register.

<5> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value match, the INTTMH1 signal

is generated, 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared, and at the same time, the compare register to be compared

with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register.

<6> By performing procedures <4> and <5> repeatedly, a carrier clock is generated.

<7> The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with the count clock of 8-bit timer H1 and output as the INTTM5H1

signal. The INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal for the NRZB1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value

is transferred to the NRZ1 bit.

<8> When the NRZ1 bit is high level, a carrier clock is output from the TOH1 pin.

<9> By performing the procedures above, an arbitrary carrier clock is obtained. To stop the count operation,

clear TMHE1 to 0.

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

202

If the setting value of the CMP01 register is N, the setting value of the CMP11 register is M, and the count clock

frequency is fCNT, the carrier clock output cycle and duty are as follows.

Carrier clock output cycle = (N + M + 2)/fCNT

Duty = High-level width : Carrier clock output width = ( M + 1) : (N + M + 2)

Cautions 1. Be sure to set the CMP11 register when starting the timer count operation (TMHE1 = 1) after

the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE1 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the

same value to the CMP11 register).

2. Set so that the count clock frequency of TMH1 becomes more than 6 times the count clock

frequency of TM51.

(4) Timing chart

The carrier output control timing is shown below.

Cautions 1. Set the values of the CMP01 and CMP11 registers in a range of 01H to FFH.

2. In the carrier generator mode, three operating clocks (signal selected by CKS12 to CKS10

bits of TMHMD1 register) or more are required from when the CMP11 register value is

changed to when the value is transferred to the register.

3. Be sure to set the RMC1 bit before the count operation is started.

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 203

Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (1/3)

(a) Operation when CMP01 = N, CMP11 = N

CMPn0

CMPn1

TMHEn

INTTMHn

Carrier clock

00H N 00H N 00H N 00H N 00H N 00H N

N

N

8-bit timer 5n

count clock

TM5n count value

CR5n

TCE5n

TOHn

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

INTTM5n

NRZBn

NRZn

Carrier clock

00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H 00H 01HL

L

INTTM5Hn

<1> <2>

<3> <4>

<5>

<6>

<7>

8-bit timer Hn

count clock

8-bit timer counter

Hn count value

<1> When TMHE1 = 0 and TCE51 = 0, 8-bit timer counter H1 operation is stopped.

<2> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer counter H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held

at the inactive level.

<3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, the first INTTMH1 signal

is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer

counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to

00H.

<4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP11 register value, the INTTMH1 signal is

generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer

counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to

00H. By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a carrier clock with duty fixed to 50% is generated.

<5> When the INTTM51 signal is generated, it is synchronized with the count clock of 8-bit timer H1 and output

as the INTTM5H1 signal.

<6> The INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal for the NRZB1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value is

transferred to the NRZ1 bit.

<7> When NRZ1 = 0 is set, the TOH1 output becomes low level.

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

204

Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (2/3)

(b) Operation when CMP01 = N, CMP11 = M

N

L

CMPn0

CMPn1

TMHEn

INTTMHn

Carrier clock

TM5n count value

00H N 00H 01H M 00H N 00H 01H M 00H 00HN

M

CR5n

TCE5n

TOHn

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

INTTM5n

NRZBn

NRZn

Carrier clock

00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H 00H 01HL

INTTM5Hn

<1> <2>

<3> <4>

<5>

<6> <7>

8-bit timer 5n

count clock

8-bit timer Hn

count clock

8-bit timer counter

Hn count value

<1> When TMHE1 = 0 and TCE51 = 0, 8-bit timer counter H1 operation is stopped.

<2> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer counter H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held

at the inactive level.

<3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, the first INTTMH1 signal

is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer

counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to

00H.

<4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP11 register value, the INTTMH1 signal is

generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer

counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to

00H. By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a carrier clock with duty fixed to other than 50% is

generated.

<5> When the INTTM51 signal is generated, it is synchronized with the count clock of 8-bit timer H1 and output

as the INTTM5H1 signal.

<6> A carrier signal is output at the first rising edge of the carrier clock if NRZ1 is set to 1.

<7> When NRZ1 = 0, the TOH1 output is held at the high level and is not changed to low level while the carrier

clock is high level (from <6> and <7>, the high-level width of the carrier clock waveform is guaranteed).

CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 205

Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (3/3)

(c) Operation when CMP11 is changed

8-bit timer H1

count clock

CMP01

TMHE1

INTTMH1

Carrier clock

00H 01H N 00H 01H 01H

M00H N 00H L 00H

<1>

<3>’

<4>

<3>

<2>

CMP11

<5>

M

N

L

M (L)

8-bit timer counter

H1 count value

<1> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer counter H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held

at the inactive level.

<2> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, 8-bit timer counter H1 is

cleared and the INTTMH1 signal is output.

<3> The CMP11 register can be rewritten during 8-bit timer H1 operation, however, the changed value (L) is

latched. The CMP11 register is changed when the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11

register value before the change (M) match (<3>’).

<4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value before the change (M) match,

the INTTMH1 signal is output, the carrier signal is inverted, and 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to 00H.

<5> The timing at which the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value match again is

indicated by the value after the change (L).

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

206

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER

9.1 Functions of Watch Timer

The watch timer has the following functions.

• Watch timer

• Interval timer

The watch timer and the interval timer can be used simultaneously.

Figure 9-1 shows the watch timer block diagram.

Figure 9-1. Watch Timer Block Diagram

f

X

/2

7

f

W

/2

4

f

W

/2

5

f

W

/2

6

f

W

/2

7

f

W

/2

8

f

W

/2

10

f

W

/2

11

f

W

/2

9

f

XT

INTWT

INTWTI

WTM0WTM1WTM2WTM3WTM4WTM5WTM6WTM7

f

W

Clear

11-bit prescaler

Clear

5-bit counter

Watch timer operation

mode register (WTM)

Internal bus

Selector

Selector

Selector

Selector

f

WX

/2

4

f

WX

/2

5

f

WX

Remark f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

f

XT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

f

W: Watch timer clock frequency

fWX: fW or fW/29

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 207

(1) Watch timer

When the X1 input clock or subsystem clock is used, interrupt requests (INTWT) are generated at preset

intervals.

Table 9-1. Watch Timer Interrupt Time

Interrupt Time When Operated at fXT = 32.768 kHz When Operated at fX = 10 MHz

24/fW 488

µ

s 205

µ

s

25/fW 977

µ

s 410

µ

s

213/fW 0.25 s 0.105 s

214/fW 0.5 s 0.210 s

Remark f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

f

XT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

fW: Watch timer clock frequency

(2) Interval timer

Interrupt requests (INTWTI) are generated at preset time intervals.

Table 9-2. Interval Timer Interval Time

Interval Time When Operated at fXT = 32.768 kHz When Operated at fX = 10 MHz

24/fW 488

µ

s 205

µ

s

25/fW 977

µ

s 410

µ

s

26/fW 1.95 ms 820

µ

s

27/fW 3.91 ms 1.64 ms

28/fW 7.81 ms 3.28 ms

29/fW 15.6 ms 6.55 ms

210/fW 31.3 ms 13.1 ms

211/fW 62.5 ms 26.2 ms

Remark f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

f

W: Watch timer clock frequency

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

208

9.2 Configuration of Watch Timer

The watch timer includes the following hardware.

Table 9-3. Watch Timer Configuration

Item Configuration

Counter 5 bits × 1

Prescaler 11 bits × 1

Control register Watch timer operation mode register (WTM)

9.3 Register Controlling Watch Timer

The watch timer is controlled by the watch timer operation mode register (WTM).

• Watch timer operation mode register (WTM)

This register sets the watch timer count clock, enables/disables operation, prescaler interval time, and 5-bit

counter operation control.

WTM is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears WTM to 00H.

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 209

Figure 9-2. Format of Watch Timer Operation Mode Register (WTM)

Address: FF6FH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0>

WTM WTM7 WTM6 WTM5 WTM4 WTM3 WTM2 WTM1 WTM0

WTM7 Watch timer count clock selection

0 fX/27 (78.125 kHz)

1 fXT (32.768 kHz)

WTM6 WTM5 WTM4 Prescaler interval time selection

0 0 0 24/fW

0 0 1 25/fW

0 1 0 26/fW

0 1 1 27/fW

1 0 0 28/fW

1 0 1 29/fW

1 1 0 210/fW

1 1 1 211/fW

WTM3 WTM2 Interrupt time selection

0 0 214/fW

0 1 213/fW

1 0 25/fW

1 1 24/fW

WTM1 5-bit counter operation control

0 Clear after operation stop

1 Start

WTM0 Watch timer operation enable

0 Operation stop (clear both prescaler and timer)

1 Operation enable

Caution Do not change the count clock and interval time (by setting bits 4 to 7 (WTM4 to WTM7) of WTM)

during watch timer operation.

Remarks 1. f

W: Watch timer clock frequency (fX/27 or fXT)

2. f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

3. f

XT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

4. Figures in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 10 MHz, fXT = 32.768 kHz.

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

210

9.4 Watch Timer Operations

9.4.1 Watch timer operation

The watch timer generates an interrupt request (INTWT) at a specific time interval by using the X1 input clock or

subsystem clock.

When bit 0 (WTM0) and bit 1 (WTM1) of the watch timer operation mode register (WTM) are set to 1, the count

operation starts. When these bits are cleared to 0, the 5-bit counter is cleared and the count operation stops.

When the interval timer is simultaneously operated, zero-second start can be achieved only for the watch timer by

clearing WTM1 to 0. In this case, however, the 11-bit prescaler is not cleared. Therefore, an error up to 29 × 1/fW

seconds occurs in the first overflow (INTWT) after zero-second start.

The interrupt request is generated at the following time intervals.

Table 9-4. Watch Timer Interrupt Time

WTM3 WTM2 Interrupt Time Selection When Operated at fXT = 32.768 kHz

(WTM7 = 1)

When Operated at fX = 10 MHz

(WTM7 = 0)

0 0 214/fW 0.5 s 0.210 s

0 1 213/fW 0.25 s 0.105 s

1 0 25/fW 977

µ

s 410

µ

s

1 1 24/fW 488

µ

s 205

µ

s

Remark fX: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

f

XT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

f

W: Watch timer clock frequency

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 211

9.4.2 Interval timer operation

The watch timer operates as interval timer which generates interrupt requests (INTWTI) repeatedly at an interval of

the preset count value.

The interval time can be selected with bits 4 to 6 (WTM4 to WTM6) of the watch timer operation mode register

(WTM). When bit 0 (WTM0) of the WTM is set to 1, the count operation starts. When this bit is cleared to 0, the count

operation stops.

Table 9-5. Interval Timer Interval Time

WTM6 WTM5 WTM4 Interval Time When Operated at

fXT = 32.768 kHz (WTM7 = 1)

When Operated at

fX = 10 MHz (WTM7 = 0)

0 0 0 24/fW 488

µ

s 205

µ

s

0 0 1 25/fW 977

µ

s 410

µ

s

0 1 0 26/fW 1.95 ms 820

µ

s

0 1 1 27/fW 3.91 ms 1.64 ms

1 0 0 28/fW 7.81 ms 3.28 ms

1 0 1 29/fW 15.6 ms 6.55 ms

1 1 0 210/fW 31.3 ms 13.1 ms

1 1 1 211/fW 62.5 ms 26.2 ms

Remark f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

f

W: Watch timer clock frequency

Figure 9-3. Operation Timing of Watch Timer/Interval Timer

0H

Start Overflow Overflow

5-bit counter

Count clock

Watch timer

interrupt INTWT

Interval timer

interrupt INTWTI

Interrupt time of watch timer (0.5 s)

Interval time

(T)

T

Interrupt time of watch timer (0.5 s)

n × T n × T

Remark fW: Watch timer clock frequency

n: The number of times of interval timer operations

Figures in parentheses are for operation with fW = 32.768 kHz (WTM7 = 1, WTM3, WTM2 = 0, 0).

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

212

9.5 Cautions for Watch Timer

When operation of the watch timer and 5-bit counter is enabled by the watch timer mode control register (WTM) (by

setting bits 0 (WTM0) and 1 (WTM1) of WTM to 1), the interval until the first interrupt request (INTWT) is generated

after the register is set does not exactly match the specification made with bits 2 and 3 (WTM2, WTM3) of WTM.

Subsequently, however, the INTWT signal is generated at the specified intervals.

Figure 9-4. Example of Generation of Watch Timer Interrupt Request (INTWT) (When Interrupt Period = 0.5 s)

It takes a maximum of 0.515625 seconds for the first INTWT to be generated (29 × 1/32768 = 0.015625 s longer).

INTWT is then generated every 0.5 seconds.

0.5 s0.5 s0.515625 s

WTM0, WTM1

INTWT

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 213

CHAPTER 10 WATCHD OG TIMER

10.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer

The watchdog timer is used to detect an ina dvertent program loop. If a program loo p is detected, an internal res et

signal is generated.

When a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer, bit 4 (WDTRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1.

For details of RESF, refer to CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION.

Table 10-1. Loop Detection Time of Watchdog Timer

Loop Detection Time

During Ring-OSC Clock Operation During X1 Input Clock Operation

211/fR (4.27 ms) 213/fXP (819.2

µ

s)

212/fR (8.53 ms) 214/fXP (1.64 ms)

213/fR (17.07 ms) 215/fXP (3.28 ms)

214/fR (34.13 ms) 216/fXP (6.55 ms)

215/fR (68.27 ms) 217/fXP (13.11 ms)

216/fR (136.53 ms) 218/fXP (26.21 ms)

217/fR (273.07 ms) 219/fXP (52.43 ms)

218/fR (546.13 ms) 220/fXP (104.86 ms)

Remarks 1. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

2. f

XP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

3. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fR = 480 kHz (MAX.) (standard

products, (A) grade products), fXP = 10 MHz.

The operation mode of the watchdog timer (WDT) is switched acc ording to the mask opt ion setting of the on-chip

Ring-OSC as shown in Table 10-2.

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

214

Table 10-2. Mask Option Setting and Watchdog Timer Operation Mode

Mask Option

Ring-OSC Cannot Be Stopped Ring-OSC Can Be Stopped by Software

Watchdog timer clock

source

Fixed to fRNote 1. • Selectable by software (fXP, fR or

stopped)

• When reset is released: fR

Operation after reset Operation starts with the maximum

interval (218/fR).

Operation starts with the maximum

interval (218/fR).

Operation mode selection The interval can be changed only

once.

The clock selection/interval can be

changed only once.

Features The watchdog timer cannot be

stopped.

The watchdog timer can be stopped in

standby modeNote 2.

Notes 1. As long as power is being supplied, Ring-OSC oscillation cannot be stopped (except in the reset

period).

2. The conditions under which clock supply to the watchdog timer is stopped differ depending on

the clock source of the watchdog timer.

<1> If the clock source is fXP, clock supply to the watchdog timer is stopped under the following

conditions.

• When fXP is stopped

• In HALT/STOP mode

• During oscillation stabilization time

<2> If the clock source is fR, clock supply to the watchdog timer is stopped under the following

conditions.

• If the CPU clock is fXP and if fR is stopped by software before execution of the STOP

instruction

• In HALT/STOP mode

Remarks 1. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

2. f

XP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 215

10.2 Configuration of Watchdog Timer

The watchdog timer includes the following hardware.

Table 10-3. Configuration of Watchdog Timer

Item Configuration

Control registers Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM)

Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE)

Figure 10-1. Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer

f

R

/2

2

Clock

input

controller

Output

controller Internal reset signal

WDCS2

Internal bus

WDCS1 WDCS0

f

XP

/2

4

WDCS3WDCS4

01 1

Selector

16-bit

counter or

2

13

/f

XP

to

2

20

/f

XP

2

11

/f

R

to

2

18

/f

R

Watchdog timer enable

register (WDTE) Watchdog timer mode

register (WDTM)

3

2

Clear

Mask option

(to set “Ring-OSC

cannot be stopped” or

“Ring-OSC can be

stopped by software”)

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

216

10.3 Registers Controlling Watchdog Timer

The watchdog timer is controlled by the following two registers.

• Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM)

• Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE)

(1) Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM)

This register sets the overflow time and operation clock of the watchdog timer.

This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction and can be read many times, but can be

written only once after reset is released.

RESET input sets this register to 67H.

Figure 10-2. Format of Watchdog Timer Mode Register (WDTM)

0

WDCS0

1

WDCS1

2

WDCS2

3

WDCS3

4

WDCS4

5

1

6

1

7

0

Symbol

WDTM

Address: FF98H After reset: 67H R/W

WDCS4Note 1 WDCS3Note 1 Operation clock selection

0 0 Ring-OSC clock (fR)

0 1 X1 input clock (fXP)

1 × Watchdog timer operation stopped

Overflow time setting WDCS2Note 2 WDCS1Note 2 WDCS0Note 2

During Ring-OSC clock

operation

During X1 input clock operation

0 0 0 211/fR (4.27 ms) 213/fXP (819.2

µ

s)

0 0 1 212/fR (8.53 ms) 214/fXP (1.64 ms)

0 1 0 213/fR (17.07 ms) 215/fXP (3.28 ms)

0 1 1 214/fR (34.13 ms) 216/fXP (6.55 ms)

1 0 0 215/fR (68.27 ms) 217/fXP (13.11 ms)

1 0 1 216/fR (136.53 ms) 218/fXP (26.21 ms)

1 1 0 217/fR (273.07 ms) 219/fXP (52.43 ms)

1 1 1 218/fR (546.13 ms) 220/fXP (104.86 ms)

Notes 1. If “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” is specified by a mask option, this cannot be set. The Ring-

OSC clock will be selected no matter what value is written.

2. Reset is released at the maximum cycle (WDCS2, 1, 0 = 1, 1, 1).

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 217

Cautions 1. If data is written to WDTM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to WDTM

when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is

stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

2. Set bits 7, 6, and 5 to 0, 1, and 1, respectively (when “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped”

is selected by a mask option, other values are ignored).

3. After reset is released, WDTM can be written only once by an 8-bit memory

manipulation instruction. If writing is attempted a second time, an internal reset

signal is generated. If the source clock to the watchdog timer is stopped, however,

an internal reset signal is generated when the source clock to the watchdog timer

resumes operation.

4. WDTM cannot be set by a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction.

5. If “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by the mask option and the

watchdog timer is stopped by setting WDCS4 to 1, the watchdog timer does not

resume operation even if WDCS4 is cleared to 0. In addition, the internal reset signal

is not generated.

Remarks 1. fR: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

2. f

XP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

3. ×: Don’t care

4. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at fR = 480 kHz (MAX.) (standard products, (A)

grade products), fXP = 10 MHz.

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

218

(2) Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE)

Writing ACH to WDTE clears the watchdog timer counter and starts counting again.

This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to 9AH.

Figure 10-3. Format of Watchdog Timer Enable Register (WDTE)

01234567

Symbol

WDTE

Address: FF99H After reset: 9AH R/W

Cautions 1. If a value other than ACH is written to WDTE, an internal reset signal is generated. If

the source clock to the watchdog timer is stopped, however, an internal reset signal

is generated when the source clock to the watchdog timer resumes operation.

2. If a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed for WDTE, an internal reset

signal is generated. If the source clock to the watchdog timer is stopped, however,

an internal reset signal is generated when the source clock to the watchdog timer

resumes operation.

3. The value read from WDTE is 9AH (this differs from the written value (ACH)).

The relationship between the watchdog timer operation and the internal reset signal generated by the watchdog

timer is shown below.

Table 10-4. Relationship Between Watchdog Timer Operation and

Internal Reset Signal Generated by Watchdog Timer

“Ring-OSC Can Be Stopped by Software” Is Selected by Mask Option

Watchdog Timer Stopped

Watchdog Timer

Operation

Internal

Reset Signal

Generation Cause

“Ring-OSC Cannot Be

Stopped by Software” Is

Selected by Mask

Option

(Watchdog Timer Is

Always Operating)

Watchdog Timer Is

Operating WDCS4 Is Set to 1 Source Clock to

Watchdog Timer Is

Stopped

Watchdog timer

overflows

Internal reset signal is

generated.

Internal reset signal is

generated.

− −

Write to WDTM for the

second time

Internal reset signal is

generated.

Internal reset signal is

generated.

Internal reset signal is

not generated and the

watchdog timer does

not resume operation.

Internal reset signal is

generated when the

source clock to the

watchdog timer

resumes operation.

Write other than “ACH”

to WDTE

Access WDTE by 1-bit

memory manipulation

instruction

Internal reset signal is

generated.

Internal reset signal is

generated.

Internal reset signal is

not generated.

Internal reset signal is

generated when the

source clock to the

watchdog timer

resumes operation.

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 219

10.4 Operation of Watchdog Timer

10.4.1 Watchdog timer operation when “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” is selected by mask option

The operation clock of watchdog timer is fixed to the Ring-OSC.

After reset is released, operation is started at the maximum cycle (bits 2, 1, and 0 (WDCS2, WDCS1, WDCS0) of

the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) = 1, 1, 1). The watchdog timer operation cannot be stopped.

The following shows the watchdog timer operation after reset release.

1. The status after reset release is as follows.

• Operation clock: Ring-OSC clock

• Cycle: 218/fR (546.13 ms: At operation with fR = 480 kHz (MAX.))

• Counting starts

2. The following should be set in the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) by an 8-bit memory manipulation

instructionNotes 1, 2.

• Cycle: Set using bits 2 to 0 (WDCS2 to WDCS0)

3. After the above procedures are executed, writing ACH to WDTE clears the count to 0, enabling recounting.

Notes 1. The operation clock (Ring-OSC clock) cannot be changed. If any value is written to bits 3 and 4

(WDCS3, WDCS4) of WDTM, it is ignored.

2. As soon as WDTM is written, the counter of the watchdog timer is cleared.

Caution In this mode, operation of the watchdog timer absolutely cannot be stopped even during STOP

instruction execution. For 8-bit timer H1 (TMH1), a division of the Ring-OSC can be selected as

the count source, so clear the watchdog timer using the interrupt request of TMH1 before the

watchdog timer overflows after STOP instruction execution. If this processing is not performed,

an internal reset signal is generated when the watchdog timer overflows after STOP instruction

execution.

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

220

10.4.2 Watchdog timer operation when “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by mask option

The operation clock of the watchdog timer can be selected as either the Ring-OSC clock or the X1 input clock.

After reset is released, operation is started at the maximum cycle (bits 2, 1, and 0 (WDCS2, WDCS1, WDCS0) of

the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) = 1, 1, 1).

The following shows the watchdog timer operation after reset release.

1. The status after reset release is as follows.

• Operation clock: Ring-OSC clock

• Cycle: 218/fR (546.13 ms: At operation with fR = 480 kHz (MAX.))

• Counting starts

2. The following should be set in the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) by an 8-bit memory manipulation

instructionNotes 1, 2, 3.

• Operation clock: Any of the following can be selected using bits 3 and 4 (WDCS3 and WDCS4).

Ring-OSC clock (fR)

X1 input clock (fXP)

Watchdog timer operation stopped

• Cycle: Set using bits 2 to 0 (WDCS2 to WDCS0)

3. After the above procedures are executed, writing ACH to WDTE clears the count to 0, enabling recounting.

Notes 1. As soon as WDTM is written, the counter of the watchdog timer is cleared.

2. Set bits 7, 6, and 5 to 0, 1, 1, respectively. Do not set the other values.

3. If the watchdog timer is stopped by setting WDCS4 and WDCS3 to 1 and ×, respectively, an internal

reset signal is not generated even if the following processing is performed.

• WDTM is written a second time.

• A 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed to WDTE.

• A value other than ACH is written to WDTE.

Caution In this mode, watchdog timer operation is stopped during HALT/STOP instruction execution.

After HALT/STOP mode is released, counting is started again using the operation clock of the

watchdog timer set before HALT/STOP instruction execution by WDTM. At this time, the counter

is not cleared to 0 but holds its value.

For the watchdog timer operation during STOP mode and HALT mode in each status, refer to 10.4.3 Watchdog

timer operation in STOP mode and 10.4.4 Watchdog timer operation in HALT mode.

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 221

10.4.3 Watchdog timer operation in STOP mode (when “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected

by mask option)

The watchdog timer stops counting during STOP instruction execution regardless of whether the X1 input clock or

Ring-OSC clock is being used.

(1) When the CPU clock and the watchdog timer operation clock are the X1 input clock (fXP) when the STOP

instruction is executed

When the STOP instruction is executed, operation of the watchdog timer is stopped. After STOP mode is

released, counting stops for the oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time select register

(OSTS) and then counting is started again using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this

time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value.

Figure 10-4. Operation in STOP Mode (CPU Clock and WDT Operation Clock: X1 Input Clock)

Watchdog timer Operating Operation stopped Operating

fR

fXP

CPU operation

Normal

operation STOP Oscillation stabilization time Normal operation

Oscillation

stopped

Oscillation stabilization time

(set by OSTS register)

(2) When the CPU clock is the X1 input clock (fXP) and the watchdog timer operation clock is the Ring-OSC

clock (fR) when the STOP instruction is executed

When the STOP instruction is executed, operation of the watchdog timer is stopped. After STOP mode is

released, counting is started again using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the

counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value.

Figure 10-5. Operation in STOP Mode

(CPU Clock: X1 Input Clock, WDT Operation Clock: Ring-OSC Clock)

Watchdog timer Operating

f

R

f

XP

CPU operation

Normal

operation STOP Oscillation stabilization time Normal operation

Oscillation

stopped

Oscillation stabilization time

(set by OSTS register)

Operating Operation stopped

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

222

(3) When the CPU clock is the Ring-OSC clock (fR) and the watchdog timer operation clock is the X1 input

clock (fXP) when the STOP instruction is executed

When the STOP instruction is executed, operation of the watchdog timer is stopped. After STOP mode is

released, counting is stopped until the timing of <1> or <2>, whichever is earlier, and then counting is started

using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds

its value.

<1> The oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) elapses.

<2> The CPU clock is switched to the X1 input clock (fXP).

Figure 10-6. Operation in STOP Mode

(CPU Clock: Ring-OSC Clock, WDT Operation Clock: X1 Input Clock)

<1> Timing when counting is started after the oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time

select register (OSTS) has elapsed

Watchdog timer Operating Operation stopped Operating

fR

fXP

CPU operation

17 clocks

Normal operation

(Ring-OSC clock) Clock supply stopped

Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock)

Oscillation

stopped

STOP

Oscillation stabilization time

(set by OSTS register)

<2> Timing when counting is started after the CPU clock is switched to the X1 input clock (fXP)

Operating Operation stopped Operating

f

R

f

XP

f

R

→ f

XP

Note

CPU operation

17 clocks

Normal operation

(Ring-OSC clock)

Clock supply

stopped

Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock)

Normal operation (X1 input clock)

CPU clock

Oscillation

stopped

STOP

Oscillation stabilization time

(set by OSTS register)

Watchdog timer

Note Confirm the oscillation stabilization time of fXP using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register

(OSTC).

CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 223

(4) When CPU clock and watchdog timer operation clock are the Ring-OSC clocks (fR) when the STOP

instruction is executed

When the STOP instruction is executed, operation of the watchdog timer is stopped. After STOP mode is

released, counting is started again using the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the

counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value.

Figure 10-7. Operation in STOP Mode (CPU Clock and WDT Operation Clock: Ring-OSC Clock)

Watchdog timer Operating

f

R

f

XP

CPU operation

17 clocks

Normal operation

(Ring-OSC clock) Clock supply stopped

Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock)

Oscillation

stopped

STOP

Oscillation stabilization time

(set by OSTS register)

Operating Operation stopped

10.4.4 Watchdog timer operation in HALT mode (when “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by

mask option)

The watchdog timer stops counting during HALT instruction execution regardless of whether the CPU clock is the

X1 input clock (fXP), Ring-OSC clock (fR), or subsystem clock (fXT), or whether the operation clock of the watchdog

timer is the X1 input clock (fXP) or Ring-OSC clock (fR). After HALT mode is released, counting is started again using

the operation clock before the operation was stopped. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its value.

Figure 10-8. Operation in HALT Mode

Watchdog timer

Operating

f

R

f

XP

CPU operation Normal operation

Operating

HALT

Operation stopped

f

XT

Normal operation

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

224

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

11.1 Functions of A/D Converter

The A/D converter converts an analog input signal into a digital value, and consists of up to eight channels (ANI0 to

ANI7) with a resolution of 10 bits.

The A/D converter has the following two functions.

(1) 10-bit resolution A/D conversion

10-bit resolution A/D conversion is carried out repeatedly for one channel selected from analog inputs ANI0 to

ANI7. Each time an A/D conversion operation ends, an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated.

(2) Power-fail detection function

This function is used to detect a voltage drop in a battery. The A/D conversion result (ADCR register value) and

power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) value are compared. INTAD is generated only when a

comparative condition has been matched.

Figure 11-1. Block Diagram of A/D Converter

AVREF

AVSS

INTAD

ADCS bit

3

ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 ADCS FR2 FR1 ADCEFR0

Sample & hold circuit

AVSS

Voltage comparator

Controller

A/D conversion result

register (ADCR)

Power-fail comparison

threshold register (PFT)

Analog input channel

specification register

(ADS)

A/D converter mode

register (ADM)

PFEN PFCM

Power-fail comparison

mode register (PFM)

Internal bus

Comparator

ANI0/P20

ANI1/P21

ANI2/P22

ANI3/P23

ANI4/P24

ANI5/P25

ANI6/P26

ANI7/P27

Successive

approximation

register (SAR)

Selector

Tap selector

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 225

11.2 Configuration of A/D Converter

The A/D converter includes the following hardware.

Table 11-1. Registers of A/D Converter Used on Software

Item Configuration

Registers A/D conversion result register (ADCR)

A/D converter mode register (ADM)

Analog input channel specification register (ADS)

Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM)

Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT)

(1) ANI0 to ANI7 pins

These are the analog input pins of the 8-channel A/D converter. They input analog signals to be converted into

digital signals. Pins other than the one selected as the analog input pin by the analog input channel specification

register (ADS) can be used as input port pins.

(2) Sample & hold circuit

The sample & hold circuit samples the input signal of the analog input pin selected by the selector when A/D

conversion is started, and holds the sampled analog input voltage value during A/D conversion.

(3) Series resistor string

The series resistor string is connected between AVREF and AVSS, and generates a voltage to be compared with

the analog input signal.

Figure 11-2. Circuit Configuration of Series Resistor String

AVREF

AVSS

P-ch

Series resistor string

ADCS

(4) Voltage comparator

The voltage comparator compares the sampled analog input voltage and the output voltage of the series resistor

string.

(5) Successive approximation register (SAR)

This register compares the sampled analog voltage and the voltage of the series resistor string, and converts the

result, starting from the most significant bit (MSB).

When the voltage value is converted into a digital value down to the least significant bit (LSB) (end of A/D

conversion), the contents of the SAR register are transferred to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

226

(6) A/D conversion result register (ADCR)

The result of A/D conversion is loaded from the successive approximation register (SAR) to this register each

time A/D conversion is completed, and the ADCR register holds the result of A/D conversion in its higher 10 bits

(the lower 6 bits are fixed to 0).

(7) Controller

When A/D conversion has been completed or when the power-fail detection function is used, this controller

compares the result of A/D conversion (value of the ADCR register) and the value of the power-fail comparison

threshold register (PFT). It generates the interrupt INTAD only if a specified comparison condition is satisfied as

a result.

(8) AVREF pin

This pin inputs an analog power/reference voltage to the A/D converter. Always use this pin at the same potential

as that of the VDD pin even when the A/D converter is not used.

The signal input to ANI0 to ANI7 is converted into a digital signal, based on the voltage applied across AVREF and

AVSS.

(9) AVSS pin

This is the ground potential pin of the A/D converter. Always use this pin at the same potential as that of the VSS

pin even when the A/D converter is not used.

(10) A/D converter mode register (ADM)

This register is used to set the conversion time of the analog input signal to be converted, and to start or stop the

conversion operation.

(11) Analog input channel specification register (ADS)

This register is used to specify the port that inputs the analog voltage to be converted into a digital signal.

(12) Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM)

This register is used to set the power-fail monitor mode.

(13) Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT)

This register is used to set the threshold value that is to be compared with the value of the A/D conversion result

register (ADCR).

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 227

11.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter

The following five registers are used to control the A/D converter.

• A/D converter mode register (ADM)

• Analog input channel specification register (ADS)

• A/D conversion result register (ADCR)

• Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM)

• Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT)

(1) A/D converter mode register (ADM)

This register sets the conversion time for analog input to be A/D converted, and starts/stops conversion.

ADM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 11-3. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register (ADM)

144 s

120 s

96 s

72 s

60 s

48 s

ADCE00FR0FR1FR20ADCS

A/D conversion operation control

Stops conversion operation

Enables conversion operation

ADCS

0

1

Conversion time selection

Note 1

288/f

X

240/f

X

192/f

X

144/f

X

120/f

X

96/f

X

Setting prohibited

FR2

0

0

0

1

1

1

Other than above

FR1

0

0

1

0

0

1

FR0

0

1

0

0

1

0

<0>123456<7>

ADM

Address: FF28H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

34.3 s

28.6 s

22.9 s

17.2 s

14.3 s

11.5 s

28.8 s

24.0 s

19.2 s

14.4 s

12.0 s

9.6 s

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

f

X

= 8.38 MHz

f

X

= 10 MHz

Boost reference voltage generator operation control

Note 2

Stops operation of reference voltage generator

Enables operation of reference voltage generator

ADCE

0

1

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

µ

f

X

= 2 MHz

Notes 1. Set so that the A/D conversion time is as follows.

• Standard products, (A) grade products: 14

µ

s or longer but less than 100

µ

s

• (A1) grade products: 14

µ

s or longer but less than 60

µ

s

• (A2) grade products: 16

µ

s or longer but less than 48

µ

s

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

228

Notes 2. A booster circuit is incorporated to realize low-voltage operation. The operation of the circuit that

generates the reference voltage for boosting is controlled by ADCE, and it takes 14

µ

s from operation

start to operation stabilization. Therefore, when ADCS is set to 1 after 14

µ

s or more has elapsed

from the time ADCE is set to 1, the conversion result at that time has priority over the first conversion

result.

Table 11-2. Settings of ADCS and ADCE

ADCS ADCE A/D Conversion Operation

0 0 Stop status (DC power consumption path does not exist)

0 1 Conversion waiting mode (only reference voltage generator consumes power)

1 0 Conversion mode (reference voltage generator operation stoppedNote)

1 1 Conversion mode (reference voltage generator operates)

Note Data of first conversion cannot be used.

Figure 11-4. Timing Chart When Boost Reference Voltage Generator Is Used

ADCE

Boost reference voltage

ADCS

Conversion

operation

Conversion

operation Conversion stopped

Conversion

waiting

Boost reference voltage generator: operating

Note

Note The time from the rising of the ADCE bit to the rising of the ADCS bit must be 14

µ

s or longer to stabilize the

reference voltage.

Cautions 1. A/D conversion must be stopped before rewriting bits FR0 to FR2 to values other than the

identical data.

2. For the sampling time of the A/D converter and the A/D conversion start delay time, see (11)

in 11.6 Cautions for A/D Converter.

3. If data is written to ADM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADM when the CPU is

operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

Remark f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 229

(2) Analog input channel specification register (ADS)

This register specifies the input port of the analog voltage to be A/D converted.

ADS can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 11-5. Format of Analog Input Channel Specification Register (ADS)

ADS0ADS1ADS200000

Analog input channel specification

ANI0

ANI1

ANI2

ANI3

ANI4

ANI5

ANI6

ANI7

ADS0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

ADS1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

ADS2

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

01234567

ADS

Address: FF29H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol

Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 of ADS to 0.

2. If data is written to ADS, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADS when the CPU is

operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

230

(3) A/D conversion result register (ADCR)

This register is a 16-bit register that stores the A/D conversion result. The lower six bits are fixed to 0. Each time

A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register, and is stored in

ADCR in order starting from the most significant bit (MSB). FF09H indicates the higher 8 bits of the conversion

result, and FF08H indicates the lower 2 bits of the conversion result.

ADCR can be read by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input makes ADCR undefined.

Figure 11-6. Format of A/D Conversion Result Register (ADCR)

Symbol

Address: FF08H, FF09H After reset: Undefined R

FF09H FF08H

000000

ADCR

Cautions 1. When writing to the A/D converter mode register (ADM) and analog input channel

specification register (ADS), the contents of ADCR may become undefined. Read the

conversion result following conversion completion before writing to ADM and ADS. Using

timing other than the above may cause an incorrect conversion result to be read.

2. If data is read from ADCR, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ADCR when the

CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 231

(4) Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM)

The power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) is used to compare the A/D conversion result (value of the

ADCR register) and the value of the power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT).

PFM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 11-7. Format of Power-Fail Comparison Mode Register (PFM)

000000PFCMPFEN

Power-fail comparison enable

Stops power-fail comparison (used as a normal A/D converter)

Enables power-fail comparison (used for power-fail detection)

PFEN

0

1

Power-fail comparison mode selection

Interrupt request signal (INTAD) generation

No INTAD generation

INTAD generation

No INTAD generation

Higher 8 bits of

ADCR ≥ PFT

Higher 8 bits of

ADCR < PFT

Higher 8 bits of

ADCR ≥ PFT

Higher 8 bits of

ADCR < PFT

PFCM

0

1

012345<6><7>

PFM

Address: FF2AH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol

Caution If data is written to PFM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to PFM when the CPU is

operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER

31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

(5) Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT)

The power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) is a register that sets the threshold value when comparing the

values with the A/D conversion result.

8-bit data in PFT is compared to the higher 8 bits (FF09H) of the 10-bit A/D conversion result.

PFT can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 11-8. Format of Power-Fail Comparison Threshold Register (PFT)

PFT0PFT1PFT2PFT3PFT4PFT5PFT6PFT7

01234567

PFT

Address: FF2BH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol

Caution If data is written to PFT, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to PFT when the CPU is

operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER

31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

232

11.4 A/D Converter Operations

11.4.1 Basic operations of A/D converter

<1> Select one channel for A/D conversion using the analog input channel specification register (ADS).

<2> Set ADCE to 1 and wait for 14

µ

s or longer.

<3> Set ADCS to 1 and start the conversion operation.

(<4> to <10> are operations performed by hardware.)

<4> The voltage input to the selected analog input channel is sampled by the sample & hold circuit.

<5> When sampling has been done for a certain time, the sample & hold circuit is placed in the hold state and the

input analog voltage is held until the A/D conversion operation has ended.

<6> Bit 9 of the successive approximation register (SAR) is set. The series resistor string voltage tap is set to

(1/2) AVREF by the tap selector.

<7> The voltage difference between the series resistor string voltage tap and analog input is compared by the

voltage comparator. If the analog input is greater than (1/2) AVREF, the MSB of SAR remains set to 1. If the

analog input is smaller than (1/2) AVREF, the MSB is reset to 0.

<8> Next, bit 8 of SAR is automatically set to 1, and the operation proceeds to the next comparison. The series

resistor string voltage tap is selected according to the preset value of bit 9, as described below.

• Bit 9 = 1: (3/4) AVREF

• Bit 9 = 0: (1/4) AVREF

The voltage tap and analog input voltage are compared and bit 8 of SAR is manipulated as follows.

• Analog input voltage ≥ Voltage tap: Bit 8 = 1

• Analog input voltage < Voltage tap: Bit 8 = 0

<9> Comparison is continued in this way up to bit 0 of SAR.

<10> Upon completion of the comparison of 10 bits, an effective digital result value remains in SAR, and the result

value is transferred to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR) and then latched.

At the same time, the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) can also be generated.

<11> Repeat steps <4> to <10>, until ADCS is cleared to 0.

To stop the A/D converter, clear ADCS to 0.

To restart A/D conversion from the status of ADCE = 1, start from <3>. To restart A/D conversion from the

status of ADCE = 0, however, start from <2>.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 233

Figure 11-9. Basic Operation of A/D Converter

Conversion time

Sampling time

Sampling A/D conversion

Undefined Conversion

result

A/D converter

operation

SAR

ADCR

INTAD

Conversion

result

A/D conversion operations are performed continuously until bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM)

is reset (0) by software.

If a write operation is performed to one of the ADM, analog input channel specification register (ADS), power-fail

comparison mode register (PFM), or power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) during an A/D conversion

operation, the conversion operation is initialized, and if the ADCS bit is set (1), conversion starts again from the

beginning.

RESET input makes the A/D conversion result register (ADCR) undefined.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

234

11.4.2 Input voltage and conversion results

The relationship between the analog input voltage input to the analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) and the theoretical

A/D conversion result (stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR)) is shown by the following expression.

SAR = INT ( × 1024 + 0.5)

ADCR = SAR × 64

or

(ADCR − 0.5) × ≤ VAIN < (ADCR + 0.5) ×

where, INT( ): Function which returns integer part of value in parentheses

V

AIN: Analog input voltage

AVREF: AVREF pin voltage

ADCR: A/D conversion result register (ADCR) value

SAR: Successive approximation register

Figure 11-10 shows the relationship between the analog input voltage and the A/D conversion result.

Figure 11-10. Relationship Between Analog Input Voltage and A/D Conversion Result

1023

1022

1021

3

2

1

0

FFC0H

FF80H

FF40H

00C0H

0080H

0040H

0000H

A/D conversion result

(ADCR)

SAR ADCR

1

2048

1

1024

3

2048

2

1024

5

2048

Input voltage/AV

REF

3

1024

2043

2048

1022

1024

2045

2048

1023

1024

2047

2048

1

VAIN

AVREF

AVREF

1024

AVREF

1024

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 235

11.4.3 A/D converter operation mode

The operation mode of the A/D converter is the select mode. One channel of analog input is selected from ANI0 to

ANI7 by the analog input channel specification register (ADS) and A/D conversion is executed.

In addition, the following two functions can be selected by setting bit 7 (PFEN) of the power-fail comparison mode

register (PFM).

• Normal 10-bit A/D converter (PFEN = 0)

• Power-fail detection function (PFEN = 1)

(1) A/D conversion operation (when PFEN = 0)

By setting bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1 and bit 7 (PFEN) of the power-fail

comparison mode register (PFM) to 0, the A/D conversion operation of the voltage, which is applied to the analog

input pin specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS), is started.

When A/D conversion has been completed, the result of the A/D conversion is stored in the A/D conversion result

register (ADCR), and an interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. Once the A/D conversion has started and

when one A/D conversion has been completed, the next A/D conversion operation is immediately started. The

A/D conversion operations are repeated until new data is written to ADS.

If ADM, ADS, the power-fail comparison mode register (PFM), and the power-fail comparison threshold register

(PFT) are rewritten during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion operation under execution is stopped and

restarted from the beginning.

If 0 is written to ADCS during A/D conversion, A/D conversion is immediately stopped. At this time, the

conversion result is undefined.

Figure 11-11. A/D Conversion Operation

ANIn

Rewriting ADM

ADCS = 1 Rewriting ADS ADCS = 0

ANIn

ANIn ANIn ANIm

ANIn ANIm ANIm

Stopped

A/D conversion

ADCR

INTAD

(PFEN = 0)

Conversion is stopped

Conversion result is not retained

Remarks 1. n = 0 to 7

2. m = 0 to 7

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

236

(2) Power-fail detection function (when PFEN = 1)

By setting bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1 and bit 7 (PFEN) of the power-fail

comparison mode register (PFM) to 1, the A/D conversion operation of the voltage applied to the analog input pin

specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS) is started.

When the A/D conversion has been completed, the result of the A/D conversion is stored in the A/D conversion

result register (ADCR), the values are compared with power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT), and an

interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated under the condition specified by bit 6 (PFCM) of PFM.

<1> When PFEN = 1 and PFCM = 0

The higher 8 bits of ADCR and PFT values are compared when A/D conversion ends and INTAD is only

generated when the higher 8 bits of ADCR ≥ PFT.

<2> When PFEN = 1 and PFCM = 1

The higher 8 bits of ADCR and PFT values are compared when A/D conversion ends and INTAD is only

generated when the higher 8 bits of ADCR < PFT.

Figure 11-12. Power-Fail Detection (When PFEN = 1 and PFCM = 0)

A/D conversion

Higher 8 bits

of ADCR

PFT

INTAD

(PFEN = 1)

ANIn ANIn

80H

80H

Condition matchFirst conversion

Note

7FH 80H

ANIn ANIn

Note If the conversion result is not read before the end of the next conversion after INTAD is output, the result is

replaced by the next conversion result.

Remark n = 0 to 7

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 237

The setting methods are described below.

• When used as A/D conversion operation

<1> Set bit 0 (ADCE) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1.

<2> Select the channel and conversion time using bits 2 to 0 (ADS2 to ADS0) of the analog input channel

specification register (ADS) and bits 5 to 3 (FR2 to FR0) of ADM.

<3> Set bit 7 (ADCS) of ADM to 1.

<4> An interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated.

<5> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).

<Change the channel>

<6> Change the channel using bits 2 to 0 (ADS2 to ADS0) of ADS.

<7> An interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated.

<8> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).

<Complete A/D conversion>

<9> Clear ADCS to 0.

<10> Clear ADCE to 0.

Cautions 1. Make sure the period of <1> to <3> is 14

µ

s or more.

2. It is no problem if the order of <1> and <2> is reversed.

3. <1> can be omitted. However, do not use the first conversion result after <3> in this

case.

4. The period from <4> to <7> differs from the conversion time set using bits 5 to 3 (FR2 to

FR0) of ADM. The period from <6> to <7> is the conversion time set using FR2 to FR0.

• When used as power-fail function

<1> Set bit 7 (PFEN) of the power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) to 1.

<2> Set power-fail comparison condition using bit 6 (PFCM) of PFM.

<3> Set bit 0 (ADCE) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1.

<4> Select the channel and conversion time using bits 2 to 0 (ADS2 to ADS0) of the analog input channel

specification register (ADS) and bits 5 to 3 (FR2 to FR0) of ADM.

<5> Set a threshold value to the power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT).

<6> Set bit 7 (ADCS) of ADM to 1.

<7> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).

<8> The higher 8 bits of ADCR and PFT are compared and an interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated

if the conditions match.

<Change the channel>

<9> Change the channel using bits 2 to 0 (ADS2 to ADS0) of ADS.

<10> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).

<11> The higher 8 bits of ADCR and the power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) are compared and an

interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated if the conditions match.

<Complete A/D conversion>

<12> Clear ADCS to 0.

<13> Clear ADCE to 0.

Cautions 1. Make sure the period of <3> to <6> is 14

µ

s or more.

2. It is no problem if order of <3>, <4>, and <5> is changed.

3. <3> must not be omitted if the power-fail function is used.

4. The period from <7> to <11> differs from the conversion time set using bits 5 to 3 (FR2 to

FR0) of ADM. The period from <9> to <11> is the conversion time set using FR2 to FR0.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

238

11.5 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table

Here, special terms unique to the A/D converter are explained.

(1) Resolution

This is the minimum analog input voltage that can be identified. That is, the percentage of the analog input

voltage per bit of digital output is called 1LSB (Least Significant Bit). The percentage of 1LSB with respect to the

full scale is expressed by %FSR (Full Scale Range).

1LSB is as follows when the resolution is 10 bits.

1LSB = 1/210 = 1/1024

= 0.098%FSR

Accuracy has no relation to resolution, but is determined by overall error.

(2) Overall error

This shows the maximum error value between the actual measured value and the theoretical value.

Zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral linearity error, and differential linearity errors that are combinations of

these express the overall error.

Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error in the characteristics table.

(3) Quantization error

When analog values are converted to digital values, a ±1/2LSB error naturally occurs. In an A/D converter, an

analog input voltage in a range of ±1/2LSB is converted to the same digital code, so a quantization error cannot

be avoided.

Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error, zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral

linearity error, and differential linearity error in the characteristics table.

Figure 11-13. Overall Error Figure 11-14. Quantization Error

Ideal line

0……0

1……1

Digital output

Overall

error

Analog input

AV

REF

0

0……0

1……1

Digital output

Quantization error

1/2LSB

1/2LSB

Analog input

0AVREF

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 239

(4) Zero-scale error

This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical

value (1/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 0......000 to 0......001.

If the actual measurement value is greater than the theoretical value, it shows the difference between the actual

measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (3/2LSB) when the digital output

changes from 0……001 to 0……010.

(5) Full-scale error

This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical

value (Full-scale − 3/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 1......110 to 1......111.

(6) Integral linearity error

This shows the degree to which the conversion characteristics deviate from the ideal linear relationship. It

expresses the maximum value of the difference between the actual measurement value and the ideal straight line

when the zero-scale error and full-scale error are 0.

(7) Differential linearity error

While the ideal width of code output is 1LSB, this indicates the difference between the actual measurement value

and the ideal value.

Figure 11-15. Zero-Scale Error Figure 11-16. Full-Scale Error

111

011

010

001 Zero-scale error

Ideal line

000

012 3 AV

REF

Digital output (Lower 3 bits)

Analog input (LSB)

111

110

101

000

0

AV

REF

AV

REF

–1AV

REF

–2AV

REF

–3

Digital output (Lower 3 bits)

Analog input (LSB)

Ideal line

Full-scale error

Figure 11-17. Integral Linearity Error Figure 11-18. Differential Linearity Error

0

AV

REF

Digital output

Analog input

Integral linearity

error

Ideal line

1……1

0……0

0

AV

REF

Digital output

Analog input

Differential

linearity error

1……1

0……0

Ideal 1LSB width

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

240

(8) Conversion time

This expresses the time since sampling has been started until digital output is obtained.

The sampling time is included in the conversion time in the c haracteristics table.

(9) Sampling time

This is the time the analog switch is turned on for the analog voltage to be sampled by the sample & hold circuit.

Sampling

time Conversion time

11.6 Cautions for A/D Conver ter

(1) Operating current in standby mode

The A/D converter stops operating in the standby mode. At this time, the operating current can be reduced by

clearing bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 0. (Refer to Figure 11-2.)

(2) Input range of ANI0 to ANI7

Observe the rated range of the ANI0 to ANI7 input voltage. If a voltage of AVREF or higher and AVSS or lower

(even in the range of absolute maximum rat ings) is input to an analog input channel, the converted value of that

channel becomes undefined. In additi on, the converted values of the other channels may also be affected.

(3) Conflicting operations

<1> Conflict between A/D conversion result register (ADCR) write and ADCR read by instruction upon the end

of conversion

ADCR read has priority. After the read operation, the new conversion result is written to ADCR.

<2> Conflict between ADCR write and A/D converter mode register (ADM) write or analog input channel

specification register (ADS) write upon the en d of conversion

ADM or ADS write has priority. ADCR write is not performed, nor is the conversion end interrupt signal

(INTAD) generated.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 241

(4) Noise countermeasures

To maintain the 10-bit resolution, attention must be paid to noise input to the AVREF pin and pins ANI0 to ANI7.

Because the effect increases in proportion to the output impedance of the analog input source, it is recommended

that a capacitor be connected externally, as shown in Figure 11-19, to reduce noise.

Figure 11-19. Analog Input Pin Connection

Reference

voltage

input

C = 100 to 1,000 pF

If there is a possibility that noise equal to or higher than AV

REF

or

equal to or lower than AV

SS

may enter, clamp with a diode with a

small V

F

value (0.3 V or lower).

AV

REF

AV

SS

V

SS

ANI0 to ANI7

(5) ANI0/P20 to ANI7/P27

<1> The analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) are also used as input port pins (P20 to P27).

When A/D conversion is performed with any of ANI0 to ANI7 selected, do not access port 2 while

conversion is in progress; otherwise the conversion resolution may be degraded.

<2> If a digital pulse is applied to the pins adjacent to the pins currently used for A/D conversion, the expected

value of the A/D conversion may not be obtained due to coupling noise. Therefore, do not apply a pulse to

the pins adjacent to the pin undergoing A/D conversion.

(6) Input impedance of ANI0 to ANI7 pins

In this A/D converter, the internal sampling capacitor is charged and sampling is performed for approx. one sixth

of the conversion time.

Since only the leakage current flows other than during sampling and the current for charging the capacitor also

flows during sampling, the input impedance fluctuates and has no meaning.

To perform sufficient sampling, however, it is recommended to make the output impedance of the analog input

source 10 kΩ or lower, or attach a capacitor of around 100 pF to the ANI0 to ANI7 pins (see Figure 11-19).

(7) AVREF pin input impedance

A series resistor string of several tens of kΩ is connected between the AVREF and AVSS pins.

Therefore, if the output impedance of the reference voltage source is high, this will result in a series connection to

the series resistor string between the AVREF and AVSS pins, resulting in a large reference voltage error.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

242

(8) Interrupt request flag (ADIF)

The interrupt request flag (ADIF) is not cleared even if the analog input channel specification register (ADS) is

changed.

Therefore, if an analog input pin is changed during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion result and ADIF for the

pre-change analog input may be set just before the ADS rewrite. Caution is therefore required since, at this time,

when ADIF is read immediately after the ADS rewrite, ADIF is set despite the fact A/D conversion for the post-

change analog input has not ended.

When A/D conversion is stopped and then resumed, clear ADIF before the A/D conversion operation is resumed.

Figure 11-20. Timing of A/D Conversion End Interrupt Request Generation

ADS rewrite

(start of ANIn conversion)

A/D conversion

ADCR

ADIF

ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm

ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm

ADS rewrite

(start of ANIm conversion)

ADIF is set but ANIm conversion

has not ended.

Remarks 1. n = 0 to 7

2. m = 0 to 7

(9) Conversion results just after A/D conversion start

The A/D conversion value immediately after A/D conversion starts may not fall within the rating range if the ADCS

bit is set to 1 within 14

µ

s after the ADCE bit was set to 1, or if the ADCS bit is set to 1 with the ADCE bit = 0.

Take measures such as polling the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) and removing the first

conversion result.

(10) A/D conversion result register (ADCR) read operation

When a write operation is performed to the A/D converter mode register (ADM) and analog input channel

specification register (ADS), the contents of ADCR may become undefined. Read the conversion result following

conversion completion before writing to ADM and ADS. Using a timing other than the above may cause an

incorrect conversion result to be read.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 243

(11) A/D converter sampling time and A/D conversion start delay time

The A/D converter sampling time differs depending on the set value of the A/D converter mode register (ADM).

The delay time exists until actual sampling is started after A/D converter operation is enabled.

When using a set in which the A/D conversion time must be strictly observed, care is required for the contents

shown in Figure 11-21 and Table 11-3.

Figure 11-21. Timing of A/D Converter Sampling and A/D Conversion Start Delay

ADCS

Wait

period

Conversion time Conversion time

A/D

conversion

start delay

time

Sampling

time

Sampling timing

INTAD

ADCS ← 1 or ADS rewrite

Sampling

time

Table 11-3. A/D Converter Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Start Delay Time (ADM Set Value)

A/D Conversion Start Delay TimeNote FR2 FR1 FR0 Conversion Time Sampling Time

MIN. MAX.

0 0 0 288/fX 40/fX 32/fX 36/fX

0 0 1 240/fX 32/fX 28/fX 32/fX

0 1 0 192/fX 24/fX 24/fX 28/fX

1 0 0 144/fX 20/fX 16/fX 18/fX

1 0 1 120/fX 16/fX 14/fX 16/fX

1 1 0 96/fX 12/fX 12/fX 14/fX

Other than above Setting prohibited − − −

Note The A/D conversion start delay time is the time after wait period. For the wait function, refer to CHAPTER 31

CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

Remark f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

(12) Register generating wait cycle

Do not read data from the ADCR register and do not write data to the ADM, ADS, PFM, and PFT registers while

the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and while oscillation of the clock input to X1 is stopped.

CHAPTER 11 A/D CONVERTER

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

244

(13) Internal equivalent circuit

The equivalent circuit of the analog input block is shown below.

Figure 11-22. Internal Equivalent Circuit of ANIn Pin

ANIn

C1 C2 C3

R1 R2

Table 11-4. Resistance and Capacitance Values of Equivalent Circuit (Reference Values)

AVREF R1 R2 C1 C2 C3

2.7 V 12 kΩ 8 kΩ 8 pF 3 pF 2 pF

4.5 V 4 kΩ 2.7 kΩ 8 pF 1.4 pF 2 pF

Remarks 1. The resistance and capacitance values shown in Table 11-4 are not guaranteed values.

2. n = 0 to 7

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 245

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

12.1 Functions of Serial Interface UART0

Serial interface UART0 has the following two modes.

(1) Operation stop mode

This mode is used when serial communication is not executed and can enable a reduction in the power

consumption.

For details, see 12.4.1 Operation stop mode.

(2) Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode

The functions of this mode are outlined below.

For details, see 12.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode and 12.4.3 Dedicated baud rate

generator.

• Two-pin configuration TXD0: Transmit data output pin

R

XD0: Receive data input pin

• Length of communication data can be selected from 7 or 8 bits.

• Dedicated on-chip 5-bit baud rate generator allowing any baud rate to be set

• Transmission and reception can be performed independently.

• Four operating clock inputs selectable

• Fixed to LSB-first communication

Cautions 1. If clock supply to serial interface UART0 is not stopped (e.g., in the HALT mode), normal

operation continues. If clock supply to serial interface UART0 is stopped (e.g., in the STOP

mode), each register stops operating, and holds the value immediately before clock supply

was stopped. The TXD0 pin also holds the value immediately before clock supply was

stopped and outputs it. However, the operation is not guaranteed after clock supply is

resumed. Therefore, reset the circuit so that POWER0 = 0, RXE0 = 0, and TXE0 = 0.

2. Set POWER0 = 1 and then set TXE0 = 1 (transmission) or RXE0 = 1 (reception) to start

communication.

3. TXE0 and RXE0 are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK0) set by BRGC0. To enable

transmission or reception again, set TXE0 or RXE0 to 1 at least two clocks of base clock

after TXE0 or RXE0 has been cleared to 0. If TXE0 or RXE0 is set within two clocks of base

clock, the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not be initialized.

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

246

12.2 Configuration of Serial Interface UART0

Serial interface UART0 includes the following hardware.

Table 12-1. Configuration of Serial Interface UART0

Item Configuration

Registers Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0)

Receive shift register 0 (RXS0)

Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0)

Control registers Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0)

Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0)

Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0)

Port mode register 1 (PM1)

Port register 1 (P1)

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 247

Figure 12-1. Block Diagram of Serial Interface UART0

T

x

D0/

SCK10/P10

INTST0

R

x

D0/

SI10/P11

INTSR0

f

X

/2

5

f

X

/2

3

f

X

/2

Transmit shift register 0

(TXS0)

Receive shift register 0

(RXS0)

Receive buffer register 0

(RXB0)

Asynchronous serial

interface reception error

status register 0 (ASIS0)

Asynchronous serial

interface operation mode

register 0 (ASIM0)

Baud rate generator

control register 0

(BRGC0)

8-bit timer/

event counter

50 output

Registers

Selector

Baud rate

generator

Baud rate

generator

Reception unit

Reception control

Filter

Internal bus

Transmission control

Transmission unit

Output latch

(P10)

PM10

77

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

248

(1) Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0)

This 8-bit register stores parallel data converted by receive shift register 0 (RXS0).

Each time 1 byte of data has been received, new receive data is transferred to this register from receive shift

register 0 (RXS0).

If the data length is set to 7 bits, the receive data is transferred to bits 0 to 6 of RXB0 and the MSB of RXB0 is

always 0.

If an overrun error (OVE0) occurs, the receive data is not transferred to RXB0.

RXB0 can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. No data can be written to this register.

RESET input or POWER0 = 0 sets this register to FFH.

(2) Receive shift register 0 (RXS0)

This register converts the serial data input to the RXD0 pin into parallel data.

RXS0 cannot be directly manipulated by a program.

(3) Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0)

This register is used to set transmit data. Transmission is started when data is written to TXS0, and serial data is

transmitted from the TXD0 pins.

TXS0 can be written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. This register cannot be read.

RESET input, POWER0 = 0, or TXE0 = 0 sets this register to FFH.

Caution Do not write the next transmit data to TXS0 before the transmission completion interrupt signal

(INTST0) is generated.

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 249

12.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface UART0

Serial interface UART0 is controlled by the following five registers.

• Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0)

• Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0)

• Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0)

• Port mode register 1 (PM1)

• Port register 1 (P1)

(1) Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0)

This 8-bit register controls the serial communication operations of serial interface UART0.

This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to 01H.

Figure 12-2. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 0 (ASIM0) (1/2)

Address: FF70H After reset: 01H R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> 4 3 2 1 0

ASIM0 POWER0 TXE0 RXE0 PS01 PS00 CL0 SL0 1

POWER0 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock

0

Note 1 Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously

resets the internal circuitNote 2.

1 Enables operation of the internal operation clock.

TXE0 Enables/disables transmission

0 Disables transmission (synchronously resets the transmission circuit).

1 Enables transmission.

RXE0 Enables/disables reception

0 Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit).

1 Enables reception.

Notes 1. The input from the RXD0 pin is fixed to high level when POWER0 = 0.

2. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0), transmit shift register 0 (TXS0),

and receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) are reset.

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

250

Figure 12-2. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 0 (ASIM0) (2/2)

PS01 PS00 Transmission operation Reception operation

0 0 Does not output parity bit. Reception without parity

0 1 Outputs 0 parity. Reception as 0 parityNote

1 0 Outputs odd parity. Judges as odd parity.

1 1 Outputs even parity. Judges as even parity.

CL0 Specifies character length of transmit/receive data

0 Character length of data = 7 bits

1 Character length of data = 8 bits

SL0 Specifies number of stop bits of transmit data

0 Number of stop bits = 1

1 Number of stop bits = 2

Note If “reception as 0 parity” is selected, the parity is not judged. Therefore, bit 2 (PE0) of asynchronous serial

interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) is not set and the error interrupt does not occur.

Cautions 1. At startup, set POWER0 to 1 and then set TXE0 to 1. To stop the operation, clear TXE0 to 0,

and then clear POWER0 to 0.

2. At startup, set POWER0 to 1 and then set RXE0 to 1. To stop the operation, clear RXE0 to 0,

and then clear POWER0 to 0.

3. Set POWER0 to 1 and then set RXE0 to 1 while a high level is input to the RxD0 pin. If

POWER0 is set to 1 and RXE0 is set to 1 while a low level is input, reception is started.

4. TXE0 and RXE0 are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK0) set by BRGC0. To enable

transmission or reception again, set TXE0 or RXE0 to 1 at least two clocks of base clock after

TXE0 or RXE0 has been cleared to 0. If TXE0 or RXE0 is set within two clocks of base clock,

the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not be initialized.

5. Clear the TXE0 and RXE0 bits to 0 before rewriting the PS01, PS00, and CL0 bits.

6. Make sure that TXE0 = 0 when rewriting the SL0 bit. Reception is always performed with

“number of stop bits = 1”, and therefore, is not affected by the set value of the SL0 bit.

7. Be sure to set bit 0 to 1.

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 251

(2) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0)

This register indicates an error status on completion of reception by serial interface UART0. It includes three

error flag bits (PE0, FE0, OVE0).

This register is read-only by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H if bit 7 (POWER0) and bit 5 (RXE0) of ASIM0 = 0. 00H is read when this

register is read.

Figure 12-3. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Error Status Register 0 (ASIS0)

Address: FF73H After reset: 00H R

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ASIS0 0 0 0 0 0 PE0 FE0 OVE0

PE0 Status flag indicating parity error

0 If POWER0 = 0 and RXE0 = 0, or if ASIS0 register is read.

1 If the parity of transmit data does not match the parity bit on completion of reception.

FE0 Status flag indicating framing error

0 If POWER0 = 0 and RXE0 = 0, or if ASIS0 register is read.

1 If the stop bit is not detected on completion of reception.

OVE0 Status flag indicating overrun error

0 If POWER0 = 0 and RXE0 = 0, or if ASIS0 register is read.

1

If receive data is set to the RXB0 register and the next reception operation is completed before the

data is read.

Cautions 1. The operation of the PE0 bit differs depending on the set values of the PS01 and PS00 bits of

asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0).

2. Only the first bit of the receive data is checked as the stop bit, regardless of the number of

stop bits.

3. If an overrun error occurs, the next receive data is not written to receive buffer register 0

(RXB0) but discarded.

4. If data is read from ASIS0, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ASIS0 when the

CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

252

(3) Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0)

This register selects the base clock of serial interface UART0 and the division value of the 5-bit counter.

BRGC0 can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to 1FH.

Figure 12-4. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register 0 (BRGC0)

Address: FF71H After reset: 1FH R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BRGC0 TPS01 TPS00 0 MDL04 MDL03 MDL02 MDL01 MDL00

TPS01 TPS00 Base clock (fXCLK0) selectionNote 1

0 0 TM50 outputNote 2

0 1 fX/2 (5 MHz)

1 0 fX/23 (1.25 MHz)

1 1 fX/25 (312.5 kHz)

MDL04 MDL03 MDL02 MDL01 MDL00 k Selection of 5-bit counter

output clock

0 0

× × × × Setting prohibited

0 1 0 0 0 8 fXCLK0/8

0 1 0 0 1 9 fXCLK0/9

0 1 0 1 0 10 fXCLK0/10

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

1 1 0 1 0 26 fXCLK0/26

1 1 0 1 1 27 fXCLK0/27

1 1 1 0 0 28 fXCLK0/28

1 1 1 0 1 29 fXCLK0/29

1 1 1 1 0 30 fXCLK0/30

1 1 1 1 1 31 fXCLK0/31

Note 1. Set the base clock to satisfy the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Base clock ≤ 10 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Base clock ≤ 8.38 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Base clock ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Base clock ≤ 2.5 MHz

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 253

Note 2. When selecting the TM50 output as the base clock, note the following.

• PWM mode (TMC506 = 1)

Set the clock to 50% duty and start the 8-bit timer/event counter 50 operation beforehand.

• Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM50 and CR50 (TMC506 = 0)

Enable the timer F/F inversion operation (TMC501 = 1) and start the 8-bit timer/event counter 50

operation beforeha nd.

In both modes, it is not necessary to enable the timer output for the TO50 pin.

Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the

Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the base clock is the Ring-

OSC clock, the operation of serial interface UART0 is not guaranteed.

2. Make sure that bit 6 (TXE0) and bit 5 (RXE0) of the ASIM0 register = 0 when rewriting the

MDL04 to MDL00 bits.

3. The baud rate value is the output clock of the 5-bit counter divided by 2.

Remarks 1. f

XCLK0: Frequency of base clock selected by the TPS01 and TPS00 bits

2. f

X: X1 input clock oscillation fre quency

3. k: Value set by the MDL04 to MDL00 bits (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 31)

4. ×: Don’t care

5. Figures in parentheses apply to operation at f X = 10 MHz.

6. TMC506: Bit 6 of 8-bit timer mode control register 50 (TMC50)

7. TMC501: Bit 1 of TMC50

(4) Port mode register 1 (PM1)

This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P10/TxD0/SCK10 pin for serial interface dat a output, clear PM10 to 0 and set the o utput latch of

P10 to 1.

When using the P11/RxD0/SI 10 pin for serial interfac e data input, set PM11 to 1. The output latch of P11 at this

time may be 0 or 1.

PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to FFH.

Figure 12-5. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)

Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10

PM1n P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

0 Output mode (output buffer on)

1 Input mode (output buffer off)

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

254

12.4 Operation of Serial Interface UART0

Serial interface UART0 has the following two modes.

• Operation stop mode

• Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode

12.4.1 Operation stop mode

In this mode, serial communication cannot be executed, thus reducing the power consumption. In addition, the

pins can be used as ordinary port pins in this mode. To set the operation stop mode, clear bits 7, 6, and 5 (POWER0,

TXE0, and RXE0) of ASIM0 to 0.

(1) Register used

The operation stop mode is set by asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0).

ASIM0 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to 01H.

Address: FF70H After reset: 01H R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> 4 3 2 1 0

ASIM0 POWER0 TXE0 RXE0 PS01 PS00 CL0 SL0 1

POWER0 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock

0

Note 1 Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously

resets the internal circuitNote 2.

TXE0 Enables/disables transmission

0 Disables transmission (synchronously resets the transmission circuit).

RXE0 Enables/disables reception

0 Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit).

Notes 1. The input from the RXD0 pin is fixed to high level when POWER0 = 0.

2. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0), transmit shift register 0 (TXS0),

and receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) are reset.

Caution Clear POWER0 to 0 after clearing TXE0 and RXE0 to 0 to set the operation stop mode.

To start the operation, set POWER0 to 1, and then set TXE0 and RXE0 to 1.

Remark To use the RxD0/SI10/P11 and TxD0/SCK10/P10 pins as general-purpose port pins, see CHAPTER 4

PORT FUNCTIONS.

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 255

12.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode

In this mode, 1-byte data is transmitted/received following a start bit, and a full-duplex operation can be performed.

A dedicated UART baud rate generator is incorporated, so that communic ation can be executed at a wi de range of

baud rates.

(1) Registers used

• Asynchronous serial interface operation mod e register 0 (ASIM0)

• Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0)

• Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0)

• Port mode register 1 (PM1)

• Port register 1 (P1)

The basic procedure of setting an operation in the UART mode is as follows.

<1> Set the BRGC0 register (see Figure 12-4).

<2> Set bits 1 to 4 (SL0, CL0, PS00, and PS01) of the ASIM0 register (see Figure 12-2).

<3> Set bit 7 (POWER0) of the ASIM0 register to 1.

<4> Set bit 6 (TXE0) of the ASIM0 register to 1. → Transmission is enabled.

Set bit 5 (RXE0) of the ASIM0 register to 1. → Reception is enabled.

<5> Write data to the TXS0 register. → Data transmission is started.

Caution Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port mode register

and port register.

The relationship between the register settings and pins is shown below.

Table 12-2. Relationship Between Register Settings and Pins

Pin Function POWER0 TXE0 RXE0 PM10 P10 PM11 P11 UART0

Operation TxD0/SCK10/P10 RxD0/SI10/P11

0 0 0 ×Note ×

Note ×

Note ×

Note Stop SCK10/P10 SI10/P11

0 1 ×Note ×

Note 1 × Reception SCK10/P10 RxD0

1 0 0 1 ×Note ×

Note Transmission TxD0 SI10/P11

1

1 1 0 1 1 ×

Transmission/

reception TxD0 RxD0

Note Can be set as port function.

Remark ×: Don’t care

POWER0: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mod e register 0 (ASIM0)

TXE0: Bit 6 of ASIM0

RXE0: Bit 5 of ASIM0

PM1×: Port mode register

P1×: Port output latch

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

256

(2) Communication operation

(a) Format and waveform example of normal transmit/receive data

Figures 12-6 and 12-7 show the format and waveform example of the normal transmit/receive data.

Figure 12-6. Format of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data

Start

bit

Parity

bit

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4

1 data frame

Character bits

D5 D6 D7 Stop bit

One data frame consists of the following bits.

• Start bit ... 1 bit

• Character bits ... 7 or 8 bits (LSB first)

• Parity bit ... Even parity, odd parity, 0 parity, or no parity

• Stop bit ... 1 or 2 bits

The character bit length, parity, and stop bit length in one data frame are specified by asynchronous serial

interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0).

Figure 12-7. Example of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data Waveform

1. Data length: 8 bits, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H

1 data frame

Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop

2. Data length: 7 bits, Parity: Odd parity, Stop bit: 2 bits, Communication data: 36H

1 data frame

Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Parity StopStop

3. Data length: 8 bits, Parity: None, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 87H

1 data frame

Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 257

(b) Parity types and operation

The parity bit is used to detect a bit error in communication data. Usually, the same type of parity bit is used

on both the transmission and reception sides. With even parity and odd parity, a 1-bit (odd number) error

can be detected. With zero parity and no parity, an error cannot be detected.

(i) Even parity

• Transmission

Transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that are “1” is even.

The value of the parity bit is as follows.

If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are “1”: 1

If transmit data has an even number of bits that are “1”: 0

• Reception

The number of bits that are “1” in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is odd, a

parity error occurs.

(ii) Odd parity

• Transmission

Unlike even parity, transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that

are “1” is odd.

If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are “1”: 0

If transmit data has an even number of bits that are “1”: 1

• Reception

The number of bits that are “1” in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is even, a

parity error occurs.

(iii) 0 parity

The parity bit is cleared to 0 when data is transmitted, regardless of the transmit data.

The parity bit is not detected when the data is received. Therefore, a parity error does not occur

regardless of whether the parity bit is “0” or “1”.

(iv) No parity

No parity bit is appended to the transmit data.

Reception is performed assuming that there is no parity bit when data is received. Because there is no

parity bit, a parity error does not occur.

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

258

(c) Transmission

The TXD0 pin outputs a high level when bit 7 (POWER0) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode

register 0 (ASIM0) is set to 1. If bit 6 (TXE0) of ASIM0 is then set to 1, transmission is enabled.

Transmission can be started by writing transmit data to transmit shift register 0 (TXS0). The start bit, parity

bit, and stop bit are automatically appended to the data.

When transmission is started, the start bit is output from the TXD0 pin, followed by the rest of the data in

order starting from the LSB. When transmission is completed, the parity and stop bits set by ASIM0 are

appended and a transmission completion interrupt request (INTST0) is generated.

Transmission is stopped until the data to be transmitted next is written to TXS0.

Figure 12-8 shows the timing of the transmission completion interrupt request (INTST0). This interrupt

occurs as soon as the last stop bit has been output.

Caution After transmit data is written to TXS0, do not write the next transmit data before the

transmission completion interrupt signal (INTST0) is generated.

Figure 12-8. Transmission Completion Interrupt Request Timing

1. Stop bit length: 1

INTST0

D0Start D1 D2 D6 D7 Stop

T

X

D0 (output) Parity

2. Stop bit length: 2

T

X

D0 (output)

INTST0

D0Start D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity Stop

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 259

(d) Reception

Reception is enabled and the RXD0 pin input is sampled when bit 7 (POWER0) of asynchronous serial

interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) is set to 1 and then bit 5 (RXE0) of ASIM0 is set to 1.

The 5-bit counter of the baud rate generator starts counting when the falling edge of the RXD0 pin input is

detected. When the set value of baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) has been counted, the

RXD0 pin input is sampled again ( in Figure 12-9). If the RXD0 pin is low level at this time, it is recognized

as a start bit.

When the start bit is detected, reception is started, and serial data is sequentially stored in receive shift

register 0 (RXS0) at the set baud rate. When the stop bit has been received, the reception completion

interrupt (INTSR0) is generated and the data of RXS0 is written to receive buffer register 0 (RXB0). If an

overrun error (OVE0) occurs, however, the receive data is not written to RXB0.

Even if a parity error (PE0) occurs while reception is in progress, reception continues to the reception

position of the stop bit, and an error interrupt (INTSR0) is generated after completion of reception.

Figure 12-9. Reception Completion Interrupt Request Timing

R

X

D0 (input)

INTSR0

Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop

RXB0

Cautions 1. Be sure to read receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) even if a reception error occurs.

Otherwise, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the reception

error status will persist.

2. Reception is always performed with the “number of stop bits = 1”. The second stop bit

is ignored.

3. Be sure to read asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0)

before reading RXB0.

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

260

(e) Reception error

Three types of errors may occur during reception: a parity error, framing error, or overrun error. If the error

flag of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) is set as a result of data

reception, a reception error interrupt request (INTSR0) is generated.

Which error has occurred during reception can be identified by reading the contents of ASIS0 in the reception

error interrupt servicing (INTSR0) (refer to Figure 12-3).

The contents of ASIS0 are reset to 0 when ASIS0 is read.

Table 12-3. Cause of Reception Error

Reception Error Cause

Parity error The parity specified for transmission does not match the parity of the

receive data.

Framing error Stop bit is not detected.

Overrun error Reception of the next data is completed before data is read from

receive buffer register 0 (RXB0).

(f) Noise filter of receive data

The RXD0 signal is sampled using the base clock output by the prescaler block.

If two sampled values are the same, the output of the match detector changes, and the data is sampled as

input data.

Because the circuit is configured as shown in Figure 12-10, the internal processing of the reception operation

is delayed by two clocks from the external signal status.

Figure 12-10. Noise Filter Circuit

Internal signal B

Internal signal A

Match detector

In

Base clock

R

X

D0/SI10/P11 QIn

LD_EN

Q

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 261

12.4.3 Dedicated baud rate generator

The dedicated baud rate generator consists of a source clock selector and a 5-bit programmable counter, and

generates a serial clock for transmission/reception of UART0.

Separate 5-bit counters are provided for transmission and reception.

(1) Configuration of baud rate generator

• Base clock

The clock selected by bits 7 and 6 (TPS01 and TPS00) of baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) is

supplied to each module when bit 7 (POWER0) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0

(ASIM0) is 1. This clock is called the base clock and its frequency is called fXCLK0. The base clock is fixed

to low level when POWER0 = 0.

• Transmission counter

This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER0) or bit 6 (TXE0) of asynchronous serial

interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) is 0.

It starts counting when POWER0 = 1 and TXE0 = 1.

The counter is cleared to 0 when the first data transmitted is written to transmit shift register 0 (TXS0).

• Reception counter

This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER0) or bit 5 (RXE0) of asynchronous serial

interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) is 0.

It starts counting when the start bit has been detected.

The counter stops operation after one frame has been received, until the next start bit is detected.

Figure 12-11. Configuration of Baud Rate Generator

fXCLK0

Selector

POWER0

5-bit counter

Match detector Baud rate

BRGC0: MDL04 to MDL00

1/2

POWER0, TXE0 (or RXE0)

BRGC0: TPS01, TPS00

8-bit timer/

event counter

50 output

f

X

/2

5

f

X

/2

f

X

/2

3

Baud rate generator

Remark POWER0: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0)

TXE0: Bit 6 of ASIM0

RXE0: Bit 5 of ASIM0

BRGC0: Baud rate generator control register 0

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

262

(2) Generation of serial clock

A serial clock can be generated by using baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0).

Select the clock to be input to the 5-bit counter by using bits 7 and 6 (TPS01 and TPS00) of BRGC0.

Bits 4 to 0 (MDL04 to MDL00) of BRGC0 can be used to select the division value of the 5-bit counter.

(a) Baud rate

The baud rate can be calculated by the following expression.

• Baud rate = [bps]

fXCLK0: Frequency of base clock selected by the TPS01 and TPS00 bits of the BRGC0 register

k: Value set by the MDL04 to MDL00 bits of the BRGC0 register (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 31)

(b) Error of baud rate

The baud rate error can be calculated by the following expression.

• Error (%) = − 1 × 100 [%]

Cautions 1. Keep the baud rate error during transmission to within the permissible error range at

the reception destination.

2. Make sure that the baud rate error during reception satisfies the range shown in (4)

Permissible baud rate range during reception.

Example: Frequency of base clock = 2.5 MHz = 2,500,000 Hz

Set value of MDL04 to MDL00 bits of BRGC0 register = 10000B (k = 16)

Target baud rate = 76,800 bps

Baud rate = 2.5 M/(2 × 16)

= 2,500,000/(2 × 16) = 78,125 [bps]

Error = (78,125/76,800 − 1) × 100

= 1.725 [%]

fXCLK0

2 × k

Actual baud rate (baud rate with error)

Desired baud rate (correct baud rate)

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 263

(3) Example of setting baud rate

Table 12-4. Set Data of Baud Rate Generator

fX = 10.0 MHz fX = 8.38 MHz fX = 4.19 MHz

Baud Rate

[bps] TPS01,

TPS00

k Calculated

Value

ERR[%] TPS01,

TPS00

k Calculated

Value

ERR[%] TPS01,

TPS00

k Calculated

Value

ERR[%]

2400 − − − − − − − − 3 27 2425 1.03

4800 − − − − 3 27 4850 1.03 3 14 4676 −2.58

9600 3 16 9766 1.73 3 14 9353 −2.58 2 27 9699 1.03

10400 3 15 10417 0.16 3 13 10072 −3.15 2 25 10475 0.72

19200 3 8 19531 1.73 2 27 19398 1.03 2 14 18705 −2.58

31250 2 20 31250 0 2 17 30809 −1.41 − − − −

38400 2 16 39063 1.73 2 14 38796 −2.58 2 27 38796 1.03

76800 2 8 78125 1.73 1 27 77593 1.03 1 14 74821 −2.58

115200 1 22 113636 −1.36 1 18 116389 1.03 1 9 116389 1.03

153600 1 16 156250 1.73 1 14 149643 −2.58 − − − −

230400 1 11 227273 −1.36 1 9 232778 1.03 − − − −

Remark TPS01, TPS00: Bits 7 and 6 of baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) (setting of base clock

(fXCLK0))

k: Value set by the MDL04 to MDL00 bits of BRGC0 (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 31)

f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

ERR: Baud rate error

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

264

(4) Permissible baud rate range during reception

The permissible error from the baud rate at the transmission destination during reception is shown below.

Caution Make sure that the baud rate error during reception is within the permissible error range, by

using the calculation expression shown below.

Figure 12-12. Permissible Baud Rate Range During Reception

FL

1 data frame (11 × FL)

FLmin

FLmax

Data frame length

of UART0 Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit

Minimum permissible

data frame length

Maximum permissible

data frame length

Stop bit

Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit

Latch timing

Stop bit

Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit

As shown in Figure 12-12, the latch timing of the receive data is determined by the counter set by baud rate

generator control register 0 (BRGC0) after the start bit has been detected. If the last data (stop bit) meets this

latch timing, the data can be correctly received.

Assuming that 11-bit data is received, the theoretical values can be calculated as follows.

FL = (Brate)−1

Brate: Baud rate of UART0

k: Set value of BRGC0

FL: 1-bit data length

Margin of latch timing: 2 clocks

CHAPTER 12 SERIAL INTERFACE UART0

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 265

Minimum permissible data frame length: FLmin = 11 × FL − × FL = FL

Therefore, the maximum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows.

BRmax = (FLmin/11)−1 = Brate

Similarly, the maximum permissible data frame length can be calculated as follows.

10 k + 2 21k − 2

11 2 × k 2 × k

FLmax = FL × 11

Therefore, the minimum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows.

BRmin = (FLmax/11)−1 = Brate

The permissible baud rate error between UART0 and the transmission destination can be calculated from the

above minimum and maximum baud rate expressions, as follows.

Table 12-5. Maximum/Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error

Division Ratio (k) Maximum Permissible Baud Rate Error Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error

8 +3.53% −3.61%

16 +4.14% −4.19%

24 +4.34% −4.38%

31 +4.44% −4.47%

Remarks 1. The permissible error of reception depends on the number of bits in one frame, input clock

frequency, and division ratio (k). The higher the input clock frequency and the higher the division

ratio (k), the higher the permissible error.

2. k: Set value of BRGC0

k − 2

2k

21k + 2

2k

22k

21k + 2

× FLmax = 11 × FL − × FL = FL

21k – 2

20k

20k

21k − 2

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

266

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

13.1 Functions of Serial Interface UART6

Serial interface UART6 has the following two modes.

(1) Operation stop mode

This mode is used when serial communication is not executed and can enable a reduction in the power

consumption.

For details, see 13.4.1 Operation stop mode.

(2) Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode

This mode supports the LIN (Local Interconnect Network)-bus. The functions of this mode are outlined below.

For details, see 13.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode and 13.4.3 Dedicated baud rate

generator.

• Two-pin configuration TXD6: Transmit data output pin

R

XD6: Receive data input pin

• Data length of communication data can be selected from 7 or 8 bits.

• Dedicated internal 8-bit baud rate generator allowing any baud rate to be set

• Transmission and reception can be performed independently.

• Twelve operating clock inputs selectable

• MSB- or LSB-first communication selectable

• Inverted transmission operation

• Synchronous break field transmission is 13-bit length output

• More than 11 bits can be identified for synchronous break field reception (SBF reception flag provided).

Cautions 1. The TXD6 output inversion function inverts only the transmission side and not the reception

side. To use this function, the reception side must be ready for reception of inverted data.

2. If clock supply to serial interface UART6 is not stopped (e.g., in the HALT mode), normal

operation continues. If clock supply to serial interface UART6 is stopped (e.g., in the STOP

mode), each register stops operating, and holds the value immediately before clock supply

was stopped. The TXD6 pin also holds the value immediately before clock supply was

stopped and outputs it. However, the operation is not guaranteed after clock supply is

resumed. Therefore, reset the circuit so that POWER6 = 0, RXE6 = 0, and TXE6 = 0.

3. If data is continuously transmitted, the communication timing from the stop bit to the next

start bit is extended two operating clocks of the macro. However, this does not affect the

result of communication because the reception side initializes the timing when it has

detected a start bit. Do not use the continuous transmission function if the interface is

incorporated in LIN.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 267

Remark LIN stands for Local Interconnect Network and is a low-speed (1 to 20 kbps) serial communication

protocol intended to aid the cost reduction of an automotive network.

LIN communication is single-master communication, and up to 15 slaves can be connected to one

master.

The LIN slaves are used to control the switches, actuators, and sensors, and these are connected to the

LIN master via the LIN network.

Normally, the LIN master is connected to a network such as CAN (Controller Area Network).

In addition, the LIN bus uses a single-wire method and is connected to the nodes via a transceiver that

complies with ISO9141.

In the LIN protocol, the master transmits a frame with baud rate information and the slave receives it and

corrects the baud rate error. Therefore, communication is possible when the baud rate error in the slave

is ±15% or less.

Figures 13-1 and 13-2 outline the transmission and reception operations of LIN.

Figure 13-1. LIN Transmission Operation

Sleep

bus

Wakeup

signal frame

8 bits

Note 1

55H

transmission

Data

transmission

Data

transmission

Data

transmission

Data

transmission

13-bit

Note 2

SBF

transmission

Note 3

Synchronous

break field

Synchronous

field

Identifier

field

Data field Data field Checksum

field

TX6

INTST6

Notes 1. The wakeup signal frame is substituted by 80H transmission in the 8-bit mode.

2. The synchronous break field is output by hardware. The output width is adjusted by baud rate

generator control register 6 (BRGC6) (see 13.4.2 (2) (h) SBF transmission).

3. INTST6 is output on completion of each transmission. It is also output when SBF is transmitted.

Remark The interval between each field is controlled by software.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

268

Figure 13-2. LIN Reception Operation

Sleep

bus

13 bitsNote 2

SF

reception

ID

reception

Data

reception

Data

reception

Data

receptionNote 5

Note 3

Note 1

Note 4

Wakeup

signal frame

Synchronous

break field

Synchronous

field

Identifier

field

Data field Data field Checksum

field

RX6

SBF

reception

Reception interrupt

(INTSR6)

Edge detection

(INTP0)

Capture timer Disable Enable

Disable Enable

Notes 1. The wakeup signal is detected at the edge of the pin, and enables UART6 and sets the SBF reception

mode.

2. Reception continues until the STOP bit is detected. When an SBF with low-level data of 11 bits or

more has been detected, it is assumed that SBF reception has been completed correctly, and an

interrupt signal is output. If an SBF with low-level data of less than 11 bits has been detected, it is

assumed that an SBF reception error has occurred. The interrupt signal is not output and the SBF

reception mode is restored.

3. If SBF reception has been completed correctly, an interrupt signal is output. This SBF reception

completion interrupt enables the capture timer. Detection of errors OVE6, PE6, and FE6 is

suppressed, and error detection processing of UART communication and data transfer of the shift

register and RXB6 is not performed. The shift register holds the reset value FFH.

4. Calculate the baud rate error from the bit length of the synchronous field, disable UART6 after SF

reception, and then re-set baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6).

5. Distinguish the checksum field by software. Also perform processing by software to initialize UART6

after reception of the checksum field and to set the SBF reception mode again.

To perform a LIN receive operation, use a configuration like the one shown in Figure 13-3.

The wakeup signal transmitted from the LIN master is received by detecting the edge of the external interrupt

(INTP0). The length of the synchronous field transmitted from the LIN master can be measured using the external

event capture operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00, and the baud rate error can be calculated.

The input signal of the reception port input (RxD6) can be input to the external interrupt (INTP0) and 16-bit

timer/event counter 00 by port input switch control (ISC0/ISC1), without connecting RxD6 and INTP0/TI000 externally.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 269

Figure 13-3. Port Configuration for LIN Reception Operation

RXD6 input

INTP0 input

TI000 input

P14/RxD6

P120/INTP0

P00/TI000

Port input

switch control

(ISC0)

<ISC0>

0: Select INTP0 (P120)

1: Select RxD6 (P14)

Port mode

(PM14)

Output latch

(P14)

Port mode

(PM120)

Output latch

(P120)

Port input

switch control

(ISC1)

<ISC1>

0: Select TI000 (P00)

1: Select RxD6 (P14)

Selector Selector

Selector

Selector

Selector

Port mode

(PM00)

Output latch

(P00)

Remark ISC0, ISC1: Bits 0 and 1 of the input switch control register (ISC) (see Figure 13-11)

The peripheral functions used in the LIN communication operation are shown below.

<Peripheral functions used>

• External interrupt (INTP0); wakeup signal detection

Use: Detects the wakeup signal edges and detects start of communication.

• 16-bit timer/event counter 00 (TI000); baud rate error detection

Use: Detects the baud rate error (measures the TI000 input edge interval in the capture mode) by detecting the

sync field (SF) length and divides it by the number of bits.

• Serial interface UART6

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

270

13.2 Configuration of Serial Interface UART6

Serial interface UART6 includes the following hardware.

Table 13-1. Configuration of Serial Interface UART6

Item Configuration

Registers Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6)

Receive shift register 6 (RXS6)

Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6)

Transmit shift register 6 (TXS6)

Control registers Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6)

Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6)

Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6)

Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6)

Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6)

Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6)

Input switch control register (ISC)

Port mode register 1 (PM1)

Port register 1 (P1)

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 271

Figure 13-4. Block Diagram of Serial Interface UART6

Internal bus

Asynchronous serial interface

control register 6 (ASICL6)

Transmit buffer register 6

(TXB6)

Transmit shift register 6

(TXS6)

T

X

D6/

P13

INTST6

Baud rate

generator

Asynchronous serial interface

control register 6 (ASICL6)

Reception control

Receive shift register 6

(RXS6)

Receive buffer register 6

(RXB6)

R

X

D6/

P14

TI000, INTP0Note

INTSR6

Baud rate

generator

Filter

INTSRE6

Asynchronous serial

interface reception error

status register 6 (ASIS6)

Asynchronous serial

interface operation mode

register 6 (ASIM6)

Asynchronous serial

interface transmission

status register 6 (ASIF6)

Transmission control

Registers

fX

fX/2

fX/22

fX/23

fX/24

fX/25

fX/26

fX/27

fX/28

fX/29

fX/210

8-bit timer/

event counter

50 output

8

Reception unit

Transmission unit

Clock selection

register 6 (CKSR6)

Baud rate generator

control register 6

(BRGC6)

Output latch

(P13)

PM13

8

Selector

Note Selectable with input switch control register (ISC).

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

272

(1) Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6)

This 8-bit register stores parallel data converted by receive shift register 6 (RXS6).

Each time 1 byte of data has been received, new receive data is transferred to this register from receive shift

register 6 (RXS6). If the data length is set to 7 bits, data is transferred as follows.

• In LSB-first reception, the receive data is transferred to bits 0 to 6 of RXB6 and the MSB of RXB6 is always 0.

• In MSB-first reception, the receive data is transferred to bits 1 to 7 of RXB6 and the LSB of RXB6 is always 0.

If an overrun error (OVE6) occurs, the receive data is not transferred to RXB6.

RXB6 can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. No data can be written to this register.

RESET input sets this register to FFH.

(2) Receive shift register 6 (RXS6)

This register converts the serial data input to the RXD6 pin into parallel data.

RXS6 cannot be directly manipulated by a program.

(3) Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6)

This buffer register is used to set transmit data. Transmission is started when data is written to TXB6.

This register can be read or written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to FFH.

Cautions 1. Do not write data to TXB6 when bit 1 (TXBF6) of asynchronous serial interface transmission

status register 6 (ASIF6) is 1.

2. Do not refresh (write the same value to) TXB6 by software during a communication

operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of asynchronous serial interface operation

mode register 6 (ASIM6) are 1 or when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 are 1).

(4) Transmit shift register 6 (TXS6)

This register transmits the data transferred from TXB6 from the TXD6 pin as serial data. Data is transferred from

TXB6 immediately after TXB6 is written for the first transmission, or immediately before INTST6 occurs after one

frame was transmitted for continuous transmission. Data is transferred from TXB6 and transmitted from the TXD6

pin at the falling edge of the base clock.

TXS6 cannot be directly manipulated by a program.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 273

13.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface UART6

Serial interface UART6 is controlled by the following nine registers.

• Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6)

• Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6)

• Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6)

• Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6)

• Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6)

• Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6)

• Input switch control register (ISC)

• Port mode register 1 (PM1)

• Port register 1 (P1)

(1) Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6)

This 8-bit register controls the serial communication operations of serial interface UART6.

This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to 01H.

Remark ASIM6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication operation

(when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1 or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6

= 1).

Figure 13-5. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 6 (ASIM6) (1/2)

Address: FF50H After reset: 01H R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> 4 3 2 1 0

ASIM6 POWER6 TXE6 RXE6 PS61 PS60 CL6 SL6 ISRM6

POWER6 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock

0

Note 1 Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously

resets the internal circuitNote 2.

1

Note 3 Enables operation of the internal operation clock

TXE6 Enables/disables transmission

0 Disables transmission (synchronously resets the transmission circuit).

1 Enables transmission

Notes 1. The output of the TXD6 pin goes high and the input from the RXD6 pin is fixed to high level when

POWER6 = 0.

2. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6), asynchronous serial interface

transmission status register 6 (ASIF6), bit 7 (SBRF6) and bit 6 (SBRT6) of asynchronous serial

interface control register 6 (ASICL6), and receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) are reset.

3. Operation of the 8-bit counter output is enabled at the second base clock after 1 is written to the

POWER6 bit.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

274

Figure 13-5. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 6 (ASIM6) (2/2)

RXE6 Enables/disables reception

0 Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit).

1 Enables reception

PS61 PS60 Transmission operation Reception operation

0 0 Does not output parity bit. Reception without parity

0 1 Outputs 0 parity. Reception as 0 parityNote

1 0 Outputs odd parity. Judges as odd parity.

1 1 Outputs even parity. Judges as even parity.

CL6 Specifies character length of transmit/receive data

0 Character length of data = 7 bits

1 Character length of data = 8 bits

SL6 Specifies number of stop bits of transmit data

0 Number of stop bits = 1

1 Number of stop bits = 2

ISRM6 Enables/disables occurrence of reception completion interrupt in case of error

0 “INTSRE6” occurs in case of error (at this time, INTSR6 does not occur).

1 “INTSR6” occurs in case of error (at this time, INTSRE6 does not occur).

Note If “reception as 0 parity” is selected, the parity is not judged. Therefore, bit 2 (PE6) of asynchronous serial

interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) is not set and the error interrupt does not occur.

Cautions 1. At startup, set POWER6 to 1 and then set TXE6 to 1. To stop the operation, clear TXE6 to 0,

and then clear POWER6 to 0.

2. At startup, set POWER6 to 1 and then set RXE6 to 1. To stop the operation, clear RXE6 to 0,

and then clear POWER6 to 0.

3. Set POWER6 to 1 and then set RXE6 to 1 while a high level is input to the RxD6 pin. If

POWER6 is set to 1 and RXE6 is set to 1 while a low level is input, reception is started.

4. Clear the TXE6 and RXE6 bits to 0 before rewriting the PS61, PS60, and CL6 bits.

5. Fix the PS61 and PS60 bits to 0 when mounting the device on LIN.

6. Make sure that TXE6 = 0 when rewriting the SL6 bit. Reception is always performed with “the

number of stop bits = 1”, and therefore, is not affected by the set value of the SL6 bit.

7. Make sure that RXE6 = 0 when rewriting the ISRM6 bit.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 275

(2) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6)

This register indicates an error status on completion of reception by serial interface UART6. It includes three

error flag bits (PE6, FE6, OVE6).

This register is read-only by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H if bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 0. 00H is read when this

register is read.

Figure 13-6. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Error Status Register 6 (ASIS6)

Address: FF53H After reset: 00H R

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ASIS6 0 0 0 0 0 PE6 FE6 OVE6

PE6 Status flag indicating parity error

0 If POWER6 = 0 and RXE6 = 0, or if ASIS6 register is read

1 If the parity of transmit data does not match the parity bit on completion of reception

FE6 Status flag indicating framing error

0 If POWER6 = 0 and RXE6 = 0, or if ASIS6 register is read

1 If the stop bit is not detected on completion of reception

OVE6 Status flag indicating overrun error

0 If POWER6 = 0 and RXE6 = 0, or if ASIS6 register is read

1

If receive data is set to the RXB register and the next reception operation is completed before the

data is read.

Cautions 1. The operation of the PE6 bit differs depending on the set values of the PS61 and PS60 bits of

asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6).

2. The first bit of the receive data is checked as the stop bit, regardless of the number of stop

bits.

3. If an overrun error occurs, the next receive data is not written to receive buffer register 6

(RXB6) but discarded.

4. If data is read from ASIS6, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ASIS6 when the

CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped. For details, see

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

276

(3) Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6)

This register indicates the status of transmission by serial interface UART6. It includes two status flag bits

(TXBF6 and TXSF6).

Transmission can be continued without disruption even during an interrupt period, by writing the next data to the

TXB6 register after data has been transferred from the TXB6 register to the TXS6 register.

This register is read-only by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H if bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 0.

Figure 13-7. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Status Register 6 (ASIF6)

Address: FF55H After reset: 00H R

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ASIF6 0 0 0 0 0 0 TXBF6 TXSF6

TXBF6 Transmit buffer data flag

0 If POWER6 = 0 or TXE6 = 0, or if data is transferred to transmit shift register 6 (TXS6)

1 If data is written to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) (if data exists in TXB6)

TXSF6 Transmit shift register data flag

0

If POWER6 = 0 or TXE6 = 0, or if the next data is not transferred from transmit buffer register 6

(TXB6) after completion of transfer

1 If data is transferred from transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) (if data transmission is in progress)

Cautions 1. To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXB6 register.

Be sure to check that the TXBF6 flag is “0”. If so, write the next transmit data (second byte)

to the TXB6 register. If data is written to the TXB6 register while the TXBF6 flag is “1”, the

transmit data cannot be guaranteed.

2. To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous transmission, be sure to

check that the TXSF6 flag is “0” after generation of the transmission completion interrupt,

and then execute initialization. If initialization is executed while the TXSF6 flag is “1”, the

transmit data cannot be guaranteed.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 277

(4) Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6)

This register selects the base clock of serial interface UA RT6.

CKSR6 can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Remark CKSR6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication operation

(when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1 or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6

= 1).

Figure 13-8. Format of Clock Selection Register 6 (CKSR6)

Address: FF56H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CKSR6 0 0 0 0 TPS63 TPS62 TPS61 TPS60

TPS63 TPS62 TPS61 TPS60 Base clock (fXCLK6) selectionNote 1

0 0 0 0 fX (10 MHz)

0 0 0 1 fX/2 (5 MHz)

0 0 1 0 fX/22 (2.5 MHz)

0 0 1 1 fX/23 (1.25 MHz)

0 1 0 0 fX/24 (625 kHz)

0 1 0 1 fX/25 (312.5 kHz)

0 1 1 0 fX/26 (156.25 kHz)

0 1 1 1 fX/27 (78.13 kHz)

1 0 0 0 fX/28 (39.06 kHz)

1 0 0 1 fX/29 (19.53 kHz)

1 0 1 0 fX/210 (9.77 kHz)

1 0 1 1 TM50 outputNote 2

Other than above Setting prohibited

Notes 1. Set the base clock to satisfy the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Base clock ≤ 10 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Base clock ≤ 8.38 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Base clock ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Base clock ≤ 2.5 MHz

2. When selecting the TM50 output as the base clock, note the following.

• PWM mode (TMC506 = 1)

Set the clock to 50% duty and start the 8-bit timer/event counter 50 operation beforehand.

• Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM50 and CR50 (TMC50 6 = 0)

Enable the timer F/F inversion operation (TMC501 = 1) and start the 8-bit timer/event counter 50

operation beforeha nd.

In both modes, it is not necessary to enable the timer output for the TO50 pin.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

278

Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the clock of the

Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the base clock is the Ring-

OSC clock, the operation of serial interface UART6 is not guaranteed.

2. Make sure POWER6 = 0 when rewriting TPS63 to TPS60.

Remarks 1. Figures in parentheses are for operation with fX = 10 MHz.

2. f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

(5) Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6)

This register sets the division value of the 8-bit counter of serial interface UART6.

BRGC6 can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to FFH.

Remark BRGC6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication operation

(when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1 or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6

= 1).

Figure 13-9. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register 6 (BRGC6)

Address: FF57H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BRGC6 MDL67 MDL66 MDL65 MDL64 MDL63 MDL62 MDL61 MDL60

MDL67 MDL66 MDL65 MDL64 MDL63 MDL62 MDL61 MDL60 k Output clock selection of

8-bit counter

0 0 0 0 0 × × × × Setting prohibited

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 fXCLK6/8

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 fXCLK6/9

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 fXCLK6/10

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 252 fXCLK6/252

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 253 fXCLK6/253

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 254 fXCLK6/254

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255 fXCLK6/255

Cautions 1. Make sure that bit 6 (TXE6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of the ASIM6 register = 0 when rewriting the

MDL67 to MDL60 bits.

2. The baud rate is the output clock of the 8-bit counter divided by 2.

Remarks 1. f

XCLK6: Frequency of base clock selected by the TPS63 to TPS60 bits of CKSR6 register

2. k: Value set by MDL67 to MDL60 bits (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 255)

3. ×: Don’t care

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 279

(6) Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6)

This register controls the serial communication operations of serial interface UART6.

ASICL6 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to 16H.

Caution ASICL6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication

operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1 or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5

(RXE6) of ASIM6 = 1). Note, however, that communication is started by the refresh operation

because bit 6 (SBRT6) of ASICL6 is cleared to 0 when communication is completed (when an

interrupt signal is generated).

Figure 13-10. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Control Register 6 (ASICL6)

Address: FF58H After reset: 16H R/WNote

Symbol <7> <6> 5 4 3 2 1 0

ASICL6 SBRF6 SBRT6 0 1 0 1 DIR6 TXDLV6

SBRF6 SBF reception status flag

0 If POWER6 = 0 and RXE6 = 0 or if SBF reception has been completed correctly

1 SBF reception in progress

SBRT6 SBF reception trigger

0 −

1 SBF reception trigger

DIR6 First bit specification

0 MSB

1 LSB

TXDLV6 Enables/disables inverting TXD6 output

0 Normal output of TXD6

1 Inverted output of TXD6

Note Bits 2 to 5 and 7 are read-only.

Cautions 1. In the case of an SBF reception error, return the mode to the SBF reception mode.

The status of the SBRF6 flag is held (1).

2. Before setting the SBRT6 bit, make sure that bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 1.

3. The read value of the SBRT6 bit is always 0. SBRT6 is automatically cleared to 0 after SBF

reception has been correctly completed.

4. Before rewriting the DIR6 and TXDLV6 bits, clear the TXE6 and RXE6 bits to 0.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

280

(7) Input switch control register (ISC)

The input switch control register (ISC) is used to receive a status signal transmitted from the master during LIN

(Local Interconnect Network) reception. The input signal is switched by setting ISC.

This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 13-11. Format of Input Switch Control Register (ISC)

Address: FF4FH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ISC 0 0 0 0 0 0 ISC1 ISC0

ISC1 TI000 input source selection

0 TI000 (P00)

1 RxD6 (P14)

ISC0 INTP0 input source selection

0 INTP0 (P120)

1 RxD6 (P14)

(8) Port mode register 1 (PM1)

This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P13/TxD6 pin for serial interface data output, clear PM13 to 0 and set the output latch of P13 to

1.

When using the P14/RxD6 pin for serial interface data input, set PM14 to 1. The output latch of P14 at this time

may be 0 or 1.

PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to FFH.

Figure 13-12. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)

Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10

PM1n P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

0 Output mode (output buffer on)

1 Input mode (output buffer off)

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 281

13.4 Operation of Serial Interface UART6

Serial interface UART6 has the following two modes.

• Operation stop mode

• Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode

13.4.1 Operation stop mode

In this mode, serial communication cannot be executed; therefore, the power consumption can be reduced. In

addition, the pins can be used as ordinary port pins in this mode. To set the operation stop mode, clear bits 7, 6, and

5 (POWER6, TXE6, and RXE6) of ASIM6 to 0.

(1) Register used

The operation stop mode is set by asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6).

ASIM6 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to 01H.

Address: FF50H After reset: 01H R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> 4 3 2 1 0

ASIM6 POWER6 TXE6 RXE6 PS61 PS60 CL6 SL6 ISRM6

POWER6 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock

0

Note 1 Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously

resets the internal circuitNote 2.

TXE6 Enables/disables transmission

0 Disables transmission operation (synchronously resets the transmission circuit).

RXE6 Enables/disables reception

0 Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit).

Notes 1. The output of the TXD6 pin goes high and the input from the RXD6 pin is fixed to high level when

POWER6 = 0.

2. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6), asynchronous serial interface

transmission status register 6 (ASIF6), bit 7 (SBRF6) and bit 6 (SBRT6) of asynchronous serial

interface control register 6 (ASICL6), and receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) are reset.

Caution Clear POWER6 to 0 after clearing TXE6 and RXE6 to 0 to set the operation stop mode.

To start the operation, set POWER6 to 1, and then set TXE6 and RXE6 to 1.

Remark To use the RxD6/P14 and TxD6/P13 pins as general-purpose port pins, see CHAPTER 4 PORT

FUNCTIONS.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

282

13.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode

In this mode, data of 1 byte is transmitted/received following a start bit, and a full-duplex operation can be

performed.

A dedicated UART baud rate generator is incorporated, so that communication can be executed at a wide range of

baud rates.

(1) Registers used

• Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6)

• Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6)

• Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6)

• Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6)

• Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6)

• Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6)

• Input switch control register (ISC)

• Port mode register 1 (PM1)

• Port register 1 (P1)

The basic procedure of setting an operation in the UART mode is as follows.

<1> Set the CKSR6 register (see Figure 13-8).

<2> Set the BRGC6 register (see Figure 13-9).

<3> Set bits 0 to 4 (ISRM6, SL6, CL6, PS60, PS61) of the ASIM6 register (see Figure 13-5).

<4> Set bits 0 and 1 (TXDLV6, DIR6) of the ASICL6 register (see Figure 13-10).

<5> Set bit 7 (POWER6) of the ASIM6 register to 1.

<6> Set bit 6 (TXE6) of the ASIM6 register to 1. → Transmission is enabled.

Set bit 5 (RXE6) of the ASIM6 register to 1. → Reception is enabled.

<7> Write data to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6). → Data transmission is started.

Caution Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port mode register

and port register.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 283

The relationship between the register settings and pins is shown below.

Table 13-2. Relationship Between Register Settings and Pins

Pin Function POWER6 TXE6 RXE6 PM13 P13 PM14 P14 UART6

Operation TxD6/P13 RxD6/P14

0 0 0 ×Note ×

Note ×

Note ×

Note Stop P13 P14

0 1 ×Note ×

Note 1 × Reception P13 RxD6

1 0 0 1 ×Note ×

Note Transmission TxD6 P14

1

1 1 0 1 1 ×

Transmission/

reception TxD6 RxD6

Note Can be set as port function.

Remark ×: Don’t care

POWER6: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mod e register 6 (ASIM6)

TXE6: Bit 6 of ASIM6

RXE6: Bit 5 of ASIM6

PM1×: Port mode register

P1×: Port output latch

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

284

(2) Communication operation

(a) Format and waveform example of normal transmit/receive data

Figures 13-13 and 13-14 show the format and waveform example of the normal transmit/receive data.

Figure 13-13. Format of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data

1. LSB-first transmission/reception

Start

bit

Parity

bit

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4

1 data frame

Character bits

D5 D6 D7 Stop bit

2. MSB-first transmission/reception

Start

bit

Parity

bit

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3

1 data frame

Character bits

D2 D1 D0 Stop bit

One data frame consists of the following bits.

• Start bit ... 1 bit

• Character bits ... 7 or 8 bits

• Parity bit ... Even parity, odd parity, 0 parity, or no parity

• Stop bit ... 1 or 2 bits

The character bit length, parity, and stop bit length in one data frame are specified by asynchronous serial

interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6).

Whether data is communicated with the LSB or MSB first is specified by bit 1 (DIR6) of asynchronous serial

interface control register 6 (ASICL6).

Whether the TXD6 pin outputs normal or inverted data is specified by bit 0 (TXDLV6) of ASICL6.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 285

Figure 13-14. Example of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data Waveform

1. Data length: 8 bits, LSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H

1 data frame

Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop

2. Data length: 8 bits, MSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H

1 data frame

Start D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Parity Stop

3. Data length: 8 bits, MSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H, TXD6 pin

inverted output

1 data frame

Start D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Parity Stop

4. Data length: 7 bits, LSB first, Parity: Odd parity, Stop bit: 2 bits, Communication data: 36H

1 data frame

Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Parity StopStop

5. Data length: 8 bits, LSB first, Parity: None, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 87H

1 data frame

Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

286

(b) Parity types and operation

The parity bit is used to detect a bit error in communication data. Usually, the same type of parity bit is used

on both the transmission and reception sides. With even parity and odd parity, a 1-bit (odd number) error

can be detected. With zero parity and no parity, an error cannot be detected.

Caution Fix the PS61 and PS60 bits to 0 when the device is incorporated in LIN.

(i) Even parity

• Transmission

Transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that are “1” is even.

The value of the parity bit is as follows.

If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are “1”: 1

If transmit data has an even number of bits that are “1”: 0

• Reception

The number of bits that are “1” in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is odd, a

parity error occurs.

(ii) Odd parity

• Transmission

Unlike even parity, transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that

are “1” is odd.

If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are “1”: 0

If transmit data has an even number of bits that are “1”: 1

• Reception

The number of bits that are “1” in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is even, a

parity error occurs.

(iii) 0 parity

The parity bit is cleared to 0 when data is transmitted, regardless of the transmit data.

The parity bit is not detected when the data is received. Therefore, a parity error does not occur

regardless of whether the parity bit is “0” or “1”.

(iv) No parity

No parity bit is appended to the transmit data.

Reception is performed assuming that there is no parity bit when data is received. Because there is no

parity bit, a parity error does not occur.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 287

(c) Normal transmission

The TXD6 pin outputs a high level when bit 7 (POWER6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode

register 6 (ASIM6) is set to 1. If bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 is then set to 1, transmission is enabled.

Transmission can be started by writing transmit data to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6). The start bit, parity

bit, and stop bit are automatically appended to the data.

When transmission is started, the data in TXB6 is transferred to transmit shift register 6 (TXS6). After that,

the data is sequentially output from TXS6 to the TXD6 pin. When transmission is completed, the parity and

stop bits set by ASIM6 are appended and a transmission completion interrupt request (INTST6) is generated.

Transmission is stopped until the data to be transmitted next is written to TXB6.

Figure 13-15 shows the timing of the transmission completion interrupt request (INTST6). This interrupt

occurs as soon as the last stop bit has been output.

Figure 13-15. Normal Transmission Completion Interrupt Request Timing

1. Stop bit length: 1

INTST6

D0Start D1 D2 D6 D7 Stop

TXD6 (output) Parity

2. Stop bit length: 2

TXD6 (output)

INTST6

D0Start D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity Stop

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

288

(d) Continuous transmission

The next transmit data can be written to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) as soon as transmit shift register 6

(TXS6) has started its shift operation. Consequently, even while the INTST6 interrupt is being serviced after

transmission of one data frame, data can be continuously transmitted and an efficient communication rate

can be realized. In addition, the TXB6 register can be efficiently written twice (2 bytes) without having to wait

for the transmission time of one data frame, by reading bit 0 (TXSF6) of asynchronous serial interface

transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) when the transmission completion interrupt has occurred.

To transmit data continuously, be sure to reference the ASIF6 register to check the transmission status and

whether the TXB6 register can be written, and then write the data.

Cautions 1. The TXBF6 and TXSF6 flags of the ASIF6 register change from “10” to “11”, and to “01”

during continuous transmission. To check the status, therefore, do not use a

combination of the TXBF6 and TXSF6 flags for judgment. Read only the TXBF6 flag

when executing continuous transmission.

2. When the device is incorporated in a LIN, the continuous transmission function cannot

be used. Make sure that asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6

(ASIF6) is 00H before writing transmit data to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6).

TXBF6 Writing to TXB6 Register

0 Writing enabled

1 Writing disabled

Caution To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXB6 register.

Be sure to check that the TXBF6 flag is “0”. If so, write the next transmit data (second byte)

to the TXB6 register. If data is written to the TXB6 register while the TXBF6 flag is “1”, the

transmit data cannot be guaranteed.

The communication status can be checked using the TXSF6 flag.

TXSF6 Transmission Status

0 Transmission is completed.

1 Transmission is in progress.

Cautions 1. To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous transmission, be sure

to check that the TXSF6 flag is “0” after generation of the transmission completion

interrupt, and then execute initialization. If initialization is executed while the TXSF6

flag is “1”, the transmit data cannot be guaranteed.

2. During continuous transmission, an overrun error may occur, which means that the

next transmission was completed before execution of INTST6 interrupt servicing after

transmission of one data frame. An overrun error can be detected by developing a

program that can count the number of transmit data and by referencing the TXSF6 flag.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 289

Figure 13-16 shows an example of the continuous transmission processing flow.

Figure 13-16. Example of Continuous Transmission Processing Flow

Write TXB6.

Set registers.

Write TXB6.

Transfer

executed necessary

number of times?

Yes

Read ASIF6

TXBF6 = 0?

No

No

Yes

Transmission

completion interrupt

occurs?

Read ASIF6

TXSF6 = 0?

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Completion of

transmission processing

Transfer

executed necessary

number of times?

Remark TXB6: Transmit buffer register 6

ASIF6: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6

TXBF6: Bit 1 of ASIF6 (transmit buffer data flag)

TXSF6: Bit 0 of ASIF6 (transmit shift register data flag)

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

290

Figure 13-17 shows the timing of starting continuous transmission, and Figure 13-18 shows the timing of

ending continuous transmission.

Figure 13-17. Timing of Starting Continuous Transmission

T

X

D6 Start

INTST6

Data (1)

Data (1) Data (2) Data (3)

Data (2)Data (1) Data (3)

FF

FF

Parity Stop Data (2) Parity Stop

TXB6

TXS6

TXBF6

TXSF6

Start Start

Note

Note When ASIF6 is read, there is a period in which TXBF6 and TXSF6 = 1, 1. Therefore, judge whether

writing is enabled using only the TXBF6 bit.

Remark T

XD6: TXD6 pin (output)

INTST6: Interrupt request signal

TXB6: Transmit buffer register 6

TXS6: Transmit shift register 6

ASIF6: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6

TXBF6: Bit 1 of ASIF6

TXSF6: Bit 0 of ASIF6

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 291

Figure 13-18. Timing of Ending Continuous Transmission

T

X

D6 Start

INTST6

Data (n − 1)

Data (n − 1) Data (n)

Data (n)Data (n − 1) FF

Parity

Stop Stop Data (n) Parity Stop

TXB6

TXS6

TXBF6

TXSF6

POWER6 or TXE6

Start

Remark TXD6: TXD6 pin (output)

INTST6: Interrupt request signal

TXB6: Transmit buffer register 6

TXS6: Transmit shift register 6

ASIF6: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6

TXBF6: Bit 1 of ASIF6

TXSF6: Bit 0 of ASIF6

POWER6: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register (ASIM6)

TXE6: Bit 6 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register (ASIM6)

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

292

(e) Normal reception

Reception is enabled and the RXD6 pin input is sampled when bit 7 (POWER6) of asynchronous serial

interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is set to 1 and then bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 is set to 1.

The 8-bit counter of the baud rate generator starts counting when the falling edge of the RXD6 pin input is

detected. When the set value of baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) has been counted, the

RXD6 pin input is sampled again ( in Figure 13-19). If the RXD6 pin is low level at this time, it is recognized

as a start bit.

When the start bit is detected, reception is started, and serial data is sequentially stored in the receive shift

register (RXS6) at the set baud rate. When the stop bit has been received, the reception completion interrupt

(INTSR6) is generated and the data of RXS6 is written to receive buffer register 6 (RXB6). If an overrun

error (OVE6) occurs, however, the receive data is not written to RXB6.

Even if a parity error (PE6) occurs while reception is in progress, reception continues to the reception

position of the stop bit, and an error interrupt (INTSR6/INTSRE6) is generated on completion of reception.

Figure 13-19. Reception Completion Interrupt Request Timing

R

X

D6 (input)

INTSR6

Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop

RXB6

Cautions 1. Be sure to read receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) even if a reception error occurs.

Otherwise, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the reception

error status will persist.

2. Reception is always performed with the “number of stop bits = 1”. The second stop bit

is ignored.

3. Be sure to read asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6)

before reading RXB6.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 293

(f) Reception error

Three types of errors may occur during reception: a parity error, framing error, or overrun error. If the error

flag of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) is set as a result of data

reception, a reception error interrupt request (INTSR6/INTSRE6) is generated.

Which error has occurred during reception can be identified by reading the contents of ASIS6 in the reception

error interrupt servicing (INTSR6/INTSRE6) (refer to Figure 13-6).

The contents of ASIS6 are reset to 0 when ASIS6 is read.

Table 13-3. Cause of Reception Error

Reception Error Cause

Parity error The parity specified for transmission does not match the parity of the

receive data.

Framing error Stop bit is not detected.

Overrun error Reception of the next data is completed before data is read from

receive buffer register 6 (RXB6).

The error interrupt can be separated into reception completion interrupt (INTSR6) and error interrupt

(INTSRE6) by clearing bit 0 (ISRM6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) to

0.

Figure 13-20. Reception Error Interrupt

1. If ISRM6 is cleared to 0 (reception completion interrupt (INTSR6) and error interrupt (INTSRE6) are

separated)

(a) No error during reception (b) Error during reception

INTSR6

INTSRE6

INTSR6

INTSRE6

2. If ISRM6 is set to 1 (error interrupt is included in INTSR6)

(a) No error during reception (b) Error during reception

INTSRE6

INTSR6

INTSRE6

INTSR6

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

294

(g) Noise filter of receive data

The RxD6 signal is sampled with the base clock output by the prescaler block.

If two sampled values are the same, the output of the match detector changes, and the data is sampled as

input data.

Because the circuit is configured as shown in Figure 13-21, the internal processing of the reception operation

is delayed by two clocks from the external signal status.

Figure 13-21. Noise Filter Circuit

Internal signal B

Internal signal A

Match detector

In

Base clock

R

X

D6/P14 QIn

LD_EN

Q

(h) SBF transmission

When the device is incorporated in LIN, the SBF (Synchronous Break Field) transmission control function is

used for transmission. For the transmission operation of LIN, see Figure 13-1 LIN Transmission

Operation.

SBF transmission is used to transmit an SBF length that is a low-level width of 13 bits or more by adjusting

the baud rate value of the ordinary UART transmission function.

[Setting method]

Transmit 00H by setting the number of character bits of the data to 8 bits and the parity bit to 0 parity or even

parity. This enables a low-level transmission of a data frame consisting of 10 bits (1 bit (start bit) + 8 bits

(character bits) + 1 bit (parity bit)).

Adjust the baud rate value to adjust this 10-bit low level to the targeted SBF length.

Example If LIN is to be transmitted under the following conditions

• Base clock of UART6 = 5 MHz (set by clock selection register 6 (CKSR6))

• Target baud rate value = 19200 bps

To realize the above baud rate value, the length of a 13-bit SBF is as follows if baud rate generator control

register 6 (BRGC6) is set to 130.

• 13-bit SBF length = 0.2

µ

s × 130 × 2 × 13 = 676

µ

s

To realize a 13-bit SBF length in 10 bits, set a value 1.3 times the targeted baud rate to BRGC6. In this

example, set 169 to BRGC6. The transmission length of a 10-bit low level in this case is as follows, and

matches the 13-bit SBF length.

• 10-bit low-level transmission length = 0.2

µ

s × 169 × 2 × 10 = 676

µ

s

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 295

If the number of bits set by BRGC6 runs short, adjust the number of bits by setting the base clock of

UART6.

Figure 13-22. Example of Setting Procedure of SBF Transmission (Flowchart)

Start

Read BRGC6 register and save current

set value of BRGC6 register to general-

purpose register.

Clear TXE6 and RXE6 bits of ASIM6

register to 0 (to disable transmission/

reception).

Set value to BRGC6 register to realize

desired SBF length.

Set character length of data to 8 bits

and parity to 0 or even using ASIM6

register.

Set TXE6 bit of ASIM6 register to 1 to

enable transmission.

Set TXB6 register to "00H" and start

transmission.

INTST6 occurred?

No

Yes

Clear TXE6 and RXE6 bits of ASIM6

register to 0.

Rewrite saved BRGC6 value to BRGC6

register.

Re-set PS61 bit, PS60 bit, and CL6 bit

of ASIM6 register to desired value.

Set TXE6 bit of ASIM6 register to 1 to

enable transmission.

End

Figure 13-23. SBF Transmission

T

X

D6

INTST6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Stop

Remark T

XD6: TXD6 pin (output)

INTST6: Transmission completion interrupt request

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

296

(i) SBF reception

When the device is incorporated in LIN, the SBF (Synchronous Break Field) reception control function is

used for reception. For the reception operation of LIN, refer to Figure 13-2 LIN Reception Operation.

Reception is enabled when bit 7 (POWER6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6

(ASIM6) is set to 1 and then bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 is set to 1. SBF reception is enabled when bit 6 (SBRT6)

of asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) is set to 1. In the SBF reception enabled status,

the RXD6 pin is sampled and the start bit is detected in the same manner as the normal reception enable

status.

When the start bit has been detected, reception is started, and serial data is sequentially stored in receive

shift register 6 (RXS6) at the set baud rate. When the stop bit is received and if the width of SBF is 11 bits or

more, a reception completion interrupt request (INTSR6) is generated as normal processing. At this time, the

SBRF6 and SBRT6 bits are automatically cleared, and SBF reception ends. Detection of errors, such as

OVE6, PE6, and FE6 (bits 0 to 2 of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6)) is

suppressed, and error detection processing of UART communication is not performed. In addition, data

transfer between receive shift register 6 (RXS6) and receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) is not performed, and

the reset value of FFH is retained. If the width of SBF is 10 bits or less, an interrupt does not occur as error

processing after the stop bit has been received, and the SBF reception mode is restored. In this case, the

SBRF6 and SBRT6 bits are not cleared.

Figure 13-24. SBF Reception

1. Normal SBF reception (stop bit is detected with a width of more than 10.5 bits)

RXD6

SBRT6

/SBRF6

INTSR6

1234567891011

2. SBF reception error (stop bit is detected with a width of 10.5 bits or less)

R

X

D6

SBRT6

/SBRF6

INTSR6

12345678910

“0”

Remark RXD6: RXD6 pin (input)

SBRT6: Bit 6 of asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6)

SBRF6: Bit 7 of ASICL6

INTSR6: Reception completion interrupt request

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 297

13.4.3 Dedicated baud rate generator

The dedicated baud rate generator consists of a source clock selector and an 8-bit programmable counter, and

generates a serial clock for transmission/reception of UART6.

Separate 8-bit counters are provided for transmission and reception.

(1) Configuration of baud rate generator

• Base clock

The clock selected by bits 3 to 0 (TPS63 to TPS60) of clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) is supplied to

each module when bit 7 (POWER6) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is

1. This clock is called the base clock and its frequency is called fXCLK6. The base clock is fixed to low level

when POWER6 = 0.

• Transmission counter

This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER6) or bit 6 (TXE6) of asynchronous serial

interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is 0.

It starts counting when POWER6 = 1 and TXE6 = 1.

The counter is cleared to 0 when the first data transmitted is written to transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6).

If data are continuously transmitted, the counter is cleared to 0 again when one frame of data has been

completely transmitted. If there is no data to be transmitted next, the counter is not cleared to 0 and continues

counting until POWER6 or TXE6 is cleared to 0.

• Reception counter

This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER6) or bit 5 (RXE6) of asynchronous serial

interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) is 0.

It starts counting when the start bit has been detected.

The counter stops operation after one frame has been received, until the next start bit is detected.

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

298

Figure 13-25. Configuration of Baud Rate Generator

Selector

POWER6

8-bit counter

Match detector Baud rate

Baud rate generator

BRGC6: MDL67 to MDL60

1/2

POWER6, TXE6 (or RXE6)

CKSR6: TPS63 to TPS60

f

X

f

X

/2

f

X

/2

2

f

X

/2

3

f

X

/2

4

f

X

/2

5

f

X

/2

6

f

X

/2

7

f

X

/2

8

f

X

/2

9

f

X

/2

10

8-bit timer/

event counter

50 output

f

XCLK6

Remark POWER6: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6)

TXE6: Bit 6 of ASIM6

RXE6: Bit 5 of ASIM6

CKSR6: Clock selection register 6

BRGC6: Baud rate generator control register 6

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 299

(2) Generation of serial clock

A serial clock can be generated by using clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) and baud rate generator control

register 6 (BRGC6).

Select the clock to be input to the 8-bit counter by using bits 3 to 0 (TPS63 to TPS60) of CKSR6.

Bits 7 to 0 (MDL67 to MDL60) of BRGC6 can be used to select the division value of the 8-bit counter.

(a) Baud rate

The baud rate can be calculated by the following expression.

• Baud rate = [bps]

fXCLK6: Frequency of base clock selected by TPS63 to TPS60 bits of CKSR6 register

k: Value set by MDL67 to MDL60 bits of BRGC6 register (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 255)

(b) Error of baud rate

The baud rate error can be calculated by the following expression.

• Error (%) = − 1 × 100 [%]

Cautions 1. Keep the baud rate error during transmission to within the permissible error range at

the reception destination.

2. Make sure that the baud rate error during reception satisfies the range shown in (4)

Permissible baud rate range during reception.

Example: Frequency of base clock = 10 MHz = 10,000,000 Hz

Set value of MDL67 to MDL60 bits of BRGC6 register = 00100001B (k = 33)

Target baud rate = 153600 bps

Baud rate = 10 M/(2 × 33)

= 10000000/(2 × 33) = 151,515 [bps]

Error = (151515/153600 − 1) × 100

= −1.357 [%]

Actual baud rate (baud rate with error)

Desired baud rate (correct baud rate)

fXCLK6

2 × k

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

300

(3) Example of setting baud rate

Table 13-4. Set Data of Baud Rate Generator

fX = 10.0 MHz fX = 8.38 MHz fX = 4.19 MHz

Baud Rate

[bps] TPS63 to

TPS60

k Calculated

Value

ERR[%] TPS63 to

TPS60

k Calculated

Value

ERR[%] TPS63 to

TPS60

k Calculated

Value

ERR[%]

600 6H 130 601 0.16 6H 109 601 0.11 5H 109 601 0.11

1200 5H 130 1202 0.16 5H 109 1201 0.11 4H 109 1201 0.11

2400 4H 130 2404 0.16 4H 109 2403 0.11 3H 109 2403 0.11

4800 3H 130 4808 0.16 3H 109 4805 0.11 2H 109 4805 0.11

9600 2H 130 9615 0.16 2H 109 9610 0.11 1H 109 9610 0.11

10400 2H 120 10417 0.16 2H 101 10371 0.28 1H 101 10475 −0.28

19200 1H 130 19231 0.16 1H 109 19220 0.11 0H 109 19220 0.11

31250 1H 80 31250 0.00 0H 134 31268 0.06 0H 67 31268 0.06

38400 0H 130 38462 0.16 0H 109 38440 0.11 0H 55 38090 −0.80

76800 0H 65 76923 0.16 0H 55 76182 −0.80 0H 27 77593 1.03

115200 0H 43 116279 0.94 0H 36 116389 1.03 0H 18 116389 1.03

153600 0H 33 151515 −1.36 0H 27 155185 1.03 0H 14 149643 −2.58

230400 0H 22 227272 −1.36 0H 18 232778 1.03 0H 9 232778 1.03

Remark TPS63 to TPS60: Bits 3 to 0 of clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) (setting of base clock (fXCLK6))

k: Value set by MDL67 to MDL60 bits of baud rate generator control register 6

(BRGC6) (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 255)

f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

ERR: Baud rate error

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 301

(4) Permissible baud rate range during reception

The permissible error from the baud rate at the transmission destination during reception is shown below.

Caution Make sure that the baud rate error during reception is within the permissible error range, by

using the calculation expression shown below.

Figure 13-26. Permissible Baud Rate Range During Reception

FL

1 data frame (11 × FL)

FLmin

FLmax

Data frame length

of UART6 Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit

Minimum permissible

data frame length

Maximum permissible

data frame length

Stop bit

Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit

Latch timing

Stop bit

Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit

As shown in Figure 13-26, the latch timing of the receive data is determined by the counter set by baud rate

generator control register 6 (BRGC6) after the start bit has been detected. If the last data (stop bit) meets this

latch timing, the data can be correctly received.

Assuming that 11-bit data is received, the theoretical values can be calculated as follows.

FL = (Brate)−1

Brate: Baud rate of UART6

k: Set value of BRGC6

FL: 1-bit data length

Margin of latch timing: 2 clocks

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

302

Minimum permissible data frame length: FLmin = 11 × FL − × FL = FL

Therefore, the maximum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows.

BRmax = (FLmin/11)−1 = Brate

Similarly, the maximum permissible data frame length can be calculated as follows.

10 k + 2 21k − 2

11 2 × k 2 × k

FLmax = FL × 11

Therefore, the minimum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows.

BRmin = (FLmax/11)−1 = Brate

The permissible baud rate error between UART6 and the transmission destination can be calculated from the

above minimum and maximum baud rate expressions, as follows.

Table 13-5. Maximum/Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error

Division Ratio (k) Maximum Permissible Baud Rate Error Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error

8 +3.53% −3.61%

20 +4.26% −4.31%

50 +4.56% −4.58%

100 +4.66% −4.67%

255 +4.72% −4.73%

Remarks 1. The permissible error of reception depends on the number of bits in one frame, input clock

frequency, and division ratio (k). The higher the input clock frequency and the higher the division

ratio (k), the higher the permissible error.

2. k: Set value of BRGC6

k − 2

2k

21k + 2

2k

22k

21k + 2

× FLmax = 11 × FL − × FL = FL

21k – 2

20k

20k

21k − 2

CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACE UART6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 303

(5) Data frame length during continuous transmission

When data is continuously transmitted, the data frame length from a stop bit to the next start bit is extended by

two clocks of base clock from the normal value. However, the result of communication is not affected because

the timing is initialized on the reception side when the start bit is detected.

Figure 13-27. Data Frame Length During Continuous Transmission

Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit

FL

1 data frame

FL FL FL FL FLFLFLstp

Start bit of

second byte

Start bit Bit 0

Where the 1-bit data length is FL, the stop bit length is FLstp, and base clock frequency is fXCLK6, the following

expression is satisfied.

FLstp = FL + 2/fXCLK6

Therefore, the data frame length during continuous transmission is:

Data frame length = 11 × FL + 2/fXCLK6

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

304

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

14.1 Functions of Serial Interface CSI10

Serial interface CSI10 has the following two modes.

• Operation stop mode

• 3-wire serial I/O mode

(1) Operation stop mode

This mode is used when serial communication is not performed and can enable a reduction in the power

consumption.

For details, see 14.4.1 Operation stop mode.

(2) 3-wire serial I/O mode (MSB/LSB-first selectable)

This mode is used to communicate 8-bit data using three lines: a serial clock line (SCK10) and two serial data

lines (SI10 and SO10).

The processing time of data communication can be shortened in the 3-wire serial I/O mode because transmission

and reception can be simultaneously executed.

In addition, whether 8-bit data is communicated with the MSB or LSB first can be specified, so this interface can

be connected to any device.

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is used for connecting peripheral ICs and display controllers with a clocked serial

interface.

For details, see 14.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode.

14.2 Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10

Serial interface CSI10 includes the following hardware.

Table 14-1. Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10

Item Configuration

Registers Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10)

Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10)

Control registers Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)

Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)

Port mode register 1 (PM1)

Port register 1 (P1)

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 305

Figure 14-1. Block Diagram of Serial Interface CSI10

Internal bus

SI10/P11/RXD0

INTCSI10

fX/2

fX/2

2

fX/2

3

fX/2

4

fX/2

5

fX/2

6

fX/2

7

SCK10/P10/TxD0

Transmit buffer

register 10 (SOTB10)

Transmit controller

Clock start/stop controller &

clock phase controller

Serial I/O shift

register 10 (SIO10)

Output

selector SO10/P12

Output latch

8

Transmit data

controller

8

Output latch

(P12)

PM12

Selector

(1) Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10)

This register sets the transmit data.

Transmission/reception is started by writing data to SOTB10 when bit 7 (CSIE10) and bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial

operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) are 1.

The data written to SOTB10 is converted from parallel data into serial data by serial I/O shift register 10, and

output to the serial output pin (SO10).

SOTB10 can be written or read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input makes this register undefined.

Caution Do not access SOTB10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication).

(2) Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10)

This is an 8-bit register that converts data from parallel data into serial data and vice versa.

This register can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

Reception is started by reading data from SIO10 if bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)

is 0.

During reception, the data is read from the serial input pin (SI10) to SIO10.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Caution Do not access SIO10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication).

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

306

14.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface CSI10

Serial interface CSI10 is controlled by the followin g four registers.

• Serial operation mode registe r 10 (CSIM10)

• Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)

• Port mode register 1 (PM1)

• Port register 1 (P1)

(1) Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)

CSIM10 is used to select the operation mode and enable or disable operation.

CSIM10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 14-2. Format of Serial Operation Mode Register 10 (CSIM10)

Address: FF80H After reset: 00H R/WNote 1

Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CSIM10 CSIE10 TRMD10 0 DIR10 0 0 0 CSOT10

CSIE10 Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode

0 Disables operationNote 2 and asynchronously resets the internal circuitNo te 3.

1 Enables operation

TRMD10Note 4 Transmit/receive mode control

0

Note 5 Receive mode (transmission disabled).

1 Transmit/receive mode

DIR10Note 6 First bit specification

0 MSB

1 LSB

CSOT10 Communication status flag

0 Communication is stopped.

1 Communication is in progress.

Notes 1. Bit 0 is a read-only bit.

2. When using P10/SCK10/TxD0, P11/SI10/RxD0, or P12/SO10 as a general-purpose port, see

CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS, Caution 3 of Figure 14-3, and Table 14-2.

3. Bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 and serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) are reset.

4. Do not rewrite TRMD10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication).

5. The SO10 output is fixed to the low level w hen TRMD10 is 0. Reception is started when data is read

from SIO10.

6. Do not rewrite DIR10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during seri al communication).

Caution Be sure to clear bit 5 to 0.

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 307

(2) Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)

CSIC10 is used to specify the timing of the data transmission/reception and set the serial clock.

CSIC10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 14-3. Format of Serial Clock Selection Register 10 (CSIC10)

Address: FF81H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CSIC10 0 0 0 CKP10 DAP10 CKS102 CKS101 CKS100

CKP10 DAP10 Specification of data transmission/reception timing Type

0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCK10

SO10

SI10 input timing

1

0 1

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCK10

SO10

SI10 input timing

2

1 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCK10

SO10

SI10 input timing

3

1 1

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCK10

SO10

SI10 input timing

4

CKS102 CKS101 CKS100 CSI10 serial clock selectionNote Mode

0 0 0 fX/2 (5 MHz) Master mode

0 0 1 fX/22 (2.5 MHz) Master mode

0 1 0 fX/23 (1.25 MHz) Master mode

0 1 1 fX/24 (625 kHz) Master mode

1 0 0 fX/25 (312.5 kHz) Master mode

1 0 1 fX/26 (156.25 kHz) Master mode

1 1 0 fX/27 (78.13 kHz) Master mode

1 1 1 External clock input to SCK10 Slave mode

Note Set the serial clock to satisfy the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Serial clock ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Serial clock ≤ 4.19 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Serial clock ≤ 2.5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Serial clock ≤ 1.25 MHz

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

308

Cautions 1. When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied to the CPU, the clock of the Ring-

OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the serial clock. At this time, the operation of serial

interface CSI10 is not guaranteed.

2. Do not write to CSIC10 while CSIE10 = 1 (operation enabled).

3. Clear CKP10 to 0 to use P10/SCK10/TxD0, P11/SI10/RxD0, and P12/SO10 as general-purpose

port pins.

4. The phase type of the data clock is type 1 after reset.

Remarks 1. Figures in parentheses are for operation with fX = 10 MHz.

2. f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

(3) Port mode register 1 (PM1)

PM1 is used to set port 1 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using P10/SCK10 as the clock output pin of the serial interface, clear PM10 to 0 and set the output latch of

P10 to 1.

When using P12/SO10 as the data output pin of the serial interface, clear PM12 and the output latches of P12 to

0.

When using P10/SCK10 as the clock input pin of the serial interface, and P11/SI10/RxD0 as the data input pin,

set PM10 and PM11 to 1. At this time, the output latches of P10 and P11 may be 0 or 1.

PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets this register to FFH.

Figure 14-4. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)

7

PM17

6

PM16

5

PM15

4

PM14

3

PM13

2

PM12

1

PM11

0

PM10

Symbol

PM1

Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W

PM1n

0

1

P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

Output mode (output buffer on)

Input mode (output buffer off)

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 309

14.4 Operation of Serial Interface CSI10

Serial interface CSI10 can be used in the foll owing two modes.

• Operation stop mode

• 3-wire serial I/O mode

14.4.1 Operation stop mode

Serial communication is not executed in this mode. Therefore, the power consumption can be reduced. In

addition, the P10/SCK10/TXD0, P11/SI10/RXD0, and P12/SO10 pins can be used as ordinary I/O port pins in this

mode.

(1) Register used

The operation stop mode is set by serial operation mo de register 10 (CSIM10).

To set the operation stop mode, clear bit 7 (CSIE10) of CSIM10 to 0.

(a) Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)

CSIM10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM10 to 00H.

Address: FF80H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CSIM10 CSIE10 TRMD10 0 DIR10 0 0 0 CSOT10

CSIE10 Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode

0 Disables operationNote 1 and asynchronously resets the internal circuitNote 2.

Notes 1. To use the SI10/RxD0/P11, SO10/P12, and SCK10/TxD0/P 10 pi ns as g eneral-purp ose port pins,

see CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS, Caution 3 of Figure 14-3, and Table 14-2.

2. Bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 and serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) are reset.

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

310

14.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is used for connecting peripheral ICs and display controllers that have a clocked serial

interface.

In this mode, communication is executed by using three lines: the serial clock (SCK10), serial output (SO10), and

serial input (SI10) lines.

(1) Registers used

• Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)

• Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)

• Port mode register 1 (PM1)

• Port register 1 (P1)

The basic procedure of setting an operation in the 3-wire serial I/O mode is as follows.

<1> Set the CSIC10 register (see Figure 14-3).

<2> Set bits 0, 4, and 6 (CSOT10, DIR10, and TRMD10) of the CSIM10 register (see Figure 14-2).

<3> Set bit 7 (CSIE10) of the CSIM10 register to 1. → Transmission/reception is enabled.

<4> Write data to transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10). → Data transmission/reception is started.

Read data from serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10). → Data reception is started.

Caution Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port mode

register and port register.

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 311

The relationship between the register settings and pins is shown below.

Table 14-2. Relationship Between Register Settings and Pins

Pin Function CSIE10 TRMD10 PM11 P11 PM12 P12 PM10 P10 CSI10

Operation SI10/RxD0/

P11 SO10/P12 SCK10/

TxD0/P10

0 × ×Note 1 ×

Note 1 ×

Note 1 ×

Note 1 ×

Note 1 ×

Note 1 Stop RxD0/P11 P12

TxD0/

P10Note 2

1 0 1 × ×Note 1 ×

Note 1 1 × Slave

receptionNote 3 SI10 P12

SCK10

(input)Note 3

1 1 ×Note 1 ×

Note 1 0 0 1 × Slave

transmissionNote 3 RxD0/P11 SO10 SCK10

(input)Note 3

1 1 1 × 0 0 1 × Slave

transmission/

receptionNote 3

SI10 SO10

SCK10

(input)Note 3

1 0 1 × ×Note 1 ×

Note 1 0 1 Master reception SI10 P12 SCK10

(output)

1 1 ×Note 1 ×

Note 1 0 0 0 1 Master

transmission RxD0/P11 SO10 SCK10

(output)

1 1 1 × 0 0 0 1 Master

transmission/

reception

SI10 SO10

SCK10

(output)

Notes 1. Can be set as port function.

2. To use P10/SCK10/TxD0 as port pins, clear CKP10 to 0.

3. To use the slave mode, set CKS102, CKS1 01, and CKS100 to 1, 1, 1.

Remark ×: Don’t care

CSIE10: Bit 7 of serial operation mode register 10 (CS I M10)

TRMD10: Bit 6 of CSIM10

CKP10: Bit 4 of serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)

CKS102, CKS101, CKS100: Bits 2 to 0 of CSIC10

PM1×: Port mode register

P1×: Port output latch

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

312

(2) Communication operation

In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, data is transmitted or received in 8-bit units. Each bit of the data is transmitted or

received in synchronization with the serial clock.

Data can be transmitted or received if bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is 1.

Transmission/reception is started when a value is written to transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10). In addition,

data can be received when bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is 0.

Reception is started when data is read from serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10).

After communication has been started, bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 is set to 1. When communication of 8-bit data

has been completed, a communication completion interrupt request flag (CSIIF10) is set, and CSOT10 is cleared

to 0. Then the next communication is enabled.

Caution Do not access the control register and data register when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial

communication).

Figure 14-5. Timing in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (1/2)

(1) Transmission/reception timing (Type 1; TRMD10 = 1, DIR10 = 0, CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0)

AAHABH 56H ADH 5AH B5H 6AH D5H

55H (communication data)

55H is written to SOTB10.

SCK10

SOTB10

SIO10

CSOT10

CSIIF10

SO10

SI10 (receive AAH)

Read/write trigger

INTCSI10

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 313

Figure 14-5. Timing in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (2/2)

(2) Transmission/reception timing (Type 2; TRMD10 = 1, DIR10 = 0, CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1)

ABH 56H ADH 5AH B5H 6AH D5H

SCK10

SOTB10

SIO10

CSOT10

CSIIF10

SO10

SI10 (input AAH)

AAH

55H (communication data)

55H is written to SOTB10.

Read/write trigger

INTCSI10

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

314

Figure 14-6. Timing of Clock/Data Phase

(a) Type 1; CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCK10

SO10

Writing to SOTB10 or

reading from SIO10

SI10 capture

CSIIF10

CSOT10

(b) Type 2; CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCK10

SO10

Writing to SOTB10 or

reading from SIO10

SI10 capture

CSIIF10

CSOT10

(c) Type 3; CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCK10

SO10

Writing to SOTB10 or

reading from SIO10

SI10 capture

CSIIF10

CSOT10

(d) Type 4; CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCK10

SO10

Writing to SOTB10 or

reading from SIO10

SI10 capture

CSIIF10

CSOT10

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 315

(3) Timing of output to SO10 pin (first bit)

When communication is started, the value of transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) is output from the SO10 pin.

The output operation of the first bit at this time is described below.

Figure 14-7. Output Operation of First Bit

(1) When CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0 (or CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0)

SCK10

SOTB10

SIO10

SO10

Writing to SOTB10 or

reading from SIO10

First bit 2nd bit

Output latch

The first bit is directly latched by the SOTB10 register to the output latch at the falling (or rising) edge of SCK10,

and output from the SO10 pin via an output selector. Then, the value of the SOTB10 register is transferred to the

SIO10 register at the next rising (or falling) edge of SCK10, and shifted one bit. At the same time, the first bit of

the receive data is stored in the SIO10 register via the SI10 pin.

The second and subsequent bits are latched by the SIO10 register to the output latch at the next falling (or rising)

edge of SCK10, and the data is output from the SO10 pin.

(2) When CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1 (or CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1)

SCK10

SOTB10

SIO10

SO10

Writing to SOTB10 or

reading from SIO10

First bit 2nd bit 3rd bit

Output latch

The first bit is directly latched by the SOTB10 register at the falling edge of the write signal of the SOTB10

register or the read signal of the SIO10 register, and output from the SO10 pin via an output selector. Then, the

value of the SOTB10 register is transferred to the SIO10 register at the next falling (or rising) edge of SCK10, and

shifted one bit. At the same time, the first bit of the receive data is stored in the SIO10 register via the SI10 pin.

The second and subsequent bits are latched by the SIO10 register to the output latch at the next rising (or falling)

edge of SCK10, and the data is output from the SO10 pin.

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

316

(4) Output value of SO10 pin (last bit)

After communication has been completed, the SO10 pin holds the output value of the last bit.

Figure 14-8. Output Value of SO10 Pin (Last Bit)

(1) Type 1; when CKP10 = 0 and DAP10 = 0 (or CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0)

SCK10

SOTB10

SIO10

SO10

Writing to SOTB10 or

reading from SIO10

( ← Next request is issued.)

Last bit

Output latch

(2) Type 2; when CKP10 = 0 and DAP10 = 1 (or CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1)

SCK10

SOTB10

SIO10

SO10 Last bit

Writing to SOTB10 or

reading from SIO10 ( ← Next request is issued.)

Output latch

CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 317

(5) SO10 output

The status of the SO10 output is as follows if bit 7 (CSIE10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is

cleared to 0.

Table 14-3. SO10 Output Status

TRMD10 DAP10 DIR10 SO10 Output

TRMD10 = 0Note − − Outputs low levelNote.

DAP10 = 0 − Value of SO10 latch

(low-level output)

DIR10 = 0 Value of bit 7 of SOTB10

TRMD10 = 1

DAP10 = 1

DIR10 = 1 Value of bit 0 of SOTB10

Note Status after reset

Caution If a value is written to TRMD10, DAP10, and DIR10, the output value of SO10 changes.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

318

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

15.1 Interrupt Function Types

The following two types of interrupt functions are used.

(1) Maskable interrupts

These interrupts undergo mask control. Maskable interrupts can be divided into a high interrupt priority group

and a low interrupt priority group by setting the priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L).

Multiple interrupt servicing can be applied to low-priority interrupts when high-priority interrupts are generated. If

two or more interrupts with the same priority are generated simultaneously, each interrupt is serviced according to

its predetermined priority (see Table 15-1).

A standby release signal is generated and STOP and HALT modes are released.

Seven external interrupt requests and 15 internal interrupt requests are provided as maskable interrupts.

(2) Software interrupt

This is a vectored interrupt generated by executing the BRK instruction. It is acknowledged even when interrupts

are disabled. The software interrupt does not undergo interrupt priority control.

15.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration

A total of 23 interrupt sources exist for maskable and software interrupts (see Table 15-1).

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 319

Table 15-1. Interrupt Source List

Interrupt Source Interrupt

Type

Default

PriorityNote 1 Name Trigger

Internal/

External

Vector

Table

Address

Basic

Configuration

TypeNote 2

0 INTLVI Low-voltage detectionNote 3 Internal 0004H (A)

1 INTP0 0006H

2 INTP1 0008H

3 INTP2 000AH

4 INTP3 000CH

5 INTP4 000EH

6 INTP5

Pin input edge detection External

0010H

(B)

7 INTSRE6 UART6 reception error generation 0012H

8 INTSR6 End of UART6 reception 0014H

9 INTST6 End of UART6 transmission 0016H

10 INTCSI10/

INTST0

End of CSI10 communication/end of UART0

transmission

0018H

11 INTTMH1 Match between TMH1 and CMP01

(when compare register is specified)

001AH

12 INTTMH0 Match between TMH0 and CMP00

(when compare register is specified)

001CH

13 INTTM50 Match between TM50 and CR50

(when compare register is specified)

001EH

14 INTTM000 Match between TM00 and CR000

(when compare register is specified),

TI010 pin valid edge detection

(when capture register is specified)

0020H

15 INTTM010 Match between TM00 and CR010

(when compare register is specified),

TI000 pin valid edge detection

(when capture register is specified)

0022H

16 INTAD End of A/D conversion 0024H

17 INTSR0 End of UART0 reception or reception error

generation

0026H

18 INTWTI Watch timer reference time interval signal 0028H

19 INTTM51 Match between TM51 and CR51

(when compare register is specified)

Internal

002AH

(A)

20 INTKR Key interrupt detection External 002CH (C)

Maskable

21 INTWT Watch timer overflow Internal 002EH (A)

Software − BRK BRK instruction execution − 003EH (D)

RESET Reset input

POC Power-on-clearNote 4

LVI Low-voltage detectionNote 5

Clock monitor X1 oscillation stop detection

Reset −

WDT WDT overflow

− 0000H −

Notes 1. The default priority is the priority applicable when two or more maskable interrupts are generated

simultaneously. 0 is the highest priority, and 21 is the lowest.

2. Basic configuration types (A) to (D) correspond to (A) to (D) in Figure 15-1.

3. When bit 1 (LVIMD) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) is cleared to 0.

4. When “POC used” is selected by a mask option.

5. When bit 1 (LVIMD) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) is set to 1.

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

320

Figure 15-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (1/2)

(A) Internal maskable interrupt

Internal bus

Interrupt

request IF

MK IE PR ISP

Priority controller Vector table

address generator

Standby release signal

(B) External maskable interrupt (INTP0 to INTP5)

Internal bus

Interrupt

request IF

MK IE PR ISP

Priority controller Vector table

address generator

Standby release signal

External interrupt edge

enable register

(EGP, EGN)

Edge

detector

IF: Interrupt request flag

IE: Interrupt enable flag

ISP: In-service priority flag

MK: Interrupt mask flag

PR: Priority specification flag

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 321

Figure 15-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (2/2)

(C) External maskable interrupt (INTKR)

IF

MK IE PR ISP

Internal bus

Interrupt

request Priority controller Vector table

address generator

Standby release signal

Key

interrupt

detector

1 when KRMn = 1 (n = 0 to 7)

(D) Software interrupt

Internal bus

Interrupt

request Priority controller Vector table

address generator

IF: Interrupt request flag

IE: Interrupt enable flag

ISP: In-service priority flag

MK: Interrupt mask flag

PR: Priority specification flag

KRM: Key return mode register

15.3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions

The following 6 types of registers are used to control the interrupt functions.

• Interrupt request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L)

• Interrupt mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L)

• Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L)

• External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP)

• External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN)

• Program status word (PSW)

Table 15-2 shows a list of interrupt request flags, interrupt mask flags, and priority specification flags corresponding

to interrupt request sources.

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

322

Table 15-2. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources

Interrupt Request Flag Interrupt Mask Flag Priority Specification Flag

Interrupt

Source Register Register Register

INTLVI LVIIF IF0L LVIMK MK0L LVIPR PR0L

INTP0 PIF0 PMK0 PPR0

INTP1 PIF1 PMK1 PPR1

INTP2 PIF2 PMK2 PPR2

INTP3 PIF3 PMK3 PPR3

INTP4 PIF4 PMK4 PPR4

INTP5 PIF5 PMK5 PPR5

INTSRE6 SREIF6 SREMK6 SREPR6

INTSR6 SRIF6 IF0H SRMK6 MK0H SRPR6 PR0H

INTST6 STIF6 STMK6 STPR6

INTCSI10 DUALIF0Note 1 DUALMK0Note 2 DUALPR0Note 2

INTST0

INTTMH1 TMIFH1 TMMKH1 TMPRH1

INTTMH0 TMIFH0 TMMKH0 TMPRH0

INTTM50 TMIF50 TMMK50 TMPR50

INTTM000 TMIF000 TMMK000 TMPR000

INTTM010 TMIF010 TMMK010 TMPR010

INTAD ADIF IF1L ADMK MK1L ADPR PR1L

INTSR0 SRIF0 SRMK0 SRPR0

INTWTI WTIIF WTIMK WTIPR

INTTM51 TMIF51 TMMK51 TMPR51

INTKR KRIF KRMK KRPR

INTWT WTIF WTMK WTPR

Notes 1. If either of the two types of interrupt sources is generated, these flags are set (1).

2. Both types of interrupt sources are supported.

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 323

(1) Interrupt request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L)

The interrupt request flags are set to 1 when the corresponding interrupt request is generated or an instruction is

executed. They are cleared to 0 when an instruction is executed upon acknowledgment of an interrupt request or

upon RESET input.

When an interrupt is acknowledged, the interrupt request flag is automatically cleared and then the interrupt

routine is entered.

IF0L, IF0H, and IF1L are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When IF0L and IF0H are

combined to form 16-bit register IF0, they are set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears these registers to 00H.

Figure 15-2. Format of Interrupt Request Flag Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L)

Address: FFE0H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

IF0L SREIF6 PIF5 PIF4 PIF3 PIF2 PIF1 PIF0 LVIIF

Address: FFE1H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

IF0H TMIF010 TMIF000 TMIF50 TMIFH0 TMIFH1 DUALIF0 STIF6 SRIF6

Address: FFE2H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

IF1L 0 0 WTIF KRIF TMIF51 WTIIF SRIF0 ADIF

XXIFX Interrupt request flag

0 No interrupt request signal is generated

1 Interrupt request is generated, interrupt request status

Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 6 and 7 of IF1L to 0.

2. When operating a timer, serial interface, or A/D converter after standby release, operate it

once after clearing the interrupt request flag. An interrupt request flag may be set by noise.

3. Use the 1-bit memory manipulation instruction (CLR1) for manipulating the flag of the

interrupt request flag register. Use the bit manipulation instruction such as “IF0L.0 = 0;” or

“_asm(“clr1 IF0L, 0”);” for describing in C language because the compiled assembler needs

to be the 1-bit memory manipulation instruction (CLR1).

If a program is described in C language using an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction

such as “IF0L & = 0xfe;” and compiled, the assembler of the following three instructions is

described.

mov a, IF0L

and a, #0FEH

mov IF0L, a

In this case, at the timing between “mov a, IF0L” and “mov IF0L, a”, if the request flag of

another bit of the identical interrupt request flag register is set to 1, it is cleared to 0 by

“mov IF0L, a”. Therefore, care must be exercised when using an 8-bit memory manipulation

instruction in C language.

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

324

(2) Interrupt mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L)

The interrupt mask flags are used to enable/disable the corresponding maskable interrupt servicing.

MK0L, MK0H, and MK1L are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When MK0L and MK0H are

combined to form 16-bit register MK0, they are set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets these registers to FFH.

Figure 15-3. Format of Interrupt Mask Flag Registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L)

Address: FFE4H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

MK0L SREMK6 PMK5 PMK4 PMK3 PMK2 PMK1 PMK0 LVIMK

Address: FFE5H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

MK0H TMMK010 TMMK000 TMMK50 TMMKH0 TMMKH1 DUALMK0 STMK6 SRMK6

Address: FFE6H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

MK1L 1 1 WTMK KRMK TMMK51 WTIMK SRMK0 ADMK

XXMKX Interrupt servicing control

0 Interrupt servicing enabled

1 Interrupt servicing disabled

Caution Be sure to set bits 6 and 7 of MK1L to 1.

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 325

(3) Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L)

The priority specification flag registers are used to set the corresponding maskable interrupt priority order.

PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. If PR0L and PR0H are

combined to form 16-bit register PR0, they are set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets these registers to FFH.

Figure 15-4. Format of Priority Specification Flag Registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L)

Address: FFE8H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

PR0L SREPR6 PPR5 PPR4 PPR3 PPR2 PPR1 PPR0 LVIPR

Address: FFE9H After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

PR0H TMPR010 TMPR000 TMPR50 TMPRH0 TMPRH1 DUALPR0 STPR6 SRPR6

Address: FFEAH After reset: FFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>

PR1L 1 1 WTPR KRPR TMPR51 WTIPR SRPR0 ADPR

XXPRX Priority level selection

0 High priority level

1 Low priority level

Caution Be sure to set bits 6 and 7 of PR1L to 1.

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

326

(4) External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP), external interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN)

These registers specify the valid edge for INTP0 to INTP5.

EGP and EGN are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears these registers to 00H.

Figure 15-5. Format of External Interrupt Rising Edge Enable Register (EGP)

and External Interrupt Falling Edge Enable Register (EGN)

Address: FF48H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EGP 0 0 EGP5 EGP4 EGP3 EGP2 EGP1 EGP0

Address: FF49H After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EGN 0 0 EGN5 EGN4 EGN3 EGN2 EGN1 EGN0

EGPn EGNn INTPn pin valid edge selection (n = 0 to 5)

0 0 Edge detection disabled

0 1 Falling edge

1 0 Rising edge

1 1 Both rising and falling edges

Table 15-3 shows the ports corresponding to EGPn and EGNn.

Table 15-3. Ports Corresponding to EGPn and EGNn

Detection Enable Register Edge Detection Port Interrupt Request Signal

EGP0 EGN0 P120 INTP0

EGP1 EGN1 P30 INTP1

EGP2 EGN2 P31 INTP2

EGP3 EGN3 P32 INTP3

EGP4 EGN4 P33 INTP4

EGP5 EGN5 P16 INTP5

Caution Select the port mode after clearing EGPn and EGNn to 0 because an edge may be detected when

the external interrupt function is switched to the port function.

Remark n = 0 to 5

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 327

(5) Program status word (PSW)

The program status word is a register used to hold the instruction execution result and the current status for an

interrupt request. The IE flag that sets maskable interrupt enable/disable and the ISP flag that controls multiple

interrupt servicing are mapped to the PSW.

Besides 8-bit read/write, this register can carry out operations using bit manipulation instructions and dedicated

instructions (EI and DI). When a vectored interrupt request is acknowledged, if the BRK instruction is executed,

the contents of the PSW are automatically saved into a stack and the IE flag is reset to 0. If a maskable interrupt

request is acknowledged, the contents of the priority specification flag of the acknowledged interrupt are

transferred to the ISP flag. The PSW contents are also saved into the stack with the PUSH PSW instruction.

They are restored from the stack with the RETI, RETB, and POP PSW instructions.

RESET input sets PSW to 02H.

Figure 15-6. Format of Program Status Word

<7>

IE

<6>

Z

<5>

RBS1

<4>

AC

<3>

RBS0

2

0

<1>

ISP

0

CYPSW

After reset

02H

ISP

High-priority interrupt servicing (low-priority

interrupt disabled)

IE

0

1

Disabled

Priority of interrupt currently being serviced

Interrupt request acknowledgment enable/disable

Used when normal instruction is executed

Enabled

Interrupt request not acknowledged, or low-

priority interrupt servicing (all maskable

interrupts enabled)

0

1

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

328

15.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations

15.4.1 Maskable interrupt request acknowledgment

A maskable interrupt request becomes acknowledgeable when the interrupt request flag is set to 1 and the mask

(MK) flag corresponding to that interrupt request is cleared to 0. A vectored interrupt request is acknowledged if

interrupts are in the interrupt enabled state (when the IE flag is set to 1). However, a low-priority interrupt request is

not acknowledged during servicing of a higher priority interrupt request (when the ISP flag is reset to 0). The times

from generation of a maskable interrupt request until interrupt servicing is performed are listed in Table 15-4 below.

For the interrupt request acknowledgment timing, see Figures 15-8 and 15-9.

Table 15-4. Time from Generation of Maskable Interrupt Request Until Servicing

Minimum Time Maximum TimeNote

When ××PR = 0 7 clocks 32 clocks

When ××PR = 1 8 clocks 33 clocks

Note If an interrupt request is generated just before a divide instruction, the wait time becomes longer.

Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock)

If two or more maskable interrupt requests are generated simultaneously, the request with a higher priority level

specified in the priority specification flag is acknowledged first. If two or more interrupt requests have the same

priority level, the request with the highest default priority is acknowledged first.

An interrupt request that is held pending is acknowledged when it becomes acknowledgeable.

Figure 15-7 shows the interrupt request acknowledgment algorithm.

If a maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents are saved into the stacks in the order of PSW, then

PC, the IE flag is reset (0), and the contents of the priority specification flag corresponding to the acknowledged

interrupt are transferred to the ISP flag. The vector table data determined for each interrupt request is loaded into the

PC and branched.

Restoring from an interrupt is possible by using the RETI instruction.

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 329

Figure 15-7. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Processing Algorithm

Start

××IF = 1?

××MK = 0?

××PR = 0?

IE = 1?

ISP = 1?

Interrupt request held pending

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes (interrupt request generation)

Yes

No (Low priority)

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

IE = 1?

No

Any high-priority

interrupt request among those

simultaneously generated

with ××PR = 0?

Yes (High priority)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Vectored interrupt servicing

Interrupt request held pending

Interrupt request held pending

Interrupt request held pending

Interrupt request held pending

Interrupt request held pending

Interrupt request held pending

Vectored interrupt servicing

Any high-priority

interrupt request among

those simultaneously

generated?

Any high-priority

interrupt request among

those simultaneously generated

with ××PR = 0?

××IF: Interrupt request flag

××MK: Interrupt mask flag

××PR: Priority specification flag

IE: Flag that controls acknowledgment of maskable interrupt request (1 = Enable, 0 = Disable)

ISP: Flag that indicates the priority level of the interrupt currently being serviced (0 = High-priority interrupt

servicing, 1 = No interrupt request acknowledged, or low-priority interrupt servicing)

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

330

Figure 15-8. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing (Minimum Time)

8 clocks

7 clocks

Instruction Instruction

PSW and PC saved,

jump to interrupt

servicing

Interrupt servicing

program

CPU processing

××IF

(××PR = 1)

××IF

(××PR = 0)

6 clocks

Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock)

Figure 15-9. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing (Maximum Time)

33 clocks

32 clocks

Instruction Divide instruction

PSW and PC saved,

jump to interrupt

servicing

Interrupt servicing

program

CPU processing

××IF

(××PR = 1)

××IF

(××PR = 0)

6 clocks

25 clocks

Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock)

15.4.2 Software interrupt request acknowledgment

A software interrupt request is acknowledged by BRK instruction execution. Software interrupts cannot be

disabled.

If a software interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents are saved into the stacks in the order of the program

status word (PSW), then program counter (PC), the IE flag is reset (0), and the contents of the vector table (003EH,

003FH) are loaded into the PC and branched.

Restoring from a software interrupt is possible by using the RETB instruction.

Caution Do not use the RETI instruction for restoring from the software interrupt.

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 331

15.4.3 Multiple interrupt servicing

Multiple interrupt servicing occurs when another interrupt request is acknowledged during execution of an interrupt.

Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur unless the interrupt request acknowledgment enabled state is selected

(IE = 1). When an interrupt request is acknowledged, interrupt request acknowledgment becomes disabled (IE = 0).

Therefore, to enable multiple interrupt servicing, it is necessary to set (1) the IE flag with the EI instruction during

interrupt servicing to enable interrupt acknowledgment.

Moreover, even if interrupts are enabled, multiple interrupt servicing may not be enabled, this being subject to

interrupt priority control. Two types of priority control are available: default priority control and programmable priority

control. Programmable priority control is used for multiple interrupt servicing.

In the interrupt enabled state, if an interrupt request with a priority equal to or higher than that of the interrupt

currently being serviced is generated, it is acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing. If an interrupt with a priority

lower than that of the interrupt currently being serviced is generated during interrupt servicing, it is not acknowledged

for multiple interrupt servicing.

Interrupt requests that are not enabled because interrupts are in the interrupt disabled state or because they have

a lower priority are held pending. When servicing of the current interrupt ends, the pending interrupt request is

acknowledged following execution of at least one main processing instruction execution.

Table 15-5 shows relationship between interrupt requests enabled for multiple interrupt servicing and Figure 15-10

shows multiple interrupt servicing examples.

Table 15-5. Relationship Between Interrupt Requests Enabled for Multiple Interrupt Servicing

During Interrupt Servicing

Maskable Interrupt Request

PR = 0 PR = 1

Multiple Interrupt Request

Interrupt Being Serviced IE = 1 IE = 0 IE = 1 IE = 0

Software

Interrupt

Request

ISP = 0 × × × Maskable interrupt

ISP = 1 × ×

Software interrupt × ×

Remarks 1. : Multiple interrupt servicing enabled

2. ×: Multiple interrupt servicing disabled

3. ISP and IE are flags contained in the PSW.

ISP = 0: An interrupt with higher priority is being serviced.

ISP = 1: No interrupt request has been acknowledged, or an interrupt with a lower

priority is being serviced.

IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment is disabled.

IE = 1: Interrupt request acknowledgment is enabled.

4. PR is a flag contained in PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L.

PR = 0: Higher priority level

PR = 1: Lower priority level

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

332

Figure 15-10. Examples of Multiple Interrupt Servicing (1/2)

Example 1. Multiple interrupt servicing occurs twice

Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing INTzz servicing

EI EI EI

RETI RETI

RETI

INTxx

(PR = 1)

INTyy

(PR = 0)

INTzz

(PR = 0)

IE = 0 IE = 0 IE = 0

IE = 1 IE = 1

IE = 1

During servicing of interrupt INTxx, two interrupt requests, INTyy and INTzz, are acknowledged, and multiple

interrupt servicing takes place. Before each interrupt request is acknowledged, the EI instruction must always be

issued to enable interrupt request acknowledgment.

Example 2. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur due to priority control

Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing

INTxx

(PR = 0)

INTyy

(PR = 1)

EI

RETI

IE = 0

IE = 0

EI

1 instruction execution

RETI

IE = 1

IE = 1

Interrupt request INTyy issued during servicing of interrupt INTxx is not acknowledged because its priority is lower

than that of INTxx, and multiple interrupt servicing does not take place. The INTyy interrupt request is held pending,

and is acknowledged following execution of one main processing instruction.

PR = 0: Higher priority level

PR = 1: Lower priority level

IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment disabled

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 333

Figure 15-10. Examples of Multiple Interrupt Servicing (2/2)

Example 3. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur because interrupts are not enabled

Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing

EI

1 instruction execution

RETI

RETI

INTxx

(PR = 0)

INTyy

(PR = 0)

IE = 0

IE = 0

IE = 1

IE = 1

Interrupts are not enabled during servicing of interrupt INTxx (EI instruction is not issued), therefore, interrupt

request INTyy is not acknowledged and multiple interrupt servicing does not take place. The INTyy interrupt request

is held pending, and is acknowledged following execution of one main processing instruction.

PR = 0: Higher priority level

IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment disabled

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

334

15.4.4 Interrupt request hold

There are instructions where, even if an interrupt request is issued for them while another instruction is being

executed, request acknowledgment is held pending until the end of execution of the next instruction. These

instructions (interrupt request hold instructions) are listed below.

• MOV PSW, #byte

• MOV A, PSW

• MOV PSW, A

• MOV1 PSW. bit, CY

• MOV1 CY, PSW. bit

• AND1 CY, PSW. bit

• OR1 CY, PSW. bit

• XOR1 CY, PSW. bit

• SET1 PSW. bit

• CLR1 PSW. bit

• RETB

• RETI

• PUSH PSW

• POP PSW

• BT PSW. bit, $addr16

• BF PSW. bit, $addr16

• BTCLR PSW. bit, $addr16

• EI

• DI

• Manipulation instructions for the IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L registers

Caution The BRK instruction is not one of the above-listed interrupt request hold instructions. However,

the software interrupt activated by executing the BRK instruction causes the IE flag to be cleared

to 0. Therefore, even if a maskable interrupt request is generated during execution of the BRK

instruction, the interrupt request is not acknowledged.

Figure 15-11 shows the timing at which interrupt requests are held pending.

Figure 15-11. Interrupt Request Hold

Instruction N Instruction M PSW and PC saved, jump

to interrupt servicing

Interrupt servicing

program

CPU processing

××IF

Remarks 1. Instruction N: Interrupt request hold instruction

2. Instruction M: Instruction other than interrupt request hold instruction

3. The ××PR (priority level) values do not affect the operation of ××IF (interrupt request).

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 335

CHAPTER 16 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION

16.1 Functions of Key Interrupt

A key interrupt (INTKR) can be generated by setting the key return mode register (KRM) and inputting a falling

edge to the key interrupt input pins (KR0 to KR3).

Table 16-1. Assignment of Key Interrupt Detection Pins

Flag Description

KRM0 Controls KR0 signal in 1-bit units.

KRM1 Controls KR1 signal in 1-bit units.

KRM2 Controls KR2 signal in 1-bit units.

KRM3 Controls KR3 signal in 1-bit units.

16.2 Configuration of Key Interrupt

The key interrupt includes the following hardware.

Table 16-2. Configuration of Key Interrupt

Item Configuration

Control register Key return mode register (KRM)

Figure 16-1. Block Diagram of Key Interrupt

INTKR

Key return mode register (KRM)

0000

KRM3 KRM2 KRM1 KRM0

KR3

KR2

KR1

KR0

CHAPTER 16 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

336

16.3 Register Controlling Key Interrupt

(1) Key return mode register (KRM)

This register controls the KRM0 to KRM3 bits using the KR0 to KR3 signals, respectively.

This register is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 16-2. Format of Key Return Mode Register (KRM)

0

Does not detect key interrupt signal

Detects key interrupt signal

KRMn

0

1

Key interrupt mode control

KRM 0 0 0 KRM3 KRM2 KRM1 KRM0

Address: FF6EH After reset: 00H R/W

Symbol 765432 0

Cautions 1. If any of the KRM0 to KRM3 bits used is set to 1, set bits 0 to 3 (PU70 to PU73) of the

corresponding pull-up resistor register 7 (PU7) to 1.

2. If KRM is changed, the interrupt request flag may be set. Therefore, disable interrupts and

then change the KRM register. Clear the interrupt request flag and enable interrupts.

3. The bits not used in the key interrupt mode can be used as normal ports.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 337

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

17.1 Standby Function and Configuration

17.1.1 Standby function

Table 17-1. Relationship Between Operation Clocks in Each Operation Status

X1 Oscillator Ring-OSC Oscillator Prescaler Clock

Supplied to Peripherals

Note 2

Status

Operation

Mode

MSTOP = 0

MCC = 0

MSTOP = 1

MCC = 1

Note 1

RSTOP = 0 RSTOP = 1

Subsystem

Clock

Oscillator

CPU Clock

After

Release MCM0 = 0 MCM0 = 1

Reset Stopped Ring-OSC Stopped

STOP

Stopped

Note 3 Stopped

HALT Oscillating Stopped

Oscillating Oscillating Stopped

Oscillating

Note 4 Ring-OSC X1

Notes 1. When “Cannot be stopped” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option.

2. When “Can be stopped by software” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option.

3. Operates using the CPU clock at STOP instruction execution.

4. Operates using the CPU clock at HALT instruction execution.

Caution The RSTOP setting is valid only when “Can be stopped by software” is set for Ring-OSC by a mask

option.

Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC)

MCC: Bit 7 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

RSTOP: Bit 0 of the Ring-OSC mode register (RCM)

MCM0: Bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM)

The standby function is designed to reduce the operating current of the system. The following two modes are

available.

(1) HALT mode

HALT instruction execution sets the HALT mode. In the HALT mode, the CPU operation clock is stopped. If the

X1 oscillator, Ring-OSC oscillator, or subsystem clock oscillator is operating before the HALT mode is set,

oscillation of each clock continues. In this mode, the operating current is not decreased as much as in the STOP

mode, but the HALT mode is effective for restarting operation immediately upon interrupt request generation and

carrying out intermittent operations.

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

338

(2) STOP mode

STOP instruction execution sets the STOP mode. In the STOP mode, the X1 oscillator stops, stopping the whole

system, thereby considerably reducing the CPU operating current.

Because this mode can be released by an interrupt request, it enables intermittent operations to be carried out.

However, because a wait time is required to secure the oscillation stabilization time after the STOP mode is

released, select the HALT mode if it is necessary to start processing immediately upon interrupt request

generation.

In either of these two modes, all the contents of registers, flags and data memory just before the standby mode is

set are held. The I/O port output latches and output buffer statuses are also held.

Cautions 1. STOP mode can be used only when CPU is operating on the X1 input clock or Ring-OSC

clock. HALT mode can be used when CPU is operating on the X1 input clock, Ring-OSC

clock, or subsystem clock. However, when the STOP instruction is executed during Ring-

OSC clock operation, the X1 oscillator stops, but Ring-OSC oscillator does not stop.

2. When shifting to the STOP mode, be sure to stop the peripheral hardware operation before

executing STOP instruction.

3. The following sequence is recommended for operating current reduction of the A/D converter

when the standby function is used: First clear bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode

register (ADM) to 0 to stop the A/D conversion operation, and then execute the HALT or STOP

instruction.

4. If the Ring-OSC oscillator is operating before the STOP mode is set, oscillation of the Ring-

OSC clock cannot be stopped in the STOP mode. However, when the Ring-OSC clock is used

as the CPU clock, the CPU operation is stopped for 17/fR (s) after STOP mode is released.

17.1.2 Registers controlling standby function

The standby function is controlled by the following two registers.

• Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)

• Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)

Remark For the registers that start, stop, or select the clock, see CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR.

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 339

(1) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)

This is the status register of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time counter. If the Ring-OSC clock is used

as the CPU clock, the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time can be checked.

OSTC can be read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

Reset release (reset by RESET input, POC, LVI, clock monitor, and WDT), the STOP instruction, MSTOP (bit 7 of

MOC register) = 1, and MCC (bit 7 of PCC register) = 1 clear OSTC to 00H.

Figure 17-1. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC)

Address: FFA3H After reset: 00H R

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

OSTC 0 0 0 MOST11 MOST13 MOST14 MOST15 MOST16

Oscillation stabilization time status

MOST11 MOST13 MOST14 MOST15 MOST16

When fXP =

10 MHz

When fXP =

12 MHzNote

1 0 0 0 0 211/fXP min. 204.8

µ

s min. 170.7

µ

s min.

1 1 0 0 0 213/fXP min. 819.2

µ

s min. 682.7

µ

s min.

1 1 1 0 0 214/fXP min. 1.64 ms min. 1.37 ms min.

1 1 1 1 0 215/fXP min. 3.27 ms min. 2.73 ms min.

1 1 1 1 1 216/fXP min. 6.55 ms min. 5.46 ms min.

Note Expanded-specification products of standard products and (A) grade products only

Cautions 1. After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from MOST11 and

remain 1.

2. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is

being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows.

• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time

set by OSTS

The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts only during the oscillation

stabilization time set by OSTS. Therefore, note that only the statuses during the

oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS are set to OSTC after STOP mode has

been released.

3. The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after

STOP mode release until clock oscillation starts (“a” below) regardless of

whether STOP mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation.

a

STOP mode release

X1 pin voltage

waveform

Remark fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

340

(2) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)

This register is used to select the X1 oscillation stabilization wait time when STOP mode is released. The wait

time set by OSTS is valid only after STOP mode is released when the X1 input clock is selected as the CPU

clock. After STOP mode is released when the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the CPU clock, check the

oscillation stabilization time using OSTC.

OSTS can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets OSTS to 05H.

Figure 17-2. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS)

Address: FFA4H After reset: 05H R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

OSTS 0 0 0 0 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0

OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 Oscillation stabilization time selection

When fXP = 10 MHz When fXP = 12 MHzNote

0 0 1 211/fXP 204.8

µ

s 170.7

µ

s

0 1 0 213/fXP 819.2

µ

s 682.7

µ

s

0 1 1 214/fXP 1.64 ms 1.37 ms

1 0 0 215/fXP 3.27 ms 2.73 ms

1 0 1 216/fXP 6.55 ms 5.46 ms

Other than above Setting prohibited

Note Expanded-specification products of standard products and (A) grade products only

Cautions 1. To set the STOP mode while the X1 input clock is the CPU clock, set OSTS

before executing the STOP instruction.

2. Set OSTS after confirming that the oscillation stabilization time expected by

OSTS has elapsed.

3. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is

being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows.

• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time

set by OSTS

The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts only during the oscillation

stabilization time set by OSTS. Therefore, note that only the statuses during the

oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS are set to OSTC after STOP mode has

been released.

4. The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after

STOP mode release until clock oscillation starts (“a” below) regardless of

whether STOP mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation.

a

STOP mode release

X1 pin voltage

waveform

Remark fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 341

17.2 Standby Function Operation

17.2.1 HALT mode

(1) HALT mode

The HALT mode is set by executing the HALT instruction. HALT mode can be set regardless of whether the CPU

clock before the setting was the X1 input clock, Ring-OSC clock, or subsystem clock.

The operating statuses in the HALT mode are shown below.

Table 17-2. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (1/2)

When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is

Operating on X1 Input Clock

When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is

Operating on Ring-OSC Clock

When Ring-OSC

Oscillation Continues

When Ring-OSC

Oscillation StoppedNote 1

When X1 Input Clock

Oscillation Continues

When X1 Input Clock

Oscillation Stopped

HALT Mode Setting

Item

When

Subsystem

Clock Used

When

Subsystem

Clock Not

Used

When

Subsystem

Clock Used

When

Subsystem

Clock Not

Used

When

Subsystem

Clock Used

When

Subsystem

Clock Not

Used

When

Subsystem

Clock Used

When

Subsystem

Clock Not

Used

System clock Clock supply to the CPU is stopped.

CPU Operation stopped

Port (output latch) Status before HALT mode was set is retained

16-bit timer/event counter 00 Operable Operation not guaranteed

8-bit timer/event counter 50 Operable Operation not guaranteed when count clock other than

TI50 is selected

8-bit timer/event counter 51 Operable Operation not guaranteed when count clock other than

TI51 is selected

8-bit timer H0 Operable Operation not guaranteed when count clock other than

TM50 output is selected during 8-bit timer/event

counter 50 operation

8-bit timer H1 Operable Operation not guaranteed when count clock other than

fR/27 is selected

Watch timer Operable OperableNote 2 Operable OperableNote 2 OperableNote 3 Operation not

guaranteed

OperableNote 3 Operation not

guaranteed

Ring-OSC cannot

be stoppedNote 4

Operable − Operable

Watchdog

timer

Ring-OSC can be

stoppedNote 4

Operation stopped

A/D converter Operable Operation not guaranteed

UART0 Operable

UART6 Operable

Operation not guaranteed when serial clock other than

TM50 output is selected during TM50 operation

Serial

interface

CSI10 Operable Operation not guaranteed when serial clock other than

external SCK10 is selected

Clock monitor Operable Operation stopped Operable Operation stopped

Power-on-clear functionNote 5 Operable

Low-voltage detection function Operable

External interrupt Operable

Notes 1. When “Stopped by software” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option and Ring-OSC is stopped by

software (for mask options, see CHAPTER 22 MASK OPTIONS).

2. Operable when the X1 input clock is selected.

3. Operation not guaranteed when other than subsystem clock is selected.

4. “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” or “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” can be selected by a mask

option.

5. When “POC used” is selected by a mask option.

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

342

Table 17-2. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (2/2)

When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Subsystem Clock

When X1 Input Clock Oscillation Continues When X1 Input Clock Oscillation Stopped

HALT Mode Setting

Item

When Ring-OSC

Oscillation Continues

When Ring-OSC

Oscillation StoppedNote 1

When Ring-OSC

Oscillation Continues

When Ring-OSC

Oscillation StoppedNote 1

System clock Clock supply to the CPU is stopped.

CPU Operation stopped

Port (output latch) Status before HALT mode was set is retained

16-bit timer/event counter 00 Operable Operation stopped

8-bit timer/event counter 50 Operable Operable only when TI50 is selected as the count clock

8-bit timer/event counter 51 Operable Operable only when TI51 is selected as the count clock

8-bit timer H0 Operable Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the

count clock during 8-bit timer/event counter 50

operation

8-bit timer H1 Operable Operable only when the

X1 input clock is selected

as the count clock

Operable only when fR/27

is selected as the count

clock

Operation stopped

Watch timer Operable Operation guaranteed only when subsystem clock is

selected

Ring-OSC cannot

be stoppedNote 2

Operable − Operable −

Watchdog

timer

Ring-OSC can be

stoppedNote 2

Operation stopped

A/D converter Operable Not operable

UART0 Operable

UART6 Operable

Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the

serial clock during TM50 operation

Serial

interface

CSI10 Operable Operable only when external SCK10 is selected as the

serial clock

Clock monitor Operable Operation stopped

Power-on-clear functionNote 3 Operable

Low-voltage detection function Operable

External interrupt Operable

Notes 1. When “Stopped by software” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option and Ring-OSC is stopped by

software (for mask options, see CHAPTER 22 MASK OPTIONS).

2. “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” or “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” can be selected by a mask

option.

3. When “POC used” is selected by a mask option.

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 343

(2) HALT mode release

The HALT mode can be released by the following two sources.

(a) Release by unmasked interrupt request

When an unmasked interrupt request is generated, the HALT mode is released. If interrupt acknowledgment

is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried out. If interrupt acknowledgment is disabled, the next

address instruction is executed.

Figure 17-3. HALT Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation

HALT

instruction Wait

Wait Operating modeHALT modeOperating mode

Oscillation

X1 input clock,

Ring-OSC clock,

or subsystem clock

Status of CPU

Standby

release signal

Interrupt

request

Remarks 1. The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request which has released the standby

mode is acknowledged.

2. The wait time is as follows:

• When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: 8 or 9 clocks

• When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: 2 or 3 clocks

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

344

(b) Release by RESET input

When the RESET signal is input, HALT mode is released, and then, as in the case with a normal reset

operation, the program is executed after branching to the reset vector address.

Figure 17-4. HALT Mode Release by RESET Input (1/2)

(1) When X1 input clock is used as CPU clock

HALT

instruction

RESET signal

X1 input clock

Operating mode HALT mode Reset

period

Operation

stopped

Operating mode

Oscillates

Oscillation

stopped

Oscillates

Status of CPU

(X1 input clock)

Oscillation stabilization time

(2

11

/f

XP

to 2

16

/f

XP

)

(Ring-OSC clock)

(17/f

R

)

(2) When Ring-OSC clock is used as CPU clock

HALT

instruction

RESET signal

Ring-OSC clock

Operating mode HALT mode Reset

period

Operation

stopped

Operating mode

Oscillates

Oscillation

stopped

Oscillates

Status of CPU

(Ring-OSC clock)(17/f

R

)

(Ring-OSC clock)

Remarks 1. fXP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

2. f

R: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 345

Figure 17-4. HALT Mode Release by RESET Input (2/2)

(3) When subsystem clock is used as CPU clock

HALT instruction

RESET signal

Subsystem clock

Operating

mode HALT mode

Reset

period

Operation

stopped

Operating mode

Oscillates

Status of CPU

(Ring-OSC clock)(17/fR)

Subsystem

clock

Remark f

R: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

Table 17-3. Operation in Response to Interrupt Request in HALT Mode

Release Source MK×× PR×× IE ISP Operation

0 0 0 × Next address

instruction execution

0 0 1 × Interrupt servicing

execution

0 1 0 1

0 1 × 0

Next address

instruction execution

0 1 1 1

Interrupt servicing

execution

Maskable interrupt

request

1 × × × HALT mode held

RESET input − − × × Reset processing

×: Don’t care

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

346

17.2.2 STOP mode

(1) STOP mode setting and operating statuses

The STOP mode is set by executing the STOP instruction, and it can be set when the CPU clock before the

setting was the X1 input clock or Ring-OSC clock.

Caution Because the interrupt request signal is used to clear the standby mode, if there is an interrupt

source with the interrupt request flag set and the interrupt mask flag reset, the standby mode is

immediately cleared if set. Thus, the STOP mode is reset to the HALT mode immediately after

execution of the STOP instruction and the system returns to the operating mode as soon as the

wait time set using the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) has elapsed.

The operating statuses in the STOP mode are shown below.

Table 17-4. Operating Statuses in STOP Mode

When STOP Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on X1 Input Clock

When Ring-OSC Oscillation

Continues

When Ring-OSC Oscillation

StoppedNote 1

When STOP Instruction Is Executed

While CPU Is Operating on Ring-

OSC Clock

STOP Mode Setting

Item

When Subsystem

Clock Used

When Subsystem

Clock Not Used

When Subsystem

Clock Used

When Subsystem

Clock Not Used

When Subsystem

Clock Used

When Subsystem

Clock Not Used

System clock Only X1 oscillator oscillation is stopped. Clock supply to the CPU is stopped.

CPU Operation stopped

Port (output latch) Status before STOP mode was set is retained

16-bit timer/event counter 00 Operation stopped

8-bit timer/event counter 50 Operable only when TI50 is selected as the count clock

8-bit timer/event counter 51 Operable only when TI51 is selected as the count clock

8-bit timer H0 Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the count clock during 8-bit timer/event counter 50 operation

8-bit timer H1 OperableNote 2 Operation stopped OperableNote 2

Watch timer OperableNote 3 Operation stopped OperableNote 3 Operation stopped OperableNote 3 Operation stopped

Ring-OSC cannot

be stoppedNote 4

Operable − Operable

Watchdog

timer

Ring-OSC can be

stoppedNote 4

Operation stopped

A/D converter Operation stopped

UART0

UART6

Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the serial clock during TM50 operation

Serial interface

CSI10 Operable only when external SCK10 is selected as the serial clock

Clock monitor Operation stopped

Power-on-clear functionNote 5 Operable

Low-voltage detection function Operable

External interrupt Operable

Notes 1. When “Stopped by software” is selected for Ring-OSC by a mask option and Ring-OSC is stopped by

software (for mask options, see CHAPTER 22 MASK OPTIONS).

2. Operable only when fR/27 is selected as the count clock.

3. Operable when the subsystem clock is selected.

4. “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” or “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” can be selected by a mask

option.

5. When “POC used” is selected by a mask option.

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 347

(2) STOP mode release

Figure 17-5. Operation Timing When STOP Mode Is Released

Ring-OSC clock is

selected as CPU clock

when STOP instruction

is executed

Ring-OSC clock

X1 input clock

X1 input clock is

selected as CPU clock

when STOP instruction

is executed

STOP mode release

STOP mode

Operation stopped

(17/fR)Clock switched

by software

Ring-OSC clock X1 input clock

HALT status

(oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS)

X1 input clock

The STOP mode can be released by the following two sources.

(a) Release by unmasked interrupt request

When an unmasked interrupt request is generated, the STOP mode is released. After the oscillation

stabilization time has elapsed, if interrupt acknowledgment is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried

out. If interrupt acknowledgment is disabled, the next address instruction is executed.

Figure 17-6. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation (1/2)

(1) When X1 input clock is used as CPU clock

Operating mode Operating mode

Oscillates

Oscillates

STOP

instruction

STOP mode

Wait

(set by OSTS)

Standby release signal

Oscillation stabilization wait

(HALT mode status)

Oscillation stopped

X1 input clock

Status of CPU

Oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS)

(X1 input clock)(X1 input clock)

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

348

Figure 17-6. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation (2/2)

(2) When Ring-OSC clock is used as CPU clock

Operating mode Operating mode

Oscillates

STOP

instruction

STOP mode

Standby release signal

Ring-OSC clock

Status of CPU

(Ring-OSC clock)

Operation

stopped

(17/f

R

)

(Ring-OSC clock)

Remarks 1. The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request that has released the standby

mode is acknowledged.

2. f

R: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

(b) Release by RESET input

When the RESET signal is input, STOP mode is released and a reset operation is performed after the

oscillation stabilization time has elapsed.

Figure 17-7. STOP Mode Release by RESET Input

(1) When X1 input clock is used as CPU clock

STOP

instruction

RESET signal

X1 input clock

Operating mode STOP mode

Reset

period

Operation

stopped

Operating mode

Oscillates

Oscillation

stopped

Oscillates

Status of CPU

(X1 input clock)

Oscillation stabilization time (2

11

/f

XP

to 2

16

/f

XP

)

(Ring-OSC clock)(17/f

R

)

Oscillation stopped

(2) When Ring-OSC clock is used as CPU clock

STOP

instruction

RESET signal

Ring-OSC clock

Operating mode STOP mode

Reset

period

Operation

stopped

Operating mode

Oscillates

Oscillation

stopped

Oscillates

Status of CPU

(Ring-OSC clock)(17/f

R

)

(Ring-OSC clock)

Remarks 1. f

XP: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

2. f

R: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 349

Table 17-5. Operation in Response to Interrupt Request in STOP Mode

Release Source MK×× PR×× IE ISP Operation

0 0 0 × Next address

instruction execution

0 0 1 × Interrupt servicing

execution

0 1 0 1

0 1 × 0

Next address

instruction execution

0 1 1 1

Interrupt servicing

execution

Maskable interrupt

request

1 × × × STOP mode held

RESET input − − × × Reset processing

×: Don’t care

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

350

CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION

The following five operations are available to generate a reset signal.

(1) External reset input via RESET pin

(2) Internal reset by watchdog timer program loop detection

(3) Internal reset by clock monitor X1 input clock oscillation stop detection

(4) Internal reset by comparison of supply voltage and detection voltage of power-on-clear (POC) circuit

(5) Internal reset by comparison of supply voltage and detection voltage of low-power-supply detector (LVI)

External and internal resets have no functional differences. In both cases, program execution starts at the address

at 0000H and 0001H when the reset signal is input.

A reset is applied when a low level is input to the RESET pin, the watchdog timer overflows, X1 clock oscillation

stop is detected by the clock monitor, or by POC and LVI circuit voltage detection, and each item of hardware is set to

the status shown in Table 18-1. Each pin is high impedance during reset input or during the oscillation stabilization

time just after reset release, except for P130, which is low-level output.

When a high level is input to the RESET pin, the reset is released and program execution starts using the Ring-

OSC clock after the CPU clock operation has stopped for 17/fR (s). A reset generated by the watchdog timer and

clock monitor sources is automatically released after the reset, and program execution starts using the Ring-OSC

clock after the CPU clock operation has stopped for 17/fR (s) (see Figures 18-2 to 18-4). Reset by POC and LVI

circuit power supply detection is automatically released when VDD > VPOC or VDD > VLVI after the reset, and program

execution starts using the Ring-OSC clock after the CPU clock operation has stopped for 17/fR (s) (see CHAPTER 20

POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT and CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR).

Cautions 1. For an external reset, input a low level for 10

µ

s or more to the RESET pin.

2. During reset input, the X1 input clock and Ring-OSC clock stop oscillating.

3. When the STOP mode is released by a reset, the STOP mode contents are held during reset

input. However, the port pins become high-impedance, except for P130, which is set to low-

level output.

CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 351

Figure 18-1. Block Diagram of Reset Function

CLMRF LVIRF

WDTRF

Reset control flag

register (RESF)

Internal bus

Clear

SetSet

Clear Clear

Set

Reset signal

Reset signal to LVIM/LVIS register

Watchdog timer reset signal

Clock monitor reset signal

RESET

Power-on-clear circuit reset signal

Low-voltage detector reset signal

Caution An LVI circuit internal reset does not reset the LVI circuit.

Remarks 1. LVIM: Low-voltage detection register

2. LVIS: Low-voltage detection level selection register

CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

352

Figure 18-2. Timing of Reset by RESET Input

Delay Delay

Hi-Z

Normal operationCPU clock Reset period

(Oscillation stop)

Operation stop

(17/f

R

)

Normal operation

(Reset processing, Ring-OSC clock)

RESET

Internal

reset signal

Port pin

(except P130)

X1 input clock

Ring-OSC clock

Port pin (P130) Note

Note Set P130 to high-level output by software.

Remark When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level before reset is

effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the reset signal to the CPU.

Figure 18-3. Timing of Reset Due to Watchdog Timer Overflow

Hi-Z

Normal operation Reset period

(Oscillation stop)

CPU clock

Watchdog timer

overflow

Internal

reset signal

Port pin

(except P130)

Operation stop

(17/f

R

)

Normal operation

(Reset processing, Ring-OSC clock)

X1 input clock

Ring-OSC clock

Note

Port pin (P130)

Note Set P130 to high-level output by software.

Caution A watchdog timer internal reset resets the watchdog timer.

Remark When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level immediately after

reset is effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the reset signal to the CPU.

CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 353

Figure 18-4. Timing of Reset in STOP Mode by RESET Input

Delay Delay

Hi-Z

Normal

operation

CPU clock Reset period

(Oscillation stop)

RESET

Internal

reset signal

Port pin

(except P130)

STOP instruction execution

Stop status

(Oscillation stop)

Operation stop

(17/f

R

)

Normal operation

(Reset processing, Ring-OSC clock)

X1 input clock

Ring-OSC clock

Port pin (P130) Note

Note Set P130 to high-level output by software.

Remarks 1. When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level immediately

after reset is effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the reset signal to the CPU.

2. For the reset timing of the power-on-clear circuit and low-voltage detector, see CHAPTER 20

POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT and CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR.

CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

354

Table 18-1. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (1/2)

Hardware Status After Reset

AcknowledgmentNote 1

Program counter (PC) The contents of the

reset vector table

(0000H, 0001H) are

set.

Stack pointer (SP) Undefined

Program status word (PSW) 02H

Data memory UndefinedNote 2 RAM

General-purpose registers UndefinedNote 2

Port registers (P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12, P13) (output latches) 00H (undefined only

for P2)

Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6, PM7, PM12) FFH

Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU7, PU12) 00H

Input switch control register (ISC) 00H

Internal memory size switching register (IMS) CFH

Processor clock control register (PCC) 00H

Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) 00H

Main clock mode register (MCM) 00H

Main OSC control register (MOC) 00H

Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) 05H

Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) 00H

Timer counter 00 (TM00) 0000H

Capture/compare registers 000, 010 (CR000, CR010) 0000H

Mode control register 00 (TMC00) 00H

Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) 00H

Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00) 00H

16-bit timer/event

counter 00

Timer output control register 00 (TOC00) 00H

Timer counters 50, 51 (TM50, TM51) 00H

Compare registers 50, 51 (CR50, CR51) 00H

Timer clock selection registers 50, 51 (TCL50, TCL51) 00H

8-bit timer/event

counters 50, 51

Mode control registers 50, 51 (TMC50, TMC51) 00H

Compare registers 00, 10, 01, 11 (CMP00, CMP10, CMP01, CMP11) 00H

Mode registers (TMHMD0, TMHMD1) 00H

8-bit timers H0, H1

Carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)Note 3 00H

Watch timer Operation mode register (WTM) 00H

Mode register (WDTM) 67H Watchdog timer

Enable register (WDTE) 9AH

Notes 1. During reset input or oscillation stabilization time wait, only the PC contents among the hardware statuses

become undefined. All other hardware statuses remain unchanged after reset.

2. When a reset is executed in the standby mode, the pre-reset status is held even after reset.

3. 8-bit timer H1 only.

CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 355

Table 18-1. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (2/2)

Hardware Status After Reset

Acknowledgment

Conversion result register (ADCR) Undefined

Mode register (ADM) 00H

Analog input channel specification register (ADS) 00H

Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM) 00H

A/D converter

Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT) 00H

Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) FFH

Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0) FFH

Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) 01H

Serial interface UART0

Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) 1FH

Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) FFH

Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6) FFH

Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) 01H

Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) 00H

Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) 00H

Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6) 00H

Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) FFH

Serial interface UART6

Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6) 16H

Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) Undefined

Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) 00H

Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) 00H

Serial interface CSI10

Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) 00H

Key interrupt Key return mode register (KRM) 00H

Clock monitor Mode register (CLM) 00H

Reset function Reset control flag register (RESF) 00HNote

Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) 00HNote Low-voltage detector

Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS) 00HNote

Request flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L) 00H

Mask flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L) FFH

Priority specification flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L) FFH

External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP) 00H

Interrupt

External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN) 00H

Note These values vary depending on the reset source.

Reset Source

Register

RESET Input Reset by POC Reset by WDT Reset by CLM Reset by LVI

RESF See Table 18-2.

LVIM

LVIS

Cleared (00H) Cleared (00H) Cleared (00H) Cleared (00H) Held

CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

356

18.1 Register for Confirming Reset Source

Many internal reset generation sources exist in the 78K0/KC1. The reset control flag register (RESF) is used to

store which source has generated the reset request.

RESF can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input, reset input by power-on-clear (POC) circuit, and reading RESF clear RESF to 00H.

Figure 18-5. Format of Reset Control Flag Register (RESF)

Address: FFACH After reset: 00HNote R

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RESF 0 0 0 WDTRF 0 0 CLMRF LVIRF

WDTRF Internal reset request by watchdog timer (WDT)

0 Internal reset request is not generated, or RESF is cleared.

1 Internal reset request is generated.

CLMRF Internal reset request by clock monitor (CLM)

0 Internal reset request is not generated, or RESF is cleared.

1 Internal reset request is generated.

LVIRF Internal reset request by low-voltage detector (LVI)

0 Internal reset request is not generated, or RESF is cleared.

1 Internal reset request is generated.

Note The value after reset varies depending on the reset source.

Caution Do not read data by a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction.

The status of RESF when a reset request is generated is shown in Table 18-2.

Table 18-2. RESF Status When Reset Request Is Generated

Reset Source

Flag

RESET Input Reset by POC Reset by WDT Reset by CLM Reset by LVI

WDTRF Set (1) Held Held

CLMRF Held Set (1) Held

LVIRF

Cleared (0) Cleared (0)

Held Held Set (1)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 357

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK MONITOR

19.1 Functions of Clock Monitor

The clock monitor samples the X1 input clock using the on-chip Ring-OSC, and generates an internal reset signal

when the X1 input clock is stopped.

When a reset signal is generated by the clock monitor, bit 1 (CLMRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set

to 1. For details of RESF, refer to CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION.

The clock monitor automatically stops under the following conditions.

• Reset is released and during the oscillation stabilization time

• In STOP mode and during the oscillation stabilization time

• When the X1 input clock is stopped by software (MSTOP = 1 or MCC = 1) and during the oscillation stabilization

time

• When the Ring-OSC clock is stopped

Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of main OSC control register (MOC)

MCC: Bit 7 of processor clock control register (PCC)

19.2 Configuration of Clock Monitor

Clock monitor includes the following hardware.

Table 19-1. Configuration of Clock Monitor

Item Configuration

Control register Clock monitor mode register (CLM)

Figure 19-1. Block Diagram of Clock Monitor

Operation mode

controller

X1 input clock

Ring-OSC clock

CLME

Clock monitor

mode register (CLM)

Internal bus

X1 oscillation

monitor circuit

Internal reset

signal

X1 oscillation control signal

(MCC, MSTOP)

X1 oscillation stabilization status

(OSTC overflow)

Remark MCC: Bit 7 of processor clock control register (PCC)

MSTOP: Bit 7 of main OSC control register (MOC)

OSTC: Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK MONITOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

358

19.3 Register Controlling Clock Monitor

Clock monitor is controlled by the clock monitor mode register (CLM).

(1) Clock monitor mode register (CLM)

This register sets the operation mode of the clock monitor.

This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears this register to 00H.

Figure 19-2. Format of Clock Monitor Mode Register (CLM)

7

0

CLME

0

1

Symbol

CLM

Address: FFA9H After reset: 00H R/W

6

0

Disables clock monitor operation

Enables clock monitor operation

5

0

4

0

3

0

Enables/disables clock monitor operation

2

0

1

0

<0>

CLME

Cautions 1. Once bit 0 (CLME) is set to 1, it cannot be cleared to 0 except by RESET input or the internal

reset signal.

2. If the reset signal is generated by the clock monitor, CLME is cleared to 0 and bit 1 (CLMRF)

of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1.

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK MONITOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 359

19.4 Operation of Clock Monitor

This section explains the functions of the clock monitor. The monitor start and stop conditions are as follows.

<Monitor start condition>

When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to operation enabled (1).

<Monitor stop condition>

• Reset is released and during the oscillation stabilization time

• In STOP mode and during the oscillation stabilization time

• When the X1 input clock is stopped by software (MSTOP = 1 or MCC = 1) and during the oscillation

stabilization time

• When the Ring-OSC clock is stopped

Remark MSTOP: Bit 7 of main OSC control register (MOC)

MCC: Bit 7 of processor clock control register (PCC)

Table 19-2. Operation Status of Clock Monitor (When CLME = 1)

CPU Operation Clock Operation Mode X1 Input Clock Status Ring-OSC Clock Status Clock Monitor Status

Oscillating STOP mode Stopped

StoppedNote

Oscillating RESET input

StoppedNote

Stopped

Oscillating Operating

X1 input clock

Normal operation mode

HALT mode

Oscillating

StoppedNote Stopped

STOP mode

RESET input

Stopped Oscillating Stopped

Oscillating Operating

Ring-OSC clock

Normal operation mode

HALT mode Stopped Stopped

Note The Ring-OSC clock is stopped only when the “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by a

mask option. If “Ring-OSC cannot be stopped” is selected, the Ring-OSC clock cannot be stopped.

The clock monitor timing is as shown in Figure 19-3.

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK MONITOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

360

Figure 19-3. Timing of Clock Monitor (1/4)

(1) When internal reset is executed by oscillation stop of X1 input clock

4 clocks of Ring-OSC clock

X1 input clock

Ring-OSC clock

Internal reset signal

CLME

CLMRF

(2) Clock monitor status after RESET input

(CLME = 1 is set after RESET input and during X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time)

CPU operation

Clock monitor status

CLME

Ring-OSC clock

X1 input clock

Reset

Oscillation

stopped

Oscillation stabilization time

Normal

operation

Clock supply

stopped Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock)

Monitoring Monitoring stopped Monitoring

Waiting for end

of oscillation

stabilization time

Oscillation

stopped

17 clocks

Set to 1 by software

RESET

RESET input clears bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) to 0 and stops the clock monitor

operation. Even if CLME is set to 1 by software during the oscillation stabilization time (reset value of OSTS register

is 05H (216/fXP)) of the X1 input clock, monitoring is not performed until the oscillation stabilization time of the X1 input

clock ends. Monitoring is automatically started at the end of the oscillation stabilization time.

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK MONITOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 361

Figure 19-3. Timing of Clock Monitor (2/4)

(3) Clock monitor status after RESET input

(CLME = 1 is set after RESET input and at the end of X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time)

CPU operation

Clock monitor status

CLME

RESET

Ring-OSC clock

X1 input clock

Reset

Oscillation stabilization time

Normal

operation Clock supply

stopped Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock)

Monitoring Monitoring stopped Monitoring

17 clocks

Set to 1 by software

RESET input clears bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) to 0 and stops the clock monitor

operation. When CLME is set to 1 by software at the end of the oscillation stabilization time (reset value of OSTS

register is 05H (216/fXP)) of the X1 input clock, monitoring is started.

(4) Clock monitor status after STOP mode is released

(CLME = 1 is set when CPU clock operates on X1 input clock and before entering STOP mode)

Clock monitor status

Monitoring

Monitoring stopped Monitoring

CLME

Ring-OSC clock

X1 input clock

(CPU clock)

CPU operation

Normal

operation STOP Oscillation stabilization time Normal operation

Oscillation

stopped Oscillation stabilization time

(time set by OSTS register)

When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to 1 before entering STOP mode, monitoring

automatically starts at the end of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time. Monitoring is stopped in STOP mode

and during the oscillation stabilization time.

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK MONITOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

362

Figure 19-3. Timing of Clock Monitor (3/4)

(5) Clock monitor status after STOP mode is released

(CLME = 1 is set when CPU clock operates on Ring-OSC clock and before entering STOP mode)

Clock monitor status

Monitoring

Monitoring

stopped

Monitoring stopped Monitoring

CLME

Ring-OSC clock

(CPU clock)

X1 input clock

CPU operation

Normal

operation

17 clocks

Clock supply

stopped Normal operation

Oscillation

stopped

Oscillation stabilization time

(time set by OSTS register)

STOP

When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to 1 before entering STOP mode, monitoring

automatically starts at the end of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time. Monitoring is stopped in STOP mode

and during the oscillation stabilization time.

(6) Clock monitor status after X1 input clock oscillation is stopped by software

Clock monitor status

CLME

MSTOP or

MCCNote

Ring-OSC clock

X1 input clock

Oscillation stabilization time

(time set by OSTS register)

Normal operation (Ring-OSC clock or subsystem clockNote)

Monitoring

Monitoring

stopped

Monitoring

CPU operation

Monitoring stopped

Oscillation

stopped

When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to 1 before or while oscillation of the X1 input

clock is stopped, monitoring automatically starts at the end of the X1 input clock oscillation stabilization time.

Monitoring is stopped when oscillation of the X1 input clock is stopped and during the oscillation stabilization time.

Note The register that controls oscillation of the X1 input clock differs depending on the type of the clock supplied

to the CPU.

• When CPU operates on Ring-OSC clock: Controlled by bit 7 (MSTOP) of the main OSC control

register (MOC)

• When CPU operates on subsystem clock: Controlled by bit 7 (MCC) of the processor clock control

register (PCC)

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK MONITOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 363

Figure 19-3. Timing of Clock Monitor (4/4)

(7) Clock monitor status after Ring-OSC clock oscillation is stopped by software

Ring-OSC clock

X1 input clock

CPU operation Normal operation (X1 input clock or subsystem clock)

Oscillation stopped

RSTOP

Note

Clock monitor status Monitoring Monitoring

stopped

Monitoring

CLME

When bit 0 (CLME) of the clock monitor mode register (CLM) is set to 1 before or while oscillation of the Ring-OSC

clock is stopped, monitoring automatically starts after the Ring-OSC clock is stopped. Monitoring is stopped when

oscillation of the Ring-OSC clock is stopped.

Note If it is specified by a mask option that Ring-OSC cannot be stopped, the setting of bit 0 (RSTOP) of the

Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) is invalid. To set RSTOP, be sure to confirm that bit 1 (MCS) of the main

clock mode register (MCM) is 1.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

364

CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT

20.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit

The power-on-clear circuit (POC) has the following functions.

• Generates internal reset signal at power on.

• Compares supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPOC), and generates internal reset signal when VDD <

VPOC.

• The following can be selected by a mask option.

• POC disabled

• POC used (detection voltage: VPOC = 2.85 V ±0.15 V)Note

• POC used (detection voltage: VPOC = 3.5 V ±0.2 V)

Note This option cannot be selected in (A1) and (A2) grade products because their supply voltage VDD is 3.3 to

5.5 V.

Caution If an internal reset signal is generated in the POC circuit, the reset control flag register (RESF) is

cleared to 00H.

Remark This product incorporates multiple hardware functions that generate an internal reset signal. A flag that

indicates the reset cause is located in the reset control flag register (RESF) for when an internal reset

signal is generated by the watchdog timer (WDT), low-voltage-detection (LVI) circuit, or clock monitor.

RESF is not cleared to 00H and the flag is set to 1 when an internal reset signal is generated by WDT,

LVI, or the clock monitor.

For details of the RESF, refer to CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION.

CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 365

20.2 Configuration of Power-on-Clear Circuit

The block diagram of the power-on-clear circuit is shown in Figure 20-1.

Figure 20-1. Block Diagram of Power-on-Clear Circuit

−

+

Detection

voltage source

(VPOC)

Internal reset signal

V

DD

V

DD

Mask option

20.3 Operation of Power-on-Clear Circuit

In the power-on-clear circuit, the supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPOC) are compared, and when VDD <

VPOC, an internal reset signal is generated.

Figure 20-2. Timing of Internal Reset Signal Generation in Power-on-Clear Circuit

Time

Supply voltage (V

DD

)

POC detection voltage

(V

POC

)

Internal reset signal

CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

366

20.4 Cautions for Power-on-Clear Circuit

In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the vicinity of the POC detection

voltage (VPOC), the system may be repeatedly reset and released from the reset status. In this case, the time from

release of reset to the start of the operation of the microcontroller can be arbitrarily set by taking the following action.

<Action>

After releasing the reset signal, wait for the supply voltage fluctuation period of each system by means of a

software counter that uses a timer, and then initialize the ports.

Figure 20-3. Example of Software Processing After Release of Reset (1/2)

• If supply voltage fluctuation is 50 ms or less in vicinity of POC detection voltage

Yes

Power-on-clear

; The Ring-OSC clock is set as the CPU clock when the reset signal is generated

;The cause of reset (power-on-clear, WDT, LVI, or clock monitor)

can be identified by the RESF register.

;Change the CPU clock from the Ring-OSC clock to the X1 input clock.

;Check the stabilization of oscillation of the X1 input clock by using the

OSTC register.

;TMIFH1 = 1: Interrupt request is generated.

;Initialization of ports

;8-bit timer H1 can operate with the Ring-OSC clock.

Source: f

R

(480 kHz (MAX.))/2

7

× compare value 200 = 53 ms

(f

R

: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency)

No

Note 1

Reset

Checking cause

of reset

Note 2

Check stabilization

of oscillation

Change CPU clock

50 ms has passed?

(TMIFH1 = 1?)

Initialization

processing

Start timer

(set to 50 ms)

Notes 1. If reset is generated again during this period, initialization processing is not started.

2. A flowchart is shown on the next page.

CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 367

Figure 20-3. Example of Software Processing After Release of Reset (2/2)

• Checking cause of reset

Yes

No

Check cause of reset

Power-on-clear/external

reset generated

Reset processing by

watchdog timer

Reset processing by

clock monitor

Reset processing by

low-voltage detector

No

No

WDTRF of RESF

register = 1?

CLMRF of RESF

register = 1?

LVIRF of RESF

register = 1?

Yes

Yes

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

368

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

21.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector

The low-voltage detector (LVI) has the following functions.

• Compares supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VLVI), and generates an internal interrupt signal or

internal reset signal when VDD < VLVI.

• Detection levelsNote of supply voltage can be changed by software.

• Interrupt or reset function can be selected by software.

• Operable in STOP mode.

Note Detection levels of supply voltage differ as follows:

Expanded-specification product of standard products and (A) grade products: 8 levels

Conventional product of standard products and (A) grade products: 7 levels

(A1) grade products and (A2) grade products: 5 levels

When the low-voltage detector is used to reset, bit 0 (LVIRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1 if

reset occurs. For details of RESF, refer to CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION.

21.2 Configuration of Low-Voltage Detector

The block diagram of the low-voltage detector is shown below.

Figure 21-1. Block Diagram of Low-Voltage Detector

LVIS1 LVIS0 LVION LVIE

V

DD

N-ch

LVIS2 LVIMD LVIF

INTLVI

Internal reset signal

3

V

DD

Low-voltage detection level selector

Selector

Detection

voltage source

Internal bus

Low-voltage detection level

selection register (LVIS)

Low-voltage detection register

(LVIM)

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 369

21.3 Registers Controlling Low-Voltage Detector

The low-voltage detector is controlled by the following registers.

• Low-voltage detection register (LVIM)

• Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS)

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

370

(1) Low-voltage detection register (LVIM)

This register sets low-voltage detection and the operation mode.

This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears LVIM to 00H.

Figure 21-2. Format of Low-Voltage Detection Register (LVIM)

<0>

LVIF

<1>

LVIMD

2

0

3

0

<4>

LVIE

5

0

6

0

<7>

LVION

Symbol

LVIM

Address: FFBEH After reset: 00H R/W

Note 1

LVIONNotes 2, 3 Enables low-voltage detection operation

0 Disables operation

1 Enables operation

LVIENotes 2, 4, 5 Specifies reference voltage generator

0 Disables operation

1 Enables operation

LVIMDNote 2 Low-voltage detection operation mode selection

0 Generates interrupt signal when supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI)

1 Generates internal reset signal when supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI)

LVIFNote 6 Low-voltage detection flag

0 Supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI), or when operation is disabled

1 Supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI)

Notes 1. Bit 0 is read-only.

2. LVION, LVIE, and LVIMD are cleared to 0 in the case of a reset other than an LVI reset.

These are not cleared to 0 in the case of an LVI reset.

3. When LVION is set to 1, operation of the comparator in the LVI circuit is started. Use

software to instigate a wait of at least 0.2 ms from when LVION is set to 1 until the voltage is

confirmed at LVIF.

4. If “POC cannot be used” is selected by a mask option, wait for 2 ms or more by software from

when LVIE is set to 1 until LVION is set to 1.

5. If “POC used” is selected by a mask option, setting of LVIE is invalid because the reference

voltage generator in the LVI circuit always operates.

6. The value of LVIF is output as the interrupt request signal INTLVI when LVION = 1 and

LVIMD = 0.

Caution To stop LVI, follow either of the procedures below.

• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction: Write 00H to LVIM.

• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction: Clear LVION to 0 first and then

clear LVIE to 0.

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 371

(2) Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS)

This register selects the low-voltage detection level.

This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears LVIS to 00H.

Figure 21-3. Format of Low-Voltage Detection Level Selection Register (LVIS)

0

LVIS0

1

LVIS1

2

LVIS2

3

0

4

0

5

0

6

0

7

0

Symbol

LVIS

Address: FFBFH After reset: 00H R/W

LVIS2 LVIS1 LVIS0 Detection level

0 0 0 VLVI0 (4.3 V ±0.2 V)

0 0 1 VLVI1 (4.1 V ±0.2 V)

0 1 0 VLVI2 (3.9 V ±0.2 V)

0 1 1 VLVI3 (3.7 V ±0.2 V)

1 0 0 VLVI4 (3.5 V ±0.2 V)Note 1

1 0 1 VLVI5 (3.3 V ±0.15 V)Notes 1, 2

1 1 0 VLVI6 (3.1 V ±0.15 V)Notes 1, 2

1 1 1 VLVI7 (2.85 V ±0.15 V)Notes 1, 3, 4

Notes 1. When the detection voltage of the POC circuit is specified as VPOC = 3.5 V ±0.2 V by a mask

option, do not select VLVI4 to VLVI7 as the LVI detection voltage. Even if VLVI4 to VLVI7 are

selected, the POC circuit has priority.

2. Settable only for the expanded-specification/conventional products of the standard products

and (A) grade products.

3. When the VPOC = 2.85 V ±0.15 V is selected as the detection voltage of the POC circuit by the

mask option, do not select VLVI7 as the detection voltage of LVI. Even if VLVI7 is selected, the

POC circuit takes priority.

4. Settable only for expanded-specification products of the standard products and (A) grade

products.

Caution Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to 0.

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

372

21.4 Operation of Low-Voltage Detector

The low-voltage detector can be used in the following two modes.

• Used as reset

Compares the supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VLVI), and generates an internal reset signal when

VDD < VLVI.

• Used as interrupt

Compares the supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VLVI), and generates an interrupt signal (INTLVI)

when VDD < VLVI.

The operation is set as follows.

(1) When used as reset

• When starting operation

<1> Mask the LVI interrupt (LVIMK = 1).

<2> Set the detection voltage using bits 2 to 0 (LVIS2 to LVIS0) of the low-voltage detection level selection

register (LVIS).

<3> Set bit 4 (LVIE) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) to 1 (enables reference voltage generator

operation).

<4> Use software to instigate a wait of at least 2 ms.

<5> Set bit 7 (LVION) of LVIM to 1 (enables LVI operation).

<6> Use software to instigate a wait of at least 0.2 ms.

<7> Confirm that “supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI)” at bit 0 (LVIF) of LVIM.

<8> Set bit 1 (LVIMD) of LVIM to 1 (generates internal reset signal when supply voltage (VDD) < detection

voltage (VLVI)).

Figure 21-4 shows the timing of the internal reset signal generated by the low-voltage detector. The numbers

in this timing chart correspond to <1> to <8> above.

Cautions 1. <1> must always be executed. When LVIMK = 0, an interrupt may occur immediately

after the processing in <5>.

2. If “POC used” is selected by a mask option, procedures <3> and <4> are not required.

3. If supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI) when LVIM is set to 1, an internal reset

signal is not generated.

• When stopping operation

Either of the following procedures must be executed.

• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction:

Write 00H to LVIM.

• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction:

Clear LVIMD to 0, LVION to 0, and LVIE to 0 in that order.

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 373

Figure 21-4. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Internal Reset Signal Generation

Supply voltage (VDD)

LVI detection voltage

(VLVI)

POC detection voltage

(VPOC)

LVIF flag

LVIRF flagNote 3

Note 2

LVI reset signal

POC reset signal

Internal reset signal

Cleared by

software

Not cleared Not cleared

Not cleared Not cleared

Not cleared Not cleared

Cleared by

software

<2>

H

<1>Note 1

<5>

<7>

<8>

Time

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

<3>

<4> 2 ms or longer

<6> 0.2 ms or longer

LVIMK flag

(set by software)

LVIE flag

(set by software)

LVION flag

(set by software)

LVIMD flag

(set by software)

Notes 1. The LVIMK flag is set to “1” by RESET input.

2. The LVIF flag may be set (1).

3. LVIRF is bit 0 of the reset control flag register (RESF). For details of RESF, see CHAPTER 18

RESET FUNCTION.

Remark <1> to <8> in Figure 21-4 above correspond to <1> to <8> in the description of “when starting operation”

in 21.4 (1) When used as reset.

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

374

(2) When used as interrupt

• When starting operation

<1> Mask the LVI interrupt (LVIMK = 1).

<2> Set the detection voltage using bits 2 to 0 (LVIS2 to LVIS0) of the low-voltage detection level selection

register (LVIS).

<3> Set bit 4 (LVIE) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) to 1 (enables reference voltage generator

operation).

<4> Use software to instigate a wait of at least 2 ms.

<5> Set bit 7 (LVION) of LVIM to 1 (enables LVI operation).

<6> Use software to instigate a wait of at least 0.2 ms.

<7> Confirm that “supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI)” at bit 0 (LVIF) of LVIM.

<8> Clear the interrupt request flag of LVI (LVIIF) to 0.

<9> Release the interrupt mask flag of LVI (LVIMK).

<10> Execute the EI instruction (when vectored interrupts are used).

Figure 21-5 shows the timing of the interrupt signal generated by the low-voltage detector. The numbers in

this timing chart correspond to <1> to <9> above.

Caution If “POC used” is selected by a mask option, procedures <3> and <4> are not required.

• When stopping operation

Either of the following procedures must be executed.

• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction:

Write 00H to LVIM.

• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction:

Clear LVION to 0 first, and then clear LVIE to 0.

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 375

Figure 21-5. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Interrupt Signal Generation

Supply voltage (V

DD

)

LVI detection voltage

(V

LVI

)

POC detection voltage

(V

POC

)

Time

LVIF flag

INTLVI

LVIIF flag

Internal reset signal

<2>

<1>

Note 1

<5>

<7>

<8>

Cleared by software

<3>

<4> 2 ms or longer

<9> Cleared by software

<6> 0.2 ms or longer

LVIMK flag

(set by software)

LVIE flag

(set by software)

LVION flag

(set by software)

Note 2

Note 2

Notes 1. The LVIMK flag is set to “1” by RESET input.

2. The LVIF and LVIIF flags may be set (1).

Remark <1> to <9> in Figure 21-5 above correspond to <1> to <9> in the description of “when starting operation”

in 21.4 (2) When used as interrupt.

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

376

21.5 Cautions for Low-Voltage Detector

In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the vicinity of the LVI detection voltage

(VLVI), the operation is as follows depending on how the low-voltage detector is used.

(1) When used as reset

The system may be repeatedly reset and released from the reset status.

In this case, the time from release of reset to the start of the operation of the microcontroller can be arbitrarily set

by taking action (a) below.

(2) When used as interrupt

Interrupt requests may be frequently generated. Take action (b) below.

In this system, take the following actions.

<Action>

(a) When used as reset

After releasing the reset signal, wait for the supply voltage fluctuation period of each system by means of a

software counter that uses a timer, and then initialize the ports.

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 377

Figure 21-6. Example of Software Processing After Release of Reset (1/2)

• If supply voltage fluctuation is 50 ms or less in vicinity of LVI detection voltage

Yes

LVI

; The Ring-OSC clock is set as the CPU clock when the reset signal is generated

;The cause of reset (power-on-clear, WDT, LVI, or clock monitor)

can be identified by the RESF register.

;Change the CPU clock from the Ring-OSC clock to the X1 input clock.

;Check the stabilization of oscillation of the X1 input clock by using the

OSTC register.

;TMIFH1 = 1: Interrupt request is generated.

;Initialization of ports

;8-bit timer H1 can operate with the Ring-OSC clock.

Source: f

R

(480 kHz (MAX.))/2

7

× compare value 200 = 53 ms

(f

R

: Ring-OSC clock oscillation frequency)

No

Note 1

Reset

Checking cause

of reset

Note 2

Check stabilization

of oscillation

Change CPU clock

50 ms has passed?

(TMIFH1 = 1?)

Initialization

processing

Start timer

(set to 50 ms)

Notes 1. If reset is generated again during this period, initialization processing is not started.

2. A flowchart is shown on the next page.

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

378

Figure 21-6. Example of Software Processing After Release of Reset (2/2)

• Checking cause of reset

Yes

No

Check cause of reset

Power-on-clear/external

reset generated

Reset processing by

watchdog timer

Reset processing by

clock monitor

Reset processing by

low-voltage detector

No

Yes

WDTRF of RESF

register = 1?

CLMRF of RESF

register = 1?

LVIRF of RESF

register = 1?

Yes

No

CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 379

(b) When used as interrupt

Check that “supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI)” in the servicing routine of the LVI interrupt by using bit

0 (LVIF) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM). Clear bit 0 (LVIIF) of interrupt request flag register 0L (IF0L)

to 0 and enable interrupts (EI).

In a system where the supply voltage fluctuation period is long in the vicinity of the LVI detection voltage, wait for

the supply voltage fluctuation period, check that “supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI)” using the LVIF

flag, and then enable interrupts (EI).

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

380

CHAPTER 22 MASK OPTIONS

Mask ROM versions are provided with the following mask options.

1. Power-on-clear (POC) circuit

• POC cannot be used

• POC used (detection voltage: VPOC = 2.85 V ±0.15 V)Note

• POC used (detection voltage: VPOC = 3.5 V ±0.2 V)

2. Ring-OSC

• Cannot be stopped

• Can be stopped by software

3. Pull-up resistor of P60 to P63 pins

• Pull-up resistor can be incorporated in 1-bit units

(Pull-up resistors are not available for the flash memory versions.)

Note This option cannot be selected in (A1) and (A2) grade products because their supply voltage VDD is 3.3 to

5.5 V.

Flash memory versions that support the mask options of the mask ROM versions are as follows.

Table 22-1. Flash Memory Versions Supporting Mask Options of Mask ROM Versions

Mask Option

POC Circuit Ring-OSC

Flash Memory Version

Cannot be stopped

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M1(A), 78F0114M1(A1) POC cannot be used

Can be stopped by software

µ

PD78F0114M2, 78F0114M2(A), 78F0114M2(A1)

Cannot be stopped

µ

PD78F0114M3, 78F0114M3(A) POC used

(VPOC = 2.85 V ±0.15 V) Can be stopped by software

µ

PD78F0114M4, 78F0114M4(A)

Cannot be stopped

µ

PD78F0114M5, 78F0114M5(A), 78F0114M5(A1) POC used

(VPOC = 3.5 V ±0.2 V) Can be stopped by software

µ

PD78F0114M6, 78F0114M6(A), 78F0114M6(A1)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 381

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

The

µ

PD78F0114 is provided as the flash memory version of the 78K0/KC1.

The

µ

PD78F0114 replaces the internal mask ROM of the

µ

PD780114 with flash memory to which a program can

be written, erased, and overwritten while mounted on the board. Table 23-1 lists the differences between the

µ

PD78F0114 and the mask ROM versions.

Table 23-1. Differences Between

µ

PD78F0114 and Mask ROM Versions

Item

µ

PD78F0114 Mask ROM Versions

Internal ROM configuration Flash memory Mask ROM

Internal ROM capacity 32 KBNote

µ

PD780111: 8 KB

µ

PD780112: 16 KB

µ

PD780113: 24 KB

µ

PD780114: 32 KB

Internal high-speed RAM capacity 1024 bytesNote

µ

PD780111: 512 bytes

µ

PD780112: 512 bytes

µ

PD780113: 1024 bytes

µ

PD780114: 1024 bytes

IC pin None Available

VPP pin Available None

Electrical specifications,

recommended soldering conditions

Refer to the description of electrical specifications and recommended soldering

conditions

Note The same capacity as the mask ROM versions can be specified by means of the internal memory size

switching register (IMS).

Caution There are differences in noise immunity and noise radiation between the flash memory and

mask ROM versions. When pre-producing an application set with the flash memory version

and then mass-producing it with the mask ROM version, be sure to conduct sufficient

evaluations for the commercial samples (not engineering samples) of the mask ROM versions.

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

382

23.1 Internal Memory Size Switching Register

The

µ

PD78F0114 allows users to select the internal memory capacity using the internal memory size switching

register (IMS) so that the same memory map as that of the mask ROM versions with a different internal memory

capacity can be achieved.

IMS is set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets IMS to CFH.

Caution The initial value of IMS is “setting prohibited (CFH)”.

Be sure to set the value of the relevant mask ROM version at initialization.

Figure 23-1. Format of Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS)

Address: FFF0H After reset: CFH R/W

Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IMS RAM2 RAM1 RAM0 0 ROM3 ROM2 ROM1 ROM0

RAM2 RAM1 RAM0 Internal high-speed RAM capacity selection

0 1 0 512 bytes

1 1 0 1024 bytes

Other than above Setting prohibited

ROM3 ROM2 ROM1 ROM0 Internal ROM capacity selection

0 0 1 0 8 KB

0 1 0 0 16 KB

0 1 1 0 24 KB

1 0 0 0 32 KB

Other than above Setting prohibited

The IMS settings required to obtain the same memory map as mask ROM versions are shown in Table 23-2.

Table 23-2. Internal Memory Size Switching Register Settings

Target Mask ROM Versions IMS Setting

µ

PD780111 42H

µ

PD780112 44H

µ

PD780113 C6H

µ

PD780114 C8H

Caution When using a mask ROM version, be sure to set the value indicated in Table 23-2 to IMS.

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 383

23.2 Writing with Flash Programmer

Data can be written to the flash memory on-board or off-board, by using a dedicated flash programmer.

(1) On-board programming

The contents of the flash memory can be rewritten after the

µ

PD78F0114 has been mounted on the target

system. The connectors that connect the dedicated flash programmer must be mounted on the target system.

(2) Off-board programming

Data can be written to the flash memory with a dedicated program adapter (FA series) before the

µ

PD78F0114 is

mounted on the target system.

Remark The FA series is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

Table 23-3. Wiring Between

µ

PD78F0114 and Dedicated Flash Programmer (1/2)

(1) 3-wire serial I/O (CSI10)

Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Programmer With CSI10 With CSI10 + HS

Signal Name I/O Pin Function Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name Pin No.

SI/RxD Input Receive signal SO10/P12 28 SO10/P12 28

SO/TxD Output Transmit signal SI10/RxD0/P11 29 SI10/RxD0/P11 29

SCK Output Transfer clock SCK10/TxD0/P10 30 SCK10/TxD0/P10 30

X1 6 X1 6 CLK Output Clock to

µ

PD78F0114

X2Note 7 X2Note 7

/RESET Output Reset signal RESET 8 RESET 8

VPP Output Write voltage VPP 3 VPP 3

H/S Input Handshake signal Not needed Not needed HS/P15/TOH0 25

VDD 4 VDD 4 VDD I/O

VDD voltage generation/voltage

monitor AVREF 1 AVREF 1

VSS 5 VSS 5 GND − Ground

AVSS 2 AVSS 2

Note When using the clock out of the flash programmer, connect CLK of the programmer to X1, and connect its

inverse signal to X2.

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

384

Table 23-3. Wiring Between

µ

PD78F0114 and Dedicated Flash Programmer (2/2)

(2) UART (UART0, UART6)

Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Programmer With UART0 With UART0 + HS With UART6

Signal Name I/O Pin Function Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name Pin No.

SI/RxD Input Receive signal TxD0/

SCK10/P10

30 TxD0/

SCK10/P10

30 TxD6/P13 27

SO/TxD Output Transmit signal RxD0/SI10/

P11

29 RxD0/SI10/

P11

29 RxD6/P14 26

SCK Output Transfer clock Not needed

Not

needed

Not needed Not

needed

Not needed Not

needed

X1 6 X1 6 X1 6 CLK Output Clock to

µ

PD78F0114

X2Note 7 X2Note 7 X2Note 7

/RESET Output Reset signal RESET 8 RESET 8 RESET 8

VPP Output Write voltage VPP 3 VPP 3 VPP 3

H/S Input Handshake signal Not needed

Not

needed

HS/P15/TOH0 25 Not needed Not

needed

VDD 4 VDD 4 VDD 4 VDD I/O

VDD voltage generation/voltage

monitor AVREF 1 AVREF 1 AVREF 1

VSS 5 VSS 5 VSS 5 GND − Ground

AVSS 2 AVSS 2 AVSS 2

Note When using the clock out of the flash programmer, connect CLK of the programmer to X1, and connect its

inverse signal to X2.

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 385

Examples of the recommended connection when using the adapter for flash memory writing are shown below.

Figure 23-2. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (CSI10)

44 43 42 41 40 39 38

13

12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

36 35 34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

37

24

GND

VDD

VDD2 (LVDD)

SI SO SCK CLK /RESET V

PP

RESERVE/HS

WRITER INTERFACE

V

DD

(2.7 to 5.5 V)

Note

GND

Note

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V

µ

PD78F0114(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

386

Figure 23-3. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode

(CSI10 + HS)

44 43 42 41 40 39 38

13

12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

36 35 34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

37

24

GND

VDD

SI SO SCK CLK /

RESET

V

PP

RESERVE/HS

GND

VDD2 (LVDD)

V

DD

(2.7 to 5.5 V)

Note

WRITER INTERFACE

Note

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V

µ

PD78F0114(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 387

Figure 23-4. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART0) Mode

44 43 42 41 40 39 38

13

12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

36 35 34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

37

24

GND

VDD

SI SO SCK CLK /RESET VPP

RESERVE/HS

GND

VDD2 (LVDD)

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

Note

WRITER INTERFACE

Note

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V

µ

PD78F0114(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

388

Figure 23-5. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART0 + HS) Mode

44 43 42 41 40 39 38

13

12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

36 35 34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

37

24

GND

VDD

SI SO SCK CLK /RESET VPP

RESERVE/HS

GND

VDD2 (LVDD)

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

Note

WRITER INTERFACE

Note

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V

µ

PD78F0114(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 389

Figure 23-6. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART6) Mode

44 43 42 41 40 39 38

13

12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

36 35 34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

37

24

GND

VDD

SI SO SCK CLK /RESET VPP

RESERVE/HS

GND

VDD2 (LVDD)

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

Note

WRITER INTERFACE

Note

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A): 2.7 to 5.5 V

µ

PD78F0114(A1): 3.3 to 5.5 V

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

390

23.3 Programming Environment

The environment required for writing a program to the flash memory of the

µ

PD78F0114 is illustrated below.

Figure 23-7. Environment for Writing Program to Flash Memory

RS-232C

Host machine

PD78F0114

VPP

VDD

VSS

RESET

CSI10/UART0/UART6

Dedicated flash

programmer

USBNote

PG-FP4

(Flash Pro4)

Cxxxxxx

Bxxxxx

Axxxx

XXX YYY

XXXXX XXXXXX

XXXX

XXXX YYYY

STAT VE

µ

Note Flashpro IV only

A host machine that controls the dedicated flash programmer is necessary.

To interface between the dedicated flash programmer and the

µ

PD78F0114, CSI10, UART0, or UART6 is used for

manipulation such as writing and erasing. To write the flash memory off-board, a dedicated program adapter (FA

series) is necessary.

23.4 Communication Mode

Communication between the dedicated flash programmer and the

µ

PD78F0114 is established by serial

communication via CSI10, UART0, or UART6 of the

µ

PD78F0114.

(1) CSI10

Transfer rate: 200 kHz to 2 MHz

Figure 23-8. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (CSI10)

PD78F0114

V

PP

V

DD

/EV

DD

/AV

REF

V

SS

/EV

SS

/AV

SS

RESET

SO10

SI10

SCK10

V

PP

V

DD

GND

/RESET

SI/RxD

SO/TxD

X1CLK

X2

SCK

Dedicated flash

programmer

PG-FP4

(Flash Pro4)

Cxxxxxx

Bxxxxx

Axxxx

XXX YYY

XXXXX XXXXXX

XXXX

XXXX YYYY

STATVE

µ

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 391

(2) CSI communication mode supporting handshake

Transfer rate: 200 kHz to 2 MHz

Figure 23-9. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (CSI10 + HS)

PD78F0114

V

PP

RESET

SO10

SI10

SCK10

HS

V

PP

V

DD

GND

/RESET

SI/RxD

SO/TxD

SCK

X1CLK

X2

H/S

Dedicated flash

programmer

PG-FP4

(Flash Pro4)

Cxxxxxx

Bxxxxx

Axxxx

XXX YYY

XXXXX XXXXXX

XXXX

XXXX YYYY

STATVE

V

DD

/EV

DD

/AV

REF

V

SS

/EV

SS

/AV

SS

µ

(3) UART0

Transfer rate: 4800 to 38400 bps

Figure 23-10. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (UART0)

PD78F0114

V

PP

RESET

TxD0

X1

V

PP

V

DD

GND

/RESET

SI/RxD

RxD0SO/TxD

CLK

X2

Dedicated flash

programmer

PG-FP4

(Flash Pro4)

Cxxxxxx

Bxxxxx

Axxxx

XXX YYY

XXXXX XXXXXX

XXXX

XXXX YYYY

STATVE

V

DD

/EV

DD

/AV

REF

V

SS

/EV

SS

/AV

SS

µ

(4) UART communication mode supporting handshake

Transfer rate: 4800 to 38400 bps

Figure 23-11. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (UART0 + HS)

PD78F0114

V

PP

RESET

TxD0

RxD0

HS

V

PP

V

DD

GND

/RESET

SI/RxD

SO/TxD

X1CLK

X2

H/S

Dedicated flash

programmer

PG-FP4

(Flash Pro4)

Cxxxxxx

Bxxxxx

Axxxx

XXX YYY

XXXXX XXXXXX

XXXX

XXXX YYYY

STATVE

V

DD

/EV

DD

/AV

REF

V

SS

/EV

SS

/AV

SS

µ

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

392

(5) UART6

Transfer rate: 4800 to 76800 bps

Figure 23-12. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (UART6)

PD78F0114

VPP

VDD

VSS

RESET

TxD6

RxD6

VPP

VDD

GND

/RESET

SI/RxD

SO/TxD

X1CLK

X2

Dedicated flash

programmer

PG-FP4

(Flash Pro4)

Cxxxxxx

Bxxxxx

Axxxx

XXX YYY

XXXXX XXXXXX

XXXX

XXXX YYYY

STAT VE

µ

If Flashpro III/Flashpro IV is used as the dedicated flash programmer, Flashpro III/Flashpro IV generates the

following signal for the

µ

PD78F0114. For details, refer to the Flashpro III/Flashpro IV Manual.

Table 23-4. Pin Connection

Flashpro III/Flashpro IV

µ

PD78F0114 Connection

Signal Name I/O Pin Function Pin Name CSI10 UART0 UART6

VPP Output Write voltage VPP

VDD I/O VDD voltage generation/voltage monitor VDD, EVDD, AVREF

GND − Ground VSS, EVSS, AVSS

CLK Output Clock output to

µ

PD78F0114 X1, X2Note { { {

/RESET Output Reset signal RESET

SI/RxD Input Receive signal SO10/TxD0/TxD6

SO/TxD Output Transmit signal SI10/RxD0/RxD6

SCK Output Transfer clock SCK10 × ×

H/S Input Handshake signal HS ×

Note When using the clock out of the flash programmer, connect CLK of the programmer to X1, and connect its

inverse signal to X2.

Remark : Be sure to connect the pin.

{: The pin does not have to be connected if the signal is generated on the target board.

×: The pin does not have to be connected.

: In handshake mode

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 393

23.5 Handling of Pins on Board

To write the flash memory on-board, connectors that connect the dedicated flash programmer must be provided on

the target system. First provide a function that selects the normal operation mode or flash memory programming

mode on the board.

When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for programming the flash memory are in

the same status as immediately after reset. Therefore, if the external device does not recognize the state immediately

after reset, the pins must be handled as described below.

23.5.1 VPP pin

In the normal operation mode, connect the VPP pin to VSS. In addition, a write voltage of 10.0 V (TYP.) is supplied

to the VPP pin in the flash memory programming mode. Perform the following pin handling.

(1) Connect pull-down resistor RVPP = 10 kΩ to the VPP pin.

(2) Switch the input of the VPP pin to the programmer side by using a jumper on the board or to GND directly.

Figure 23-13. Example of Connection of VPP Pin

PD78F0114

V

PP

Dedicated flash programmer connection pin

Pull-down resistor (R

VPP

)

µ

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

394

23.5.2 Serial interface pins

The pins used by each serial interface are listed below.

Table 23-5. Pins Used by Each Serial Interface

Serial Interface Pins Used

CSI10 SO10, SI10, SCK10

CSI10 + HS SO10, SI10, SCK10, HS/P15

UART0 TxD0, RxD0

UART0 + HS TxD0, RxD0, HS/P15

UART6 TxD6, RxD6

To connect the dedicated flash programmer to the pins of a serial interface that is connected to another device on

the board, care must be exercised so that signals do not collide or that the other device does not malfunction.

(1) Signal collision

If the dedicated flash programmer (output) is connected to a pin (input) of a serial interface connected to another

device (output), signal collision takes place. To avoid this collision, either isolate the connection with the other

device, or make the other device go into an output high-impedance state.

Figure 23-14. Signal Collision (Input Pin of Serial Interface)

Input pin Signal collision

Dedicated flash programmer

connection pin

Other device

Output pin

In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by the device

collides with the signal sent from the dedicated flash programmer.

Therefore, isolate the signal of the other device.

PD78F0114

µ

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 395

(2) Malfunction of other device

If the dedicated flash programmer (output or input) is connected to a pin (input or output) of a serial interface

connected to another device (input), a signal may be output to the other device, causing the device to

malfunction. To avoid this malfunction, isolate the connection with the other device.

Figure 23-15. Malfunction of Other Device

Pin

Dedicated flash programmer

connection pin

Other device

Input pin

If the signal output by the PD78F0114 in the flash memory programming

mode affects the other device, isolate the signal of the other device.

Pin

Dedicated flash programmer

connection pin

Other device

Input pin

If the signal output by the dedicated flash programmer in the flash memory

programming mode affects the other device, isolate the signal of the other

device.

PD78F0114

µ

µ

PD78F0114

µ

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

396

23.5.3 RESET pin

If the reset signal of the dedicated flash programmer is connected to the RESET pin that is connected to the reset

signal generator on the board, signal collision takes place. To prevent this collision, isolate the connection with the

reset signal generator.

If the reset signal is input from the user system while the flash memory programming mode is set, the flash

memory will not be correctly programmed. Do not input any signal other than the reset signal of the dedicated flash

programmer.

Figure 23-16. Signal Collision (RESET Pin)

RESET

Dedicated flash programmer

connection pin

Reset signal generator

Signal collision

Output pin

In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by the reset

signal generator collides with the signal output by the dedicated flash

programmer. Therefore, isolate the signal of the reset signal generator.

PD78F0114

µ

23.5.4 Port pins

When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for flash memory programming enter the

same status as that immediately after reset. If external devices connected to the ports do not recognize the port

status immediately after reset, the port pin must be connected to VDD or VSS via a resistor.

23.5.5 Other signal pins

Connect X1 and X2 in the same status as in the normal operation mode when using the on-board clock.

To input the operating clock from the programmer, however, connect the clock out of the programmer to X1, and its

inverse signal to X2.

23.5.6 Power supply

To use the power supply output of the flash programmer, connect the VDD pin to VDD of the flash programmer, and

the VSS pin to VSS of the flash programmer.

However, the flash programmer is used to monitor voltage, be sure to connect the VDD and VSS pins to VDD and

GND of the flash programmer.

To use the on-board power supply, connect in compliance with the normal operation mode.

Supply the same other power supplies (EVDD, EVSS, AVREF, and AVSS) as those in the normal operation mode.

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 397

23.6 Programming Method

23.6.1 Controlling flash memory

The following figure illustrates the procedure to manipulate the flash memory.

Figure 23-17. Flash Memory Manipulation Procedure

Start

Selecting communication mode

Manipulate flash memory

End?

Yes

VPP pulse supply

No

End

Flash memory programming

mode is set

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

398

23.6.2 Flash memory programming mode

To rewrite the contents of the flash memory by using the dedicat ed flash programmer, set the

µ

PD78F0114 in the

flash memory programming mode. To set the mode, set the VPP pin and clear the reset signal.

Change the mode by using a jumper when writing the flash memory on-board.

Figure 23-18. Flash Memory Programming Mode

10.0 V

V

SS

RESET

V

PP

V

DD

V

PP

pulse

Flash memory programming mode

12 n• • •

VPP Operation mode

VSS Normal operation mode

10.0 V Flash memory programming mode

23.6.3 Selecting communication mode

In the

µ

PD78F0114 a commu nication mode is selected by inputtin g pulses (up to 1 1 pulses) to the VPP pin after the

dedicated flash memory programming mode is entered. These VPP pulses are generate d by the flash programmer.

The following table shows the relatio nship between the number of pulses a nd communication modes.

Table 23-6. Communication Modes

Standard (TYPE) Setting Note 1

Communication Mode

Port

(COMM PORT) Speed

(SIO CLOCK) On Target

(CPU CLOCK) Frequency

(Flashpro Clock) Multiply Rate

(Multiple Rate)

Pins Used Number

of VPP

Pulses

3-wire serial I/O

(CSI10) SIO-ch0

(SIO ch-0) 200 kHz to 2 MHzNote 2 SO10, SI10,

SCK10 0

3-wire serial I/O with

handshake supported

(CSI10 + HS)

SIO-H/S

(SIO ch-3

+ handshake)

200 kHz to 2 MHzNote 2 SO10, SI10,

SCK10,

HS/P15

3

UART

(UART0) UART-ch0

(UART ch-0) 4800 to 38400 bpsNotes 2 , 3 TxD0, RxD0 8

UART

(UART6) UART-ch1

(UART ch-1) 4800 to 76800 bpsNotes 2 , 3 TxD6, RxD6 9

UART with

handshake supported

(UART0 + HS)

UART-ch3

(UART ch-3) 4800 to 38400 bpsNotes 2 , 3

Optional 2 MHz to 10 MHz 1.0

TxD0, RxD0,

HS/P15 11

Notes 1. Selection items for Standard settings on Flashpro IV (TYPE settings on Flashpro III).

2. The possible setting range differs dependin g on the voltage. For details, r efer to the chapters of electrical

specifications.

3. Because factors other than the baud rate error, such as the signal waveform slew, also affect UART

communication, thoroughly evaluate the slew as well as the baud rate error.

Caution When UART0 or UART6 is selected, the receive clock is calculated based on the reset command

sent from the dedicated flash programmer after the VPP pulse has been received.

Remark Items enclosed in parentheses in the setting item column are the set value and set item of Flashpro III

when they differ from those of Flashpro IV.

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 399

23.6.4 Communication commands

The

µ

PD78F0114 communicates with the dedicated flash programmer by using commands. The signals sent from

the flash programmer to the

µ

PD78F0114 are called commands, and the commands sent from the

µ

PD78F0114 to

the dedicated flash programmer are called response commands.

Figure 23-19. Communication Commands

PD78F0114

Command

Response command

Dedicated flash

p

ro

g

rammer

PG-FP4

(Flash Pro4)

Cxxxxxx

Bxxxxx

Axxxx

XXX YYY

XXXXX XXXXXX

XXXX

XXXX YYYY

STATVE

µ

The flash memory control commands of the

µ

PD78F0114 are listed in the table below. All these commands are

issued from the programmer and the

µ

PD78F0114 perform processing corresponding to the respective commands.

Table 23-7. Flash Memory Control Commands

Classification Command Name Function

Verify Batch verify command Compares the contents of the entire memory

with the input data.

Erase Batch erase command Erases the contents of the entire memory.

Blank check Batch blank check command Checks the erasure status of the entire memory.

High-speed write command Writes data by specifying the write address and

number of bytes to be written, and executes a

verify check.

Data write

Successive write command Writes data from the address following that of

the high-speed write command executed

immediately before, and executes a verify

check.

Status read command Obtains the operation status.

Oscillation frequency setting command Sets the oscillation frequency.

Erase time setting command Sets the erase time for batch erase.

Write time setting command Sets the write time for writing data.

Baud rate setting command Sets the baud rate when UART is used.

Silicon signature command Reads the silicon signature information.

System setting, control

Reset command Escapes from each status.

The

µ

PD78F0114 return a response command for the command issued by the dedicated flash programmer. The

response commands sent from the

µ

PD78F0114 are listed below.

Table 23-8. Response Commands

Command Name Function

ACK Acknowledges command/data.

NAK Acknowledges illegal command/data.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

400

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

This chapter lists each instruction set of the 78K0/KC1 in table form. For details of each operation and operation

code, refer to the separate document 78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual (U12326E).

24.1 Conventions Used in Operation List

24.1.1 Operand identifiers and specification methods

Operands are written in the “Operand” column of each instruction in accordance with the specification method of

the instruction operand identifier (refer to the assembler specifications for details). When there are two or more

methods, select one of them. Uppercase letters and the symbols #, !, $ and [ ] are keywords and must be written as

they are. Each symbol has the following meaning.

• #: Immediate data specification

• !: Absolute address specification

• $: Relative address specification

• [ ]: Indirect address specification

In the case of immediate data, describe an appropriate numeric value or a label. When using a label, be sure to

write the #, !, $, and [ ] symbols.

For operand register identifiers r and rp, either function names (X, A, C, etc.) or absolute names (names in

parentheses in the table below, R0, R1, R2, etc.) can be used for specification.

Table 24-1. Operand Identifiers and Specification Methods

Identifier Specification Method

r

rp

sfr

sfrp

X (R0), A (R1), C (R2), B (R3), E (R4), D (R5), L (R6), H (R7)

AX (RP0), BC (RP1), DE (RP2), HL (RP3)

Special function register symbolNote

Special function register symbol (16-bit manipulatable register even addresses only)Note

saddr

saddrp

FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or labels

FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or labels (even address only)

addr16

addr11

addr5

0000H to FFFFH Immediate data or labels

(Only even addresses for 16-bit data transfer instructions)

0800H to 0FFFH Immediate data or labels

0040H to 007FH Immediate data or labels (even address only)

word

byte

bit

16-bit immediate data or label

8-bit immediate data or label

3-bit immediate data or label

RBn RB0 to RB3

Note Addresses from FFD0H to FFDFH cannot be accessed with these operands.

Remark For special function register symbols, refer to Table 3-5 Special Function Register List.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 401

24.1.2 Description of operation column

A: A register; 8-bit accumulator

X: X register

B: B register

C: C register

D: D register

E: E register

H: H register

L: L register

AX: AX register pair; 16-bit accumulator

BC: BC register pair

DE: DE register pair

HL: HL register pair

PC: Program counter

SP: Stack pointer

PSW: Program status word

CY: Carry flag

AC: Auxiliary carry flag

Z: Zero flag

RBS: Register bank select flag

IE: Interrupt request enable flag

( ): Memory contents indicated by address or register contents in parentheses

XH, XL: Higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits of 16-bit register

∧: Logical product (AND)

∨: Logical sum (OR)

∨: Exclusive logical sum (exclusive OR)

: Inverted data

addr16: 16-bit immediate data or label

jdisp8: Signed 8-bit data (displacement value)

24.1.3 Description of flag operation column

(Blank): Not affected

0: Cleared to 0

1: Set to 1

×: Set/cleared according to the result

R: Previously saved value is restored

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

402

24.2 Operation List

Clocks Flag

Instruction

Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes

Note 1 Note 2

Operation ZACCY

r, #byte 2 4 − r ← byte

saddr, #byte 3 6 7 (saddr) ← byte

sfr, #byte 3 − 7 sfr ← byte

A, r Note 3 1 2 − A ← r

r, A Note 3 1 2 − r ← A

A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← (saddr)

saddr, A 2 4 5 (saddr) ← A

A, sfr 2 − 5 A ← sfr

sfr, A 2 − 5 sfr ← A

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A ← (addr16)

!addr16, A 3 8 9 (addr16) ← A

PSW, #byte 3 − 7 PSW ← byte × × ×

A, PSW 2 − 5 A ← PSW

PSW, A 2 − 5 PSW ← A × × ×

A, [DE] 1 4 5 A ← (DE)

[DE], A 1 4 5 (DE) ← A

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A ← (HL)

[HL], A 1 4 5 (HL) ← A

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A ← (HL + byte)

[HL + byte], A 2 8 9 (HL + byte) ← A

A, [HL + B] 1 6 7 A ← (HL + B)

[HL + B], A 1 6 7 (HL + B) ← A

A, [HL + C] 1 6 7 A ← (HL + C)

MOV

[HL + C], A 1 6 7 (HL + C) ← A

A, r Note 3 1 2 − A ↔ r

A, saddr 2 4 6 A ↔ (saddr)

A, sfr 2 − 6 A ↔ (sfr)

A, !addr16 3 8 10 A ↔ (addr16)

A, [DE] 1 4 6 A ↔ (DE)

A, [HL] 1 4 6 A ↔ (HL)

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 10 A ↔ (HL + byte)

A, [HL + B] 2 8 10 A ↔ (HL + B)

8-bit data

transfer

XCH

A, [HL + C] 2 8 10 A ↔ (HL + C)

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

3. Except “r = A”

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 403

Clocks Flag

Instruction

Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes

Note 1 Note 2

Operation ZACCY

rp, #word 3 6 − rp ← word

saddrp, #word 4 8 10 (saddrp) ← word

sfrp, #word 4 − 10 sfrp ← word

AX, saddrp 2 6 8 AX ← (saddrp)

saddrp, AX 2 6 8 (saddrp) ← AX

AX, sfrp 2 − 8 AX ← sfrp

sfrp, AX 2 − 8 sfrp ← AX

AX, rp Note 3 1 4 − AX ← rp

rp, AX Note 3 1 4 − rp ← AX

AX, !addr16 3 10 12 AX ← (addr16)

MOVW

!addr16, AX 3 10 12 (addr16) ← AX

16-bit data

transfer

XCHW AX, rp Note 3 1 4 − AX ↔ rp

A, #byte 2 4 − A, CY ← A + byte × × ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) + byte × × ×

A, r Note 4 2 4 − A, CY ← A + r × × ×

r, A 2 4 − r, CY ← r + A × × ×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A + (saddr) × × ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A, CY ← A + (addr16) × × ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A, CY ← A + (HL) × × ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + byte) × × ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + B) × × ×

ADD

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + C) × × ×

A, #byte 2 4 − A, CY ← A + byte + CY × × ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) + byte + CY × × ×

A, r Note 4 2 4 − A, CY ← A + r + CY × × ×

r, A 2 4 − r, CY ← r + A + CY × × ×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A + (saddr) + CY × × ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A, CY ← A + (addr16) + CY × × ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A, CY ← A + (HL) + CY × × ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + byte) + CY × × ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + B) + CY × × ×

8-bit

operation

ADDC

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + C) + CY × × ×

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

3. Only when rp = BC, DE or HL

4. Except “r = A”

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

404

Clocks Flag

Instruction

Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes

Note 1 Note 2

Operation ZACCY

A, #byte 2 4 − A, CY ← A − byte × × ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) − byte × × ×

A, r Note 3 2 4 − A, CY ← A − r × × ×

r, A 2 4 − r, CY ← r − A × × ×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A − (saddr) × × ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A, CY ← A − (addr16) × × ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A, CY ← A − (HL) × × ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + byte) × × ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + B) × × ×

SUB

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + C) × × ×

A, #byte 2 4 − A, CY ← A − byte − CY × × ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) − byte − CY × × ×

A, r Note 3 2 4 − A, CY ← A − r − CY × × ×

r, A 2 4 − r, CY ← r − A − CY × × ×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A − (saddr) − CY × × ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A, CY ← A − (addr16) − CY × × ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A, CY ← A − (HL) − CY × × ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + byte) − CY × × ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + B) − CY × × ×

SUBC

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + C) − CY × × ×

A, #byte 2 4 − A ← A ∧ byte ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) ∧ byte ×

A, r Note 3 2 4 − A ← A ∧ r ×

r, A 2 4 − r ← r ∧ A ×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A ∧ (saddr) ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A ← A ∧ (addr16) ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A ← A ∧ (HL) ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A ← A ∧ (HL + byte) ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A ← A ∧ (HL + B) ×

8-bit

operation

AND

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A ← A ∧ (HL + C) ×

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

3. Except “r = A”

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 405

Clocks Flag

Instruction

Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes

Note 1 Note 2

Operation ZACCY

A, #byte 2 4 − A ← A ∨ byte ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) ∨ byte ×

A, r Note 3 2 4 − A ← A ∨ r ×

r, A 2 4 − r ← r ∨ A ×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A ∨ (saddr) ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A ← A ∨ (addr16) ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A ← A ∨ (HL) ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + byte) ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + B) ×

OR

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + C) ×

A, #byte 2 4 − A ← A ∨ byte ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) ∨ byte ×

A, r Note 3 2 4 − A ← A ∨ r ×

r, A 2 4 − r ← r ∨ A ×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A ∨ (saddr) ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A ← A ∨ (addr16) ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A ← A ∨ (HL) ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + byte) ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + B) ×

XOR

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + C) ×

A, #byte 2 4 − A − byte × × ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) − byte × × ×

A, r Note 3 2 4 − A − r × × ×

r, A 2 4 − r − A × × ×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A − (saddr) × × ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 A − (addr16) × × ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 A − (HL) × × ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A − (HL + byte) × × ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A − (HL + B) × × ×

8-bit

operation

CMP

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A − (HL + C) × × ×

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

3. Except “r = A”

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

406

Clocks Flag

Instruction

Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes

Note 1 Note 2

Operation ZACCY

ADDW AX, #word 3 6 − AX, CY ← AX + word × × ×

SUBW AX, #word 3 6 − AX, CY ← AX − word × × ×

16-bit

operation

CMPW AX, #word 3 6 − AX − word × × ×

MULU X 2 16

− AX ← A × X Multiply/

divide DIVUW C 2 25

− AX (Quotient), C (Remainder) ← AX ÷ C

r 1 2

− r ← r + 1 × × INC

saddr 2 4 6 (saddr) ← (saddr) + 1 × ×

r 1 2

− r ← r − 1 × × DEC

saddr 2 4 6 (saddr) ← (saddr) − 1 × ×

INCW rp 1 4

− rp ← rp + 1

Increment/

decrement

DECW rp 1 4

− rp ← rp − 1

ROR A, 1 1 2 − (CY, A7 ← A0, Am − 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×

ROL A, 1 1 2 − (CY, A0 ← A7, Am + 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×

RORC A, 1 1 2 − (CY ← A0, A7 ← CY, Am − 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×

ROLC A, 1 1 2 − (CY ← A7, A0 ← CY, Am + 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×

ROR4 [HL] 2 10 12 A3 − 0 ← (HL)3 − 0, (HL)7 − 4 ← A3 − 0,

(HL)3 − 0 ← (HL)7 − 4

Rotate

ROL4 [HL] 2 10 12 A3 − 0 ← (HL)7 − 4, (HL)3 − 0 ← A3 − 0,

(HL)7 − 4 ← (HL)3 − 0

ADJBA 2 4

− Decimal Adjust Accumulator after Addition × × ×

BCD

adjustment ADJBS 2 4

− Decimal Adjust Accumulator after Subtract × × ×

CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← (saddr.bit) ×

CY, sfr.bit 3 − 7 CY ← sfr.bit ×

CY, A.bit 2 4 − CY ← A.bit ×

CY, PSW.bit 3 − 7 CY ← PSW.bit ×

CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 CY ← (HL).bit ×

saddr.bit, CY 3 6 8 (saddr.bit) ← CY

sfr.bit, CY 3 − 8 sfr.bit ← CY

A.bit, CY 2 4 − A.bit ← CY

PSW.bit, CY 3 − 8 PSW.bit ← CY × ×

Bit

manipulate

MOV1

[HL].bit, CY 2 6 8 (HL).bit ← CY

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 407

Clocks Flag

Instruction

Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes

Note 1 Note 2

Operation ZACCY

CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY ∧ (saddr.bit) ×

CY, sfr.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∧ sfr.bit ×

CY, A.bit 2 4 − CY ← CY ∧ A.bit ×

CY, PSW.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∧ PSW.bit ×

AND1

CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 CY ← CY ∧ (HL).bit ×

CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY ∨ (saddr.bit) ×

CY, sfr.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∨ sfr.bit ×

CY, A.bit 2 4 − CY ← CY ∨ A.bit ×

CY, PSW.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∨ PSW.bit ×

OR1

CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 CY ← CY ∨ (HL).bit ×

CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY ∨ (saddr.bit) ×

CY, sfr.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∨ sfr.bit ×

CY, A.bit 2 4 − CY ← CY ∨ A.bit ×

CY, PSW.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∨ PSW.bit ×

XOR1

CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 CY ← CY ∨ (HL).bit ×

saddr.bit 2 4 6 (saddr.bit) ← 1

sfr.bit 3

− 8 sfr.bit ← 1

A.bit 2 4

− A.bit ← 1

PSW.bit 2

− 6 PSW.bit ← 1 × × ×

SET1

[HL].bit 2 6 8 (HL).bit ← 1

saddr.bit 2 4 6 (saddr.bit) ← 0

sfr.bit 3

− 8 sfr.bit ← 0

A.bit 2 4

− A.bit ← 0

PSW.bit 2

− 6 PSW.bit ← 0 × × ×

CLR1

[HL].bit 2 6 8 (HL).bit ← 0

SET1 CY 1 2

− CY ← 1 1

CLR1 CY 1 2

− CY ← 0 0

Bit

manipulate

NOT1 CY 1 2

− CY ← CY ×

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

408

Clocks Flag

Instruction

Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes

Note 1 Note 2

Operation ZACCY

CALL !addr16 3 7

− (SP − 1) ← (PC + 3)H, (SP − 2) ← (PC + 3)L,

PC ← addr16, SP ← SP − 2

CALLF !addr11 2 5

− (SP − 1) ← (PC + 2)H, (SP − 2) ← (PC + 2)L,

PC15 − 11 ← 00001, PC10 − 0 ← addr11,

SP ← SP − 2

CALLT [addr5] 1 6

− (SP − 1) ← (PC + 1)H, (SP − 2) ← (PC + 1)L,

PCH ← (00000000, addr5 + 1),

PCL ← (00000000, addr5),

SP ← SP − 2

BRK 1 6

− (SP − 1) ← PSW, (SP − 2) ← (PC + 1)H,

(SP − 3) ← (PC + 1)L, PCH ← (003FH),

PCL ← (003EH), SP ← SP − 3, IE ← 0

RET 1 6

− PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP),

SP ← SP + 2

RETI 1 6

− PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP),

PSW ← (SP + 2), SP ← SP + 3

RRR

Call/return

RETB 1 6

− PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP),

PSW ← (SP + 2), SP ← SP + 3

RRR

PSW 1 2

− (SP − 1) ← PSW, SP ← SP − 1 PUSH

rp 1 4

− (SP − 1) ← rpH, (SP − 2) ← rpL,

SP ← SP − 2

PSW 1 2

− PSW ← (SP), SP ← SP + 1 R R RPOP

rp 1 4

− rpH ← (SP + 1), rpL ← (SP),

SP ← SP + 2

SP, #word 4 − 10 SP ← word

SP, AX 2 − 8 SP ← AX

Stack

manipulate

MOVW

AX, SP 2 − 8 AX ← SP

!addr16 3

6 − PC ← addr16

$addr16 2

6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8

Unconditional

branch

BR

AX 2

8 − PCH ← A, PCL ← X

BC $addr16 2

6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 1

BNC $addr16 2

6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 0

BZ $addr16 2

6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 1

Conditional

branch

BNZ $addr16 2

6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 0

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 409

Clocks Flag

Instruction

Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes

Note 1 Note 2

Operation ZACCY

saddr.bit, $addr16 3 8 9 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 1

sfr.bit, $addr16 4 − 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1

A.bit, $addr16 3 8 − PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1

PSW.bit, $addr16 3 − 9 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1

BT

[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10 11 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1

saddr.bit, $addr16 4 10 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 0

sfr.bit, $addr16 4 − 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 0

A.bit, $addr16 3 8 − PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 0

PSW.bit, $addr16 4 − 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 0

BF

[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10 11 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 0

saddr.bit, $addr16 4 10 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 1

then reset (saddr.bit)

sfr.bit, $addr16 4 − 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1

then reset sfr.bit

A.bit, $addr16 3 8 − PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1

then reset A.bit

PSW.bit, $addr16 4 − 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1

then reset PSW.bit

× × ×

BTCLR

[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10 12 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1

then reset (HL).bit

B, $addr16 2 6 − B ← B − 1, then

PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if B ≠ 0

C, $addr16 2 6 − C ← C −1, then

PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if C ≠ 0

Conditional

branch

DBNZ

saddr, $addr16 3 8 10 (saddr) ← (saddr) − 1, then

PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (saddr) ≠ 0

SEL RBn 2 4

− RBS1, 0 ← n

NOP 1 2

− No Operation

EI 2

− 6 IE ← 1 (Enable Interrupt)

DI 2

− 6 IE ← 0 (Disable Interrupt)

HALT 2 6

− Set HALT Mode

CPU

control

STOP 2 6

− Set STOP Mode

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

410

24.3 Instructions Listed by Addressing Type

(1) 8-bit instructions

MOV, XCH, ADD, ADDC, SUB, SUBC, AND, OR, XOR, CMP, MULU, DIVUW, INC, DEC, ROR, ROL, RORC,

ROLC, ROR4, ROL4, PUSH, POP, DBNZ

Second Operand

First Operand

#byte A rNote sfr saddr !addr16 PSW [DE] [HL]

[HL + byte]

[HL + B]

[HL + C]

$addr16 1 None

A ADD

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

OR

XOR

CMP

MOV

XCH

ADD

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

OR

XOR

CMP

MOV

XCH

MOV

XCH

ADD

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

OR

XOR

CMP

MOV

XCH

ADD

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

OR

XOR

CMP

MOV MOV

XCH

MOV

XCH

ADD

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

OR

XOR

CMP

MOV

XCH

ADD

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

OR

XOR

CMP

ROR

ROL

RORC

ROLC

r MOV MOV

ADD

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

OR

XOR

CMP

INC

DEC

B, C DBNZ

sfr MOV MOV

saddr MOV

ADD

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

OR

XOR

CMP

MOV DBNZ INC

DEC

!addr16 MOV

PSW MOV MOV PUSH

POP

[DE] MOV

[HL] MOV ROR4

ROL4

[HL + byte]

[HL + B]

[HL + C]

MOV

X MULU

C DIVUW

Note Except “r = A”

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 411

(2) 16-bit instructions

MOVW, XCHW, ADDW, SUBW, CMPW, PUSH, POP, INCW, DECW

Second Operand

First Operand

#word AX rpNote sfrp saddrp !addr16 SP None

AX ADDW

SUBW

CMPW

MOVW

XCHW

MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW

rp MOVW MOVWNote INCW

DECW

PUSH

POP

sfrp MOVW MOVW

saddrp MOVW MOVW

!addr16 MOVW

SP MOVW MOVW

Note Only when rp = BC, DE, HL

(3) Bit manipulation instructions

MOV1, AND1, OR1, XOR1, SET1, CLR1, NOT1, BT, BF, BTCLR

Second Operand

First Operand

A.bit sfr.bit saddr.bit PSW.bit [HL].bit CY $addr16 None

A.bit MOV1

BT

BF

BTCLR

SET1

CLR1

sfr.bit MOV1

BT

BF

BTCLR

SET1

CLR1

saddr.bit MOV1

BT

BF

BTCLR

SET1

CLR1

PSW.bit MOV1

BT

BF

BTCLR

SET1

CLR1

[HL].bit MOV1

BT

BF

BTCLR

SET1

CLR1

CY MOV1

AND1

OR1

XOR1

MOV1

AND1

OR1

XOR1

MOV1

AND1

OR1

XOR1

MOV1

AND1

OR1

XOR1

MOV1

AND1

OR1

XOR1

SET1

CLR1

NOT1

CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION SET

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

412

(4) Call instructions/branch instructions

CALL, CALLF, CALLT, BR, BC, BNC, BZ, BNZ, BT, BF, BTCLR, DBNZ

Second Operand

First Operand

AX !addr16 !addr11 [addr5] $addr16

Basic instruction BR CALL

BR

CALLF CALLT BR

BC

BNC

BZ

BNZ

Compound

instruction

BT

BF

BTCLR

DBNZ

(5) Other instructions

ADJBA, ADJBS, BRK, RET, RETI, RETB, SEL, NOP, EI, DI, HALT, STOP

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 413

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

Target products (expanded-specification products): Products with a rankNote E or after

•

µ

PD780111, 780112, 78011 3, 780114, 7801 11(A), 780112(A), 78011 3(A), and 780114(A) for which orders wer e

received after the end of March 2004

•

µ

PD78F0114 and 78F0114(A) for which orders were received after the middle of July 2004

Note The rank is indicated by the 5th digit from the left in the lot number marked on the package.

Lot number × × × ×

Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C) (1/2)

Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit

VDD −0.3 to +6.5 V

EVDD −0.3 to +6.5 V

VSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

EVSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

AVREF −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

AVSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

Supply voltage

VPP

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A) only, Note 2 −0.3 to +10.5 V

VI1 P00, P01, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33,

P60, P61, P70 to P73, P120, X1, X2, XT1, XT2,

RESET

−0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

N-ch open drain −0.3 to +13 V VI2 P62, P63

On-chip pull-up resistor −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

Input voltage

VI3 VPP in flash programming mode

(

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A) only) −0.3 to +10.5 V

Output voltage VO −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

Analog input voltage VAN AVSS − 0.3 to AVREF + 0.3Note 1

and −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

Per pin −10 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P16, P70 to P73 −30 mA

Output current, high IOH Total of all

pins −60 mA P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130 −30 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, P130 20 mA Per pin

P60 to P63 30 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P16, P70 to P73 35 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of all

pins 70 mA P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63,

P120, P130 35 mA

In normal operation mode −40 to +85 Operating ambient

temperature TA

In flash memory programming mode −10 to +85

°C

µ

PD780111, 780112, 780113, 780114,

780111(A), 780112(A), 780113(A), 780114(A) −65 to +150 Storage temperature Tstg

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A) −40 to +125

°C

Year

code Week

code

Rank

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

414

Notes 1. Must be 6.5 V or lower.

2. Make sure that the following conditions of the VPP voltage application timing are satisfied when the flash

memory is written.

• When supply voltage rises

V

PP must exceed VDD 10

µ

s or more after VDD has reached the lower-limit value (2.5 V) of the operating

voltage range (see a in the figure below).

• When supply voltage drops

V

DD must be lowered 10

µ

s or more after VPP falls below the lower-limit value (2.5 V) of the operating

voltage range of VDD (see b in the figure below).

2.5 V

V

DD

0 V

0 V

V

PP

2.5 V

a b

Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any

parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the

verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that

ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 415

X1 Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 12

3.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 10

3.0 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V 2.0 8.38

Ceramic

resonator

C1

X2X1

V

SS

C2

Oscillation

frequency (fXP)Note

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 12

3.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 10

3.0 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V 2.0 8.38

Crystal

resonator

C1

X2X1

V

SS

C2

Oscillation

frequency (fXP)Note

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 12

3.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 10

3.0 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V 2.0 8.38

X1 input

frequency (fXP)Note

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 38 500

3.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 46 500

3.0 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V 56 500

External

clock

X2X1

X1 input high-

/low-level width

(tXPH, tXPL)

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 V 96 500

ns

Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the

above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the o scillator capacitor th e same potential as V SS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. Since the CPU is started by the Ring-OSC after reset is released, check the oscillation

stabilization time of the X1 input clock using the oscillation stabilization time counter status

register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation

stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization

time with the resonator to be used.

Ring-OSC Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

On-chip Ring-OSC oscillator Oscillation frequency (fR) 120 240 480 kHz

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

416

Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Crystal

resonator

XT1

V

SS

XT2

C4 C3

Rd

Oscillation frequency

(fXT)Note

32 32.768 35 kHz

XT1 input frequency

(fXT)Note

32 38.5 kHz

External clock

XT1

XT2

XT1 input high-/low-level

width (tXTH, tXTL)

12 15

µ

s

Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figure to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power

consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the X1 oscillator. Particular

care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem clock is used.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation

themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 417

Recommended Oscillator Constants

Caution For the resonator selection of the

µ

PD780111(A), 780112(A), 780113(A), 780114(A), and

78F0114(A) and oscillator constants, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation

themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

(a)

µ

PD780111, 780112, 780113, 780114

X1 oscillation: Ceramic resonator (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Recommended

Circuit Constants

Oscillation Voltage

Range

Manufacturer Part Number SMD/

Lead

Frequency

(MHz)

C1

(pF)

C2

(pF)

MIN.

(V)

MAX.

(V)

CSTCC2M00G56-R0 SMD 2.00 Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

2.5

CSTCR4M00G55-R0 2.6

CSTCR4M00G55U-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39) 2.5

CSTLS4M00G56-B0 2.7

CSTLS4M00G56U-B0

Lead

4.00

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47) 2.5

CSTCR4M19G55-R0 2.6

CSTCR4M19G55U-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39) 2.5

CSTLS4M19G56-B0 2.7

CSTLS4M19G56U-B0

Lead

4.194

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47) 2.5

CSTCR4M91G53-R0

CSTCR4M91G53U-R0

SMD Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTLS4M91G53-B0

CSTLS4M91G53U-B0

Lead

4.915

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCR5M00G53-R0

CSTCR5M00G53U-R0

SMD Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTLS5M00G53-B0

CSTLS5M00G53U-B0

Lead

5.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCR6M00G53-R0

CSTCR6M00G53U-R0

SMD Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTLS6M00G53-B0

CSTLS6M00G53U-B0

Lead

6.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCE8M00G52-R0 SMD Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

2.5

CSTLS8M00G53-B0 2.6

CSTLS8M00G53U-B0

Lead

8.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15) 2.5

CSTCE10M0G52-R0 SMD Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

2.5

CSTLS10M0G53-B0 2.7

Murata Mfg.

CSTLS10M0G53U-B0

Lead

10.0

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15) 2.5

5.5

CSTCE12M0G52-R0 SMD 12.0 Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

2.6

Caution The oscillator constants shown above are reference values based on evaluation in a specific

environment by the resonator manufacturer. If it is necessary to optimize the oscillator

characteristics in the actual application, apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on

the implementation circuit. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency only indicate the

oscillator characteristic. Use the 78K0/KC1 so that the internal operation conditions are within

the specifications of the DC and AC characteristics.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

418

(b)

µ

PD78F0114

X1 oscillation: Ceramic resonator (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Recommended

Circuit Constants

Oscillation Voltage

Range

Manufacturer Part Number

SMD/

Lead

Frequency

(MHz)

C1

(pF)

C2

(pF)

MIN.

(V)

MAX.

(V)

CSTCC2M00G56-R0 SMD 2.00

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR4M00G55-R0

CSTCR4M00G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS4M00G56-B0

CSTLS4M00G56U-B0

Lead

4.00

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR4M19G55-R0

CSTCR4M19G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS4M19G56-B0

CSTLS4M19G56U-B0

Lead

4.194

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

2.5

CSTCR4M91G55-R0 2.6

CSTCR4M91G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39) 2.5

CSTLS4M91G56-B0 2.6

CSTLS4M91G56U-B0

Lead

4.915

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47) 2.5

CSTCR5M00G55-R0 2.6

CSTCR5M00G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39) 2.5

CSTLS5M00G56-B0 Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

2.6

CSTLS5M00G53U-B0

Lead

5.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCR6M00G55-R0

CSTCR6M00G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS6M00G56-B0

CSTLS6M00G56U-B0

Lead

6.00

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCE8M00G52-R0 SMD Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

CSTLS8M00G53-B0

CSTLS8M00G53U-B0

Lead

8.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCE10M0G52-R0 SMD Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

CSTLS10M0G53-B0

Murata Mfg.

CSTLS10M0G53U-B0

Lead

10.0

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

2.5

5.5

CSTCE12M0G52-R0 SMD 12.0

Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

Caution The oscillator constants shown above are reference values based on evaluation in a specific

environment by the resonator manufacturer. If it is necessary to optimize the oscillator

characteristics in the actual application, apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on

the implementation circuit. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency only indicate the

oscillator characteristic. Use the 78K0/KC1 so that the internal operation conditions are within

the specifications of the DC and AC characteristics.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 419

DC Characteristics (1/4)

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Per pin 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −5 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −25 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −25 mA

Output current, high IOH

Total of all pins 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V −10 mA

Per pin for P00, P01, P10 to

P17, P30 to P33, P70 to

P73, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10 mA

Per pin for P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 15 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 30 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P60 to P63, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 30 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of all pins 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 10 mA

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.7VDD VDD V VIH1 P12, P13, P15

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.8VDD VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.8VDD VDD V VIH2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14,

P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70

to P73, P120, RESET 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.85VDD VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.7AVREF AVREF V VIH3 P20 to P27Note

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.8AVREF AVREF V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.7VDD VDD V VIH4 P60, P61

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.8VDD VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.7VDD 12 V N-ch open

drain 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.8VDD 12 V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.7VDD VDD V

VIH5 P62, P63

On-chip pull-up

resistor 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.8VDD VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V VDD − 0.5 VDD V

Input voltage, high

VIH6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V VDD − 0.2 VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.3VDD V VIL1 P12, P13, P15

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.2VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.2VDD V VIL2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14,

P16, P17, P30 to P33, P70

to P73, P120, RESET 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.15VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.3AVREF V VIL3 P20 to P27Note

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.2AVREF V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.3VDD V VIL4 P60, P61

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.2VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.3VDD V VIL5 P62, P63

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.2VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.4 V

Input voltage, low

VIL6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.2 V

Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

420

DC Characteristics (2/4)

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Total of P00, P01, P10

to P16, P70 to P73

IOH = −25 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −5 mA

VDD − 1.0 V

Total of P17, P30 to

P33, P120, P130

IOH = −25 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −5 mA

VDD − 1.0 V

Output voltage, high VOH

IOH = −100

µ

A 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V VDD − 0.5 V

Total of P00, P01, P10

to P16, P70 to P73

IOL = 30 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 10 mA

1.3 V

Total of P17, P30 to

P33, P60 to P63, P120,

P130

IOL = 30 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 10 mA

1.3 V

VOL1

IOL = 400

µ

A 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.4 V

Output voltage, low

VOL2 P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 15 mA

2.0 V

VI = VDD P00, P01, P10 to P17,

P30 to P33, P60, P61,

P70 to P73, P120,

RESET

3

µ

A ILIH1

VI = AVREF P20 to P27 3

µ

A

ILIH2 VI = VDD X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 20

µ

A

Input leakage current,

high

ILIH3 VI = 12 V P62, P63 3

µ

A

ILIL1 P00, P01, P10 to P17,

P20 to P27, P30 to P33,

P60, P61, P70 to P73,

P120, RESET

−3

µ

A

ILIL2 X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 −20

µ

A

Input leakage current,

low

ILIL3

VI = 0 V

P62, P63 −3Note 2

µ

A

Output leakage current,

high

ILOH VO = VDD 3

µ

A

Output leakage current,

low

ILOL VO = 0 V −3

µ

A

Pull-up resistance

value

RL VI = 0 V 10 30 100 kΩ

VPP supply voltage

(

µ

PD78F0114,

78F0114(A) only)

VPP1 In normal operation mode 0 0.2VDD V

Notes 1. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse level of XT1 is input to XT2.

2. If there is no on-chip pull-up resistor for P62 and P63 (specified by a mask option) and if port 6 has been

set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level input leakage

current of up to −45

µ

A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum leakage current is −3

µ

A.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 421

DC Characteristics (3/4):

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A)

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

When A/D converter is stopped 14.7 25.4 mA

fXP = 12 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4 15.7 27.4 mA

When A/D converter is stopped 12.2 21.1 mA

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4 13.2 23.1 mA

When A/D converter is stopped 4.1 6.8 mA

IDD1 X1 crystal

oscillation

operating

modeNote 2

fXP = 5 MHz

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4 4.7 8.0 mA

When peripher al func tions ar e stopped 1.8 3.6 mA

fXP = 12 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% When peripheral fu nctions are oper ating 7.8 mA

When peripher al func tions ar e stopped 1.5 3.0 mA

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% When peripheral fu nctions are oper ating 6.6 mA

When peripher al func tions ar e stopped 0.34 0.68 mA

IDD2 X1 crystal

oscillation HALT

mode

fXP = 5 MHz

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% When peripheral fu nctions are oper ating 1.8 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 0.39 1.56 mA IDD3 Ring-OSC

operating

modeNote 5 VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.31 1.24 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 0.19 0.76 mA IDD4 Ring-OSC HALT

modeNote 5 VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.16 0.64 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 92 184

µ

A IDD5 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

operating

modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 78 156

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 20 40

µ

A IDD6 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

HALT modeNotes 5, 7 VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 6 12

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.1 30

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 14 58

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 35.5

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 17.5 63.5

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.05 10

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 7.5 25

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 15.5

µ

A

Supply

currentNote 1

IDD7 STOP mode

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 11 30.5

µ

A

Notes 1. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included

(however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not inclu ded).

2. I

DD1 includes peripheral operation current.

3. When PCC = 00H.

4. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin.

5. When X1 oscillator is stopped.

6. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 in the

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M2, 78F0114M1(A), and

78F0114M2(A).

7. When the

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M2, 78F0114M1(A), and 78F0114M2(A) (including LVIE = 0) are

selected and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped. Peripheral operation current is not included.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

422

DC Characteristics (4/4):

µ

PD780111, 780112, 780113, 780114, 780111 ( A), 780112(A), 780113(A), 780114(A)

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

When A/D converter is stopped 7.5 14.3 mA

fXP = 12 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4 8.5 16.3 mA

When A/D converter is stopped 6.2 11.9 mA

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4 7.2 13.9 mA

When A/D converter is stopped 1.8 3.4 mA

IDD1 X1 crystal

oscillation

operating

modeNote 2

fXP = 5 MHz

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4 2.4 4.6 mA

When peripher al func tions ar e stopped 1.6 3.2 mA

fXP = 12 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% When peripheral fu nctions are oper ating 6.6 mA

When peripher al func tions ar e stopped 1.4 2.8 mA

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% When peripheral fu nctions are oper ating 5.7 mA

When peripher al func tions ar e stopped 0.26 0.51 mA

IDD2 X1 crystal

oscillation HALT

mode

fXP = 5 MHz

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% When peripheral fu nctions are oper ating 1.4 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 210 840

µ

A IDD3 Ring-OSC

operating

modeNote 5 VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 130 520

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 60 240

µ

A IDD4 Ring-OSC HALT

modeNote 5 VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 33 132

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 30 60

µ

A IDD5 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

operating

modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 13 26

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 20 40

µ

A IDD6 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

HALT modeNotes 5, 7 VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 6 12

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.1 30

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 14 58

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 35.5

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 17.5 63.5

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.05 10

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 7.5 25

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 15.5

µ

A

Supply

currentNote 1

IDD7 STOP mode

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 11 30.5

µ

A

Notes 1. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included

(however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not inclu ded).

2. I

DD1 includes peripheral operation current.

3. When PCC = 00H.

4. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin.

5. When X1 oscillator is stopped.

6. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 with POC-OFF selected by a mask option.

7. W hen POC-OFF (including LVIE = 0) is selected by a mask option and Ring-OSC oscill ation is stopped.

Peripheral operation current is not included.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 423

AC Characteristics

(1) Basic operation (TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.166 16

µ

s

3.5 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.2 16

µ

s

3.0 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 VNote 1 0.238 16

µ

s

X1 input

clock

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 VNote 1 0.4 16

µ

s

Main system

clock

operation

Ring-OSC clock 4.17 8.33 33.3

µ

s

Instruction cycle (mi nim um

instruction execution time) TCY

Subsystem clock operation 114 122 125

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2/fsam + 0.1Note 2

µ

s

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2/fsam + 0.2Note 2

µ

s

TI000, TI010 input high-level

width, low-level width tTIH0,

tTIL0

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 2/fsam + 0.5Note 2

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10 MHz

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 5 MHz

TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 2.5 MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 50 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100 ns

TI50, TI51 input high-level width,

low-level width tTIH5,

tTIL5

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 200 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1

µ

s

Interrupt input high-level width,

low-level width tINTH,

tINTL 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 2

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 50 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100 ns

Key return input low-level width tKR

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 200 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10

µ

s RESET low-level width tRSL

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 20

µ

s

Notes 1. The following characteristics are applied when P62 or P63 i s read at VDD lower than 3.5 V.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V 0.238 16

µ

s

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.3 V 0.4 16

µ

s

Instruction cycle (mi nim um

instruction execution time) TCY Main system

clock

operation

X1 input

clock

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.8 16

µ

s

2. Selection of fsam = fXP, fXP/4, or fXP/256 is possible using bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler

mode register 00 (PRM00). Note that when selecting the TI000 val id edge as the count clock, fsam = fXP.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

424

TCY vs. VDD (X1 Input Clock Operation)

5.0

1.0

2.0

0.4

0.2

0.1

0

10.0

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

Supply voltage VDD [V]

Cycle time TCY [ s]

5.5

20.0

16.0

0.238

0.166

3.5

2.5

µ

Guaranteed

operation range

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 425

(2) Serial interface (TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

(a) UART mode (UART6, dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 312.5 kbps

(b) UART mode (UART0, dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 312.5 kbps

(c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 200 ns

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 240 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.3 V 400 ns

SCK10 cycle time tKCY1

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V tKCY1/2 − 10 ns SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH1,

tKL1 2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V tKCY1/2 − 50 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 30 ns SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK1

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 70 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 30 ns SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI1

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 70 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 30 ns

Delay time from SCK10↓ to

SO10 output

tKSO1 C = 100 pFNote

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 120 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines.

(d) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns SCK10 cycle time tKCY2

2.5 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 800 ns

SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH2,

tKL2

t

KCY2/2 ns

SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK2 80 ns

SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI2 50 ns

Delay time from SCK10↓ to

SO10 output

tKSO2 C = 100 pFNote 120 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

426

AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1 Input)

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Test points 0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Clock Timing

X1 input V

IH6

(MIN.)

V

IL6

(MAX.)

1/f

XP

t

XPL

t

XPH

1/f

XT

t

XTL

t

XTH

XT1 input V

IH6

(MIN.)

V

IL6

(MAX.)

TI Timing

TI000, TI010

t

TIL0

t

TIH0

TI50, TI51

1/f

TI5

t

TIL5

t

TIH5

Interrupt Request Input Timing

INTP0 to INTP5

t

INTL

t

INTH

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 427

RESET Input Timing

RESET

t

RSL

Serial Transfer Timing

3-wire serial I/O mode:

SI10

SO10

t

KCYm

t

KLm

t

KHm

t

SIKm

t

KSIm

Input data

t

KSOm

Output data

SCK10

Remark m = 1, 2

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

428

A/D Converter Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.5 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.5 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 10 10 10 bit

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.2 ±0.4 %FSR

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.3 ±0.6 %FSR

Overall errorNotes 1, 2

2.5 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±0.6 ±1.2 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V 14 100

µ

s

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V 17 100

µ

s

Conversion time tCONV

2.5 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V 48 100

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4 %FSR

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.6 %FSR

Zero-scale errorNotes 1, 2

2.5 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±1.2 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4 %FSR

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.6 %FSR

Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2

2.5 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±1.2 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±2.5 LSB

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±4.5 LSB

Integral non-linearity errorNote 1

2.5 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±8.5 LSB

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±1.5 LSB

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±2.0 LSB

Differential non-linearity error Note 1

2.5 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±3.5 LSB

Analog input voltage VIAN AVSS AVREF V

Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).

2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value.

POC Circuit Characteristics (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VPOC0 Mask option = 3.5 V Note 1 3.3 3.5 3.7 V Detection voltage

VPOC1 Mask option = 2.85 VNote 2 2.7 2.85 3.0 V

VDD: 0 V → 2.7 V 0.0015 ms Power supply rise time tPTH

VDD: 0 V → 3.3 V 0.002 ms

Response delay time 1Note 3 tPTHD When power supply rises, after reaching

detection voltage (MAX.)

3.0 ms

Response delay time 2Note 4 tPD When VDD falls 1.0 ms

Minimum pulse width tPW 0.2 ms

Notes 1. When flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M5, 78F0114M6, 78F0114M5(A), or 78F0114M6(A) is used

2. When flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M3, 78F0114M4, 78F0114M3(A), or 78F0114M4(A) is used

3. Time required from voltage detection to reset release.

4. Time required from voltage detection to internal reset output.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 429

POC Circuit Timing

Supply voltage

(V

DD

)

Time

Detection voltage (MIN.)

Detection voltage (TYP.)

Detection voltage (MAX.)

t

PTH

t

PTHD

t

PW

t

PD

LVI Circuit Characteristics (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VLVI0 4.1 4.3 4.5 V

VLVI1 3.9 4.1 4.3 V

VLVI2 3.7 3.9 4.1 V

VLVI3 3.5 3.7 3.9 V

VLVI4 3.3 3.5 3.7 V

VLVI5 3.15 3.3 3.45 V

VLVI6 2.95 3.1 3.25 V

Detection voltage

VLVI7 2.7 2.85 3.0 V

Response timeNote 1 tLD 0.2 2.0 ms

Minimum pulse width tLW 0.2 ms

Reference voltage stabilization wait

timeNote 2

tLWAIT0 0.5 2.0 ms

Operation stabilization wait time Note 3 tLWAIT1 0.1 0.2 ms

Notes 1. Time required from voltage detection to interrupt output or internal reset output.

2. Time required from setting LVIE to 1 to reference voltage stabilization when POC-OFF is selected by the

POC mask option (when flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M2, 78F0114M1(A), or

78F0114M2(A) is used).

3. Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization.

Remarks 1. V

LVI0 > VLVI1 > VLVI2 > VLVI3 > VLVI4 > VLVI5 > VLVI6 > VLVI7

2. V

POCn < VLVm (n = 0, 1, m = 0 to 7)

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

430

LVI Circuit Timing

Supply voltage

(V

DD

)

Time

Detection voltage (MIN.)

Detection voltage (TYP.)

Detection voltage (MAX.)

t

LWAIT0

t

LW

t

LD

t

LWAIT1

LVIE ← 1 LVION ← 1

Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Data retention supply voltage VDDDR When POC-OFF is selected by mask

optionNote

1.6 5.5 V

Release signal set time tSREL 0

µ

s

Note When flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M2, 78F0114M1(A), or 78F0114M2(A) is used

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 431

Flash Memory Programming Characteristics:

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A)

(TA = +10 to +60°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

(1) Write erase characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VPP supply voltage VPP2 During flash memory programming 9.7 10.0 10.3 V

VDD supply current IDD When VPP = VPP2, fXP = 10 MHz, VDD = 5.5 V 37 mA

VPP supply current IPP VPP = VPP2 100 mA

Step erase timeNote 1 Ter 0.199 0.2 0.201 s

Overall erase timeNote 2 Tera When step erase time = 0.2 s 20 s/chip

Writeback timeNote 3 Twb 49.4 50 50.6 ms

Number of writebacks per

writeback commandNote 4

Cwb When writeback time = 50 ms 60 Times

Number of erases/writebacks Cerwb 16 Times

Step write timeNote 5 Twr 48 50 52

µ

s

Overall write time per wordNote 6 Twrw When step write time = 50

µ

s (1 word = 1

byte)

48 520

µ

s

Number of rewrites per chipNote 7 Cerwr 1 erase + 1 write after erase = 1 rewrite 20 Times/

area

Notes 1. The recommended setting value of the step erase time is 0.2 s.

2. The prewrite time before erasure and the erase verify time (writeback time) are not included.

3. The recommended setting value of the writeback time is 50 ms.

4. Writeback is executed once by the issuance of the writeback command. Therefore, the number of retries

must be the maximum value minus the number of commands issued.

5. The recommended setting value of the step write time is 50

µ

s.

6. The actual write time per word is 100

µ

s longer. The internal verify time during or after a write is not

included.

7. When a product is first written after shipment, “erase → write” and “write only” are both taken as one

rewrite.

Example: P: Write, E: Erase

Shipped product → P → E → P → E → P: 3 rewrites

Shipped product → E → P → E → P → E → P: 3 rewrites

Remark The range of the operating clock during flash memory programming is the same as the range during normal

operation.

CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

432

(2) Serial write operation characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Set time from VDD↑ to VPP↑ tDP 10

µ

s

Release time from VPP↑ to RESET↑ tPR 10

µ

s

VPP pulse input start time from RESET↑ tRP 2 ms

VPP pulse high-/low-level width tPW 8

µ

s

VPP pulse input end time from RESET↑ tRPE 14 ms

VPP pulse low-level input voltage VPPL 0.8VDD 1.2VDD V

VPP pulse high-level input voltage VPPH 9.7 10.0 10.3 V

Flash Write Mode Setting Timing

V

DD

V

DD

0 V

V

DD

RESET (input)

0 V

V

PPH

V

PPL

V

PP

V

PP

t

RP

t

PR

t

DP

t

PW

t

PW

t

RPE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 433

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

Target products (conventional products): Products with rank Note I or K

•

µ

PD780111, 780112, 78011 3, 780114, 7801 11(A), 780112(A), 78011 3(A), and 780114(A) for which orders wer e

received before the end of March 2004

•

µ

PD78F0114 and 78F0114(A) for which orde r s were received before the middle of July 2004

Note The rank is indicated by the 5th digit from the left in the lot number marked on the package.

Lot number × × × ×

Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit

VDD −0.3 to +6.5 V

EVDD −0.3 to +6.5 V

VSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

EVSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

AVREF −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

AVSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

Supply voltage

VPP

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A) only, Note 2 −0.3 to +10.5 V

VI1 P00, P01, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P33,

P60, P61, P70 to P73, P120, X1, X2, XT1, XT2,

RESET

−0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

N-ch open drain −0.3 to +13 V VI2 P62, P63

On-chip pull-up resistor −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

Input voltage

VI3 VPP in flash programming mode

(

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A) only) −0.3 to +10.5 V

Output voltage VO −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

Analog input voltage VAN AVSS − 0.3 to AVREF + 0.3Note 1

and −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

Per pin −10 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P16, P70 to P73 −30 mA

Output current, high IOH

Total of all

pins −60 mA P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130 −30 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, P130 20 mA Per pin

P60 to P63 30 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P16, P70 to P73 35 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of all

pins 70 mA P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63,

P120, P130 35 mA

In normal operation mode −40 to +85 Operating ambient

temperature TA

In flash memory programming mode −10 to +85

°C

µ

PD780111, 780112, 780113, 780114,

780111(A), 780112(A), 780113(A), 780114(A) −65 to +150 Storage temperature Tstg

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A) −40 to +125

°C

Year

code Week

code

Rank

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

434

Notes 1. Must be 6.5 V or lower.

2. Make sure that the following conditions of the VPP voltage application timing are satisfied when the flash

memory is written.

• When supply voltage rises

V

PP must exceed VDD 10

µ

s or more after VDD has reached the lower-limit value (2.7 V) of the operating

voltage range (see a in the figure below).

• When supply voltage drops

V

DD must be lowered 10

µ

s or more after VPP falls below the lower-limit value (2.7 V) of the operating

voltage range of VDD (see b in the figure below).

2.7 V

VDD

0 V

0 V

VPP

2.7 V

ab

Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any

parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the

verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that

ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 435

X1 Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 10

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 8.38

Ceramic

resonator

C1

X2X1

V

SS

C2

Oscillation

frequency (fXP)Note

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.3 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 10

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 8.38

Crystal

resonator

C1

X2X1

V

SS

C2

Oscillation

frequency (fXP)Note

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.3 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 10

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 8.38

X1 input

frequency (fXP)Note

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.3 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 46 500

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 56 500

External

clock

X2X1

X1 input high-

/low-level width

(tXPH, tXPL) 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.3 V 96 500

ns

Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the

above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. Since the CPU is started by the Ring-OSC after reset is released, check the oscillation

stabilization time of the X1 input clock using the oscillation stabilization time counter status

register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation

stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization

time with the resonator to be used.

Ring-OSC Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

On-chip Ring-OSC oscillator Oscillation frequency (fR) 120 240 480 kHz

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

436

Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Crystal

resonator

XT1

V

SS

XT2

C4 C3

Rd

Oscillation frequency

(fXT)Note

32 32.768 35 kHz

XT1 input frequency

(fXT)Note

32 38.5 kHz

External clock

XT1

XT2

XT1 input high-/low-level

width (tXTH, tXTL)

12 15

µ

s

Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figure to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power

consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the X1 oscillator. Particular

care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem clock is used.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation

themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 437

Recommended Oscillator Constants

Caution For the resonator selection of the

µ

PD780111(A), 780112(A), 780113(A), 780114(A), and

78F0114(A) and oscillator constants, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation

themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

(a)

µ

PD780111, 780112, 780113, 780114

X1 oscillation: Ceramic resonator (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Recommended

Circuit Constants

Oscillation Voltage

Range

Manufacturer Part Number SMD/

Lead

Frequency

(MHz)

C1

(pF)

C2

(pF)

MIN.

(V)

MAX.

(V)

CSTCC2M00G56-R0 SMD 2.00 Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR4M00G55-R0

CSTCR4M00G55U-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS4M00G56-B0

CSTLS4M00G56U-B0

Lead

4.00

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR4M19G55-R0

CSTCR4M19G55U-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS4M19G56-B0

CSTLS4M19G56U-B0

Lead

4.194

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR4M91G53-R0

CSTCR4M91G53U-R0

SMD Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTLS4M91G53-B0

CSTLS4M91G53U-B0

Lead

4.915

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCR5M00G53-R0

CSTCR5M00G53U-R0

SMD Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTLS5M00G53-B0

CSTLS5M00G53U-B0

Lead

5.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCR6M00G53-R0

CSTCR6M00G53U-R0

SMD Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTLS6M00G53-B0

CSTLS6M00G53U-B0

Lead

6.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCE8M00G52-R0 SMD Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

CSTLS8M00G53-B0

CSTLS8M00G53U-B0

Lead

8.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCE10M0G52-R0 SMD Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

CSTLS10M0G53-B0

Murata Mfg.

CSTLS10M0G53U-B0

Lead

10.0

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

2.7 5.5

Caution The oscillator constants shown above are reference values based on evaluation in a specific

environment by the resonator manufacturer. If it is necessary to optimize the oscillator

characteristics in the actual application, apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on

the implementation circuit. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency only indicate the

oscillator characteristic. Use the 78K0/KC1 so that the internal operation conditions are within

the specifications of the DC and AC characteristics.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

438

(b)

µ

PD78F0114

X1 oscillation: Ceramic resonator (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Recommended

Circuit Constants

Oscillation Voltage

Range

Manufacturer Part Number

SMD/

Lead

Frequency

(MHz)

C1

(pF)

C2

(pF)

MIN.

(V)

MAX.

(V)

CSTCC2M00G56-R0 SMD 2.00

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR4M00G55-R0

CSTCR4M00G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS4M00G56-B0

CSTLS4M00G56U-B0

Lead

4.00

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR4M19G55-R0

CSTCR4M19G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS4M19G56-B0

CSTLS4M19G56U-B0

Lead

4.194

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR4M91G55-R0

CSTCR4M91G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS4M91G56-B0

CSTLS4M91G56U-B0

Lead

4.915

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCR5M00G55-R0

CSTCR5M00G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS5M00G56-B0 Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTLS5M00G53U-B0

Lead

5.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCR6M00G55-R0

CSTCR6M00G55095-R0

SMD Internal

(39)

Internal

(39)

CSTLS6M00G56-B0

CSTLS6M00G56U-B0

Lead

6.00

Internal

(47)

Internal

(47)

CSTCE8M00G52-R0 SMD Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

CSTLS8M00G53-B0

CSTLS8M00G53U-B0

Lead

8.00

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

CSTCE10M0G52-R0 SMD Internal

(10)

Internal

(10)

CSTLS10M0G53-B0

Murata Mfg.

CSTLS10M0G53U-B0

Lead

10.0

Internal

(15)

Internal

(15)

2.7 5.5

Caution The oscillator constants shown above are reference values based on evaluation in a specific

environment by the resonator manufacturer. If it is necessary to optimize the oscillator

characteristics in the actual application, apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on

the implementation circuit. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency only indicate the

oscillator characteristic. Use the 78K0/KC1 so that the internal operation conditions are within

the specifications of the DC and AC characteristics.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 439

DC Characteristics (1/4)

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Per pin 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −5 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −25 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −25 mA

Output current, high IOH

Total of all pins 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V −10 mA

Per pin for P00, P01, P10 to

P17, P30 to P33, P70 to

P73, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10 mA

Per pin for P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 15 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 30 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P60 to P63, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 30 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of all pins 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 10 mA

VIH1 P12, P13, P15 0.7VDD VDD V

VIH2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, RESET

0.8VDD VDD V

VIH3 P20 to P27Note 0.7AVREF AVREF V

VIH4 P60, P61 0.7VDD VDD V

N-ch open drain 0.7VDD 12 V VIH5 P62, P63

On-chip pull-up resistor

(mask ROM version only)

0.7VDD VDD V

Input voltage, high

VIH6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VDD − 0.5 VDD V

VIL1 P12, P13, P15 0 0.3VDD V

VIL2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, RESET

0 0.2VDD V

VIL3 P20 to P27Note 0 0.3AVREF V

VIL4 P60, P61 0 0.3VDD V

VIL5 P62, P63 0 0.3VDD V

Input voltage, low

VIL6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 0 0.4 V

Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

440

DC Characteristics (2/4)

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Total of P00, P01, P10

to P16, P70 to P73

IOH = −25 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −5 mA

VDD − 1.0 V

Total of P17, P30 to

P33, P120, P130

IOH = −25 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −5 mA

VDD − 1.0 V

Output voltage, high VOH

IOH = −100

µ

A 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V VDD − 0.5 V

Total of P00, P01, P10

to P16, P70 to P73

IOL = 30 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 10 mA

1.3 V

Total of P17, P30 to

P33, P60 to P63, P120,

P130

IOL = 30 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 10 mA

1.3 V

VOL1

IOL = 400

µ

A 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.4 V

Output voltage, low

VOL2 P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 15 mA

2.0 V

VI = VDD P00, P01, P10 to P17,

P30 to P33, P60, P61,

P70 to P73, P120,

RESET

3

µ

A ILIH1

VI = AVREF P20 to P27 3

µ

A

ILIH2 VI = VDD X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 20

µ

A

Input leakage current,

high

ILIH3 VI = 12 V P62, P63 3

µ

A

ILIL1 P00, P01, P10 to P17,

P20 to P27, P30 to P33,

P60, P61, P70 to P73,

P120, RESET

−3

µ

A

ILIL2 X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 −20

µ

A

Input leakage current,

low

ILIL3

VI = 0 V

P62, P63 −3Note 2

µ

A

Output leakage current,

high

ILOH VO = VDD 3

µ

A

Output leakage current,

low

ILOL VO = 0 V −3

µ

A

Pull-up resistance

value

RL VI = 0 V 10 30 100 kΩ

VPP supply voltage

(

µ

PD78F0114,

78F0114(A) only)

VPP1 In normal operation mode 0 0.2VDD V

Notes 1. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse level of XT1 is input to XT2.

2. If there is no on-chip pull-up resistor for P62 and P63 (specified by a mask option) and if port 6 has been

set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level input leakage

current of up to −45

µ

A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum leakage current is −3

µ

A.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 441

DC Characteristics (3/4):

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A)

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

When A/D converter is stopped 12.2 21.1 mA

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4

13.2 23.1 mA

When A/D converter is stopped 4.1 6.8 mA

IDD1 X1 crystal

oscillation

operating

modeNote 2 fXP = 5 MHz

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4

4.7 8.0 mA

When peripheral functions are stopped 1.5 3.0 mA

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% When peripheral functions are operating 6.6 mA

When peripheral functions are stopped 0.34 0.68 mA

IDD2 X1 crystal

oscillation HALT

mode fXP = 5 MHz

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% When peripheral functions are operating 1.8 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 0.39 1.56 mA IDD3 Ring-OSC

operating

modeNote 5

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.31 1.24 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 92 184

µ

A IDD4 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

operating

modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 78 156

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 20 40

µ

A IDD5 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

HALT modeNotes 5, 7 VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 6 12

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.1 30

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 14 58

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 35.5

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 17.5 63.5

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.05 10

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 7.5 25

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 15.5

µ

A

Supply

currentNote 1

IDD6 STOP mode

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 11 30.5

µ

A

Notes 1. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included

(however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included).

2. I

DD1 includes peripheral operation current.

3. When PCC = 00H.

4. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin.

5. When X1 oscillator is stopped.

6. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 in the

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M2, 78F0114M1(A), and

78F0114M2(A).

7. When the

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M2, 78F0114M1(A), and 78F0114M2(A) (including LVIE = 0) are

selected and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped. Peripheral operation current is not included.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

442

DC Characteristics (4/4):

µ

PD780111, 780112, 780113, 780114, 780111(A), 780112(A), 780113(A), 780114(A)

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

When A/D converter is stopped 6.2 11.9 mA

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4

7.2 13.9 mA

When A/D converter is stopped 1.8 3.4 mA

IDD1 X1 crystal

oscillation

operating

modeNote 2 fXP = 5 MHz

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4

2.4 4.6 mA

When peripheral functions are stopped 1.4 2.8 mA

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% When peripheral functions are operating 5.7 mA

When peripheral functions are stopped 0.26 0.51 mA

IDD2 X1 crystal

oscillation HALT

mode fXP = 5 MHz

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% When peripheral functions are operating 1.4 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 210 840

µ

A IDD3 Ring-OSC

operating

modeNote 5

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 130 520

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 30 60

µ

A IDD4 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

operating

modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 13 26

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 20 40

µ

A IDD5 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

HALT modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 6 12

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.1 30

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 14 58

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 35.5

µ

A

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 17.5 63.5

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.05 10

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 7.5 25

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 15.5

µ

A

Supply

currentNote 1

IDD6 STOP mode

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 11 30.5

µ

A

Notes 1. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included

(however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included).

2. I

DD1 includes peripheral operation current.

3. When PCC = 00H.

4. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin.

5. When X1 oscillator is stopped.

6. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 with POC-OFF selected by a mask option.

7. When POC-OFF (including LVIE = 0) is selected by a mask option and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped.

The peripheral operation current is not included.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 443

AC Characteristics

(1) Basic operation (TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.2 16

µ

s

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.238 16

µ

s

X1 input

clock

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.3 V 0.4 16

µ

s

Main system

clock

operation

Ring-OSC clock 4.17 8.33 16.67

µ

s

Instruction cycle (minimum

instruction execution time)

TCY

Subsystem clock operation 114 122 125

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2/fsam + 0.1Note

µ

s

TI000, TI010 input high-level

width, low-level width

tTIH0,

tTIL0 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2/fsam + 0.2Note

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10 MHz TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 5 MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 50 ns

TI50, TI51 input high-level width,

low-level width

tTIH5,

tTIL5 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100 ns

Interrupt input high-level width,

low-level width

tINTH,

tINTL

1

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 50 ns Key return input low-level width tKR

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100 ns

RESET low-level width tRSL 10

µ

s

Note Selection of fsam = fXP, fXP/4, or fXP/256 is possible using bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler mode

register 00 (PRM00). Note that when selecting the TI000 valid edge as the count clock, fsam = fXP.

TCY vs. VDD (X1 Input Clock Operation)

5.0

1.0

2.0

0.4

0.2

0.1

Supply voltage V

DD

[V]

Cycle time T

CY

[ s]

0

10.0

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

5.5

2.7 3.3

Guaranteed

operation range

20.0

16.0

0.238

µ

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

444

(2) Serial interface (TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

(a) UART mode (UART6, dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 312.5 kbps

(b) UART mode (UART0, dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 312.5 kbps

(c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 200 ns

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 240 ns

SCK10 cycle time tKCY1

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.3 V 400 ns

SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH1,

tKL1

t

KCY1/2 − 10 ns

SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK1 30 ns

SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI1 30 ns

Delay time from SCK10↓ to

SO10 output

tKSO1 C = 100 pFNote 30 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines.

(d) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK10 cycle time tKCY2 400 ns

SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH2,

tKL2

t

KCY2/2 ns

SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK2 80 ns

SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI2 50 ns

Delay time from SCK10↓ to

SO10 output

tKSO2 C = 100 pFNote 120 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 445

AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1 Input)

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Test points

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Clock Timing

X1 input V

IH6

(MIN.)

V

IL6

(MAX.)

1/f

XP

t

XPL

t

XPH

1/f

XT

t

XTL

t

XTH

XT1 input V

IH6

(MIN.)

V

IL6

(MAX.)

TI Timing

TI000, TI010

t

TIL0

t

TIH0

TI50, TI51

1/f

TI5

t

TIL5

t

TIH5

Interrupt Request Input Timing

INTP0 to INTP5

t

INTL

t

INTH

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

446

RESET Input Timing

RESET

tRSL

Serial Transfer Timing

3-wire serial I/O mode:

SI10

SO10

t

KCYm

t

KLm

t

KHm

t

SIKm

t

KSIm

Input data

t

KSOm

Output data

SCK10

Remark m = 1, 2

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 447

A/D Converter Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 10 10 10 bit

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.2 ±0.4 %FSR Overall errorNotes 1, 2

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.3 ±0.6 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V 14 100

µ

s Conversion time tCONV

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V 17 100

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4 %FSR Zero-scale errorNotes 1, 2

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.6 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4 %FSR Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.6 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±2.5 LSB Integral non-linearity errorNote 1

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±4.5 LSB

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±1.5 LSB Differential non-linearity error Note 1

2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±2.0 LSB

Analog input voltage VIAN AVSS AVREF V

Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).

2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value.

POC Circuit Characteristics (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VPOC0 Mask option = 3.5 V Note 1 3.3 3.5 3.7 V Detection voltage

VPOC1 Mask option = 2.85 VNote 2 2.7 2.85 3.0 V

VDD: 0 V → 2.7 V 0.0015 ms Power supply rise time tPTH

VDD: 0 V → 3.3 V 0.002 ms

Response delay time 1Note 3 tPTHD When power supply rises, after reaching

detection voltage (MAX.)

3.0 ms

Response delay time 2Note 4 tPD When VDD falls 1.0 ms

Minimum pulse width tPW 0.2 ms

Notes 1. When flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M5, 78F0114M6, 78F0114M5(A), or 78F0114M6(A) is used

2. When flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M3, 78F0114M4, 78F0114M3(A), or 78F0114M4(A) is used

3. Time required from voltage detection to reset release.

4. Time required from voltage detection to internal reset output.

POC Circuit Timing

Supply voltage

(V

DD

)

Time

Detection voltage (MIN.)

Detection voltage (TYP.)

Detection voltage (MAX.)

t

PTH

t

PTHD

t

PW

t

PD

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

448

LVI Circuit Characteristics (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VLVI0 4.1 4.3 4.5 V

VLVI1 3.9 4.1 4.3 V

VLVI2 3.7 3.9 4.1 V

VLVI3 3.5 3.7 3.9 V

VLVI4 3.3 3.5 3.7 V

VLVI5 3.15 3.3 3.45 V

Detection voltage

VLVI6 2.95 3.1 3.25 V

Response timeNote 1 tLD 0.2 2.0 ms

Minimum pulse width tLW 0.2 ms

Reference voltage stabilization wait

timeNote 2

tLWAIT0 0.5 2.0 ms

Operation stabilization wait time Note 3 tLWAIT1 0.1 0.2 ms

Notes 1. Time required from voltage detection to interrupt output or internal reset output.

2. Time required from setting LVIE to 1 to reference voltage stabilization when POC-OFF is selected by the

POC mask option (when flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M2, 78F0114M1(A), or

78F0114M2(A) is used).

3. Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization.

Remarks 1. V

LVI0 > VLVI1 > VLVI2 > VLVI3 > VLVI4 > VLVI5 > VLVI6

2. VPOCn < VLVm (n = 0, 1, m = 0 to 6)

LVI Circuit Timing

Supply voltage

(V

DD

)

Time

Detection voltage (MIN.)

Detection voltage (TYP.)

Detection voltage (MAX.)

t

LWAIT0

t

LW

t

LD

t

LWAIT1

LVIE ← 1 LVION ← 1

Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = −40 to +85°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Data retention supply voltage VDDDR When POC-OFF is selected by mask

optionNote

1.6 5.5 V

Release signal set time tSREL 0

µ

s

Note When flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M1, 78F0114M2, 78F0114M1(A), or 78F0114M2(A) is used

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 449

Flash Memory Programming Characteristics:

µ

PD78F0114, 78F0114(A)

(TA = +10 to +60°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

(1) Write erase characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VPP supply voltage VPP2 During flash memory programming 9.7 10.0 10.3 V

VDD supply current IDD When VPP = VPP2, fXP = 10 MHz, VDD = 5.5 V 37 mA

VPP supply current IPP VPP = VPP2 100 mA

Step erase timeNote 1 Ter 0.199 0.2 0.201 s

Overall erase timeNote 2 Tera When step erase time = 0.2 s 20 s/chip

Writeback timeNote 3 Twb 49.4 50 50.6 ms

Number of writebacks per

writeback commandNote 4

Cwb When writeback time = 50 ms 60 Times

Number of erases/writebacks Cerwb 16 Times

Step write timeNote 5 Twr 48 50 52

µ

s

Overall write time per wordNote 6 Twrw When step write time = 50

µ

s (1 word = 1

byte)

48 520

µ

s

Number of rewrites per chipNote 7 Cerwr 1 erase + 1 write after erase = 1 rewrite 20 Times/

area

Notes 1. The recommended setting value of the step erase time is 0.2 s.

2. The prewrite time before erasure and the erase verify time (writeback time) are not included.

3. The recommended setting value of the writeback time is 50 ms.

4. Writeback is executed once by the issuance of the writeback command. Therefore, the number of retries

must be the maximum value minus the number of commands issued.

5. The recommended setting value of the step write time is 50

µ

s.

6. The actual write time per word is 100

µ

s longer. The internal verify time during or after a write is not

included.

7. When a product is first written after shipment, “erase → write” and “write only” are both taken as one

rewrite.

Example: P: Write, E: Erase

Shipped product → P → E → P → E → P: 3 rewrites

Shipped product → E → P → E → P → E → P: 3 rewrites

Remark The range of the operating clock during flash memory programming is the same as the range during normal

operation.

CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

450

(2) Serial write operation characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Set time from VDD↑ to VPP↑ tDP 10

µ

s

Release time from VPP↑ to RESET↑ tPR 10

µ

s

VPP pulse input start time from RESET↑ tRP 2 ms

VPP pulse high-/low-level width tPW 8

µ

s

VPP pulse input end time from RESET↑ tRPE 14 ms

VPP pulse low-level input voltage VPPL 0.8VDD 1.2VDD V

VPP pulse high-level input voltage VPPH 9.7 10.0 10.3 V

Flash Write Mode Setting Timing

V

DD

V

DD

0 V

V

DD

RESET (input)

0 V

V

PPH

V

PPL

V

PP

V

PP

t

RP

t

PR

t

DP

t

PW

t

PW

t

RPE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 451

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

Target products:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1), 78F0114(A1)

Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit

VDD −0.3 to +6.5 V

EVDD −0.3 to +6.5 V

VSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

EVSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

AVREF −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

AVSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

Supply voltage

VPP

µ

PD78F0114(A1) only, Note 2 −0.3 to +10.5 V

VI1 P00, P01, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30

to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P73, P120, X1,

X2, XT1, XT2, RESET

−0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

N-ch open drain −0.3 to +13 V VI2 P62, P63

On-chip pull-up resistor −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

Input voltage

VI3 VPP in flash programming mode

(

µ

PD78F0114(A1) only)

−0.3 to +10.5 V

Output voltage VO −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1 V

Analog input voltage VAN AVSS − 0.3 to AVREF + 0.3Note 1

and −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note 1

V

Per pin −8 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P16, P70 to

P73

−24 mA

Output current, high IOH

Total of

all pins

−48 mA P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130 −24 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, P130

16 mA

Per pin

P60 to P63 24 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P16,

P70 to P73

28 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of

all pins

56 mA P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63,

P120, P130

28 mA

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1),

780113(A1), 780114(A1)

−40 to +110

In normal operation

mode

−40 to +105

Operating ambient

temperature

TA

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

In flash memory

programming mode

−10 to +85

°C

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1),

780113(A1), 780114(A1)

−65 to +150

Storage temperature Tstg

µ

PD78F0114(A1) −40 to +125

°C

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

452

Notes 1. Must be 6.5 V or lower.

2. Make sure that the following conditions of the VPP voltage application timing are satisfied when the flash

memory is written.

• When supply voltage rises

V

PP must exceed VDD 10

µ

s or more after VDD has reached the lower-limit value (3.3 V) of the operating

voltage range (see a in the figure below).

• When supply voltage drops

V

DD must be lowered 10

µ

s or more after VPP falls below the lower-limit value (3.3 V) of the operating

voltage range of VDD (see b in the figure below).

3.3 V

VDD

0 V

0 V

VPP

3.3 V

a b

Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any

parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the

verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that

ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 453

X1 Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +110°CNote 1, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 10

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 2.0 8.38

Ceramic

resonator

C1

X2X1

V

SS

C2

Oscillation frequency (fXP)Note 2

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 10

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 2.0 8.38

Crystal

resonator

C1

X2X1

V

SS

C2

Oscillation frequency (fXP)Note 2

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 10

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 2.0 8.38

X1 input frequency (fXP)Note 2

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 46 500

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 56 500

External

clock

X2X1

X1 input high-/low-level width

(tXPH, tXPL)

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 96 500

ns

Notes 1. TA = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

2. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the

above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. Since the CPU is started by the Ring-OSC after reset is released, check the oscillation

stabilization time of the X1 input clock using the oscillation stabilization time counter status

register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation

stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization

time with the resonator to be used.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation

themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

454

Ring-OSC Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +110°CNote, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

On-chip Ring-OSC oscillator Oscillation frequency (fR) 120 240 490 kHz

Note TA = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +110°CNote 1, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Crystal

resonator

XT1

V

SS

XT2

C4 C3

Rd

Oscillation frequency

(fXT)Note 2

32 32.768 35 kHz

XT1 input frequency

(fXT)Note 2

32 38.5 kHz

External clock

XT1

XT2

XT1 input high-/low-level

width (tXTH, tXTL)

12 15

µ

s

Notes 1. TA = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

2. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figure to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power

consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the X1 oscillator. Particular

care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem clock is used.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation

themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 455

DC Characteristics (1/6):

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

(TA = −40 to +105°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Per pin 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −4 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −20 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −20 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −25 mA

Output current, high IOH

Total of all pins

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V −8 mA

Per pin for P00, P01, P10 to

P17, P30 to P33, P70 to

P73, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 8 mA

Per pin for P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 12 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 24 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P60 to P63, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 24 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 30 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of all pins

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 8 mA

VIH1 P12, P13, P15 0.7VDD VDD V

VIH2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, RESET

0.8VDD VDD V

VIH3 P20 to P27Note 0.7AVREF AVREF V

VIH4 P60, P61 0.7VDD VDD V

VIH5 P62, P63 N-ch open drain 0.7VDD 12 V

Input voltage, high

VIH6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VDD − 0.5 VDD V

VIL1 P12, P13, P15 0 0.3VDD V

VIL2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, RESET

0 0.2VDD V

VIL3 P20 to P27Note 0 0.3AVREF V

VIL4 P60, P61 0 0.3VDD V

VIL5 P62, P63 0 0.3VDD V

Input voltage, low

VIL6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 0 0.4 V

Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

456

DC Characteristics (2/6):

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

(TA = −40 to +105°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

IOH = −20 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −4 mA VDD − 1.0 V

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P120, P130

IOH = −20 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −4 mA VDD − 1.0 V

Output voltage, high VOH

IOH = −100

µ

A 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V VDD − 0.5 V

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

IOL = 24 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 8 mA 1.3 V

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P60 to P63, P120, P130

IOL = 24 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 8 mA 1.3 V

VOL1

IOL = 400

µ

A 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.4 V

Output voltage, low

VOL2 P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 12 mA 2.0 V

VI = VDD P00, P01, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,

P60, P61, P70 to P73, P120,

RESET

10

µ

A ILIH1

VI = AVREF P20 to P27 10

µ

A

ILIH2 VI = VDD X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 20

µ

A

Input leakage current, high

ILIH3 VI = 12 V P62, P63 20

µ

A

ILIL1 P00, P01, P10 to P17, P20 to P27,

P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P73,

P120, RESET

−10

µ

A

ILIL2 X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 −20

µ

A

Input leakage current, low

ILIL3

VI = 0 V

P62, P63 −10Note 2

µ

A

Output leakage current, high ILOH VO = VDD 10

µ

A

Output leakage current, low ILOL VO = 0 V −10

µ

A

Pull-up resistance value RL VI = 0 V 10 30 120 kΩ

VPP supply voltage VPP1 In normal operation mode 0 0.2VDD V

Notes 1. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse l evel of XT1 is input to XT2.

2. If port 6 has been set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level

input leakage current of up to −55

µ

A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum

leakage current is −10

µ

A.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 457

DC Characteristics (3/6):

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

(TA = −40 to +105°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

When A/D converter is stopped 12.2 22.3 mA IDD1 X1 crystal

oscillation

operating

modeNote 2

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4

13.2 24.3 mA

When peripheral functions are

stopped

1.5 4.2 mA

IDD2 X1 crystal

oscillation HALT

mode

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

When peripheral functions are

operating

7.8 mA

IDD3 Ring-OSC

operating

modeNote 5

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 0.39 2.76 mA

IDD4 Ring-OSC HALT

modeNote 5

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 0.19 1.96 mA

IDD5 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

operating

modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 92 1400

µ

A

IDD6 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

HALT modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 20 1200

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.1 1200

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 14 1300

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 1200

µ

A

Supply

currentNote 1

IDD7 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 17.5 1300

µ

A

Notes 1. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included

(however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included).

2. IDD1 includes peripheral operation current.

3. When PCC = 00H.

4. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin.

5. When X1 oscillator is stopped.

6. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 in the

µ

PD78F0114M1(A1) and 78F0114M2(A1).

7. When the

µ

PD78F0114M1(A1) and 78F0114M2(A1) (including LVIE = 0) are selected and Ring-OSC

oscillation is stopped. Peripheral operation current is not included.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

458

DC Characteristics (4/6):

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), and 780114(A1)

(TA = −40 to +110°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Per pin 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −4 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −20 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −20 mA

Output current, high IOH

Total of all pins 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V −8 mA

Per pin for P00, P01, P10 to

P17, P30 to P33, P70 to

P73, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 8 mA

Per pin for P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 12 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 24 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P60 to P63, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 24 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of all pins 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 8 mA

VIH1 P12, P13, P15 0.7VDD VDD V

VIH2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, RESET

0.8VDD VDD V

VIH3 P20 to P27Note 0.7AVREF AVREF V

VIH4 P60, P61 0.7VDD VDD V

N-ch open drain 0.7VDD 12 V VIH5 P62, P63

On-chip pull-up resistor 0.7VDD VDD V

Input voltage, high

VIH6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VDD − 0.5 VDD V

VIL1 P12, P13, P15 0 0.3VDD V

VIL2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, RESET

0 0.2VDD V

VIL3 P20 to P27Note 0 0.3AVREF V

VIL4 P60, P61 0 0.3VDD V

VIL5 P62, P63 0 0.3VDD V

Input voltage, low

VIL6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 0 0.4 V

Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 459

DC Characteristics (5/6):

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), and 780114(A1)

(TA = −40 to +110°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

IOH = −20 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −4 mA

VDD − 1.0 V

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P120, P130

IOH = −20 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −4 mA

VDD − 1.0 V

Output voltage, high VOH

IOH = −100

µ

A 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V VDD − 0.5 V

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

IOL = 24 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 8 mA

1.3 V

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P60 to P63, P120, P130

IOL = 24 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 8 mA

1.3 V

VOL1

IOL = 400

µ

A 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.4 V

Output voltage, low

VOL2 P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 12 mA

2.0 V

VI = VDD P00, P01, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,

P60, P61, P70 to P73, P120,

RESET

10

µ

A ILIH1

VI = AVREF P20 to P27 10

µ

A

ILIH2 VI = VDD X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 20

µ

A

Input leakage current, high

ILIH3 VI = 12 V P62, P63 20

µ

A

ILIL1 P00, P01, P10 to P17, P20 to P27,

P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P73,

P120, RESET

−10

µ

A

ILIL2 X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 −20

µ

A

Input leakage current, low

ILIL3

VI = 0 V

P62, P63 −10Note 2

µ

A

Output leakage current, high ILOH VO = VDD 10

µ

A

Output leakage current, low ILOL VO = 0 V −10

µ

A

Pull-up resistance value RL VI = 0 V 10 30 120 kΩ

Notes 1. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse level of XT1 is input to XT2.

2. If there is no on-chip pull-up resistor for P62 and P63 (specified by a mask option) and if port 6 has been

set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level input leakage

current of up to −55

µ

A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum leakage current is

−10

µ

A.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

460

DC Characteristics (6/6):

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), and 780114(A1)

(TA = −40 to +110°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

When A/D converter is stopped 6.2 12.8 mA IDD1 X1 crystal

oscillation

operating

modeNote 2

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4

7.2 14.8 mA

When peripheral functions are

stopped

1.4 3.7 mA

IDD2 X1 crystal

oscillation

HALT mode

fXP = 10 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

When peripheral functions are

operating

6.6 mA

IDD3 Ring-OSC

operating

modeNote 5

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 210 1740

µ

A

IDD4 Ring-OSC

HALT modeNote 5

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 60 1140

µ

A

IDD5 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

operating

modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 30 1000

µ

A

IDD6 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

HALT modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 20 900

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.1 900

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 14 1000

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 900

µ

A

Supply

currentNote 1

IDD7 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 17.5 1000

µ

A

Notes 1. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included

(however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included).

2. IDD1 includes peripheral operation current.

3. When PCC = 00H.

4. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin.

5. When X1 oscillator is stopped.

6. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 with POC-OFF selected by a mask option.

7. When POC-OFF (including LVIE = 0) is selected by a mask option and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped.

Peripheral operation current is not included.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 461

AC Characteristics

(1) Basic operation

(TA = −40 to +110°CNote 1, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.2 16

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0.238 16

µ

s

X1 input

clock

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.4 16

µ

s

Main

system

clock

operation

Ring-OSC clock 4.09 8.33 16.67

µ

s

Instruction cycle (minimum

instruction execution time)

TCY

Subsystem clock operation 114 122 125

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2/fsam +

0.1Note 2

µ

s

TI000, TI010 input high-level

width, low-level width

tTIH0,

tTIL0

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2/fsam +

0.2Note 2

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10 MHz TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 5 MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 50 ns

TI50, TI51 input high-level width,

low-level width

tTIH5,

tTIL5 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100 ns

Interrupt input high-level width,

low-level width

tINTH,

tINTL

1

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 50 ns Key return input low-level width tKR

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100 ns

RESET low-level width tRSL 10

µ

s

Notes 1. T

A = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

2. Selection of fsam = fXP, fXP/4, or fXP/256 is possible using bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler

mode register 00 (PRM00). Note that when selecting the TI000 valid edge as the count clock, fsam = fXP.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

462

TCY vs. VDD (X1 Input Clock Operation)

5.0

1.0

2.0

0.4

0.2

0.1

Supply voltage V

DD

[V]

Cycle time T

CY

[ s]

0

10.0

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

5.5

3.3 4.5

Guaranteed

operation range

20.0

16.0

0.238

µ

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 463

(2) Serial interface

(TA = −40 to +110°CNote, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Note T

A = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

(a) UART mode (UART6, dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 312.5 kbps

(b) UART mode (UART0, dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 312.5 kbps

(c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 200 ns

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 240 ns

SCK10 cycle time tKCY1

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 400 ns

SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH1,

tKL1

t

KCY1/2 − 10 ns

SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK1 30 ns

SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI1 30 ns

Delay time from SCK10↓ to

SO10 output

tKSO1 C = 100 pFNote 30 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines.

(d) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK10 cycle time tKCY2 400 ns

SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH2,

tKL2

t

KCY2/2 ns

SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK2 80 ns

SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI2 50 ns

Delay time from SCK10↓ to

SO10 output

tKSO2 C = 100 pFNote 120 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

464

AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1 Input)

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Test points 0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Clock Timing

X1 input V

IH6

(MIN.)

V

IL6

(MAX.)

1/f

XP

t

XPL

t

XPH

1/f

XT

t

XTL

t

XTH

XT1 input V

IH6

(MIN.)

V

IL6

(MAX.)

TI Timing

TI000, TI010

t

TIL0

t

TIH0

TI50, TI51

1/f

TI5

t

TIL5

t

TIH5

Interrupt Request Input Timing

INTP0 to INTP5

t

INTL

t

INTH

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 465

RESET Input Timing

RESET

t

RSL

Serial Transfer Timing

3-wire serial I/O mode:

SI10

SO10

t

KCYm

t

KLm

t

KHm

t

SIKm

t

KSIm

Input data

t

KSOm

Output data

SCK10

Remark m = 1, 2

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

466

A/D Converter Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +110°CNote 1, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 10 10 10 bit

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.2 ±0.6 %FSR Overall errorNotes 2, 3

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.3 ±0.8 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V 14 60

µ

s Conversion time tCONV

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V 19 60

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.6 %FSR Zero-scale errorNotes 2, 3

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.8 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.6 %FSR Full-scale errorNotes 2, 3

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.8 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±4.5 LSB Integral non-linearity errorNote 2

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±6.5 LSB

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±2.0 LSB Differential non-linearity errorNote 2

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±2.5 LSB

Analog input voltage VAIN AVSS AVREF V

Notes 1. TA = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

2. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).

3. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value.

POC Circuit Characteristics (TA = −40 to +110°CNote 1)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Detection voltage VPOC0 Mask option = 3.5 VNote 2 3.3 3.5 3.72 V

Power supply rise time tPTH VDD: 0 V → 3.3 V 0.002 ms

Response delay time 1Note 3 tPTHD When power supply rises, after reaching

detection voltage (MAX.)

3.0 ms

Response delay time 2Note 4 tPD When VDD falls 1.0 ms

Minimum pulse width tPW 0.2 ms

Notes 1. TA = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

2. When flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M5(A1) or 78F0114M6(A1) is used

3. Time required from voltage detection to reset release.

4. Time required from voltage detection to internal reset output.

POC Circuit Timing

Supply voltage

(VDD)

Time

Detection voltage (MIN.)

Detection voltage (TYP.)

Detection voltage (MAX.)

tPTH tPTHD

tPW

tPD

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 467

LVI Circuit Characteristics (TA = −40 to +110°CNote 1)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VLVI0 4.1 4.3 4.52 V

VLVI1 3.9 4.1 4.32 V

VLVI2 3.7 3.9 4.12 V

VLVI3 3.5 3.7 3.92 V

Detection voltage

VLVI4 3.3 3.5 3.72 V

Response timeNote 2 tLD 0.2 2.0 ms

Minimum pulse width tLW 0.2 ms

Reference voltage stabilization wait

timeNote 3

tLWAIT0 0.5 2.0 ms

Operation stabilization wait timeNote 4 tLWAIT1 0.1 0.2 ms

Notes 1. TA = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

2. Time required from voltage detection to interrupt output or internal reset output.

3. Time required from setting LVIE to 1 to reference voltage stabilization when POC-OFF is selected by

mask option (when flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M1(A1) or 78F0114M2(A1) is used).

4. Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization.

Remarks 1. V

LVI0 > VLVI1 > VLVI2 > VLVI3 > VLVI4

2. VPOCn < VLVIm (n = 0 and 1, m = 0 to 4)

LVI Circuit Timing

Supply voltage

(VDD)

Time

Detection voltage (MIN.)

Detection voltage (TYP.)

Detection voltage (MAX.)

tLWAIT0

tLW

tLD

tLWAIT1

LVIE ← 1 LVION ← 1

Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = −40 to +110°CNote 1)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Data retention supply voltage VDDDR When POC-OFF is selected by mask

optionNote 2

2.0 5.5 V

Release signal set time tSREL 0

µ

s

Notes 1. TA = −40 to +110°C:

µ

PD780111(A1), 780112(A1), 780113(A1), 780114(A1)

TA = −40 to +105°C:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

2. When flash memory version

µ

PD78F0114M1(A1) or 78F0114M2(A1) is used

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

468

Flash Memory Programming Characteristics:

µ

PD78F0114(A1)

(TA = +10 to +60°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

(1) Write erase characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VPP supply voltage VPP2 During flash memory programming 9.7 10.0 10.3 V

VDD supply current IDD When VPP = VPP2, fXP = 10 MHz, VDD = 5.5 V 37 mA

VPP supply current IPP VPP = VPP2 100 mA

Step erase timeNote 1 Ter 0.199 0.2 0.201 s

Overall erase timeNote 2 Tera When step erase time = 0.2 s 20 s/chip

Writeback timeNote 3 Twb 49.4 50 50.6 ms

Number of writebacks per

writeback commandNote 4

Cwb When writeback time = 50 ms 60 Times

Number of erases/writebacks Cerwb 16 Times

Step write timeNote 5 Twr 48 50 52

µ

s

Overall write time per wordNote 6 Twrw When step write time = 50

µ

s (1 word = 1

byte)

48 520

µ

s

Number of rewrites per chipNote 7 Cerwr 1 erase + 1 write after erase = 1 rewrite 20 Times/

area

Notes 1. The recommended setting value of the step erase time is 0.2 s.

2. The prewrite time before erasure and the erase verify time (writeback time) are not included.

3. The recommended setting value of the writeback time is 50 ms.

4. Writeback is executed once by the issuance of the writeback command. Therefore, the number of retries

must be the maximum value minus the number of commands issued.

5. The recommended setting value of the step write time is 50

µ

s.

6. The actual write time per word is 100

µ

s longer. The internal verify time during or after a write is not

included.

7. When a product is first written after shipment, “erase → write” and “write only” are both taken as one

rewrite.

Example: P: Write, E: Erase

Shipped product → P → E → P → E → P: 3 rewrites

Shipped product → E → P → E → P → E → P: 3 rewrites

Remark The range of the operating clock during flash memory programming is the same as the range during normal

operation.

CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 469

(2) Serial write operation characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Set time from VDD↑ to VPP↑ tDP 10

µ

s

Release time from VPP↑ to RESET↑ tPR 10

µ

s

VPP pulse input start time from

RESET↑

tRP 2 ms

VPP pulse high-/low-level width tPW 8

µ

s

VPP pulse input end time from

RESET↑

tRPE 14 ms

VPP pulse low-level input voltage VPPL 0.8VDD 1.2VDD V

VPP pulse high-level input voltage VPPH 9.7 10.0 10.3 V

Flash Write Mode Setting Timing

V

DD

V

DD

0 V

V

DD

RESET (input)

0 V

V

PPH

V

PPL

V

PP

V

PP

t

RP

t

PR

t

DP

t

PW

t

PW

t

RPE

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

470

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

Target products:

µ

PD780111(A2), 780112(A2), 780113(A2), 780114(A2)

Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit

VDD −0.3 to +6.5 V

EVDD −0.3 to +6.5 V

VSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

EVSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

AVREF −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note V

Supply voltage

AVSS −0.3 to +0.3 V

VI1 P00, P01, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30

to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P73, P120, X1,

X2, XT1, XT2, RESET

−0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note V

N-ch open drain −0.3 to +13 V

Input voltage

VI2 P62, P63

On-chip pull-up resistor −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note V

Output voltage VO −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note V

Analog input voltage VAN AVSS − 0.3 to AVREF + 0.3Note

and −0.3 to VDD + 0.3Note

V

Per pin −7 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P16, P70 to

P73

−21 mA

Output current, high IOH

Total of

all pins

−42 mA P17, P30 to P33, P120, P130 −21 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, P130

14 mA

Per pin

P60 to P63 21 mA

P00, P01, P10 to P16, P70 to

P73

24.5 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of

all pins

49 mA P17, P30 to P33, P60 to P63,

P120, P130

24.5 mA

Operating ambient

temperature

TA In normal operation mode −40 to +125 °C

Storage temperature Tstg −65 to +150 °C

Note Must be 6.5 V or lower.

Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any

parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the

verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that

ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 471

X1 Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V 2.0 8.38

Ceramic

resonator

C1

X2X1

V

SS

C2

Oscillation frequency

(fXP)Note 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V 2.0 8.38

Crystal

resonator

C1

X2X1

V

SS

C2

Oscillation frequency

(fXP) Note 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V 2.0 8.38

X1 input frequency

(fXP) Note 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2.0 5.0

MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V 56 500

External clock

X2X1

X1 input high-/low-

level width (tXPH, tXPL) 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 96 500

ns

Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the

above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. Since the CPU is started by the Ring-OSC after reset is released, check the oscillation

stabilization time of the X1 input clock using the oscillation stabilization time counter status

register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation

stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization

time with the resonator to be used.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation

themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

472

Ring-OSC Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

On-chip Ring-OSC oscillator Oscillation frequency (fR) 120 240 495 kHz

Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Crystal

resonator

XT1

VSS XT2

C4 C3

Rd

Oscillation frequency

(fXT)Note

32 32.768 35 kHz

XT1 input frequency

(fXT)Note

32 38.5 kHz

External clock

XT1

XT2

XT1 input high-/low-level

width (tXTH, tXTL)

12 15

µ

s

Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figure to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power

consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the X1 oscillator. Particular

care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem clock is used.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, users are required to either evaluate the oscillation

themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 473

DC Characteristics (1/3)

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Per pin 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −3.5 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −17.5 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V −17.5 mA

Output current, high IOH

Total of all pins 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V −7 mA

Per pin for P00, P01, P10 to

P17, P30 to P33, P70 to

P73, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 7 mA

Per pin for P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10.5 mA

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 21 mA

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P60 to P63, P120, P130

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 21 mA

Output current, low IOL

Total of all pins 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 7 mA

VIH1 P12, P13, P15 0.7VDD VDD V

VIH2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, RESET

0.8VDD VDD V

VIH3 P20 to P27Note 0.7AVREF AVREF V

VIH4 P60, P61 0.75VDD VDD V

N-ch open drain 0.7VDD 12 V VIH5 P62, P63

On-chip pull-up resistor 0.7VDD VDD V

Input voltage, high

VIH6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VDD − 0.5 VDD V

VIL1 P12, P13, P15 0 0.3VDD V

VIL2 P00, P01, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to

P33, P70 to P73, P120, RESET

0 0.2VDD V

VIL3 P20 to P27Note 0 0.3AVREF V

VIL4 P60, P61 0 0.25VDD V

VIL5 P62, P63 0 0.3VDD V

Input voltage, low

VIL6 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 0 0.4 V

Note When used as digital input ports, set AVREF = VDD.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

474

DC Characteristics (2/3)

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

IOH = −17.5 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −3.5 mA

VDD − 1.0 V

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P120, P130

IOH = −17.5 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOH = −3.5 mA

VDD − 1.0 V

Output voltage, high VOH

IOH = −100

µ

A 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V VDD − 0.5 V

Total of P00, P01, P10 to

P16, P70 to P73

IOL = 21 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 7 mA

1.3 V

Total of P17, P30 to P33,

P60 to P63, P120, P130

IOL = 21 mA

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 7 mA

1.3 V

VOL1

IOL = 400

µ

A 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.4 V

Output voltage, low

VOL2 P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V,

IOL = 10.5 mA

2.0 V

VI = VDD P00, P01, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,

P60, P61, P70 to P73, P120,

RESET

10

µ

A ILIH1

VI = AVREF P20 to P27 10

µ

A

ILIH2 VI = VDD X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 20

µ

A

Input leakage current, high

ILIH3 VI = 12 V P62, P63 40

µ

A

ILIL1 P00, P01, P10 to P17, P20 to P27,

P30 to P33, P60, P61, P70 to P73,

P120, RESET

−10

µ

A

ILIL2 X1, X2Note 1, XT1, XT2Note 1 −20

µ

A

Input leakage current, low

ILIL3

VI = 0 V

P62, P63 −10Note 2

µ

A

Output leakage current, high ILOH VO = VDD 10

µ

A

Output leakage current, low ILOL VO = 0 V −10

µ

A

Pull-up resistance value RL VI = 0 V 10 30 120 kΩ

Notes 1. When the inverse level of X1 is input to X2 and the inverse level of XT1 is input to XT2.

2. If there is no on-chip pull-up resistor for P62 and P63 (specified by a mask option) and if port 6 has been

set to input mode when a read instruction is executed to read from port 6, a low-level input leakage

current of up to −55

µ

A flows during only one cycle. At all other times, the maximum leakage current is

−10

µ

A.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 475

DC Characteristics (3/3)

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

When A/D converter is stopped 5.4 11.7 mA IDD1 X1 crystal

oscillation

operating

modeNote 2

fXP = 8.38 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 3 When A/D converter is

operatingNote 4

6.4 13.7 mA

When peripheral functions are

stopped

1.3 4.0 mA

IDD2 X1 crystal

oscillation HALT

mode

fXP = 8.38 MHz

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

When peripheral functions are

operating

6.5 mA

IDD3 Ring-OSC

operating

modeNote 5

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 210 2240

µ

A

IDD4 Ring-OSC HALT

modeNote 5

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 190 2160

µ

A

IDD5 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

operating

modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 30 1500

µ

A

IDD6 32.768 kHz

crystal oscillation

HALT modeNotes 5, 7

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 20 1400

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: OFF 0.1 1400

µ

A

POC: OFF, RING: ON 14 1500

µ

A

POC: ONNote 6, RING: OFF 3.5 1400

µ

A

Supply

currentNote 1

IDD7 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

POC: ONNote 6, RING: ON 17.5 1500

µ

A

Notes 1. Total current flowing through the internal power supply (VDD). Peripheral operation current is included

(however, the current that flows through the pull-up resistors of ports is not included).

2. IDD1 includes peripheral operation current.

3. When PCC = 00H.

4. Including the current that flows through the AVREF pin.

5. When X1 oscillator is stopped.

6. Including when LVIE (bit 4 of LVIM) = 1 with POC-OFF selected by a mask option.

7. When POC-OFF (including LVIE = 0) is selected by a mask option and Ring-OSC oscillation is stopped.

Peripheral operation current is not included.

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

476

AC Characteristics

(1) Basic operation

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.238 16

µ

s

X1 input

clock 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.4 16

µ

s

Main

system

clock

operation Ring-OSC clock 4.04 8.33 16.67

µ

s

Instruction cycle (minimum

instruction execution time)

TCY

Subsystem clock operation 114 122 125

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2/fsam +

0.1Note

µ

s

TI000, TI010 input high-level

width, low-level width

tTIH0,

tTIL0

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2/fsam +

0.2Note

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 8.38 MHz TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 5 MHz

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 59.6 ns

TI50, TI51 input high-level width,

low-level width

tTIH5,

tTIL5 3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100 ns

Interrupt input high-level width,

low-level width

tINTH,

tINTL

1

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 59.6 ns Key return input low-level width tKR

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100 ns

RESET low-level width tRSL 10

µ

s

Note Selection of fsam = fXP, fXP/4, or fXP/256 is possible using bits 0 and 1 (PRM000, PRM001) of prescaler mode

register 00 (PRM00). Note that when selecting the TI000 valid edge as the count clock, fsam = fXP.

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 477

TCY vs. VDD (X1 Input Clock Operation)

5.0

1.0

2.0

0.4

0.2

0.1

Supply voltage V

DD

[V]

Cycle time T

CY

[ s]

0

10.0

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

5.5

3.3

Guaranteed

operation range

20.0

16.0

0.238

µ

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

478

(2) Serial interface

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

(a) UART mode (UART6, dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 261.9 kbps

(b) UART mode (UART0, dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 261.9 kbps

(c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 240 ns SCK10 cycle time tKCY1

3.3 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 400 ns

SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH1,

tKL1

t

KCY1/2 − 10 ns

SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK1 30 ns

SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI1 30 ns

Delay time from SCK10↓ to

SO10 output

tKSO1 C = 100 pFNote 30 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines.

(d) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK10 cycle time tKCY2 400 ns

SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH2,

tKL2

t

KCY2/2 ns

SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK2 80 ns

SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI2 50 ns

Delay time from SCK10↓ to

SO10 output

tKSO2 C = 100 pFNote 120 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line.

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 479

AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1 Input)

0.8V

DD

0.2V

DD

Test points 0.8V

DD

0.2V

DD

Clock Timing

X1 input V

IH6

(MIN.)

V

IL6

(MAX.)

1/f

XP

t

XPL

t

XPH

1/f

XT

t

XTL

t

XTH

XT1 input V

IH6

(MIN.)

V

IL6

(MAX.)

TI Timing

TI000, TI010

t

TIL0

t

TIH0

TI50, TI51

1/f

TI5

t

TIL5

t

TIH5

Interrupt Request Input Timing

INTP0 to INTP5

t

INTL

t

INTH

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

480

RESET Input Timing

RESET

tRSL

Serial Transfer Timing

3-wire serial I/O mode:

SI10

SO10

t

KCYm

t

KLm

t

KHm

t

SIKm

t

KSIm

Input data

t

KSOm

Output data

SCK10

Remark m = 1, 2

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 481

A/D Converter Characteristics

(TA = −40 to +125°C, 3.3 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 3.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 10 10 10 bit

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.2 ±0.7 %FSR Overall errorNotes 1, 2

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.3 ±0.9 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V 16 48

µ

s Conversion time tCONV

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V 19 48

µ

s

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.7 %FSR Zero-scale errorNotes 1, 2

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.9 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.7 %FSR Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.9 %FSR

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±5.5 LSB Integral non-linearity errorNote 1

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±7.5 LSB

4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±2.5 LSB Differential non-linearity error Note 1

3.3 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±3.0 LSB

Analog input voltage VAIN AVSS AVREF V

Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).

2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value.

POC Circuit Characteristics (TA = −40 to +125°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Detection voltage VPOC0 Mask option = 3.5 V 3.3 3.5 3.76 V

Power supply rise time tPTH VDD: 0 V → 3.3 V 0.002 ms

Response delay time 1Note 1 tPTHD When power supply rises, after reaching

detection voltage (MAX.)

3.0 ms

Response delay time 2Note 2 tPD When VDD falls 1.0 ms

Minimum pulse width tPW 0.2 ms

Notes 1. Time required from voltage detection to reset release.

2. Time required from voltage detection to internal reset output.

POC Circuit Timing

Supply voltage

(V

DD

)

Time

Detection voltage (MIN.)

Detection voltage (TYP.)

Detection voltage (MAX.)

t

PTH

t

PTHD

t

PW

t

PD

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

482

LVI Circuit Characteristics (TA = −40 to +125°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VLVI0 4.1 4.3 4.56 V

VLVI1 3.9 4.1 4.36 V

VLVI2 3.7 3.9 4.16 V

VLVI3 3.5 3.7 3.96 V

Detection voltage

VLVI4 3.3 3.5 3.76 V

Response timeNote 1 tLD 0.2 2.0 ms

Minimum pulse width tLW 0.2 ms

Reference voltage stabilization wait

timeNote 2

tLWAIT0 0.5 2.0 ms

Operation stabilization wait timeNote 3 tLWAIT1 0.1 0.2 ms

Notes 1. Time required from voltage detection to interrupt output or internal reset output.

2. Time required from setting LVIE to 1 to reference voltage stabilization when POC-OFF is selected by the

mask option.

3. Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization.

Remarks 1. V

LVI0 > VLVI1 > VLVI2 > VLVI3 > VLVI4

2. V

POCn < VLVIm (n = 0 and 1, m = 0 to 4)

LVI Circuit Timing

Supply voltage

(VDD)

Time

Detection voltage (MIN.)

Detection voltage (TYP.)

Detection voltage (MAX.)

tLWAIT0

tLW

tLD

tLWAIT1

LVIE ← 1 LVION ← 1

Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = −40 to +125°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Data retention supply voltage VDDDR When POC-OFF is selected by mask

option

2.0 5.5 V

Release signal set time tSREL 0

µ

s

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 483

CHAPTER 29 PACKAGE DRAWING

33

34 22

44

112

11

23

44 PIN PLASTIC LQFP (10x10)

ITEM MILLIMETERS

N

Q 0.1±0.05

0.10

S44GB-80-8ES-2

J

I

H

N

A 12.0±0.2

B 10.0±0.2

C 10.0±0.2

D 12.0±0.2

F

G

H

1.0

0.37

1.0

I

J

K

0.8 (T.P.)

1.0±0.2

0.20

L 0.5

M 0.17

S

T

U

1.6 MAX.

0.25 (T.P.)

0.6±0.15

R3°

+0.08

−0.07

+0.03

−0.06

+4°

−3°

detail of lead end

F

G

K

M

M

P 1.4±0.05

NOTE

SS

A

B

CD

U

R

S

P

Q

L

T

Each lead centerline is located within 0.20 mm of

its true position (T.P.) at maximum material condition.

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

484

CHAPTER 30 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS

These products should be soldered and mounted under the following recommended conditions.

For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended below, please contact an NEC Electronics

sales representative.

For technical information, see the following website.

Semiconductor Device Mount Manual (http://www.necel.com/pkg/en/mount/index.html)

Table 30-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (1/2)

µ

PD780111GB-×××-8ES, 780112GB-×××-8ES, 780113GB-×××-8ES, 780114GB-×××-8ES,

µ

PD780111GB(A)-×××-8ES, 780112GB(A)-×××-8ES, 780113GB(A)-×××-8ES, 780114GB(A)-×××-8ES,

µ

PD780111GB(A1)-×××-8ES, 780112GB(A1)-×××-8ES, 780113GB(A1)-×××-8ES, 780114GB(A1)-×××-8ES,

µ

PD780111GB(A2)-×××-8ES, 780112GB(A2)-×××-8ES, 780113GB(A2)-×××-8ES, 780114GB(A2)-×××-8ES

Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended

Condition Symbol

Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235°C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210°C or higher),

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10

hours)

IR35-107-2

VPS Package peak temperature: 215°C, Time: 40 seconds max. (at 200°C or higher),

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10

hours)

VP15-107-2

Wave soldering Solder bath temperature: 260°C max., Time: 10 seconds max., Count: Once,

Preheating temperature: 120°C max. (package surface temperature), Exposure

limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

WS60-107-1

Partial heating Pin temperature: 300°C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) −

Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25°C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period.

Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating).

CHAPTER 30 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 485

Table 30-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (2/2)

µ

PD78F0114M1GB-8ES, 78F0114M2GB-8ES, 78F0114M3GB-8ES, 78F0114M4GB-8ES, 78F0114M5GB-8ES,

µ

PD78F0114M6GB-8ES, 78F0114M1GB(A)-8ES, 78F0114M2GB(A)-8ES, 78F0114M3GB(A)-8ES,

µ

PD78F0114M4GB(A)-8ES, 78F0114M5GB(A)-8ES, 78F0114M6GB(A)-8ES, 78F0114M1GB(A1)-8ES,

µ

PD78F0114M2GB(A1)-8ES, 78F0114M5GB(A1)-8ES, 78F0114M6GB(A1)-8ES

Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended

Condition Symbol

Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235°C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210°C or higher),

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 3 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10

hours)

IR35-103-2

VPS Package peak temperature: 215°C, Time: 40 seconds max. (at 200°C or higher),

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 3 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10

hours)

VP15-103-2

Wave soldering Solder bath temperature: 260°C max., Time: 10 seconds max., Count: Once,

Preheating temperature: 120°C max. (package surface temperature), Exposure

limit: 3 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

WS60-103-1

Partial heating Pin temperature: 300°C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) −

Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25°C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period.

Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating).

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

486

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT

31.1 Cautions for Wait

This product has two internal system buses.

One is a CPU bus and the other is a peripheral bus that interfaces with the low-speed peripheral hardware.

Because the clock of the CPU bus and the clock of the peripheral bus are asynchronous, unexpected illegal data

may be passed if an access to the CPU conflicts with an access to the peripheral hardware.

When accessing the peripheral hardware that may cause a conflict, therefore, the CPU repeatedly executes

processing, until the correct data is passed.

As a result, the CPU does not start the next instruction processing but waits. If this happens, the number of

execution clocks of an instruction increases by the number of wait clocks (for the number of wait clocks, refer to Table

31-1). This must be noted when real-time processing is performed.

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 487

31.2 Peripheral Hardware That Generates Wait

Table 30-1 lists the registers that issue a wait when accessed by the CPU, and the number of CPU wait clocks.

Table 31-1. Registers That Generate Wait and Number of CPU Wait Clocks

Peripheral Hardware Register Access Number of Wait Clocks

Watchdog timer WDTM Write 3 clocks (fixed)

Serial interface UART0 ASIS0 Read 1 clock (fixed)

Serial interface UART6 ASIS6 Read 1 clock (fixed)

ADM Write

ADS Write

PFM Write

PFT Write

2 to 5 clocksNote

(when ADM.5 flag = “1”)

2 to 9 clocksNote

(when ADM.5 flag = “0”)

ADCR Read 1 to 5 clocks

(when ADM.5 flag = “1”)

1 to 9 clocks

(when ADM.5 flag = “0”)

A/D converter

<Calculating maximum number of wait clocks>

{(1/fMACRO) × 2/(1/fCPU)} + 1

*The result after the decimal point is truncated if it is less than tCPUL after it has been multiplied by

(1/fCPU), and is rounded up if it exceeds tCPUL.

fMACRO: Macro operating frequency

(When bit 5 (FR2) of ADM = “1”: fX/2, when bit 5 (FR2) of ADM = “0”: fX/22)

fCPU: CPU clock frequency

tCPUL: Low-level width of CPU clock

Note No wait cycle is generated for the CPU if the number of wait clocks calculated by the above expression is 1.

Caution When the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped (MCC = 1), do

not access the registers listed above using an access method in which a wait request is issued.

Remark The clock is the CPU clock (fCPU).

CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

488

31.3 Example of Wait Occurrence

<1> Watchdog timer

<On execution of MOV WDTM, A>

Number of execution clocks: 8

(5 clocks when data is written to a register that does not issue a wait (MOV sfr, A).)

<On execution of MOV WDTM, #byte>

Number of execution clocks: 10

(7 clocks when data is written to a register that does not issue a wait (MOV sfr, #byte).)

<2> Serial interface UART6

<On execution of MOV A, ASIS6>

Number of execution clocks: 6

(5 clocks when data is read from a register that does not issue a wait (MOV A, sfr).)

<3> A/D converter

Table 31-2. Number of Wait Clocks and Number of Execution Clocks on Occurrence of Wait (A/D Converter)

<On execution of MOV ADM, A; MOV ADS, A; or MOV A, ADCR>

• When fX = 10 MHz, tCPUL = 50 ns

Value of Bit 5 (FR2)

of ADM Register fCPU Number of Wait Clocks Number of Execution Clocks

fX 9 clocks 14 clocks

fX/2 5 clocks 10 clocks

fX/22 3 clocks 8 clocks

fX/23 2 clocks 7 clocks

0

fX/24 0 clocks (1 clockNote) 5 clocks (6 clocksNote)

fX 5 clocks 10 clocks

fX/2 3 clocks 8 clocks

fX/22 2 clocks 7 clocks

fX/23 0 clocks (1 clockNote) 5 clocks (6 clocksNote)

1

fX/24 0 clocks (1 clockNote) 5 clocks (6 clocksNote)

Note On execution of MOV A, ADCR

Remark The clock is the CPU clock (fCPU).

f

X: X1 input clock oscillation frequency

t

CPUL: Low-level width of CPU clock

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 489

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

The following development tools are available for the development of systems that employ the 78K0/KC1.

Figure A-1 shows the development tool configuration.

• Support for PC98-NX series

Unless otherwise specified, products supported by IBM PC/ATTM compatibles are compatible with PC98-NX

series computers. When using PC98-NX series computers, refer to the explanation for IBM PC/AT compatibles.

• WindowsTM

Unless otherwise specified, “Windows” means the following OSs.

• Windows 3.1

• Windows 95

• Windows 98

• Windows NTTM Ver. 4.0

• Windows 2000

• Windows XP

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

490

Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (1/3)

(1) When using the in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A

Language processing software

• Assembler package

• C compiler package

• Device file

• C library source fileNote 1

Debugging software

• Integrated debugger

• System simulator

Host machine (PC or EWS)

Interface adapter,

PC card interface, etc.

In-circuit emulatorNote 3

Emulation board

Emulation probe

Conversion socket or

conversion adapter

Target system

Flash programmer

Flash memory

write adapter

Flash memory

• Software package

• Project manager

(Windows only)Note 2

Flash memory

write environment

Control software

Performance board

Power supply unit

Software package

Notes 1. The C library source file is not included in the software package.

2. The project manager PM plus is included in the assembler package.

PM plus is only used for Windows.

3. Products other than in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-A are all sold separately.

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 491

Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (2/3)

(2) When using the in-circuit emulator IE-78K0K1-ET

Language processing software

• Assembler package

• C compiler package

• Device file

• C library source file

Note 1

Debugging software

• Integrated debugger

• System simulator

Host machine (PC or EWS)

Interface adapter

In-circuit emulator

Note 3

Emulation probe

Conversion socket or

conversion adapter

Target system

Flash programmer

Flash memory

write adapter

Flash memory

• Software package

• Project manager

(Windows only)

Note 2

Software package

Flash memory

write environment

Control software

Power supply unit

Notes 1. The C library source file is not included in the software package.

2. The project manager PM plus is included in the assembler package.

PM plus is only used for Windows.

3. In-circuit emulator IE-78K0K1-ET is supplied with integrated debugger ID78K0-NS, a device file, power

supply unit, and PCI bus interface adapter IE-70000-PCI-IF-A. Any other products are sold separately.

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

492

Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (3/3)

(3) When using the in-circuit emulator QB-78K0KX1H

Language processing software

• Assembler package

• C compiler package

• Device file

• C library source file

Note 1

Debugging software

• Integrated debugger

• System simulator

Host machine (PC or EWS)

USB interface cable

In-circuit emulator

Note 3

Emulation probe

Conversion socket or

conversion adapter

Target system

Flash programmer

Flash memory

write adapter

Flash memory

• Software package

• Project manager

(Windows only)

Note 2

Software package

Flash memory

write environment

Control software

Power supply unit

Notes 1. The C library source file is not included in the software package.

2. The project manager PM plus is included in the assembler package.

PM plus is only used for Windows.

3. In-circuit emulator QB-78K0KX1H is supplied with integrated debugger ID78K0-QB, flash memory

programmer PG-FPL (unsupported in the 78K0/Kx1 products), power supply unit, and USB interface

cable. Any other products are sold separately.

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 493

A.1 Software Package

Development tools (software) common to the 78K/0 Series are combined in this package.

SP78K0

78K/0 Series software package Part number:

µ

S××××SP78K0

Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used.

µ

S××××SP78K0

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AB17 Windows (Japanese version)

BB17

PC-9800 series,

IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)

CD-ROM

A.2 Language Processing Software

This assembler converts programs written in mnemonics into object codes executable

with a microcontroller.

This assembler is also provided with functions capable of automatically creating symbol

tables and branch instruction optimization.

This assembler should be used in combination with a device file (DF780114) (sold

separately).

<Precaution when using RA78K0 in PC environment>

This assembler package is a DOS-based application. It can also be used in Windows,

however, by using the Project Manager (included in assembler package) on Windows.

RA78K0

Assembler package

Part number:

µ

S××××RA78K0

This compiler converts programs written in C language into object codes executable with

a microcontroller.

This compiler should be used in combination with an assembler package and device file

(both sold separately).

<Precaution when using CC78K0 in PC environment>

This C compiler package is a DOS-based application. It can also be used in Windows,

however, by using the Project Manager (included in assembler package) on Windows.

CC78K0

C compiler package

Part number:

µ

S××××CC78K0

This file contains information peculiar to the device.

This device file should be used in combination with a tool (RA78K0, CC78K0, SM78K0,

ID78K0-NS, ID78K0, and ID78K0-QB) (all sold separately).

The corresponding OS and host machine differ depending on the tool to be used.

DF780114Note 1

Device file

Part number:

µ

S××××DF780114

This is a source file of the functions that configure the object library included in the C

compiler package.

This file is required to match the object library included in the C compiler package to the

user’s specifications.

Since this is a source file, its working environment does not depend on any particular

operating system.

CC78K0-LNote 2

C library source file

Part number:

µ

S××××CC78K0-L

Notes 1. The DF780114 can be used in common with the RA78K0, CC78K0, SM78K0, ID78K0-NS, ID78K0,

and ID78K0-QB.

2. The CC78K0-L is not included in the software package (SP78K0).

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

494

Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used.

µ

S××××RA78K0

µ

S××××CC78K0

µ

S××××CC78K0-L

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AB17 Windows (Japanese version)

BB17

PC-9800 series,

IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)

3P17 HP9000 series 700TM HP-UXTM (Rel. 10.10)

3K17 SPARCstationTM SunOSTM (Rel. 4.1.4)

SolarisTM (Rel. 2.5.1)

CD-ROM

µ

S××××DF780114

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AB13 Windows (Japanese version)

BB13

PC-9800 series,

IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)

3.5-inch 2HD FD

A.3 Control Software

PM plus

Project manager

This is control software designed to enable efficient user program development in the

Windows environment. All operations used in development of a user program, such as

starting the editor, building, and starting the debugger, can be performed from PM plus.

<Caution>

PM plus is included in the assembler package (RA78K0).

It can only be used in Windows.

A.4 Flash Memory Writing Tools

Flashpro III

(part number: FL-PR3, PG-FP3)

Flashpro IV

(part number: FL-PR4, PG-FP4)

Flash programmer

Flash programmer dedicated to microcontrollers with on-chip flash memory.

FA-44GB-8ES

Flash memory writing adapter

Flash memory writing adapter used connected to the Flashpro III/Flashpro IV.

• FA-44GB-8ES: For 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ES type)

Remark FL-PR3, FL-PR4, and FA-44GB-8ES are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

TEL: +81-45-475-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 495

A.5 Debugging Tools (Hardware)

A.5.1 When using in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-A

Remark Operations where the oscillation frequencies exceed 10 MHz are only supported in IE-78K0-NS control

code N or later, IE-78K0-NS-A control code G or later, and IE-780148-NS-E M1 control code E or later.

IE-78K0-NS

In-circuit emulator The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing

application systems using a 78K/0 Series product. It corresponds to the integrated

debugger (ID78K0-NS). This emulator should be used in combination with a power

supply unit, emulation probe, and the interface adapter required to connect this emulator

to the host machine.

IE-78K0-NS-PA

Performance board This board is connected to the IE-78K0-NS to expand its functions. Adding this board

adds a coverage function and enhances debugging function s such as tracer and timer

functions.

IE-78K0-NS-A

In-circuit emulator Product that combines the IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-PA

IE-70000-MC-PS-B

Power supply unit This adapter is used for supplying power from a 100 V to 240 V AC outlet.

IE-70000-98-IF-C

Interface adapter This adapter is required when using a PC-9800 series computer (except notebook type)

as the host machine (C bus compatible).

IE-70000-CD-IF-A

PC card interface This is PC card and interface cable required when using a notebook-type computer as

the host machine (PCMCIA socket compatible).

IE-70000-PC-IF-C

Interface adapter This adapter is required when using an IBM PC/AT compatible computer as the host

machine (ISA bus compatible).

IE-70000-PCI-IF-A

Interface adapter This adapter is required when using a computer with a PCI bus as the host machine.

IE-780148-NS-EM1

Emulation board This board emulates the operations of the peripheral hardware peculiar to a device. It

should be used in combination with an in-circuit emulator.

NP-44GB-TQ

Emulation probe This probe is used to connect the in-circuit emulator to a target system and is designed

for use with 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ES type).

TGB-044SAP

Conversion adapter This conversion adapter connects the NP-44GB-TQ to a target system board designed

for a 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ES type).

Remarks 1. NP-44GB-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

TEL: +81-45-4 75-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

2. TGB-044SAP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

For further information, contact: Daimaru Kogyo, Ltd.

Tokyo Electronics Departme nt (TEL +81-3-3820-7112)

Osaka Electronics Department (TEL +81-6-6244-6672)

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

496

A.5.2 When using in-circuit emulator IE-78K0K1-ET

Remark Operations where the oscillation frequencies exceed 10 MHz are only supported in IE-78K0K1-ET

control code C or later.

IE-78K0K1-ETNote

In-circuit emulator The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing

application systems using a 78K0/Kx1 product. It corresponds to the integrated

debugger (ID78K0-NS). This emulator should be used in combination with a power

supply unit, emulation probe, and the interface adapter required to connect this emulator

to the host machine.

IE-70000-98-IF-C

Interface adapter This adapter is required when using a PC-9800 series computer (except notebook type)

as the host machine (C bus compatible).

IE-70000-CD-IF-A

PC card interface This is PC card and interface cable required when using a notebook-type computer as

the host machine (PCMCIA socket compatible).

IE-70000-PC-IF-C

Interface adapter This adapter is required when using an IBM PC/AT compatible computer as the host

machine (ISA bus compatible).

IE-70000-PCI-IF-A

Interface adapter This adapter is required when using a computer with a PCI bus as the host machine.

This is supplied with IE-78K0K1-ET.

NP-44GB-TQ

Emulation probe This probe is used to connect the in-circuit emulator to a target system and is designed

for use with 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ES type).

TGB-044SAP

Conversion adapter This conversion adapter connects the NP-44GB-TQ to a target system board designed

for a 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-8ES type).

Note IE-78K0K1-ET is supplied with a power supply unit and PCI bus interface adapter IE-70000-PCI-IF-A. It is

also supplied with integrated debugger ID78K0-NS and a device file as control software.

Remarks 1. NP-44GB-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

TEL: +81-45-4 75-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

2. TGB-044SAP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

For further information, contact: Daimaru Kogyo, Ltd.

Tokyo Electronics Departme nt (TEL +81-3-3820-7112)

Osaka Electronics Department (TEL +81-6-6244-6672)

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 497

A.5.3 When using in-circuit emulator QB-78K0KX1H

QB-78K0KX1HNote 1

In-circuit emulator The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing

application systems using the 78K0/Kx1 and 78K0/Kx1+. It corresponds to the integrated

debugger (ID78K0-QB). This emulator should be used in combination with a power

supply unit and emulation probe. USB is used to connect this emulator to the host

machine.

QB-144-CA-01Note 2

Check pin adapter This adapter is used in waveform monitoring using the oscilloscope, etc.

QB-80-EP-01T

Emulation probe This is a flexible type probe used to connect the in-circuit emulator to the target system.

QB-44GB-EA-01T

Exchange adapter This adapter is used to perform the pin conversion from the in-circuit emulator to the

target system.

QB-44GB-YS-01T

Space adapter This adapter is used to adjust the height between the target system and in-circuit

emulator if required.

QB-44GB-YQ-01T

YQ connector This connector is used to connect the target connector to the exchange adapter.

QB-44GB-HQ-01T

Mount adapter This adapter is used to mount the target device onto the target device with socket.

QB-44GB-NQ-01T

Target connector This connector is used to mount the QB-78K0KX1H onto the target system.

Notes 1. QB-78K0KX1H is supplied with a power supply unit, USB interface cable, and flash memory

programmer PG-FPL (unsupported in the 78K0/Kx1 products). It is also supplied with integrated

debugger ID78K0-QB as control software.

2. Under development

Remark The package contents differ dependi ng on the part number.

• QB-78K0KX1H-ZZZ: In-circuit emulator only

• QB-78K0KX1H-T44GB: In-circuit emula tor and accessories (emu lation probe, excha nge adapter, YQ

connector, target connector).

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

498

A.6 Debugging Tools (Software)

This is a system simulator for the 78K/0 Series. The SM78K0 is Windows-based

software.

It is used to perform debugging at the C source level or assembler level while simulating

the operation of the target system on a host machine.

Use of the SM78K0 allows the execution of application logical testing and performance

testing on an independent basis from hardware development, thereby providing higher

development efficiency and software quality.

The SM78K0 should be used in combination with the device file (DF780114) (sold

separately).

SM78K0

System simulator

Part number:

µ

S××××SM78K0

This debugger supports the in-circuit emulators for the 78K/0 Series. The ID78K0-NS

and ID78K0-QB are Windows-based software.

It has improved C-compatible debugging functions and can display the results of tracing

with the source program using an integrating window function that associates the source

program, disassemble display, and memory display with the trace result. It should be

used in combination with the device file (sold separately).

ID78K0-NS

(supporting in-circuit emulators

IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A, and

IE-78K0K1-ET),

ID78K0-QB (supporting in-circuit

emulator QB-78K0KX1H)

Integrated debugger Part number:

µ

S××××ID78K0-NS,

µ

S××××ID78K0-QB

Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used.

µ

S××××SM78K0

µ

S××××ID78K0-NS

µ

S××××ID78K0-QB

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AB17 Windows (Japanese version)

BB17

PC-9800 series,

IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)

CD-ROM

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 499

APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN

B.1 When Using IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A, or IE-78K0K1-ET

The following shows a diagram of the connection conditions between the emulation probe and conversion adapter.

Design your system making allowances for conditions such as the shape of parts mounted on the target system, as

shown below.

Figure B-1. Distance Between IE System and Conversion Adapter

170 mm

In-circuit emulator

IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A,

or IE-78K0K1-ET

Emulation board

IE-780148-NS-EM1

Conversion adapter

TGB-044SAP

CN1

Emulation probe

NP-44GB-TQ

78011X PROBE Board

Target system

Remark The NP-44GB-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

The TGB-044SAP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

500

Figure B-2. Connection Conditions of Target System

Emulation probe

NP-44GB-TQ

Emulation board

IE-780148-NS-EM1

23 mm

10 mm

40 mm 34 mm

Target system

11 mm

Conversion adapter

TGB-044SAP

Remark The NP-44GB-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

The TGB-044SAP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 501

B.2 When Using QB-78K0KX1H

The following shows areas on the target system where component mounting is prohibited and areas where there

are component mounting height restrictions.

Figure B-3. Restricted Area on Target System

15

9.85

13.375

10

15

9.85

17.375

10

: Exchange adapter area: Components up to 17.45 mm in height can be mountedNote

: Emulation probe tip area: Components up to 24.45 mm in height can be mounted Note

Note Height can be regulated by using space adapters (each adds 2.4 mm)

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

502

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

C.1 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Names)

[A]

A/D conversion result register (ADCR)........................................................................................................................230

A/D converter mode register (ADM) ............................................................................................................................227

Analog input channel specification register (ADS) ......................................................................................................229

Asynchronous serial interface control register 6 (ASICL6)..........................................................................................279

Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0) .............................................................................249

Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) .............................................................................273

Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0 (ASIS0) .....................................................................251

Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6 (ASIS6) .....................................................................275

Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) ........................................................................276

[B]

Baud rate generator control register 0 (BRGC0) .........................................................................................................252

Baud rate generator control register 6 (BRGC6) .........................................................................................................278

[C]

Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)............................................................................................................134

Clock monitor mode register (CLM) ............................................................................................................................358

Clock selection register 6 (CKSR6).............................................................................................................................277

[E]

8-bit timer compare register 50 (CR50).......................................................................................................................166

8-bit timer compare register 51 (CR51).......................................................................................................................166

8-bit timer counter 50 (TM50)......................................................................................................................................165

8-bit timer counter 51 (TM51)......................................................................................................................................165

8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)........................................................................................................188

8-bit timer H compare register 00 (CMP00).................................................................................................................184

8-bit timer H compare register 01 (CMP01).................................................................................................................184

8-bit timer H compare register 10 (CMP10).................................................................................................................184

8-bit timer H compare register 11 (CMP11).................................................................................................................184

8-bit timer H mode register 0 (TMHMD0) ....................................................................................................................185

8-bit timer H mode register 1 (TMHMD1) ....................................................................................................................185

8-bit timer mode control register 50 (TMC50)..............................................................................................................169

8-bit timer mode control register 51 (TMC51)..............................................................................................................169

External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN)..................................................................................................326

External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP)...................................................................................................326

[I]

Input switch control register (ISC) ...............................................................................................................................280

Internal memory size switching register (IMS).............................................................................................................382

Interrupt mask flag register 0H (MK0H).......................................................................................................................324

Interrupt mask flag register 0L (MK0L)........................................................................................................................324

Interrupt mask flag register 1L (MK1L)........................................................................................................................324

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 503

Interrupt request flag register 0H (IF0H) .....................................................................................................................323

Interrupt request flag register 0L (IF0L) ......................................................................................................................323

Interrupt request flag register 1L (IF1L) ......................................................................................................................323

[K]

Key return mode register (KRM) .................................................................................................................................336

[L]

Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS)..................................................................................................371

Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) ........................................................................................................................370

[M]

Main clock mode register (MCM) ................................................................................................................................105

Main OSC control register (MOC) ...............................................................................................................................106

[O]

Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) ..............................................................................107, 339

Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)............................................................................................108, 340

[P]

Port mode register 0 (PM0)...................................................................................................................................95, 137

Port mode register 1 (PM1)................................................................................................... 95, 171, 189, 253, 280, 308

Port mode register 12 (PM12).......................................................................................................................................95

Port mode register 3 (PM3)...................................................................................................................................95, 171

Port mode register 6 (PM6)...........................................................................................................................................95

Port mode register 7 (PM7)...........................................................................................................................................95

Port register 0 (P0)........................................................................................................................................................97

Port register 1 (P1)........................................................................................................................................................97

Port register 12 (P12)....................................................................................................................................................97

Port register 13 (P13)....................................................................................................................................................97

Port register 2 (P2)........................................................................................................................................................97

Port register 3 (P3)........................................................................................................................................................97

Port register 6 (P6)........................................................................................................................................................97

Port register 7 (P7)........................................................................................................................................................97

Power-fail comparison mode register (PFM)...............................................................................................................231

Power-fail comparison threshold register (PFT)..........................................................................................................231

Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)..........................................................................................................................136

Priority specification flag register 0H (PR0H)..............................................................................................................325

Priority specification flag register 0L (PR0L) ...............................................................................................................325

Priority specification flag register 1L (PR1L) ...............................................................................................................325

Processor clock control register (PCC) .......................................................................................................................102

Pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0) .........................................................................................................................98

Pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1) .........................................................................................................................98

Pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12) .....................................................................................................................98

Pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3) .........................................................................................................................98

Pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7) .........................................................................................................................98

[R]

Receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) ................................................................................................................................248

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

504

Receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) ................................................................................................................................272

Reset control flag register (RESF) ..............................................................................................................................356

Ring-OSC mode register (RCM) .................................................................................................................................104

[S]

Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10).................................................................................................................307

Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) ..............................................................................................................................305

Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) ...............................................................................................................306

16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) ....................................................................................................129

16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) ....................................................................................................131

16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00)....................................................................................................................................129

16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)............................................................................................................132

16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)...........................................................................................................134

[T]

Timer clock selection register 50 (TCL50)...................................................................................................................167

Timer clock selection register 51 (TCL51)...................................................................................................................167

Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) .........................................................................................................................305

Transmit buffer register 6 (TXB6)................................................................................................................................272

Transmit shift register 0 (TXS0) ..................................................................................................................................248

[W]

Watch timer operation mode register (WTM) ..............................................................................................................208

Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) ....................................................................................................................218

Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM)......................................................................................................................216

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 505

C.2 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Symbol)

[A]

ADCR: A/D conversion result register .................................................................................................................230

ADM: A/D converter mode register ...................................................................................................................227

ADS: Analog input channel specification register .............................................................................................229

ASICL6: Asynchronous serial interface control register 6......................................................................................279

ASIF6: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6..................................................................276

ASIM0: Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0........................................................................249

ASIM6: Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6........................................................................273

ASIS0: Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0...............................................................251

ASIS6: Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6...............................................................275

[B]

BRGC0: Baud rate generator control register 0.....................................................................................................252

BRGC6: Baud rate generator control register 6.....................................................................................................278

[C]

CKSR6: Clock selection register 6 ........................................................................................................................277

CLM: Clock monitor mode register ...................................................................................................................358

CMP00: 8-bit timer H compare register 00............................................................................................................184

CMP01: 8-bit timer H compare register 01............................................................................................................184

CMP10: 8-bit timer H compare register 10............................................................................................................184

CMP11: 8-bit timer H compare register 11............................................................................................................184

CR000: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000...............................................................................................129

CR010: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010...............................................................................................131

CR50: 8-bit timer compare register 50 ...............................................................................................................166

CR51: 8-bit timer compare register 51 ...............................................................................................................166

CRC00: Capture/compare control register 00.......................................................................................................134

CSIC10: Serial clock selection register 10.............................................................................................................307

CSIM10: Serial operation mode register 10 ...........................................................................................................306

[E]

EGN: External interrupt falling edge enable register .........................................................................................326

EGP: External interrupt rising edge enable register..........................................................................................326

[I]

IF0H: Interrupt request flag register 0H.............................................................................................................323

IF0L: Interrupt request flag register 0L .............................................................................................................323

IF1L: Interrupt request flag register 1L .............................................................................................................323

IMS: Internal memory size switching register ..................................................................................................382

ISC: Input switch control register.....................................................................................................................280

[K]

KRM: Key return mode register.........................................................................................................................336

[L]

LVIM: Low-voltage detection register ................................................................................................................370

LVIS: Low-voltage detection level selection register .........................................................................................371

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

506

[M]

MCM: Main clock mode register.........................................................................................................................105

MK0H: Interrupt mask flag register 0H ................................................................................................................324

MK0L: Interrupt mask flag register 0L.................................................................................................................324

MK1L: Interrupt mask flag register 1L.................................................................................................................324

MOC: Main OSC control register .......................................................................................................................106

[O]

OSTC: Oscillation stabilization time counter status register ........................................................................107, 339

OSTS: Oscillation stabilization time select register .....................................................................................108, 340

[P]

P0: Port register 0 ........................................................................................................................................... 97

P1: Port register 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 97

P12: Port register 12......................................................................................................................................... 97

P13: Port register 13......................................................................................................................................... 97

P2: Port register 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 97

P3: Port register 3 ........................................................................................................................................... 97

P6: Port register 6 ........................................................................................................................................... 97

P7: Port register 7 ........................................................................................................................................... 97

PCC: Processor clock control register...............................................................................................................102

PFM: Power-fail comparison mode register ......................................................................................................231

PFT: Power-fail comparison threshold register ................................................................................................231

PM0: Port mode register 0 ..........................................................................................................................95, 137

PM1: Port mode register 1..........................................................................................95, 171, 189, 253, 280, 308

PM12: Port mode register 12............................................................................................................................... 95

PM3: Port mode register 3 ..........................................................................................................................95, 171

PM6: Port mode register 6 ................................................................................................................................. 95

PM7: Port mode register 7 ................................................................................................................................. 95

PR0H: Priority specification flag register 0H .......................................................................................................325

PR0L: Priority specification flag register 0L ........................................................................................................325

PR1L: Priority specification flag register 1L ........................................................................................................325

PRM00: Prescaler mode register 00 .....................................................................................................................136

PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0............................................................................................................... 98

PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1............................................................................................................... 98

PU12: Pull-up resistor option register 12............................................................................................................. 98

PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3............................................................................................................... 98

PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7............................................................................................................... 98

[R]

RCM: Ring-OSC mode register .........................................................................................................................104

RESF: Reset control flag register........................................................................................................................356

RXB0: Receive buffer register 0 .........................................................................................................................248

RXB6: Receive buffer register 6 .........................................................................................................................272

[S]

SIO10: Serial I/O shift register 10........................................................................................................................305

SOTB10: Transmit buffer register 10 ......................................................................................................................305

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 507

[T]

TCL50: Timer clock selection register 50.............................................................................................................167

TCL51: Timer clock selection register 51.............................................................................................................167

TM00: 16-bit timer counter 00 ............................................................................................................................129

TM50: 8-bit timer counter 50 ..............................................................................................................................165

TM51: 8-bit timer counter 51 ..............................................................................................................................165

TMC00: 16-bit timer mode control register 00.......................................................................................................132

TMC50: 8-bit timer mode control register 50.........................................................................................................169

TMC51: 8-bit timer mode control register 51.........................................................................................................169

TMCYC1: 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1......................................................................................................188

TMHMD0: 8-bit timer H mode register 0...................................................................................................................185

TMHMD1: 8-bit timer H mode register 1...................................................................................................................185

TOC00: 16-bit timer output control register 00......................................................................................................134

TXB6: Transmit buffer register 6 ........................................................................................................................272

TXS0: Transmit shift register 0...........................................................................................................................248

[W]

WDTE: Watchdog timer enable register ..............................................................................................................218

WDTM: Watchdog timer mode register ................................................................................................................216

WTM: Watch timer operation mode register ......................................................................................................208

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

508

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

This appendix lists cautions described in this document.

“Classification (hard/soft)” in table is as follows.

Hard: Cautions for microcontroller internal/external hardware

Soft: Cautions for software such as register settings or programs

(1/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Peripheral

function: Count

clock, base

clock

The specifications of the peripheral functions (timer, serial interface, A/D

converter, etc.) are conventional when operating at VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V.

Therefore, to select the count clock or base clock of a peripheral function, satisfy

the following conditions.

• VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 10 MHz

• VDD = 3.3 to 4.0 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 8.38 MHz

• VDD = 2.7 to 3.3 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 5 MHz

• VDD = 2.5 to 2.7 V: Count clock or base clock ≤ 2.5 MHz

p. 17

Operating

frequency

rating

Flash memory Rewrite the flash memory in the ranges of fX = 2 to 10 MHz and VDD = 2.7 to 5.5

V as ever. p. 17

Connect the IC (Internally Connected) pin directly to VSS. p. 22

Connect the AVSS pin to VSS. p. 22

CHAPTER 1

Hard

Pin

connection −

Connect the VPP pin to EVSS or VSS during normal operation. p. 22

IMS: Memory

size switching

register

Regardless of the internal memory capacity, the initial value of the internal

memory size switching register (IMS) of all 78K0/KC1 products is fixed (IMS =

CFH). Therefore, set the value corresponding to each product as indicated

below.

•

µ

PD780111: 42H

•

µ

PD780112: 44H

•

µ

PD780113: C6H

•

µ

PD780114: C8H

•

µ

PD78F0114: Value corresponding to mask ROM version

p. 44

SFR area:

Special function

register

Do not access addresses to which SFRs are not assigned. p. 51

CHAPTER 3

Soft

Memory

space

SP: Stack

pointer Since RESET input makes the SP contents undefined, be sure to initialize the

SP before using the stack. p. 59

Soft

P10, P11, P12 When P10/SCK10/TxD0, P11/SI10/RxD0, and P12/SO10 are used as general-

purpose ports, do not write to serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10). p. 83

Hard

P60 to P63 Use of a pull-up resistor can be specified for P60 to P63 pins by a mask option

only in the mask ROM versions. p. 98

CHAPTER 4

Soft

Port

function

− In the case of a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction, although a single bit is

manipulated, the port is accessed as an 8-bit unit. Therefore, on a port with a

mixture of input and output pins, the output latch contents for pins specified as

input are undefined, even for bits other than the manipulated bit.

p. 99

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 509

(2/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function

Cautions Page

− PCC:

Processor clock

control register

(PCC)

Be sure to clear bit 3 to 0. p. 103

Soft

Ring-OSC RCM: Ring-

OSC mode

register

Make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 1 before

setting RSTOP.

p. 104

Hard

Main clock When Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

divided clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator output (fX) is supplied to the peripheral

hardware (fX = 240 kHz (TYP.)).

Operation of the peripheral hardware with Ring-OSC clock cannot be guaranteed.

Therefore, when Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied to the CPU, do

not use peripheral hardware. In addition, stop the peripheral hardware before

switching the clock supplied to the CPU from the X1 input clock to the Ring-OSC

clock. Note, however, that the following peripheral hardware can be used when

the CPU operates on the Ring-OSC clock.

• Watchdog timer

• Clock monitor

• 8-bit timer H1 when fR/27 is selected as count clock

• Peripheral hardware selecting external clock as the clock source

(Except when external count clock of TM00 is selected (TI000 valid edge))

p. 105

Subsystem

clock

MCM: Main

clock mode

register

Set MCS = 1 and MCM0 = 1 before switching subsystem clock operation to X1

input clock operation (bit 4 (CSS) of the processor clock control register (PCC) is

changed from 1 to 0).

p. 105

Main clock Make sure that bit 1 (MCS) of the main clock mode register (MCM) is 0 before

setting MSTOP.

p. 106

Subsystem

clock

MOC: Main

OSC control

register To stop X1 oscillation when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock, set bit 7

(MCC) of the processor clock control register (PCC) to 1 (setting by MSTOP is not

possible).

p. 106

After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from MOST11 and

remain 1.

p. 107

Soft

If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being

used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows.

• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time set by

OSTS

The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation

stabilization time set by OSTS. Note, therefore, that only the status up to the

oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS is set to OSTC after STOP mode is

released.

p. 107

CHAPTER 5

Hard

Main clock OSTC:

Oscillation

stabilization

time counter

status register

The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP

mode release until clock oscillation starts (“a” below) regardless of whether STOP

mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation.

p. 107

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

510

(3/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Soft

If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being

used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows.

• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time set by

OSTS

The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation

stabilization time set by OSTS. Note, therefore, that only the status up to the

oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS is set to OSTC after STOP mode is

released.

p. 108

The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP

mode release until clock oscillation starts (“a” below) regardless of whether STOP

mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation.

p. 108

To set the STOP mode while the X1 input clock is the CPU clock, set OSTS

before executing the STOP instruction. p. 108

Main

clock OSTS:

Oscillation

stabilization

time selection

register

Before setting OSTS, confirm that the oscillation stabilization time expected by

OSTS has elapsed. p. 108

X1

oscillator,

subsystem

clock

oscillator

− When using the X1 oscillator and subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the

area enclosed by the broken lines in Figures 5-8 and 5-9 to avoid an adverse

effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating

current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as

VSS. Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high

current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

Note that the subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for

reducing power consumption.

p. 110

Hard

Prescaler − When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied to the CPU, the

prescaler generates various clocks by dividing the Ring-OSC oscillator output (fX =

240 kHz (TYP.)).

p. 112

The RSTOP setting is valid only when “Can be stopped by software” is set for

Ring-OSC by a mask option. p. 119

Ring-OSC −

To calculate the maximum time, set fR = 120 kHz. p. 120

Selection of the CPU clock cycle division factor (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover

from the X1 input clock to the subsystem clock (changing CSS from 0 to 1) should

not be set simultaneously.

Simultaneous setting is possible, however, for selection of the CPU clock cycle

division factor (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from the subsystem clock to the

X1 input clock (changing CSS from 1 to 0).

p. 121

CHAPTER 5

Soft

CPU

clock −

Setting the following values is prohibited when the CPU operates on the Ring-

OSC clock.

• CSS, PCC2, PCC1, PCC0 = 0, 0, 0, 1 (setting is enabled only for standard

products and (A) grade products)

• CSS, PCC2, PCC1, PCC0 = 0, 0, 1, 0

• CSS, PCC2, PCC1, PCC0 = 0, 0, 1, 1

• CSS, PCC2, PCC1, PCC0 = 0, 1, 0, 0

p. 121

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 511

(4/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Set a value other than 0000H to CR000 in the mode in which clear & start occurs

on a match of TM00 and CR000. p. 130

Soft

If CR000 is set to 0000H in the free-running mode and in the clear mode using

the valid edge of the TI000 pin, an interrupt request (INTTM000) is generated

when the value of CR000 changes from 0000H to 0001H following TM00

overflow (FFFFH). Moreover, INTTM000 is generated after a match of TM00

and CR000 is detected, a valid edge of the TI010 pin is detected, and the timer

is cleared by a one-shot trigger.

p. 130

When P01 is used as the valid edge input pin of TI010, it cannot be used as the

timer output (TO00). Moreover, when P01 is used as TO00, it cannot be used as

the valid edge input pin of TI010.

p. 130

Hard

When CR000 is used as a capture register, read data is undefined if the register

read time and capture trigger input conflict (the capture data itself is the correct

value).

If timer count stop and capture trigger input conflict, the captured data is

undefined.

p. 130

CR000: 16-bit

timer

capture/compare

register 000

Do not rewrite CR000 during TM00 operation.

pp. 130,

138

142,

153

Soft

If the CR010 register is cleared to 0000H, an interrupt request (INTTM010) is

generated when the value changes from 0000H to 0001H after an overflow

(FFFFH) of TM00. Moreover, INTTM010 is generated after a match of TM00 and

CR010, after the valid edge of the TI000 pin is detected, and after clearing by the

one-shot trigger.

p. 131

Hard

When CR010 is used as a capture register, read data is undefined if the register

read time and capture trigger input conflict (the capture data itself is the correct

value).

If count stop input and capture trigger input conflict, the captured data is

undefined.

p. 131

CR010: 16-bit

timer

capture/compare

register 010

CR010 can be rewritten during TM00 operation. For details, see Caution 2 in

Figure 6-15. p. 131

16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) starts operation at the moment TMC002 and

TMC003 are set to values other than 0, 0 (operation stop mode), respectively. Set

TMC002 and TMC003 to 0, 0 to stop the operation.

p. 132

Timer operation must be stopped before writing to bits other than the OVF00 flag. p. 133

Set the valid edge of the TI000/P00 pin using prescaler mode register 00

(PRM00). p. 133

TMC00: 16-bit

timer mode

control register

00

If any of the following modes is selected: the mode in which clear & start occurs

on match between TM00 and CR000, the mode in which clear & start occurs at

the TI000 valid edge, or free-running mode, when the set value of CR000 is

FFFFH and the TM00 value changes from FFFFH to 0000H, the OVF00 flag is set

to 1.

p. 133

Timer operation must be stopped before setting CRC00. p. 134

Soft

When the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM00 and

CR000 is selected with 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00), CR000

should not be specified as a capture register.

p. 134

CHAPTER 6

Hard

16-bit

timer/

event

counter

00

(TM00)

CRC00:

Capture/

compare control

register 00 To ensure that the capture operation is performed properly, the capture trigger

requires a pulse two cycles longer than the count clock selected by prescaler mode

register 00 (PRM00).

p. 134

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

512

(5/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Timer operation must be stopped before setting other than TOC004. p. 135

If LVS00 and LVR00 are read, 0 is read. p. 135

OSPT00 is automatically cleared after data is set, so 0 is read. p. 135

Soft

Do not set OSPT00 to 1 other than in one-shot pulse output mode. p. 135

Hard

A write interval of two cycles or more of the count clock selected by prescaler

mode register 00 (PRM00) is required to write to OSPT00 successively. p. 135

Do not set LVS00 to 1 before TOE00, and do not set LVS00 and TOE00 to 1

simultaneously. p. 135

Soft

TOC00: 16-bit

timer output

control register

00

Perform <1> and <2> below in the following order, not at the same time.

<1> Set TOC001, TOC004, TOE00, OSPE00: Timer output operation setting

<2> Set LVS00, LVR00: Timer output F/F setting

p. 135

Hard

When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the

count clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00

is not guaranteed. When an external clock is used and when the Ring-OSC clock

is selected and supplied to the CPU, the operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00

is not guaranteed, either, because the Ring-OSC clock is supplied as the sampling

clock to eliminate noise.

p. 136

Always set data to PRM00 after stopping the timer operation. p. 136

If the valid edge of TI000 is to be set for the count clock, do not set the clear &

start mode using the valid edge of TI000 and the capture trigger. p. 136

Soft

If the TI000 or TI010 pin is high level immediately after system reset, the rising

edge is immediately detected after the rising edge or both the rising and falling

edges are set as the valid edge(s) of the TI000 pin or TI010 pin to enable the

operation of 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00). Care is therefore required when

pulling up the TI000 or TI010 pin. However, if the TI000 pin or TI010 pin is high

level, the rising edge is not detected when re-enabling operation after the

operation has been stopped once.

p. 137

Hard

PRM00:

Prescaler mode

register 00

When P01 is used as the TI010 valid edge input pin, it cannot be used as the

timer output (TO00), and when used as TO00, it cannot be used as the TI010 valid

edge input pin.

p. 137

CR010: 16-bit

timer

capture/compare

register 010

To change the value of the duty factor (the value of the CR010 register) during

operation, see Caution 2 in Figure 6-15 PPG Output Operation Timing. p. 140

Values in the following range should be set in CR000 and CR010:

0000H ≤ CR010 < CR000 ≤ FFFFH p. 141

CR000, CR010:

16-bit timer

capture/compare

registers 000,

010

The cycle of the pulse generated through PPG output (CR000 setting value + 1)

has a duty of (CR010 setting value + 1)/(CR000 setting value + 1). p. 141

CHAPTER 6

Soft

16-bit

timer/

event

counter

00

(TM00)

PPG output In the PPG output operation, change the pulse width (rewrite CR010) during TM00

operation using the following procedure.

<1> Disable the timer output inversion operation by match of TM00 and CR010

(TOC004 = 0)

<2> Disable the INTTM010 interrupt (TMMK010 = 1)

<3> Rewrite CR010

<4> Wait for 1 cycle of the TM00 count clock

<5> Enable the timer output inversion operation by match of TM00 and CR010

(TOC004 = 1)

<6> Clear the interrupt request flag of INTTM010 (TMIF010 = 0)

<7> Enable the INTTM010 interrupt (TMMK010 = 0)

p. 142

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 513

(6/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Pulse width

measurement To use two capture registers, set the TI000 and TI010 pins. p. 143

External event

counter When reading the external event counter count value, TM00 should be read. p. 152

Soft

Do not set the OSPT00 bit to 1 while the one-shot pulse is being output. To

output the one-shot pulse again, wait until the current one-shot pulse output is

completed.

p. 155

Hard

When using the one-shot pulse output of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 with a

software trigger, do not change the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function

port pin.

Because the external trigger is valid even in this case, the timer is cleared and

started even at the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin, resulting

in the output of a pulse at an undesired timing.

p. 155

Soft

Do not set the CR000 and CR010 registers to 0000H. p. 156

Soft

One-shot pulse

output:

Software trigger

16-bit timer counter 00 starts operating as soon as a value other than 00

(operation stop mode) is set to the TMC003 and TMC002 bits. p. 157

Hard

Even if the external trigger is generated again while the one-shot pulse is output,

it is ignored. p. 157

Do not set the CR000 and CR010 registers to 0000H. p. 158

Soft

One-shot pulse

output: External

trigger

16-bit timer counter 00 starts operating as soon as a value other than 00

(operation stop mode) is set to the TMC003 and TMC002 bits. p. 159

Hard

Timer start

errors An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be

generated after timer start. This is because 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is

started asynchronously to the count clock.

p. 160

16-bit timer

capture/compare

register setting

In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM00 and CR000,

set 16-bit timer capture/compare registers 000 and 010 (CR000 and CR010) to

other than 0000H. This means a 1-pulse count operation cannot be performed

when 16-bit timer/event counter 00 is used as an external event counter.

p. 160

Capture register

data retention

timing

The values of 16-bit timer capture/compare registers 000 and 010 (CR000 and

CR010) are not guaranteed after 16-bit timer/event counter 00 has been stopped. p. 160

Valid edge

setting Set the valid edge of the TI000 pin after setting bits 2 and 3 (TMC002 and

TMC003) of 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) to 0, 0, respectively,

and then stopping timer operation. The valid edge is set using bits 4 and 5

(ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00).

p. 160

One-shot pulse

output: Software

trigger

When a one-shot pulse is output, do not set the OSPT00 bit to 1. Do not output

the one-shot pulse again until INTTM000, which occurs upon a match with the

CR000 register, or INTTM010, which occurs upon a match with the CR010

register, occurs.

p. 160

Soft

One-shot pulse

output: External

trigger

If the external trigger occurs again while a one-shot pulse is output, it is ignored. p. 160

CHAPTER 6

Hard

16-bit

timer/

event

counter

00

(TM00)

One-shot pulse

output function When using the one-shot pulse output of 16-bit timer/event counter 00 with a

software trigger, do not change the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function

port pin.

Because the external trigger is valid even in this case, the timer is cleared and

started even at the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin, resulting

in the output of a pulse at an undesired timing.

p. 160

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

514

(7/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

The OVF00 flag is also set to 1 in the following case.

When any of the following modes is selected: the mode in which clear & start

occurs on a match between TM00 and CR000, the mode in which clear & start

occurs at the TI000 valid edge, or the free-running mode

→ CR000 is set to FFFFH

→ TM00 is counted up from FFFFH to 0000H.

p. 161

OVF00 flag

operation

Even if the OVF00 flag is cleared before the next count clock is counted (before

TM00 becomes 0001H) after the occurrence of TM00 overflow, the OVF00 flag is

re-set newly and clear is disabled.

p. 161

Conflict

operation If a conflict occurs between the read period of the 16-bit timer capture/compare

register (CR000/CR010) and capture trigger input (CR000/CR010 used as capture

register), capture trigger input has priority. The data read from CR000/CR010 is

undefined.

p. 161

Soft

Even if 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is read, the value is not captured by 16-bit

timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010). p. 162

Regardless of the CPU’s operation mode, when the timer stops, the input signals

to the TI000/TI010 pins are not acknowledged. p. 162

Timer operation

The one-shot pulse output mode operates correctly only in the free-running mode

and the mode in which clear & start occurs at the TI000 valid edge. In the mode in

which clear & start occurs on a match between the TM00 register and CR000

register, one-shot pulse output is not possible because an overflow does not

occur.

p. 162

If TI000 valid edge is specified as the count clock, a capture operation by the

capture register specified as the trigger for TI000 is not possible. p. 162

To ensure the reliability of the capture operation, the capture trigger requires a

pulse two cycles longer than the count clock selected by prescaler mode register

00 (PRM00).

p. 162

Capture

operation

The capture operation is performed at the falling edge of the count clock. An

interrupt request input (INTTM000/INTTM010), however, is generated at the rise

of the next count clock.

p. 162

Compare

operation A capture operation may not be performed for CR000/CR010 set in compare

mode even if a capture trigger has been input. p. 162

If the TI000 or TI010 pin is high level immediately after system reset and the rising

edge or both the rising and falling edges are specified as the valid edge of the

TI000 or TI010 pin to enable the 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) operation, a rising

edge is detected immediately after the operation is enabled. Be careful therefore

when pulling up the TI000 or TI010 pin. However, if the TI000 pin or TI010 pin is

high level, the rising edge is not detected at restart after the operation has been

stopped once.

p. 162

CHAPTER 6

Hard

16-bit

timer/

event

counter

00

(TM00)

Edge detection

The sampling clock used to eliminate noise differs when the TI000 valid edge is

used as the count clock and when it is used as a capture trigger. In the former

case, the count clock is fX, and in the latter case the count clock is selected by

prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00). The capture operation is only performed

when a valid level is detected twice by sampling the valid edge, thus eliminating

noise with a short pulse width.

p. 162

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 515

(8/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n and CR5n (TMC5n6

= 0), do not write other values to CR5n during operation. p. 166

Soft

CR5n: 8-bit

timer compare

register 5n In PWM mode, make the CR5n rewrite period 3 count clocks of the count clock

(clock selected by TCL5n) or more. p. 166

Hard

When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the

count clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50 is

not guaranteed.

p. 167

When rewriting TCL50 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand. p. 167

TCL50: Timer

clock selection

register 50

Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to 0. p. 167

When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the

count clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is

not guaranteed.

p. 168

When rewriting TCL51 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand. p. 168

TCL51: Timer

clock selection

register 51

Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to 0. p. 168

The settings of LVS5n and LVR5n are valid in other than PWM mode. p. 170

Perform <1> to <4> below in the following order, not at the same time.

<1> Set TMC5n1, TMC5n6: Operation mode setting

<2> Set TOE5n to enable output: Timer output enable

<3> Set LVS5n, LVR5n (see Caution 1): Timer F/F setting

<4> Set TCE5n

p. 170

TMC5n: 8-bit

timer mode

control register

5n

Stop operation before rewriting TMC5n6. p. 170

Interval

timer/square

waveform

output

Do not write other values to CR5n during operation.

pp. 172,

175

In PWM mode, make the CR5n rewrite period 3 count clocks of the count clock

(clock selected by TCL5n) or more. p. 176

Soft

PWM output

When reading from CR5n between <1> and <2> in Figure 7-15, the value read

differs from the actual value (read value: M, actual value of CR5n: N). p. 179

CHAPTER 7

Hard

8-bit timer/

event

counters

50, 51

(TM50,

TM51)

Timer start error An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be

generated after timer start. This is because 8-bit timer counters 50 and 51 (TM50,

TM51) are started asynchronously to the count clock.

p. 180

CMP0n: 8-bit

timer H

compare

register 0n

CMP0n cannot be rewritten during timer count operation. p. 184

CHAPTER 8

Soft

8-bit

timers H0,

H1

(TMH0,

TMH1) CMP1n: 8-bit

timer H

compare

register 1n

In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set CMP1n when

starting the timer count operation (TMHEn = 1) after the timer count operation was

stopped (TMHEn = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to

CMP1n).

p. 184

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

516

(9/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Hard

When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the

count clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer H0 is not

guaranteed.

p. 187

When TMHE0 = 1, setting the other bits of the TMHMD0 register is prohibited. p. 187

Soft

TMHMD0: 8-bit

timer H mode

register 0

In the PWM output mode, be sure to set 8-bit timer H compare register 10

(CMP10) when starting the timer count operation (TMHE0 = 1) after the timer

count operation was stopped (TMHE0 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the

same value to the CMP10 register).

p. 187

Hard

When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the

count clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of 8-bit timer H1 is not

guaranteed (except when CKS12, CKS11, CKS10 = 1, 0, 1 (fR/27)).

p. 188

When TMHE1 = 1, setting the other bits of the TMHMD1 register is prohibited. p. 188

In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set 8-bit timer H

compare register 11 (CMP11) when starting the timer count operation (TMHE1 =

1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE1 = 0) (be sure to set again

even if setting the same value to the CMP11 register).

p. 188

Soft

TMHMD1: 8-bit

timer H mode

register 1

When the carrier generator mode is used, set so that the count clock frequency of

TMH1 becomes more than 6 times the count clock frequency of TM51. p. 188

Hard

In PWM output mode, three operation clocks (signal selected using the CKSn2 to

CKSn0 bits of the TMHMDn register) are required to transfer the CMP1n register

value after rewriting the register.

p. 194

Be sure to set the CMP1n register when starting the timer count operation

(TMHEn = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn = 0) (be sure to

set again even if setting the same value to the CMP1n register).

p. 194

PWM output

Make sure that the CMP1n register setting value (M) and CMP0n register setting

value (N) are within the following range.

00H ≤ CMP1n (M) < CMP0n (N) ≤ FFH

p. 195

Do not rewrite the NRZB1 bit again until at least the second clock after it has been

rewritten, or else the transfer from the NRZB1 bit to the NRZ1 bit is not

guaranteed.

p. 200

When 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in the carrier generator mode, an

interrupt is generated at the timing of <1>. When 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is

used in a mode other than the carrier generator mode, the timing of the interrupt

generation differs.

p. 200

Be sure to set the CMP11 register when starting the timer count operation

(TMHE1 = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE1 = 0) (be sure to

set again even if setting the same value to the CMP11 register).

p. 202

Set so that the count clock frequency of TMH1 becomes more than 6 times the

count clock frequency of TM51. p. 202

Set the values of the CMP01 and CMP11 registers in a range of 01H to FFH. p. 202

In the carrier generator mode, three operating clocks (signal selected by CKS12

to CKS10 bits of TMHMD1 register) or more are required from when the CMP11

register value is changed to when the value is transferred to the register.

p. 202

CHAPTER 8

Soft

8-bit

timers H0,

H1

(TMH0,

TMH1)

Carrier

generator mode

(TMH1 only)

Be sure to set the RMC1 bit before the count operation is started. p. 202

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 517

(10/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

WTM: Watch

timer operation

mode register

Do not change the count clock and interval time (by setting bits 4 to 7 (WTM4 to

WTM7) of WTM) during watch timer operation. p. 209

CHAPTER 9

Hard

Watch

timer

Interrupt

request When operation of the watch timer and 5-bit counter is enabled by the watch timer

mode control register (WTM) (by setting bits 0 (WTM0) and 1 (WTM1) of WTM to

1), the interval until the first interrupt request (INTWT) is generated after the

register is set does not exactly match the specification made with bits 2 and 3

(WTM2, WTM3) of WTM. Subsequently, however, the INTWT signal is generated

at the specified intervals.

p. 212

If data is written to WDTM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to WDTM

when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is

stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

p. 217

Set bits 7, 6, and 5 to 0, 1, and 1, respectively (when “Ring-OSC cannot be

stopped” is selected by a mask option, other values are ignored). p. 217

After reset is released, WDTM can be written only once by an 8-bit memory

manipulation instruction. If writing is attempted a second time, an internal reset

signal is generated. If the source clock to the watchdog timer is stopped,

however, an internal reset signal is generated when the source clock to the

watchdog timer resumes operation.

p. 217

WDTM cannot be set by a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction. p. 217

WDTM:

Watchdog timer

mode register

If “Ring-OSC can be stopped by software” is selected by the mask option and the

watchdog timer is stopped by setting WDCS4 to 1, the watchdog timer does not

resume operation even if WDCS4 is cleared to 0. In addition, the internal reset

signal is not generated.

p. 217

If a value other than ACH is written to WDTE, an internal reset signal is generated.

If the source clock to the watchdog timer is stopped, however, an internal reset

signal is generated when the source clock to the watchdog timer resumes

operation.

p. 218

If a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed for WDTE, an internal reset

signal is generated. If the source clock to the watchdog timer is stopped,

however, an internal reset signal is generated when the source clock to the

watchdog timer resumes operation.

p. 218

Soft

WDTE:

Watchdog timer

enable register

The value read from WDTE is 9AH (this differs from the written value (ACH)). p. 218

When “Ring-

OSC cannot be

stopped” is

selected by

mask option

In this mode, operation of the watchdog timer absolutely cannot be stopped even

during STOP instruction execution. For 8-bit timer H1 (TMH1), a division of the

Ring-OSC can be selected as the count source, so clear the watchdog timer using

the interrupt request of TMH1 before the watchdog timer overflows after STOP

instruction execution. If this processing is not performed, an internal reset signal

is generated when the watchdog timer overflows after STOP instruction execution.

p. 219

CHAPTER 10

Hard

Watchdog

timer

When “Ring-OSC

can be stopped

by software” is

selected by mask

option

In this mode, watchdog timer operation is stopped during HALT/STOP instruction

execution. After HALT/STOP mode is released, counting is started again using

the operation clock of the watchdog timer set before HALT/STOP instruction

execution by WDTM. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but holds its

value.

p. 220

Soft

A/D conversion must be stopped before rewriting bits FR0 to FR2 to values other

than the identical data. p. 228

Hard

For the sampling time of the A/D converter and the A/D conversion start delay

time, see (11) in 11.6 Cautions for A/D Converter. p. 228

CHAPTER 11

Soft

A/D

converter ADM: A/D

converter mode

register

If data is written to ADM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADM

when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is

stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

p. 228

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

518

(11/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 of ADS to 0. p. 229ADS: Analog

input channel

specification

register

If data is written to ADS, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADS

when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is

stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

p. 229

When writing to the A/D converter mode register (ADM) and analog input channel

specification register (ADS), the contents of ADCR may become undefined.

Read the conversion result following conversion completion before writing to ADM

and ADS. Using timing other than the above may cause an incorrect conversion

result to be read.

p. 230ADCR: A/D

conversion result

register

If data is read from ADCR, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from

ADCR when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock

is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

p. 230

PFM: Power-fail

comparison

mode register

If data is written to PFM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to PFM

when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is

stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

p. 231

PFT: Power-fail

comparison

threshold

register

If data is written to PFT, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to PFT when

the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is stopped.

For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

p. 231

Make sure the period of <1> to <3> is 14

µ

s or more. p. 237

It is no problem if the order of <1> and <2> is reversed. p. 237

<1> can be omitted. However, do not use the first conversion result after <3> in

this case. p. 237

A/D conversion

operation

The period from <4> to <7> differs from the conversion time set using bits 5 to 3

(FR2 to FR0) of ADM. The period from <6> to <7> is the conversion time set

using FR2 to FR0.

p. 237

Make sure the period of <3> to <6> is 14

µ

s or more. p. 237

It is no problem if order of <3>, <4>, and <5> is changed. p. 237

<3> must not be omitted if the power-fail function is used. p. 237

Soft

Power-fail

detection

function

period from <7> to <11> differs from the conversion time set using bits 5 to 3

(FR2 to FR0) of ADM. The period from <9> to <11> is the conversion time set

using FR2 to FR0.

p. 237

Operating

current in

standby mode

The A/D converter stops operating in the standby mode. At this time, the

operating current can be reduced by clearing bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter

mode register (ADM) to 0. (refer to Figure 11-2)

p. 240

Hard

ANI0 to ANI7

input range Observe the rated range of the ANI0 to ANI7 input voltage. If a voltage of AVREF

or higher and AVSS or lower (even in the range of absolute maximum ratings) is

input to an analog input channel, the converted value of that channel becomes

undefined. In addition, the converted values of the other channels may also be

affected.

p. 240

ADCR read has priority. After the read operation, the new conversion result is

written to ADCR. p. 240

CHAPTER 11

Soft

A/D

converter

Conflict

operation ADM or ADS write has priority. ADCR write is not performed, nor is the

conversion end interrupt signal (INTAD) generated. p. 240

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 519

(12/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function

Cautions Page

Noise

countermeasures

To maintain the 10-bit resolution, attention must be paid to noise input to the

AVREF pin and pins ANI0 to ANI7. Because the effect increases in proportion to

the output impedance of the analog input source, it is recommended that a

capacitor be connected externally, as shown in Figure 11-19, to reduce noise.

p. 241

The analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) are also used as input port pins (P20 to

P27).

When A/D conversion is performed with any of ANI0 to ANI7 selected, do not

access port 2 while conversion is in progress; otherwise the conversion resolution

may be degraded.

p. 241

ANI0/P20 to

ANI7/P27

If a digital pulse is applied to the pins adjacent to the pins currently used for A/D

conversion, the expected value of the A/D conversion may not be obtained due to

coupling noise. Therefore, do not apply a pulse to the pins adjacent to the pin

undergoing A/D conversion.

p. 241

Input

impedance of

ANI0 to ANI7

pins

In this A/D converter, the internal sampling capacitor is charged and sampling is

performed for approx. one sixth of the conversion time.

Since only the leakage current flows other than during sampling and the current

for charging the capacitor also flows during sampling, the input impedance

fluctuates and has no meaning.

To perform sufficient sampling, however, it is recommended to make the output

impedance of the analog input source 10 kΩ or lower, or attach a capacitor of

around 100 pF to the ANI0 to ANI7 pins (see Figure 11-19).

p. 241

Hard

AVREF pin input

impedance

A series resistor string of several tens of kΩ is connected between the AVREF and

AVSS pins.

Therefore, if the output impedance of the reference voltage source is high, this will

result in a series connection to the series resistor string between the AVREF and

AVSS pins, resulting in a large reference voltage error.

p. 241

Interrupt

request flag

(ADIF)

The interrupt request flag (ADIF) is not cleared even if the analog input channel

specification register (ADS) is changed.

Therefore, if an analog input pin is changed during A/D conversion, the A/D

conversion result and ADIF for the pre-change analog input may be set just before

the ADS rewrite. Caution is therefore required since, at this time, when ADIF is

read immediately after the ADS rewrite, ADIF is set despite the fact A/D

conversion for the post-change analog input has not ended.

When A/D conversion is stopped and then resumed, clear ADIF before the A/D

conversion operation is resumed.

p. 242

Conversion

result just after

A/D conversion

start

The A/D conversion value immediately after A/D conversion starts may not fall

within the rating range if the ADCS bit is set to 1 within 14

µ

s after the ADCE bit

was set to 1, or if the ADCS bit is set to 1 with the ADCE bit = 0. Take measures

such as polling the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) and removing

the first conversion result.

p. 242

CHAPTER 11

Soft

A/D

converter

A/D conversion

result register

(ADCR) read

operation

When a write operation is performed to the A/D converter mode register (ADM)

and analog input channel specification register (ADS), the contents of ADCR may

become undefined. Read the conversion result following conversion completion

before writing to ADM and ADS. Using a timing other than the above may cause

an incorrect conversion result to be read.

p. 242

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

520

(13/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

A/D converter

sampling time

and A/D

conversion start

delay time

The A/D converter sampling time differs depending on the set value of the A/D

converter mode register (ADM). The delay time exists until actual sampling is

started after A/D converter operation is enabled.

When using a set in which the A/D conversion time must be strictly observed, care

is required for the contents shown in Figure 11-21 and Table 11-3.

p. 243

CHAPTER 11

Hard

A/D

converter

Register

generating wait

cycle

Do not read data from the ADCR register and do not write data to the ADM, ADS,

PFM, and PFT registers while the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and

while oscillation of the clock input to X1 is stopped.

p. 243

If clock supply to serial interface UART0 is not stopped (e.g., in the HALT mode),

normal operation continues. If clock supply to serial interface UART0 is stopped

(e.g., in the STOP mode), each register stops operating, and holds the value

immediately before clock supply was stopped. The TXD0 pin also holds the value

immediately before clock supply was stopped and outputs it. However, the

operation is not guaranteed after clock supply is resumed. Therefore, reset the

circuit so that POWER0 = 0, RXE0 = 0, and TXE0 = 0.

p. 245

Set POWER0 = 1 and then set TXE0 = 1 (transmission) or RXE0 = 1 (reception) to

start communication. p. 245

UART mode

TXE0 and RXE0 are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK0) set by BRGC0. To

enable transmission or reception again, set TXE0 or RXE0 to 1 at least two clocks

of base clock after TXE0 or RXE0 has been cleared to 0. If TXE0 or RXE0 is set

within two clocks of base clock, the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not

be initialized.

p. 245

TXS0: Transmit

shift register 0 Do not write the next transmit data to TXS0 before the transmission completion

interrupt signal (INTST0) is generated. p. 248

At startup, set POWER0 to 1 and then set TXE0 to 1. To stop the operation, clear

TXE0 to 0, and then clear POWER0 to 0. p. 250

At startup, set POWER0 to 1 and then set RXE0 to 1. To stop the operation, clear

RXE0 to 0, and then clear POWER0 to 0. p. 250

Set POWER0 to 1 and then set RXE0 to 1 while a high level is input to the RxD0

pin. If POWER0 is set to 1 and RXE0 is set to 1 while a low level is input,

reception is started.

p. 250

TXE0 and RXE0 are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK0) set by BRGC0. To

enable transmission or reception again, set TXE0 or RXE0 to 1 at least two clocks

of base clock after TXE0 or RXE0 has been cleared to 0. If TXE0 or RXE0 is set

within two clocks of base clock, the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not

be initialized.

p. 250

Clear the TXE0 and RXE0 bits to 0 before rewriting the PS01, PS00, and CL0 bits. p. 250

Make sure that TXE0 = 0 when rewriting the SL0 bit. Reception is always

performed with “number of stop bits = 1”, and therefore, is not affected by the set

value of the SL0 bit.

p. 250

ASIM0:

Asynchronous

serial interface

operation mode

register 0

Be sure to set bit 0 to 1. p. 250

The operation of the PE0 bit differs depending on the set values of the PS01 and

PS00 bits of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 0 (ASIM0). p. 251

Only the first bit of the receive data is checked as the stop bit, regardless of the

number of stop bits. p. 251

If an overrun error occurs, the next receive data is not written to receive buffer

register 0 (RXB0) but discarded. p. 251

CHAPTER 12

Soft

Serial

interface

UART0

ASIS0:

Asynchronous

serial interface

reception error

status register 0

If data is read from ASIS0, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ASIS0

when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is

stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

p. 251

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 521

(14/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Hard

When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the

base clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of serial interface UART0 is not

guaranteed.

p. 253

Soft

Make sure that bit 6 (TXE0) and bit 5 (RXE0) of the ASIM0 register = 0 when

rewriting the MDL04 to MDL00 bits. p. 253

Hard

BRGC0: Baud

rate generator

control register

0

The baud rate value is the output clock of the 5-bit counter divided by 2. p. 253

POWER0,

TXE0, RXE0:

Bits 7, 6, and 5

of ASIM0

Clear POWER0 to 0 after clearing TXE0 and RXE0 to 0 to set the operation stop

mode.

To start the operation, set POWER0 to 1, and then set TXE0 and RXE0 to 1.

p. 254

UART mode Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port

mode register and port register. p. 255

UART

transmission After transmit data is written to TXS0, do not write the next transmit data before

the transmission completion interrupt signal (INTST0) is generated. p. 258

Be sure to read receive buffer register 0 (RXB0) even if a reception error occurs.

Otherwise, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the

reception error status will persist.

p. 259

Reception is always performed with the “number of stop bits = 1”. The second

stop bit is ignored. p. 259

UART reception

Be sure to read asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 0

(ASIS0) before reading RXB0. p. 259

Keep the baud rate error during transmission to within the permissible error range

at the reception destination. p. 262Baud rate error

Make sure that the baud rate error during reception satisfies the range shown in

(4) Permissible baud rate range during reception. p. 262

CHAPTER 12

Soft

Serial

interface

UART0

Allowable baud

rate range

during reception

Make sure that the baud rate error during reception is within the permissible error

range, by using the calculation expression shown below. p. 264

Hard

The TXD6 output inversion function inverts only the transmission side and not the

reception side. To use this function, the reception side must be ready for

reception of inverted data.

p. 266

If clock supply to serial interface UART6 is not stopped (e.g., in the HALT mode),

normal operation continues. If clock supply to serial interface UART6 is stopped

(e.g., in the STOP mode), each register stops operating, and holds the value

immediately before clock supply was stopped. The TXD6 pin also holds the value

immediately before clock supply was stopped and outputs it. However, the

operation is not guaranteed after clock supply is resumed. Therefore, reset the

circuit so that POWER6 = 0, RXE6 = 0, and TXE6 = 0.

p. 266

UART mode

If data is continuously transmitted, the communication timing from the stop bit to

the next start bit is extended two operating clocks of the macro. However, this

does not affect the result of communication because the reception side initializes

the timing when it has detected a start bit. Do not use the continuous

transmission function if the interface is incorporated in LIN.

p. 266

Do not write data to TXB6 when bit 1 (TXBF6) of asynchronous serial interface

transmission status register 6 (ASIF6) is 1. p. 272

CHAPTER 13

Soft

Serial

interface

UART6

TXB6: Transmit

buffer register 6 Do not refresh (write the same value to) TXB6 by software during a

communication operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of

asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6) are 1 or when bit

7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 are 1).

p. 272

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

522

(15/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

At startup, set POWER6 to 1 and then set TXE6 to 1. To stop the operation, clear

TXE6 to 0, and then clear POWER6 to 0. p. 274

At startup, set POWER6 to 1 and then set RXE6 to 1. To stop the operation, clear

RXE6 to 0, and then clear POWER6 to 0. p. 274

Set POWER6 to 1 and then set RXE6 to 1 while a high level is input to the RxD6

pin. If POWER6 is set to 1 and RXE6 is set to 1 while a low level is input,

reception is started.

p. 274

Clear the TXE6 and RXE6 bits to 0 before rewriting the PS61, PS60, and CL6

bits. p. 274

Fix the PS61 and PS60 bits to 0 when mounting the device on LIN. p. 274

Make sure that TXE6 = 0 when rewriting the SL6 bit. Reception is always

performed with “the number of stop bits = 1”, and therefore, is not affected by the

set value of the SL6 bit.

p. 274

ASIM6:

Asynchronous

serial interface

operation mode

register 6

Make sure that RXE6 = 0 when rewriting the ISRM6 bit. p. 274

The operation of the PE6 bit differs depending on the set values of the PS61 and

PS60 bits of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6 (ASIM6). p. 275

The first bit of the receive data is checked as the stop bit, regardless of the

number of stop bits. p. 275

If an overrun error occurs, the next receive data is not written to receive buffer

register 6 (RXB6) but discarded. p. 275

ASIS6:

Asynchronous

serial interface

reception error

status register 6

If data is read from ASIS6, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from

ASIS6 when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock

is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 31 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.

p. 275

To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXB6

register. Be sure to check that the TXBF6 flag is “0”. If so, write the next transmit

data (second byte) to the TXB6 register. If data is written to the TXB6 register

while the TXBF6 flag is “1”, the transmit data cannot be guaranteed.

p. 276

Soft

ASIF6:

Asynchronous

serial interface

transmission

status register 6 To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous transmission, be

sure to check that the TXSF6 flag is “0” after generation of the transmission

completion interrupt, and then execute initialization. If initialization is executed

while the TXSF6 flag is “1”, the transmit data cannot be guaranteed.

p. 276

Hard

When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock to be supplied to the CPU, the

clock of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the count clock. If the

base clock is the Ring-OSC clock, the operation of serial interface UART6 is not

guaranteed.

p. 278CKSR6: Clock

selection

register 6

Make sure POWER6 = 0 when rewriting TPS63 to TPS60. p. 278

Soft

Make sure that bit 6 (TXE6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of the ASIM6 register = 0 when

rewriting the MDL67 to MDL60 bits. p. 278

CHAPTER 13

Hard

Serial

interface

UART6

BRGC6: Baud

rate generator

control register

6 The baud rate is the output clock of the 8-bit counter divided by 2. p. 278

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 523

(16/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

ASICL6 can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a

communication operation (when bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 6 (TXE6) of ASIM6 = 1

or bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6) of ASIM6 = 1). Note, however, that

communication is started by the refresh operation because bit 6 (SBRT6) of

ASICL6 is cleared to 0 when communication is completed (when an interrupt

signal is generated).

p. 279

In the case of an SBF reception error, return the mode to the SBF reception

mode.

The status of the SBRF6 flag is held (1).

p. 279

Before setting the SBRT6 bit, make sure that bit 7 (POWER6) and bit 5 (RXE6)

of ASIM6 = 1. p. 279

The read value of the SBRT6 bit is always 0. SBRT6 is automatically cleared to

0 after SBF reception has been correctly completed. p. 279

ASICL6:

Asynchronous

serial interface

control register

6

Before rewriting the DIR6 and TXDLV6 bits, clear the TXE6 and RXE6 bits to 0. p. 279

POWER6,

TXE6, RXE6:

Bits 7, 6, and 5

of ASIM6

Clear POWER6 to 0 after clearing TXE6 and RXE6 to 0 to set the operation stop

mode.

To start the operation, set POWER6 to 1, and then set TXE6 and RXE6 to 1.

p. 281

UART mode Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port

mode register and port register. p. 282

Parity type and

operation Fix the PS61 and PS60 bits to 0 when the device is incorporated in LIN. p. 286

The TXBF6 and TXSF6 flags of the ASIF6 register change from “10” to “11”, and

to “01” during continuous transmission. To check the status, therefore, do not

use a combination of the TXBF6 and TXSF6 flags for judgment. Read only the

TXBF6 flag when executing continuous transmission.

p. 288 Continuous

transmission

When the device is incorporated in a LIN, the continuous transmission function

cannot be used. Make sure that asynchronous serial interface transmission

status register 6 (ASIF6) is 00H before writing transmit data to transmit buffer

register 6 (TXB6).

p. 288

TXBF6 during

continuous

transmission:

Bit 1 of ASIF6

To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXB6

register. Be sure to check that the TXBF6 flag is “0”. If so, write the next

transmit data (second byte) to the TXB6 register. If data is written to the TXB6

register while the TXBF6 flag is “1”, the transmit data cannot be guaranteed.

p. 288

To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous transmission, be

sure to check that the TXSF6 flag is “0” after generation of the transmission

completion interrupt, and then execute initialization. If initialization is executed

while the TXSF6 flag is “1”, the transmit data cannot be guaranteed.

p. 288 During

continuous

transmission:

Bit 1 of ASIF6 During continuous transmission, an overrun error may occur, which means that

the next transmission was completed before execution of INTST6 interrupt

servicing after transmission of one data frame. An overrun error can be detected

by developing a program that can count the number of transmit data and by

referencing the TXSF6 flag.

p. 288

Be sure to read receive buffer register 6 (RXB6) even if a reception error occurs.

Otherwise, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the

reception error status will persist.

p. 292

Reception is always performed with the “number of stop bits = 1”. The second

stop bit is ignored. p. 292

CHAPTER 13

Soft

Serial

interface

UART6

Normal

reception

Be sure to read asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6

(ASIS6) before reading RXB6. p. 292

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

524

(17/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Keep the baud rate error during transmission to within the permissible error range

at the reception destination. p. 299Serial clock

generation Make sure that the baud rate error during reception satisfies the range shown in

(4) Permissible baud rate range during reception. p. 299

CHAPTER 13

Serial

interface

UART6

Permissible baud

rate range during

reception

Make sure that the baud rate error during reception is within the permissible error

range, by using the calculation expression shown below. p. 301

SOTB10:

Transmit buffer

register 10

Do not access SOTB10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication). p. 305

SIO10: Serial I/O

shift register 10 Do not access SIO10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication). p. 305

Soft

CSIM10: Serial

operation mode

register 10

Be sure to clear bit 5 to 0. p. 306

Hard

When the Ring-OSC clock is selected as the clock supplied to the CPU, the clock

of the Ring-OSC oscillator is divided and supplied as the serial clock. At this

time, the operation of serial interface CSI10 is not guaranteed.

p. 308

Do not write to CSIC10 while CSIE10 = 1 (operation enabled). p. 308

Clear CKP10 to 0 to use P10/SCK10/TxD0, P11/SI10/RxD0, and P12/SO10 as

general-purpose port pins. p. 308

CSIC10: Serial

clock selection

register 10

The phase type of the data clock is type 1 after reset. p. 308

3-wire serial I/O

mode Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port

mode register and port register. p. 310

Communication

operation Do not access the control register and data register when CSOT10 = 1 (during

serial communication). p. 312

CHAPTER 14

Soft

Serial

interface

CSI10

SO10 output If a value is written to TRMD10, DAP10, and DIR10, the output value of SO10

changes. p. 317

IF1L: Interrupt

request flag

register

Be sure to clear bits 6 and 7 of IF1L to 0. p. 323

When operating a timer, serial interface, or A/D converter after standby release,

operate it once after clearing the interrupt request flag. An interrupt request flag

may be set by noise.

p. 323

CHAPTER 15

Soft

Interrupt

IF0L, IF0H, IF1L:

Interrupt request

flag registers Use the 1-bit memory manipulation instruction (CLR1) for manipulating the flag of

the interrupt request flag register. Use the bit manipulation instruction such as

“IF0L.0 = 0;” or “_asm(“clr1 IF0L, 0”);” for describing in C language because the

compiled assembler needs to be the 1-bit memory manipulation instruction

(CLR1).

If a program is described in C language using an 8-bit memory manipulation

instruction such as “IF0L & = 0xfe;” and compiled, the assembler of the following

three instructions is described.

mov a, IF0L

and a, #0FEH

mov IF0L, a

In this case, at the timing after “mov a, IF0L” to “mov IF0L, a”, if the request flag

of another bit of the identical interrupt request flag register is set to 1, it is cleared

to 0 by “mov IF0L, a”. Therefore, care must be exercised when using the 8-bit

memory manipulation instruction in C language.

p. 330

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 525

(18/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

MK1L: Interrupt

mask flag

register

Be sure to set bits 6 and 7 of MK1L to 1. p. 324

PR1L: Priority

specification

flag register

Be sure to set bits 6 and 7 of PR1L to 1. p. 325

EGP, EGN:

External

interrupt

rising/falling

edge enable

registers

Select the port mode after clearing EGPn and EGNn to 0 because an edge may be

detected when the external interrupt function is switched to the port function. p. 326

Soft interrupt

request

acknowledgement

Do not use the RETI instruction for restoring from the software interrupt. p. 330

CHAPTER 15

Soft

Interrupt

Interrupt

request hold The BRK instruction is not one of the above-listed interrupt request hold

instructions. However, the software interrupt activated by executing the BRK

instruction causes the IE flag to be cleared to 0. Therefore, even if a maskable

interrupt request is generated during execution of the BRK instruction, the interrupt

request is not acknowledged.

p. 334

If any of the KRM0 to KRM3 bits used is set to 1, set bits 0 to 3 (PU70 to PU73) of

the corresponding pull-up resistor register 7 (PU7) to 1. p. 336

If KRM is changed, the interrupt request flag may be set. Therefore, disable

interrupts and then change the KRM register. Clear the interrupt request flag and

enable interrupts.

p. 336

CHAPTER 16

Soft

Key

interrupt

function

KRM: Key

return mode

register

The bits not used in the key interrupt mode can be used as normal ports. p. 336

Soft

The RSTOP setting is valid only when “Can be stopped by software” is set for

Ring-OSC by a mask option. p. 337

STOP mode can be used only when CPU is operating on the X1 input clock or

Ring-OSC clock. HALT mode can be used when CPU is operating on the X1 input

clock, Ring-OSC clock, or subsystem clock. However, when the STOP instruction

is executed during Ring-OSC clock operation, the X1 oscillator stops, but Ring-

OSC oscillator does not stop.

p. 338

Hard

−

When shifting to the STOP mode, be sure to stop the peripheral hardware

operation before executing STOP instruction. p. 338

Soft

STOP mode,

HALT mode The following sequence is recommended for operating current reduction of the A/D

converter when the standby function is used: First clear bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D

converter mode register (ADM) to 0 to stop the A/D conversion operation, and then

execute the HALT or STOP instruction.

p. 338

CHAPTER 17

Hard

Standby

function

STOP mode If the Ring-OSC oscillator is operating before the STOP mode is set, oscillation of

the Ring-OSC clock cannot be stopped in the STOP mode. However, when the

Ring-OSC clock is used as the CPU clock, the CPU operation is stopped for 17/fR

(s) after STOP mode is released.

p. 338

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

526

(19/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from MOST11 and

remain 1. p. 339

Soft

If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being

used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows.

• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time set by

OSTS

The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts only during the oscillation

stabilization time set by OSTS. Therefore, note that only the statuses during the

oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS are set to OSTC after STOP mode has

been released.

p. 339

Hard

OSTC:

Oscillation

stabilization

time counter

status register

The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP

mode release until clock oscillation starts (“a” below) regardless of whether STOP

mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation.

p. 339

Soft

If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the Ring-OSC clock is being

used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization time as follows.

• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time set by

OSTS

The X1 oscillation stabilization time counter counts only during the oscillation

stabilization time set by OSTS. Therefore, note that only the statuses during the

oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS are set to OSTC after STOP mode has

been released.

p. 340

The wait time when STOP mode is released does not include the time after STOP

mode release until clock oscillation starts (“a” below) regardless of whether STOP

mode is released by RESET input or interrupt generation.

p. 340

To set the STOP mode while the X1 input clock is the CPU clock, set OSTS

before executing the STOP instruction. p. 340

Hard

OSTS:

Oscillation

stabilization

time select

register

Set OSTS after confirming that the oscillation stabilization time expected by OSTS

has elapsed. p. 340

CHAPTER 17

Soft

Standby

function

STOP mode

setting and

operation status

Because the interrupt request signal is used to clear the standby mode, if there is

an interrupt source with the interrupt request flag set and the interrupt mask flag

reset, the standby mode is immediately cleared if set. Thus, the STOP mode is

reset to the HALT mode immediately after execution of the STOP instruction and

the system returns to the operating mode as soon as the wait time set using the

oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) has elapsed.

p. 346

For an external reset, input a low level for 10

µ

s or more to the RESET pin. p. 350

During reset input, the X1 input clock and Ring-OSC clock stop oscillating. p. 350

−

When the STOP mode is released by a reset, the STOP mode contents are held

during reset input. However, the port pins become high-impedance, except for

P130, which is set to low-level output.

p. 350

LVI circuit reset An LVI circuit internal reset does not reset the LVI circuit. p. 351

Hard

Reset timing

due to

watchdog timer

overflow

A watchdog timer internal reset resets the watchdog timer. p. 352

CHAPTER 18

Soft

Reset

function

RESF: Reset

control flag

register

Do not read data by a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction. p. 356

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 527

(20/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Once bit 0 (CLME) is set to 1, it cannot be cleared to 0 except by RESET input or

the internal reset signal. p. 358

CHAPTER 19

Soft

Clock

monitor CLM: Clock

monitor mode

register If the reset signal is generated by the clock monitor, CLME is cleared to 0 and bit

1 (CLMRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1. p. 358

Power-on-clear

circuit functions If an internal reset signal is generated in the POC circuit, the reset control flag

register (RESF) is cleared to 00H. p. 364

CHAPTER 20

Soft

Power-on-

clear

circuit

(POC) Cautions for

power-on-clear

circuit

In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the

vicinity of the POC detection voltage (VPOC), the system may be repeatedly reset

and released from the reset status. In this case, the time from release of reset to

the start of the operation of the microcontroller can be arbitrarily set by taking the

following action.

p. 366

LVIM: Low-

voltage

detection

register

To stop LVI, follow either of the procedures below.

• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction: Write 00H to LVIM.

• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction: Clear LVION to 0 first and

then clear LVIE to 0.

p. 370

LVIS: Low-

voltage

detection level

selection

register

Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to 0. p. 371

<1> must always be executed. When LVIMK = 0, an interrupt may occur

immediately after the processing in <5>. p. 372

If “POC used” is selected by a mask option, procedures <3> and <4> are not

required. p. 372

When used as

reset

If supply voltage (VDD) > detection voltage (VLVI) when LVIM is set to 1, an internal

reset signal is not generated. p. 372

When used as

interrupt If “POC used” is selected by a mask option, procedures <3> and <4> are not

required. p. 374

CHAPTER 21

Soft

Low-

voltage

detector

(LVI)

Cautions for

low-voltage

detector

In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the

vicinity of the LVI detection voltage (VLVI), the operation is as follows depending on

how the low-voltage detector is used.

(1) When used as reset

The system may be repeatedly reset and released from the reset status.

In this case, the time from release of reset to the start of the operation of the

microcontroller can be arbitrarily set by taking action (a) below.

(2) When used as interrupt

Interrupt requests may be frequently generated. Take action (b) below.

p. 376

Hard

－ There are differences in noise immunity and noise radiation between the flash

memory and mask ROM versions. When pre-producing an application set with

the flash memory version and then mass-producing it with the mask ROM version,

be sure to conduct sufficient evaluations for the commercial samples (not

engineering samples) of the mask ROM versions

p. 381

Setting the initial value of IMS is prohibited.

Be sure to set the value of the relevant mask ROM version at initialization. p. 382

IMS: Memory

size switching

register When using a mask ROM version, be sure to set the value indicated in Table 23-2

to IMS. p. 382

CHAPTER 23

Soft

µ

PD78F0

114

UART0, UART6 When UART0 or UART6 is selected, the receive clock is calculated based on the

reset command sent from the dedicated flash programmer after the VPP pulse has

been received.

p. 398

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

528

(21/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

Absolute

maximum

ratings

Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even

momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are

rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical

damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that

ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

pp. 414,

434, 452,

470

When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the

broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring

capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating

current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential

as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high

current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

pp. 415,

435, 453,

471

X1 oscillator

Since the CPU is started by the Ring-OSC after reset is released, check the

oscillation stabilization time of the X1 input clock using the oscillation

stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation

stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation stabilization time select

register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization time

with the resonator to be used.

pp. 415,

435, 453,

471

When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area

enclosed by the broken lines in the above figure to avoid an adverse effect

from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating

current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential

as VSS.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high

current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

pp. 416,

436, 454,

472

Subsystem

clock oscillator

The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for

reducing power consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise

than the X1 oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring

method when the subsystem clock is used.

pp.416,

436, 454,

472

For the resonator selection of the

µ

PD780111(A), 780112(A), 780113(A),

780114(A), and 78F0114(A) and oscillator constants, users are required to

either evaluate the oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator

manufacturer for evaluation.

pp.417,

437

CHAPTER 25, 26, 27, 28

Hard

Electrical

specifications

Recommended

oscillator

constants (X1)

The oscillator constants shown above are reference values based on

evaluation in a specific environment by the resonator manufacturer. If it is

necessary to optimize the oscillator characteristics in the actual application,

apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on the implementation

circuit. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency only indicate the

oscillator characteristic. Use the 78K0/KC1 so that the internal operation

conditions are within the specifications of the DC and AC characteristics.

pp. 417,

418, 437,

438

APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 529

(22/22)

Chapter

Classification

Function Details of

Function Cautions Page

CHAPTER 30

Hard

Recommended

soldering

conditions

− Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). pp. 484,

485

CHAPTER 31

Soft

Wait − When the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the X1 input clock is

stopped (MCC = 1), do not access the registers listed above using an access

method in which a wait request is issued.

p. 487

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

530

APPENDIX E REVISION HISTORY

E.1 Major Revisions in This Edition (1/2)

Page Description

Throughout Addition of description on expanded-specification products of standard products and (A) grade products

p. 8 Addition of Differences Between 78K0/KC1 and 78K0/KC1+ to INTRODUCTION

p. 17 Addition of 1.1 Expanded-Specification Products and Conventional Products (Standard Products, (A)

Grade Products Only)

p. 24 Modification of 1.6 Kx1 Series Lineup

p. 41 Modification of connection of XT1 pin when unused in Table 2-2 Pin I/O Circuit Types

p. 103 Modification of Note 3 and addition of Note 5 to Figure 5-2 Format of Processor Clock Control Register

(PCC)

p. 104 Addition of minimum instruction execution time of X1 input clock at 12 MHz operation and addition of Notes 2

and 3 to Table 5-2 Relationship Between CPU Clock and Minimum Instruction Execution Time

p. 107 Addition of status during oscillation stabilization time when fXP = 12 MHz to Figure 5-6 Format of Oscillation

Stabilization Time Counter Status Regist er (OSTC)

p. 108 Addition of oscillation stabilization time when fXP = 12 MHz and addition of Cautions 1 and 2 to Figure 5-7

Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS)

p. 112 Modification of connection of XT1 pin when unused and addition of Note to 5.4.3 When subsystem clock is

not used

p. 120 Addition of Note and modification of Table 5-5 Maximum Time Required to Switch Bet ween Ring-OSC

Clock and X1 Input Clock

p. 121 Addition of Caution 2 and modification of Table 5-6 Maximum Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover

p. 133 Addition of description on using capture register to Interrupt request generation column in Figure 6-5 Format

of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 00 (TMC00)

p. 135 Addition of Caution 7 to Figure 6-7 Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register 00 (TOC00)

p. 136 Addition of Note 1 to Figure 6-8 Format of Prescaler Mode Register 00 (PRM00)

p. 157 Modification of TMC00 set value in Figure 6-32 Timing of One-Shot Pulse Output Operation with

Software Trigger

p. 167 Addition of Note to Figure 7-5 Format of Timer Clock Selection Register 50 (TCL50)

p. 168 Addition of Note to Figure 7-6 Format of Timer Clock Selection Register 51 (TCL51)

p. 170 Modification of Caution 2 in Figure 7-7 Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 50 (TMC50) and

Figure 7-8 Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 51 (TMC51)

p. 186 Addition of Note 1 and modification of Note 2 in Figure 8-5 Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 0

(TMHMD0)

p. 188 Addition of Note in Figure 8-6 Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 1 (TMHMD1)

p. 217 Modification of Caution 3 and addition of Caution 5 to Figure 10-2 Format of Watchdog Timer Mode

Register (WDTM)

p. 218 Modification of Cautions 1 and 2 in Figure 10-3 Format of Watchdog Timer Enable Register (WDTE)

p. 218 Addition of Table 10-4 Relationship Between Watchdog Timer Operation and Internal Reset Signal

Generated by Watchdog Timer

APPENDIX E REVISION HISTORY

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 531

(2/2)

Page Description

pp. 252, 253 Addition of Note 1 and modification of Note 2 in Figure 12-4 Format of Baud Rate Generator Control

Register 0 (BRGC0)

p. 277 Addition of Note 1 and modification of Note 2 in Figure 13-8 Format of Clock Selection Register 6

(CKSR6)

p. 307 Addition of Note in Figure 14-3 Format of Serial Clock Selection Register 10 (CSIC10)

p. 323 Modification of Caution 3 in Figure 15-2 Format of Interrupt Request Flag Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L)

p. 339 Addition of oscillation stabilization time status when fXP = 12 MHz to Figure 17-1 Format o f Oscillation

Stabilization Time Counter Status Regist er (OSTC)

p. 340 Addition of oscillation stabilization time when fXP = 12 MHz and addition of Cautions 1 and 2 to Figure 17-2

Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS)

p. 352 Modification of Figure 18-2 Timing of Reset by RESET Input

p. 352 Modification of Figure 18-3 Timing of Reset Due to Watchdog Timer Overflow

p. 353 Modification of Figure 18-4 Timing of Reset in STOP Mode by RESET Input

p. 368 Modification of Note in 21.1 Functions of Low-V oltage Detector

p. 371 Addition of Notes 3 and 4 to Figure 21-3 Format of Low-Voltage Detection Level Selection Register

(LVIS)

p. 398 Modification of Table 23-6 Communication Modes

p. 413 Addition of CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODU CTS, (A) GRADE

PRODUCTS) (EXPANDED-SPECIFICATION PRODUCTS)

p. 433 Modification of description of target products in CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(STANDARD PRODUCTS, (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (CONVENTIONAL PRODUCTS)

pp. 456, 459

pp. 457, 460

DC Characteristics in CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS)

• Addition of condition 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V for low-level output voltage (VOL2)

• Addition of value of supply voltage (IDD4) in Ring-OSC, HALT mode

p. 474

p. 475

DC Characteristics in CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)

• Addition of condition 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V for low-level output voltage (VOL2)

• Addition of value of supply voltage (IDD4) in Ring-OSC, HALT mode

p. 492 Addition of (3) When using the in-circuit emulator QB-78K0KX1H to Figure A-1 Development Tool

Configuration

p. 497 Addition of A.5.3 When using in-circuit emulator QB-78K0KX1H

p. 501 Addition of B.2 When Using QB-78K0KX1H

p. 508 Addition of APPENDIX D LIST OF CAUTIONS

p. 530 Addition of E.2 Revision History up to Previous Edition

APPENDIX E REVISION HISTORY

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

532

E.2 Revision History up to Previous Edition

Revisions up to the previous edition are shown below. The “Applied to:” column indicates the chapter in each

edition to which the revision was applied.

(1/3)

Page Description Applied to:

Addition of products

µ

PD78F0114(A1), 780111(A2), 780112(A2), 780113(A2), 780114(A2)

Modification of names of the following special function registers (SFRs)

• Ports 0 to 3, 6, 7, 12, and 13 → Port registers 0 to 3, 6, 7, 12, and 13

Throughout

Addition of Caution 3 to 1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View)

Modification of 1.5 K1 Family Lineup

Modification of outline of timer in and addition of Remark to 1.7 Outline of

Functions

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

Addition of Table 2-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies

Modification of descriptions in 2.2.9 AVREF and 2.2.16 VPP (flash memory

versions only)

Modification of the following contents in Table 2-2 Pin I/O Circuit Types

• Modification of recommended connection when P60 to P63 are not used

• Modification of I/O circuit type of P62 and P63

• Addition of Note to AVREF

• Modification of recommended connection when VPP is not used

CHAPTER 2 PIN

FUNCTIONS

Modification of Figure 3-14 Data to Be Saved to Stack Memory

Modification of Figure 3-15 Data to Be Restored from Stack Memory

Modification of [Description example] in 3.4.4 Short direct addressing

Addition of [Illustration] to 3.4.7 Based addressing, 3.4.8 Based indexed

addressing, and 3.4.9 Stack addressing

CHAPTER 3 CPU

ARCHITECTURE

Addition of Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies

Modification of Table 4-3 Port Configuration

Modification of Figure 4-9 Block Diagram of P20 to P27

Addition of Remark to Figure 4-15 Block Diagram of P130

Deletion of input switch control register (ISC) from and addition of port registers

(P0 to P3, P6, P7, P12, P13) to 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function

Partial modification of descriptions in 4.4.1 (1) Output mode, 4.4.3 (1) Output

mode, and (2) Input mode

CHAPTER 4 PORT

FUNCTIONS

Modification of Figure 5-1 Block Diagram of Clock Generator

Addition of Note to 5.3 (1) Processor clock control register (PCC)

Addition of Cautions 2 and 3 to Figure 5-6 Format of Oscillation Stabilization

Time Counter Status Register (OSTC)

Modification of Figure 5-8 Examples of External Circuit of X1 Oscillator,

Figure 5-9 Examples of External Circuit of Subsystem Clock Oscillator, and

Figure 5-10 Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection

Modification of Notes 4 and 5 in Figure 5-13 Status Transition Diagram (2)

Modification of Note 4 and illustration in Figure 5-13 Status Transition Diagram

(4)

Modification of Table 5-3 Relationship Between Operation Clocks in Each

Operation Status

Modification of Note in Figure 5-14 Switching from Ring-OSC Clock to X1

Input Clock (Flowchart)

Second

edition

Addition of Note to Figure 5-16 Switching from X1 Input Clock to Subsystem

Clock (Flowchart)

CHAPTER 5 CLOCK

GENERATOR

APPENDIX E REVISION HISTORY

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD 533

(2/3)

Page Description Applied to:

Revision of chapter CHAPTER 6 16-BIT

TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 00

Revision of chapter CHAPTER 7 8-BIT

TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS

50 AND 51

Revision of chapter CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS

H0 AND H1

Modification of Figure 9-1 Watch Timer Block Diagram

Addition of Figure 9-4 Example of Generation of Watch Timer Interrupt

Request (INTWT) (When Interrupt Period = 0.5 s)

CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER

Revision of chapter CHAPTER 11 A/D

CONVERTER

Revision of chapter CHAPTER 12 SERIAL

INTERFACE UART0

Revision of chapter CHAPTER 13 SERIAL

INTERFACE UART6

Revision of chapter CHAPTER 14 SERIAL

INTERFACE CSI10

Addition of Note to INTLVI, POC, and LVI in Table 15-1 Interrupt Source List

Addition of Note 2 to Table 15-2 Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request

Sources

Addition of Caution 2 to Figure 15-2 Format of Interrupt Request Flag

Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L)

Addition of Caution to Table 15-3 Ports Corresponding to EGPn and EGNn

Addition of software interrupt request item to Table 15-5 Relationship Between

Interrupt Requests Enabled for Multiple Interrupt Servicing During Interrupt

Servicing

CHAPTER 15 INTERRUPT

FUNCTIONS

Modification of Figure 16-1 Block Diagram of Key Interrupt CHAPTER 16 KEY

INTERRUPT FUNCTION

Modification of Table 17-1 Relationship Between HALT Mode, STOP Mode,

and Clock in old edition to Table 17-1 Relationship Between Operation

Clocks in Each Operation Status

Addition of Cautions 2 and 3 to Figure 17-1 Format of Oscillation

Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC)

Modification of Table 17-2 Operating Statuses in HALT Mode

Addition of (3) When subsystem clock is used as CPU clock to Figure 17-4

HALT Mode Release by RESET Input

Modification of the following items in Table 17-4 Operating Statuses in STOP

Mode

• 8-bit timer H0

• Serial interfaces UART0 and UART6

CHAPTER 17 STANDBY

FUNCTION

Modification of Figure 18-1 Block Diagram of Reset Function to Figure 18-4

Timing of Reset in STOP Mode by RESET Input

CHAPTER 18 RESET

FUNCTION

Modification of Figure 19-1 Block Diagram of Clock Monitor

Second

edition

Addition of normal operation mode to Table 19-2 Operation Status of Clock

Monitor (When CLME = 1)

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK

MONITOR

APPENDIX E REVISION HISTORY

User’s Manual U16227EJ3V0UD

534

(3/3)

Page Description Applied to:

Addition of (6) Clock monitor status after X1 input clock oscillation is

stopped by software and (7) Clock monitor status after Ring-OSC clock

oscillation is stopped by software to Figure 19-3 Timing of Clock Monitor

CHAPTER 19 CLOCK

MONITOR

Addition of Note to description in 20.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit

Modification of Figure 20-1 Block Diagram of Power-on-Clear Circuit

CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-

CLEAR CIRCUIT

Addition of Note to description in 21.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector

Modification of Figure 21-1 Block Diagram of Low-Voltage Detector

Modification of Note 5 in Figure 21-2 Format of Low-Voltage Detection

Register (LVIM)

Addition of Note 2 and Caution to Figure 21-3 Format of Low-Voltage

Detection Level Selection Register (LVIS)

Modification of Figure 21-4 Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Internal Reset

Signal Generation and Figure 21-5 Timing of Low-Voltage Detector

Interrupt Signal Generation

Partial modification of description of (2) When used as interrupt under

<Action> in 21.5 Cautions for Low-Voltage Detector

CHAPTER 21 LOW-

VOLTAGE DETECTOR

Addition of Note to description in CHAPTER 22 MASK OPTIONS CHAPTER 22 MASK

OPTIONS

Revision of chapter (no modification of 23.1 Internal Memory Size Switching

Register)

CHAPTER 23

µ

PD78F0114

Partial modification of operation of “RETI” in 24.2 Operation List CHAPTER 24 INSTRUCTION

SET

Revision of chapter CHAPTER 25 ELECTRICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

(STANDARD PRODUCTS,

(A) GRADE PRODUCTS)

Addition of chapter CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL

SPECIFICATIONS ((A1)

GRADE PRODUCTS)

Addition of chapter CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL

SPECIFICATIONS ((A2)

GRADE PRODUCTS)

Addition of chapter CHAPTER 29

RECOMMENDED

SOLDERING CONDITIONS

Addition of A.3 Control Software

Addition of in-circuit emulator “IE-78K0K1-ET” to A.5 Debugging Tools

(Hardware)

Modification of part number of RX78K0 in A.7 Embedded Software

APPENDIX A

DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

Addition of chapter APPENDIX B NOTES ON

TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN

Second

edition

Addition of chapter APPENDIX D REVISION

HISTORY